Smart Sketch Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

Version 2014 (8.0)

September 2013 DSKT2-PE-2000008G

Copyright Copyright © 1996 - 2013 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation 300 Intergraph Way Huntsville, AL 35813

Documentation Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides, Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a particular software product.

Other Documentation Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on eCustomer, SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use a.

Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

b.

For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

2

SmartSketch User's Guide

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED. IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances: a.

To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.

b.

To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www,bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S. Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html, and the U.S. Department of State Debarred List.

c.

To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive nuclear uses.

d.

To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.

Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

SmartSketch User's Guide

3

4

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 What's New in SmartSketch? ................................................................................................................... 21 Introducing SmartSketch .......................................................................................................................... 23 Technical User Forum ........................................................................................................................... 24 Additional Documentation ..................................................................................................................... 24 Using SmartSketch Options .................................................................................................................. 24 AEC Solutions ................................................................................................................................ 25 Electrical Solutions ......................................................................................................................... 25 Image Integrator ............................................................................................................................. 25 Mechanical Solutions...................................................................................................................... 26 Process Solutions ........................................................................................................................... 26 Symbol Authoring ........................................................................................................................... 27 Programming Tools ........................................................................................................................ 27 Translators ...................................................................................................................................... 28 User Assistance .................................................................................................................................... 28 Display Context-Sensitive Help ...................................................................................................... 29 Help Command............................................................................................................................... 29 Access the Printable Guides .......................................................................................................... 29 Access Online Tutorials .................................................................................................................. 29 Display the Tip of the Day .............................................................................................................. 30 Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off ................................................................................................... 30 Display Help Topics ........................................................................................................................ 31 Open the SmartSketch Home Page ............................................................................................... 31 Display Information About the Software ......................................................................................... 31 About Command ............................................................................................................................. 31 Getting Started with SmartSketch ........................................................................................................... 33 Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................... 33 Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................... 33 Check Out a License for SmartSketch ........................................................................................... 34 License Checkout Utility Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 35 Exploring the Interface .......................................................................................................................... 35 Exploring the Window with Your Mouse ......................................................................................... 36 Menu Bar and Menus ..................................................................................................................... 38 Ribbons and Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................................. 39 Toolbars .......................................................................................................................................... 40 Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................ 51 Mouse ............................................................................................................................................. 52 Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 53 Viewing Your Work ............................................................................................................................... 54 Zoom Area ...................................................................................................................................... 55 Zoom In on an Area ........................................................................................................................ 55 Zoom Out ........................................................................................................................................ 56 Fit All Elements in the Active View ................................................................................................. 57 Restore a View ............................................................................................................................... 57

SmartSketch User's Guide

5

Contents Pan a View ..................................................................................................................................... 57 Switch to Another Open Document ................................................................................................ 58 Open a New Window ...................................................................................................................... 58 Change the Window Layout ........................................................................................................... 59 Understanding Document Concepts ....................................................................................................... 61 Document Explorer Command .............................................................................................................. 61 Document Explorer Window ........................................................................................................... 62 Filter Objects Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 62 View Document Properties ............................................................................................................. 62 Setting Up Documents .......................................................................................................................... 63 Create a New Document ................................................................................................................ 64 Open a Document .......................................................................................................................... 65 Set Up a Drawing Sheet ................................................................................................................. 66 Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet ..................................................... 68 Most Recently Used Files Command ............................................................................................. 68 Set Document Properties ............................................................................................................... 68 View the Properties of a Document ................................................................................................ 69 Managing Multi-Sheet Documents ........................................................................................................ 73 Sheets and Document Templates .................................................................................................. 76 Create a New Drawing Sheet ......................................................................................................... 76 Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs .............................................................................................. 77 Activate a Drawing Sheet ............................................................................................................... 77 Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets ......................................................................................... 77 Create a Background Sheet ........................................................................................................... 78 Display Background Sheets ........................................................................................................... 79 Change the Background Sheet ...................................................................................................... 79 Rename a Drawing Sheet .............................................................................................................. 80 Delete a Drawing Sheet.................................................................................................................. 80 Reorder Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 81 Move Sheet Border ......................................................................................................................... 82 Using Title Blocks.................................................................................................................................. 84 Title Block Properties Command .................................................................................................... 84 Title Block Field Command ............................................................................................................ 84 Title Block Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 85 Drawing Diagrams................................................................................................................................. 88 Saving and Printing Documents............................................................................................................ 91 Saving Documents ......................................................................................................................... 92 Printing Documents ........................................................................................................................ 99 SmartSketch Templates .......................................................................................................................... 107 AEC Templates ................................................................................................................................... 108 Architectural Templates ................................................................................................................ 108 HVAC Templates .......................................................................................................................... 110 Landscape Templates .................................................................................................................. 111 Site Templates .............................................................................................................................. 112 Electrical Diagramming Templates ..................................................................................................... 114 Control Loop Templates ............................................................................................................... 114 Electrical Templates ..................................................................................................................... 115 General Diagramming Templates ....................................................................................................... 117 Atlas Mapping Templates ............................................................................................................. 117 Basic Diagramming Templates .................................................................................................... 119

6

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Directional Mapping Templates .................................................................................................... 121 Flowchart Templates .................................................................................................................... 122 Network Diagram Templates ........................................................................................................ 124 Office Layout Templates............................................................................................................... 126 Organizational Chart Templates ................................................................................................... 128 Workflow Diagram Templates ...................................................................................................... 130 Organizational Chart Wizard ............................................................................................................... 131 Mechanical Engineering Templates .................................................................................................... 131 Mechanical Templates.................................................................................................................. 132 Process Diagraming Templates .......................................................................................................... 134 Ortho Piping Templates ................................................................................................................ 135 PFD and P&ID Templates ............................................................................................................ 136 Plot Plan Templates ..................................................................................................................... 138 Process Block Diagramming Templates ...................................................................................... 139 Technical Drawing Templates ...................................................................................................... 141 Title Block Templates .......................................................................................................................... 142 Create a Template .............................................................................................................................. 143 Save a Document as a Template........................................................................................................ 143 Save as Template Command ....................................................................................................... 143 Drawing Basic Elements ......................................................................................................................... 145 Drawing Lines ..................................................................................................................................... 146 Draw a Line .................................................................................................................................. 146 Draw a Point ................................................................................................................................. 148 Drawing Connectors ........................................................................................................................... 149 Connector Drawing Elements ....................................................................................................... 150 Place a Connector ........................................................................................................................ 150 Modify a Connector ...................................................................................................................... 152 Format a Connector ...................................................................................................................... 154 Attach a Connector to an Object .................................................................................................. 154 Merge Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 155 Reverse Connector Direction ....................................................................................................... 155 Connect Two Objects ................................................................................................................... 155 Split a Connector .......................................................................................................................... 156 Drawing Doublelines ........................................................................................................................... 158 Draw a Doubleline ........................................................................................................................ 158 Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses .................................................................................................... 160 Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points ....................................................................................... 160 Draw a Circle by Center Point ...................................................................................................... 161 Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements .......................................................................... 162 Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points ......................................................................................... 163 Draw an Arc by Center Point ........................................................................................................ 165 Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements ........................................................................................ 166 Draw Connected Lines and Arcs .................................................................................................. 166 Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch ....................................................................... 167 Draw a Curve ................................................................................................................................ 168 Insert a Node into a Curve ........................................................................................................... 169 Delete a Node from a Curve ......................................................................................................... 169 Change the Curve Type ............................................................................................................... 170 Change the Node Type ................................................................................................................ 171 Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points .................................................................................... 172 Draw an Ellipse by Center Point ................................................................................................... 174 Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons .................................................................................... 174

SmartSketch User's Guide

7

Contents Draw a Rectangle or Square ........................................................................................................ 175 Draw a Fillet Rectangle ................................................................................................................ 176 Draw an N-Sided Polygon ............................................................................................................ 178 Draw a Polygon by Center point ................................................................................................... 179 Drawing FreeForm Shapes ................................................................................................................. 180 Draw a Line with FreeSketch ....................................................................................................... 182 Draw a Circle with FreeSketch ..................................................................................................... 182 Draw an Arc with FreeSketch ....................................................................................................... 183 Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch ............................................................................. 183 Draw a Curve with FreeForm ....................................................................................................... 185 Creating Isometric Drawings ............................................................................................................... 186 Draw an Isometric Circle .............................................................................................................. 187 Draw an Isometric Line ................................................................................................................. 189 Draw an Isometric Rectangle ....................................................................................................... 191 Format Part of an Element ........................................................................................................... 193 Using Scaled Sketching ...................................................................................................................... 194 Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar .................................................... 194 Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor ........................................................................... 194 Scaled Sketching Command ........................................................................................................ 195 Scaled Sketching Ribbon ............................................................................................................. 195 Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements ........................................................................................... 197 Display the Change Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 198 Selecting Elements ............................................................................................................................. 198 Select an Element ........................................................................................................................ 199 Select Elements Using SmartSelect ............................................................................................. 202 Undo Actions ................................................................................................................................ 205 Redo Actions ................................................................................................................................ 205 Finding Elements ................................................................................................................................ 206 Find a SmartSketch Object .......................................................................................................... 206 Moving Elements................................................................................................................................. 210 Move an Element.......................................................................................................................... 211 Move an Element with the Select Tool ......................................................................................... 211 Move an Element Precisely .......................................................................................................... 212 Nudge an Element ........................................................................................................................ 213 Copying and Pasting Elements ........................................................................................................... 213 Copy an Element .......................................................................................................................... 213 Copy an Element with the Select Tool ......................................................................................... 214 Copy a Format .............................................................................................................................. 214 Paste an Element ......................................................................................................................... 215 Paste an Element with a Different Format.................................................................................... 216 Offset Elements ............................................................................................................................ 216 Cutting or Deleting Elements .............................................................................................................. 219 Delete an Element ........................................................................................................................ 219 Cut an Element ............................................................................................................................. 220 Creating Patterns ................................................................................................................................ 220 Draw a Rectangular Pattern ......................................................................................................... 221 Draw a Circular Pattern ................................................................................................................ 222 Adding Text to Documents ..................................................................................................................... 225 Placing Annotations ............................................................................................................................ 225 Move an Annotation...................................................................................................................... 228

8

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Place a Text Box .......................................................................................................................... 230 Move a Text Box ........................................................................................................................... 237 Delete Text in a Text Box ............................................................................................................. 237 Apply a Border to a Text Box ....................................................................................................... 237 Edit a Text Box ............................................................................................................................. 237 Resize a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 238 Use Spell Checker ........................................................................................................................ 238 Place a Balloon ............................................................................................................................. 239 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................................ 242 Add a Leader ................................................................................................................................ 245 Insert a Vertex in a Leader ........................................................................................................... 247 Delete a Vertex from a Leader ..................................................................................................... 248 Insert a Font Character into a Text Box ....................................................................................... 248 Labels .................................................................................................................................................. 250 Create a Text Label ...................................................................................................................... 251 Edit a Text Label ........................................................................................................................... 252 Move a Label ................................................................................................................................ 252 Place a SmartLabel ...................................................................................................................... 252 Place Multiple Labels.................................................................................................................... 252 Edit a SmartLabel ......................................................................................................................... 253 Engineering Fonts ............................................................................................................................... 254 Drawing with Relationships.................................................................................................................... 255 Display the Relationship Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 257 Using Relationships as You Draw....................................................................................................... 257 Intent Zones .................................................................................................................................. 259 Draw with Relationships ............................................................................................................... 261 Suspend Relationships ................................................................................................................. 263 Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command .......................................................... 263 Delete a Relationship ................................................................................................................... 263 Maintain Relationships ................................................................................................................. 264 Display or Hide Relationship Handles .......................................................................................... 264 Lock an Element or Key Point ...................................................................................................... 265 Insert a Detail View....................................................................................................................... 265 Drawing Precisely.................................................................................................................................... 267 Placing Elements in Precise Locations ............................................................................................... 267 Draw with PinPoint ....................................................................................................................... 268 Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool ................................................................... 269 Reposition the PinPoint Target Point ........................................................................................... 269 Re-Orient PinPoint ........................................................................................................................ 269 Placing Elements with a Grid .............................................................................................................. 271 Place Elements with a Grid .......................................................................................................... 272 Modify Grid Intensity ..................................................................................................................... 273 Dimensioning Drawing Elements ........................................................................................................ 274 Types of Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 277 Display the Dimension Toolbar .................................................................................................... 278 Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension ............................................................................. 279 Dimension Along a Curve ............................................................................................................. 290 Align Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 291 Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points .......................................................... 292 Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements ......................................................................... 294

SmartSketch User's Guide

9

Contents Dimension Groups ........................................................................................................................ 295 Place a Dimension Group ............................................................................................................ 296 Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group ...................................................................................... 297 Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension ...................................................................................... 298 Set a Dimension Axis ................................................................................................................... 300 Set the Dimension Type ............................................................................................................... 301 Edit a Dimension Prefix ................................................................................................................ 302 Set the Dimension Units ............................................................................................................... 303 Move a Dimension ........................................................................................................................ 303 Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements ......................................................................... 305 Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements ............................................................................ 308 Setting Paper and Model Units ........................................................................................................... 309 Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet ................................................... 310 Measuring Distances and Areas ......................................................................................................... 310 Measure a Distance...................................................................................................................... 311 Measure the Length of a Line ....................................................................................................... 312 Measure the Distance Along an Object ........................................................................................ 313 Measure an Area .......................................................................................................................... 316 Set Bearing and Azimuth .............................................................................................................. 318 Using the Variable Table ..................................................................................................................... 318 Create a Variable with a Value or Expression .............................................................................. 320 Edit an Existing Variable............................................................................................................... 320 Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine ....................................................................... 321 Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet ........................................................................... 322 Edit a Formula Containing a Function .......................................................................................... 323 Insert a Function into a Formula ................................................................................................... 323 Format a Column .......................................................................................................................... 323 Transforming Elements .......................................................................................................................... 329 Changing the Shape of an Element .................................................................................................... 330 Modify an Element with the Select Tool ....................................................................................... 330 Change Command ....................................................................................................................... 331 Rotating Elements ............................................................................................................................... 331 Rotate an Element ........................................................................................................................ 331 Rotate Command ......................................................................................................................... 332 Rotate Ribbon ............................................................................................................................... 332 Mirroring Elements .............................................................................................................................. 334 Mirror an Element ......................................................................................................................... 334 Aligning SmartSketch Objects ............................................................................................................ 336 Align SmartSketch Objects ........................................................................................................... 337 Scaling Elements ................................................................................................................................ 338 Scale an Element ......................................................................................................................... 339 Scale an Element with Its Handles ............................................................................................... 340 Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size ............................................................ 340 Extending or Trimming Elements ........................................................................................................ 341 Trim an Element ........................................................................................................................... 343 Trim to Element Command .......................................................................................................... 343 Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements ................................................................. 344 Trim an Element to a Point ........................................................................................................... 345 Trim Part of Element..................................................................................................................... 345 Split Graphic Elements ................................................................................................................. 345 Extend an Element ....................................................................................................................... 347 Extend an Element to a Point ....................................................................................................... 348

10

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Draw a Chamfer ........................................................................................................................... 349 Draw a Fillet .................................................................................................................................. 352 Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements ........................................................................ 354 Make Elements Concentric .......................................................................................................... 356 Make Elements Collinear.............................................................................................................. 357 Connect Elements ........................................................................................................................ 357 Make Elements Equal................................................................................................................... 358 Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical .................................................................... 358 Make Elements Parallel ................................................................................................................ 359 Make Elements Perpendicular ..................................................................................................... 359 Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis ................................................................................... 360 Make Elements Tangential ........................................................................................................... 360 Arranging Elements ................................................................................................................................ 363 Grouping Elements ............................................................................................................................. 363 Group or Ungroup Elements ........................................................................................................ 364 Element Display Priority ...................................................................................................................... 367 Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order ..................................................................... 368 Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order ...................................................................... 368 Pull an Element Up in the Display Order ...................................................................................... 369 Push an Element Down in the Display Order ............................................................................... 369 Using Layers to Arrange Elements ..................................................................................................... 370 Control the Display of Elements in a Window .............................................................................. 371 Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers ........................................................................... 374 Create a Layer .............................................................................................................................. 374 Display or Hide Layers ................................................................................................................. 375 Change the Layer of an Element.................................................................................................. 376 Change the Active Layer .............................................................................................................. 376 Create a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 377 Modify Layers in a Layer Group ................................................................................................... 377 Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group .............................................................................. 377 Delete a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 378 Remove Empty Layers ................................................................................................................. 379 Using Symbols in Documents ................................................................................................................ 381 Creating Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 381 Create a Symbol ........................................................................................................................... 381 Create Symbol Command ............................................................................................................ 382 The Symbol Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 382 Symbol Explorer Window ............................................................................................................. 384 Open a Symbol Library ................................................................................................................. 385 View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer ................................................................................ 386 View Documents with the Symbol Explorer.................................................................................. 386 Close the Symbol Explorer ........................................................................................................... 387 Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer ................................................................................ 387 Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer ............................................................................... 387 Move the Symbol Explorer ........................................................................................................... 388 Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer .......................................................................... 388 Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer ......................................................................... 389 Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer ............................................................... 389 Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles ........................................................................................ 390 Associate a Symbol with an Element ........................................................................................... 392

SmartSketch User's Guide

11

Contents Placing Symbols.................................................................................................................................. 392 Place a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 393 Place Copies of a Symbol ............................................................................................................ 394 Editing Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 395 Edit a Symbol ............................................................................................................................... 396 Symbol Ribbon ............................................................................................................................. 397 Edit Symbol Properties ................................................................................................................. 398 Create a Symbol Report ............................................................................................................... 401 Update a Symbol Report .............................................................................................................. 401 Scaling Symbols.................................................................................................................................. 402 Scale a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 402 Mirroring Symbols ............................................................................................................................... 403 Mirror a Symbol ............................................................................................................................ 403 Rotating Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 403 Rotate a Symbol ........................................................................................................................... 404 Manipulating Symbols ......................................................................................................................... 405 Manipulate a Symbol .................................................................................................................... 406 Unlock a Symbol From an Element .............................................................................................. 406 Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points ................................................................. 406 Mechanism Modeling .......................................................................................................................... 407 Attach a Connector to an Object .................................................................................................. 407 Working with Attributes .......................................................................................................................... 409 Display the Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................ 410 Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................................... 410 Move the Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................... 410 Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer......................................................................................................... 411 Edit Attributes ...................................................................................................................................... 411 Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set ...................................................................................... 412 Delivered Reports ............................................................................................................................... 412 Create a Custom Report ..................................................................................................................... 412 Report Generator Command ........................................................................................................ 413 Report Generator Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 413 Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors ................................................................................................. 415 Applying Formats with Styles .............................................................................................................. 416 Apply a Style ................................................................................................................................. 417 Rename a Style ............................................................................................................................ 417 Apply a Style to a Group of Elements .......................................................................................... 418 Delete a Style ............................................................................................................................... 418 Create a Style Using a Formatted Element .................................................................................. 418 Create a Style with the Style Command....................................................................................... 419 Change the Formats of a Style ..................................................................................................... 419 Save a Style to a Template .......................................................................................................... 419 Add Styles to the Current Document ............................................................................................ 420 Applying Unique Formats .................................................................................................................... 431 Format a Geometric Element ....................................................................................................... 432 Format a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 440 Format a Dimension or Annotation ............................................................................................... 440 Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries .......................................................................... 442 Place a Fill .................................................................................................................................... 444 Format a Fill .................................................................................................................................. 445

12

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Create a Fill Color ......................................................................................................................... 445 Refill a Modified Boundary ........................................................................................................... 446 Draw a Mask ................................................................................................................................. 448 Working with Object, Linking and Embedding ..................................................................................... 451 How Embedding Works ...................................................................................................................... 453 Embed an Object .......................................................................................................................... 454 Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software ................................................................... 455 How Linking Works ............................................................................................................................. 457 Link an Object ............................................................................................................................... 458 Open an OLE Object for Editing ................................................................................................... 459 Edit a Linked Object ..................................................................................................................... 459 Change the Source for a Linked Object ....................................................................................... 459 Break a Connection to a Linked Object ........................................................................................ 460 Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the Changes ............................................ 460 Customizing the Software ...................................................................................................................... 463 Customize the Software with the Options Command ......................................................................... 464 Options Command........................................................................................................................ 464 Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 464 Create a New Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 469 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings............................................................................. 470 Toolbars Command ...................................................................................................................... 470 Toolbars Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 470 New Toolbar Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 471 Add a Button to a Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 471 Remove a Command from a Toolbar.................................................................................................. 471 Create a New Menu ............................................................................................................................ 471 Add a Command to a Menu ................................................................................................................ 472 Delete a Command from a Menu ........................................................................................................ 472 Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings ............................................................................. 473 Customize Command ................................................................................................................... 473 Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 473 Run a Custom Command ................................................................................................................... 475 Custom Commands Command .................................................................................................... 475 Custom Command Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 476 Assign a Shortcut Key ......................................................................................................................... 476 Customize Keyboard Command .................................................................................................. 477 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 477 Installing Additional Tools ................................................................................................................... 478 Install or Remove an Add-In ............................................................................................................... 479 Add-Ins Command........................................................................................................................ 479 Add-In Manager Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 479 Install the To Do List Add-In................................................................................................................ 480 To Do List Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 480 Create a To Do List ............................................................................................................................. 480 To Do List Manager Command .................................................................................................... 481 To Do List Manager Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 481 To Do List Options Command ...................................................................................................... 481 To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box .................................................................................. 482

SmartSketch User's Guide

13

Contents Using the Line Style Editor ..................................................................................................................... 483 Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar ............................................................................................ 484 Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style Editor) ....................................................................... 484 Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style ....................................................................................................... 485 Line Style Editor Command .......................................................................................................... 492 Line Style Editor Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 492 Create Custom Point Styles ................................................................................................................ 493 Create New Style Command ........................................................................................................ 494 Create New Point Style Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 494 Create Custom Linear Patterns .......................................................................................................... 494 Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 494 Create Custom Linear Styles .............................................................................................................. 495 Create New Linear Style Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 495 Create Custom Fill Styles ................................................................................................................... 495 Create New Fill Style Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 495 Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles ...................................................... 496 Copy Style Command................................................................................................................... 496 Copy Point Style Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 496 Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 496 Copy Linear Style Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 497 Copy Fill Style Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 497 Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles ..................................................................... 497 Import Style Command ................................................................................................................. 497 Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles .................................................... 497 Delete Style Command................................................................................................................. 498 Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles ................................................... 498 Properties Command.................................................................................................................... 498 Point Style Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 498 Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 499 Linear Style Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 501 Fill Style Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 503 Show Styles in Resource Files Command ................................................................................... 503 Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet ............................................................................................ 504 Place Point Style Graphics Command ......................................................................................... 504 Redefine Point Styles .......................................................................................................................... 504 Define Point Style Graphics Command ........................................................................................ 504 Symbol Authoring ................................................................................................................................... 505 Planning Your Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 505 Create a Parametric Symbol ........................................................................................................ 506 Define Symbol Properties ............................................................................................................. 508 Define Handles for a Symbol ........................................................................................................ 508 Add a Symbol Attribute ................................................................................................................. 509 Modify a Symbol Attribute ............................................................................................................ 509 Remove a Symbol Attribute .......................................................................................................... 509 Attach a Help File to a Symbol ..................................................................................................... 510 Define an Icon for a Symbol ......................................................................................................... 510 Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document ................................................. 515 Redefine the Origin of a Symbol .................................................................................................. 518 Managing Text in Symbols .................................................................................................................. 519 Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart Label ............................................................................ 520 Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol ........................................................................................ 521

14

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Create a Leader for a SmartText Label ........................................................................................ 521 Define a Text-Driven Symbol ....................................................................................................... 522 Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields ................................................................................ 524 Integrating Programs with Your Symbol ............................................................................................. 529 Add Symbol Commands ............................................................................................................... 529 Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol ....................................................................... 530 Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols ............................................................................................ 530 Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking ....................................................................................... 531 Defining SmartPoints .......................................................................................................................... 531 Define SmartPoints for a Symbol ................................................................................................. 531 Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes................................................................................. 532 Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes ...................................................................................... 532 Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes ...................................................................................... 532 Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol ...................................................................................................... 533 Symbol Lookup Tables ....................................................................................................................... 534 Set Up an ODBC Data Source ..................................................................................................... 535 Generate a Lookup Table ............................................................................................................. 535 Using the Internet .................................................................................................................................... 539 Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer .................................................................................. 539 Hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................... 539 Insert a Hyperlink .......................................................................................................................... 539 Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) .................................................................................... 541 Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) ....................................................................................... 541 Edit a Hyperlink ............................................................................................................................ 543 Working with Raster Images .................................................................................................................. 545 Insert a Raster Image ......................................................................................................................... 546 Image Command .......................................................................................................................... 547 Save Changes to a Linked Image ....................................................................................................... 547 Save Selected Image(s) Command ............................................................................................. 547 Undo Changes to Images ................................................................................................................... 547 Image Undo Command ................................................................................................................ 548 Redo Changes to Images ................................................................................................................... 548 Image Redo Command ................................................................................................................ 548 Select a Rectangular Area of an Image .............................................................................................. 548 Rectangular Select Area Command ............................................................................................. 549 Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image ....................................................................................... 550 Polygonal Select Area Command ................................................................................................ 551 Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image ................................................................................ 551 Contrast and Brightness Command ............................................................................................. 552 Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 552 Invert Colors in an Image .................................................................................................................... 553 Invert Command ........................................................................................................................... 553 Fill an Image Area with Color .............................................................................................................. 553 Fill Command ............................................................................................................................... 554 Fill Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 554 Position an Image by Dragging ........................................................................................................... 554 Position Command (Shortcut Menu) ............................................................................................ 555 Position an Image by Clicking ............................................................................................................. 556 Position Command ....................................................................................................................... 556 View Image Properties ........................................................................................................................ 556

SmartSketch User's Guide

15

Contents Image Properties Command ........................................................................................................ 557 Image Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 557 Erase Part of An Image ....................................................................................................................... 558 Image Erase Command................................................................................................................ 558 Remove Speckles from an Image ....................................................................................................... 558 Speckle Remove Command ......................................................................................................... 559 Speckle Remove Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 559 Warp an Image Using Multiple Points ................................................................................................. 560 Multi-Point Warp Command ......................................................................................................... 560 Multi-Point Warp Ribbon............................................................................................................... 560 Warp Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 561 Working with CAD Drawings .................................................................................................................. 565 Working with MicroStation Files .......................................................................................................... 565 Command Comparison with MicroStation .................................................................................... 567 Task Comparison with MicroStation ............................................................................................. 574 MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples ..................................................................................... 578 Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import .............................................................................. 581 Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export .............................................................................. 587 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation .............................................................. 591 Open a MicroStation Document ................................................................................................... 595 Place MicroStation Information in the Document ......................................................................... 597 Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document ................................................................ 598 Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File ........................................................... 598 Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File .......................................................................... 599 Add MicroStation Styles to a Document ....................................................................................... 599 MicroStation Cells in Your Document........................................................................................... 600 Open a MicroStation Cell Library ................................................................................................. 600 MicroStation Construction Class Information ............................................................................... 601 Working with AutoCAD Files ............................................................................................................... 601 Command Comparison with AutoCAD ......................................................................................... 603 Task Comparison with AutoCAD .................................................................................................. 609 AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples .......................................................................................... 617 Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import ................................................................................... 620 Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export ................................................................................... 626 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation ................................................................... 631 Open an AutoCAD Document ...................................................................................................... 638 Place AutoCAD Information in the Document .............................................................................. 638 Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File .............................................................. 639 Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File ............................................................................. 640 Using the Validation Add-In Tool ........................................................................................................... 641 Install the Validation Tools Add-In ...................................................................................................... 641 Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document .................................................................................. 642 Validate Command ....................................................................................................................... 643 Validation Options Command ....................................................................................................... 643 Validation Options Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 643 Sample Workflows................................................................................................................................... 645 Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained ................................................................................... 645 Connect Points While Drawing a Line................................................................................................. 646

16

SmartSketch User's Guide

Contents Connect Points While Modifying a Line .............................................................................................. 646 Creating a Kinematics Animation ........................................................................................................ 647 Customizing a Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 650 Dimension the Length of a Line .......................................................................................................... 651 Dimension the Diameter of a Circle .................................................................................................... 651 Draw an Arc ........................................................................................................................................ 651 Draw a Horizontal Line ........................................................................................................................ 652 Draw a Line ......................................................................................................................................... 653 Draw a Line Connected to Another Line ............................................................................................. 653 Draw a Line with PinPoint ................................................................................................................... 654 Establish More Than One Relationship .............................................................................................. 654 Formatting a New Drawing ................................................................................................................. 655 Formatting an Existing Drawing .......................................................................................................... 656 Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet .................................................................................................... 656 Measure the Length of a Line ............................................................................................................. 657 Place a Doubleline Precisely .............................................................................................................. 658 Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values .............................................................................. 659 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 661 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 677

SmartSketch User's Guide

17

Contents

18

SmartSketch User's Guide

Preface This document is a user's guide for SmartSketch and provides conceptual information and procedural instructions for creating drawings. The content is identical to the online Help that is delivered as part of the SmartSketch software. Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or redistribution outside your company.

SmartSketch User's Guide

19

Preface

20

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION

What's New in SmartSketch? Version 2014 (8.0)  A topic has been added showing how to create a wrapper symbol that contains a symbol and a SmartLabel. For more information, see Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields (on page 524). (P4 IT: 49078)  SmartSketch supports the import and export of MicroStation V8 DGN files.  SmartSketch supports the import and export of AutoCAD 2010-2012 files.  Changes have been made to the MicroStation and AutoCAD Export Options dialog box to show only supported versions. Each selected version is then listed in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog box. For more information see the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) and Save As Dialog Box (on page 94). (P2 IM: 52181)  The Import Cells2 as Symbols setting has been added to the ITMSTN.INI configuration file to define whether Type 2 cell headers are imported from MicroStation V8 files as symbols or groups.  Added the Owner group option to the Colors tab of the Options dialog box. For more information, see Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465).  The SmartPlant menu and corresponding commands (Register, Set Active Plant, Publish and Refresh) have been removed. Use SmartPlant Enterprise tools such as SmartPlant Foundation to publish SmartSketch documents. (P2 IT: 49144)  The Fillet Rectangle command allows you to draw a fillet rectangle using a single command. Previous versions of the software required you to use a combination of the Rectangle and Fillet commands to draw the same object. For more information, see Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177). (P2 IT: 49184) Version 2011 R1 (7.1)  Configuration settings for MicroStation have been updated. There is a new ini setting called Symbol Layers. These changes are reflected in CR-IT-48941, CR-IT-48942, and CR-IT-48943. For more information, see Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation (on page 591). Version 2011 (7.0) Service Pack 1  SmartSketch is now supported on the following operating systems:  Microsoft 64-bit Windows Standard/Enterprise Server 2008 (R2)  Microsoft 32-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client  Microsoft 64-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client  You can specify whether toolbars use high-color icons or the classic icons. See Toolbars Dialog Box (on page 470).

SmartSketch User's Guide

21

What's New in SmartSketch?

22

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 1

Introducing SmartSketch SmartSketch® is the only desktop application that gives you the power to create quick sketches, complex engineering designs, production drawings, plot plans, schematics, business diagrams, and more.  Industry templates with numerous symbols available for SmartSketch  Sketch ideas spontaneously and accurately, instantly transforming them into precise CAD geometry  What-if scenarios and testing real-world models reduce prototyping time  Merge your designs with AutoCAD® and MicroStation® using the Translators option  Add text and spreadsheets from Word, Excel, and PowerPoint; integrate with popular databases

Industry Solutions Available in SmartSketch and in SmartSketch Options Get a quick start in projects with workflow templates tailored to different industries including:  Process: Process Flow Diagrams, P&ID, Electrical Schematics, Ortho Piping, Control Loop, Process Block Diagramming  Business Diagrams: Workflow Diagramming, Basic Diagramming, Office Layout, Flowcharts, Organization Charts, Network Diagrams  Network Diagram  Technical Drawing  Mapping: Atlas Mapping, Directional Mapping  AEC: Architecture, Construction, HVAC, Plot Plans, Site, Landscape  Mechanical: Mechanical Drawings (ANSI & ISO)

SmartSketch Works with Leading CAD Products Unlike most low-end sketching and drawing products, SmartSketch supports major existing CAD environments such as AutoCAD and MicroStation. You have full import and export capabilities for traditional CAD data. In addition, you can work with .dgn and .dwg data in native formats—as if these formats were OLE-enabled. Acting as wrappers around foreign data, OLE servers allow you to simply drag AutoCAD or MicroStation data into SmartSketch. You can even locate points in the CAD geometry and work directly off those points in your SmartSketch document. This capability—giving you live access to legacy data—makes SmartSketch a powerful tool on your desktop.

SmartSketch User's Guide

23

Introducing SmartSketch

Technical User Forum See http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/customers/tuf/smartsketch.aspx http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/customers/tuf/smartsketch.aspx to open the SmartSketch Technical User Forum website. This site contains user discussions on SmartSketch.

Additional Documentation For more information about installing and using SmartSketch, the following documentation is provided:  SmartSketch User's Guide (SmartSketchUsersGuide.pdf) - Provides all of the information found in the online Help file, presented in a printable .PDF format. You can access this guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software. Additionally, the user's guide is delivered on your computer to the ..\SmartSketch\Program\resdlls\0009 folder after you install the software.  SmartSketch Installation Guide (SmartSketchInstallGuide.pdf) - Provides installation and configuration information for system administrators. You can access this guide on the SmartSketch CD and on the AutoPlay dialog box, or using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software. The installation guide is also delivered on your computer to the ..\SmartSketch\Program\resdlls\0009 folder after you install the software.  SmartSketch README (README.HTM) - Contains installation and configuration information, along with notes about last-minute fixes and other helpful hints. You will find this file on the SmartSketch CD.  SmartSketch Programming Help (SktchGd.chm and SktchPrg.chm) - These files, available online only, contain instructions and complete reference information for programming with the SmartSketch Automation Interface. You will find these files in the ..\SmartSketch\Programming Help folder after you install the SmartSketch Programming option.

See Also User Assistance (on page 28) Getting Started with SmartSketch (on page 33)

Using SmartSketch Options The following options further enhance the functionality found in SmartSketch. They are available via the Custom setup feature. For more information, see the Installation Guide, accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.  AEC Solutions (on page 25)  Electrical Solutions (on page 25)  Image Integrator (on page 25)  Mechanical Solutions (on page 26)  Process Solutions (on page 26)  Symbol Authoring (on page 27)  Programming Tools (on page 27)  Translators (on page 28)

24

SmartSketch User's Guide

Introducing SmartSketch

AEC Solutions A variety of AEC templates and symbols are provided with the SmartSketch AEC Solutions option. After installing the AEC Solutions option, you will be able to use the AEC templates with any AutoCAD, MicroStation, DXF, or IGR reference file. You can install the AEC Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

Electrical Solutions The Electrical Solutions option for SmartSketch contains industry-specific templates (both Imperial and metric), task-specific toolbars, and industry-standard symbols that let you quickly and easily create electrical schematics. When installed, the Electrical Solutions option delivers 250 electrical symbols, including:  Circuit Protectors  Contacts and Relays  Electron Tubes  Fundamental Items  High Voltage  Logic Gates  Qualifying Symbols  Rotating Mach  Semiconductors - Diodes, Thyristors, Transistors  Signaling  Switches  Terminal and Connectors  Transformers and Inductors  Transmission Path You can install the Electrical Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

Image Integrator The Image Integrator option provides integrated tools for viewing and manipulating images in a vector/raster drawing environment. You can manipulate all or part of an image using such edits as cut and move, copy and move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust contrast and brightness, or invert the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale and rotate images to match vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points. Image Integrator supports popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true color image formats including GIF, JPG, BMO, TIF, CAL, PC, RLE, COT, CIT, TG4, CRL, CMP, and RGB. When you install the Image Integrator option in conjunction with the Translators (on page 28) option, you can import hybrid raster/vector files into and exported from AutoCAD and MicroStation files while maintaining all reference data. You can install the Image Integrator option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

SmartSketch User's Guide

25

Introducing SmartSketch See Also Image Command (on page 547) Insert a Raster Image (on page 546)

Mechanical Solutions The Mechanical Solutions option for SmartSketch includes symbol sets that let you create and place GD&T (Geometric Dimension and Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols into SmartSketch drawings. The symbols are placed through a simple drag-and-drop operation from the Symbol Explorer. You can also place text fields that build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop operation. Several of the symbols feature multiple representations that you can easily access with a simple right-mouse click on your placed symbol. Once you see the representation you like, you simply left-mouse click it to change the display of the symbol in your drawing. GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are easily accessed with a simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit the input field to change its value. You can access these symbols when you open a Mechanical template in SmartSketch. GD&T and Weld Symbols for SmartSketch include both Metric and Imperial templates. You can install the Mechanical Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

See Also Mechanical Engineering Templates (on page 131) Mechanical Templates (on page 132)

Process Solutions When installed, the Process Solutions option for SmartSketch provides industry-specific templates, task-specific toolbars, and industry-standard symbols that let you produce 2D process diagrams, schematics, and precision drawings. With the included report macros, you can easily create component reports. Simple drag-and-drop actions let you quickly position major components of a process system into their appropriate locations in the drawing area. Using SmartSketch's intelligent routing (the Connector command) together with predefined linestyles to represent pipes and instrumentation lines, you can connect components at each symbol's connect points. You can place other inline components, such as valves, directly on a pipeline or instrumentation line. You can install the Process Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

See Also Ortho Piping Templates (on page 135) PFD and P&ID Templates (on page 136) Plot Plan Templates (on page 138) Process Block Diagramming Templates (on page 139)

26

SmartSketch User's Guide

Introducing SmartSketch

Symbol Authoring When installed, the Symbol Authoring option for SmartSketch provides integrated tools for creating new symbols and modifying existing symbols. Symbol Authoring tools give you the ability to:  Define SmartPoints on your symbols that predetermine points where connectors should attach (connect points), multiple origin points for placement (drag points), and points where other symbols should attach (drop points)  Define symbol behaviors such as rotation angles, desired handles (mirror, scale, rotate), label positions, etc.  Define symbol attributes (text information) and symbol parameters (dimensional information)  Define special processes (actions) that execute on symbol drop, double click, and so forth.  Define bitmaps and help files to be associated with your symbol.  Drive symbol parameters and attributes from external datasources such as Excel or MS Access (lookup tables)  Define several graphic representations (multiple representations) of a symbol that can be changed after placement using the right mouse short-cut You can install the Symbol Authoring option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

See Also Planning Your Symbol (on page 505) Managing Text in Symbols (on page 519)

Programming Tools The Programming Tools option includes programming libraries that allow developers to create custom programs that run with SmartSketch. Programming Tools is not a requirement to run the custom programs, only to create custom programs for SmartSketch. The Programming Tools option includes a type library delivered with the software that contains all the objects, properties, and methods available with SmartSketch. On-line documentation for these libraries is delivered locally to [Product Directory]:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Programming Help. These guides are designed to:  Provide an overview of how you can customize SmartSketch with standard Windows programming tools and languages, including Visual Basic.  Describe the tools available in SmartSketch for customization  Show practical examples of customization using the sample custom commands that are delivered with the Programming Tools option. You can install the Programming Tools option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

SmartSketch User's Guide

27

Introducing SmartSketch

Translators ®

®

The Translators option allows you to translate or reference MicroStation and AutoCAD files for use with SmartSketch. MicroStation and AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, and fill styles are fully supported, so you can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and then save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation provides equivalent objects to and from which elements or entities may be mapped during translation. Translator options let you customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and units are imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings. If your MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings are "hybrid" drawings containing both graphic and raster data, we recommend that you install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option for SmartSketch as well. Although hybrid MicroStation and AutoCAD drawings will import without Image Integrator, all of the raster data will be ignored in your new file. You can install the Translators option using the Custom setup feature. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

See Also Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565) Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

User Assistance You can access different kinds of information any time you are running the software, including reference topics, narrative descriptions, or instructional material. In addition, the software provides several learning tools that you can activate from the online Help menu. You can use About SmartSketch on the Help menu to see your software version and license information.

Online Help A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search capabilities provide easy access to Help topics. Press F1 any time you need online Help during a design session. When a command is active, the Help topic for that command appears. If no command is active, then the table of contents for the Help topics appears. You can also access the table of contents by clicking SmartSketch Help Topics on the Help menu.

Learning Tools  

To learn to use the software more efficiently, explore the tutorials available on the Help menu. Every time you activate the software, a Tip of the Day dialog box displays a helpful tip. You can use More Tips on the dialog box, or Tip of the Day on the Help menu, to display more tips.

User Interface Features  

28

Tool tips help you find command names. When you pause the mouse pointer on the command button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command's name. Brief command descriptions show you the basic function of a command. When you point the pointer at the command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the Status Bar at

SmartSketch User's Guide

Introducing SmartSketch the bottom of the window. Also, messages that explain your actions for each step of the command appear in the Status Bar.

Display Context-Sensitive Help 1. On the main toolbar, click Help . The pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a question mark. 2. Click a command or dialog box in the main window.

What's This Help Command Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current window. You can use this command to get help on any item even when the item is not active. When this command is active, the pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a question mark. You can press Shift + F1 to get context-sensitive Help on an active command.

Help Command Displays the table of contents for the SmartSketch Help topics, which include step-by-step instructions for using the software, reference information, examples of features, and technical support information. It also provides access to the Help index and full-text search.

See Also Display Help Topics (on page 31)

Access the Printable Guides 1. Click Help > Printable Guides. 2. In the browser that opens, click a link to the guide that you want to view or print. To print the guide, use the printing capability of the application that opens the guide. The printable SmartSketchUser's Guide contains the same information that is in the online Help.

Printable Guides Command SmartSketch documentation is available in PDF format. To view these files, you need a PDF reader such as Adobe® Reader. After you have installed a PDF reader, you can click a document title to open its PDF file. Intergraph gives its customers permission to print as many copies of the delivered PDF files that you need for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print the PDF files for resale or redistribution outside your company. To prevent Internet Explorer from blocking PDF files, you can change your Internet Options to allow active content located on your computer to run: 1. In Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet Options. 2. Select the Advanced Tab. 3. Scroll to the Security section of the settings, and select Allow active content to run on My Computer.

Access Online Tutorials 1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch.

SmartSketch User's Guide

29

Introducing SmartSketch 2. Select a tutorial. 3. Follow the instructions in the Learning Center to navigate within the tutorials. 4. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your screen. If you installed the software from a network, verify the network drive or Universal Naming Convention (UNC) network connection.

Learning Center Command Accesses a set of HTML-based tutorials to help you get up and running with the software.

See Also Access Online Tutorials (on page 29)

Display the Tip of the Day Click Help > Tip of the Day.  

If you want to turn off Tip of the Day, set the check box on the Tip of the Day dialog box that appears when you start the software. To turn Tip of the Day back on, you can click Tip of the Day on the Help menu. Then, on the Tip of the Day dialog box, set the Show Tips at Startup check box.

Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off Turn Off Tip of the Day 1. Click Help > Tip of the Day. 2. On the Tip of the Day dialog box, clear the Show Tips at Startup check box.

Turn On Tip of the Day 1. Click Help > Tip of the Day. 2. On the Tip of the Day dialog box, click the Show Tips at Startup check box.

Tip of the Day Command Displays tips about using features in the software. This command also offers a tip each time you start the software.

See Also Display the Tip of the Day (on page 30) Tip of the Day Dialog Box (on page 30)

Tip of the Day Dialog Box Displays a tip each time you start the software. You can also activate this dialog box by choosing Tip of the Day from the Help menu.

30

SmartSketch User's Guide

Introducing SmartSketch Did You Know - Displays a tip about using a feature. More Tips - Displays a list of available tips. Next Tip - Displays the next tip in the list. Show Tips At Startup - Displays a tip every time you start the software. If you do not want to display tips when you start the software, clear this option.

See Also Display the Tip of the Day (on page 30)

Display Help Topics Click Help > SmartSketch Help.

Open the SmartSketch Home Page 1. Click Help > SmartSketch on the Web. 2. Follow the instructions on the SmartSketch web page to navigate within the site and to leave the site. 3. Return to the SmartSketch product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your screen. On this page, you can access a variety of tools to help you learn and use SmartSketch more efficiently.

SmartSketch on the Web Command Activates your World Wide Web browser and opens the SmartSketch web page. On this page, you can:  Access registration and support information  Access learning tools  Keep up-to-date on product events  View a web gallery of SmartSketch drawings  Contact Intergraph.

Display Information About the Software Click Help > About SmartSketch.

About Command Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.

See Also Display Information About the Software (on page 31)

SmartSketch User's Guide

31

Introducing SmartSketch

32

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 2

Getting Started with SmartSketch After installing SmartSketch, you are ready to start the application and begin using SmartSketch for all your 2D precision design and production drafting needs. Before starting, you need to be familiar with the interface components, understand Setting Up Documents (on page 63), and familiar with using the pre-defined templates.

See Also Exploring the Interface (on page 35) Setting Up Documents (on page 63) SmartSketch Templates (on page 107)

Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility The SmartPlant License Checkout utility (License Checkout Utility.exe) allows you to obtain licenses for SmartPlant products for use on a non-networked computer (for example, a remote laptop). Each user on a server can check out an individual license on that machine. When you check out a license, the license and expiration information are stored on your local machine, separate from another user's license and expiration information. A license is available only for the user that checks out the license. Each time you start the product during the checkout period, a message displays the expiration date for the checked-out license. When the checkout period for the license expires, the SmartPlant product attempts to request a license using SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product. For example, after the license expires at 11:59 PM on the expiration date, the next time you start the product, it attempts to access the SmartPlant License Manager license machine for base and module licenses prior to running.  

You must install and configure SmartPlant License Manager before checking out a license. You must have administrator privileges to setup and install the utility.

Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility 1. Insert the product CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the installation does not start automatically, double-click setup.exe in the main folder. 2. Click SmartPlant License Checkout Utility. 3. Type your name and company name. 4. Verify your name and company name, then click Next. 5. Click Display to read and accept the license agreement, and then click Yes. 6. 7. 8. 9.

You must have a PDF reader to view the license agreement. Specify the destination folder. Review your settings, and then click Next. Click Install to start the installation process. Click Finish.

SmartSketch User's Guide

33

Getting Started with SmartSketch You can uninstall the License Checkout utility at any time, even if you are currently running a product in remote license mode.

Check Out a License for SmartSketch Be sure that SmartPlant License Manager is installed and configured on your computer. 1. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant License Checkout Utility > License Checkout Utility. 2. Select the product for which you want to check out a license. 3. Click OK.  







34

Checked out licenses cannot be checked in. When running in remote license mode, you cannot use setup to modify the product installation until the following conditions are met:  The checkout duration expires.  The system is working with SmartPlant License Manager in connected license mode once again. In other words, you cannot install or remove modules while running in remote license mode. If the product is running in remote license mode but is unable to confirm for any reason that it is running in that mode, the product automatically returns to connected license mode and attempts to obtain the licenses from SmartPlant License Manager. The product notifies you if it is unable to obtain licenses from SmartPlant License Manager. Each time you start the product while using the remote license mode, the software displays a message informing you when the checked out license will expire. The first time that you run the product after the checked out licenses expire, the software displays a message informing you that the checked out licenses have expired and that the software is reverting to the standard connected license mode and attempting to get licenses from SmartPlant License Manager. When SmartSketch Drawing Editor (Standalone) is used, a SmartSketch license is assigned to it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

License Checkout Utility Dialog Box Allows you to select the product for which you want to check out a license.

Product - Displays the installed products available for license checkout. Select the product for which you want to check out licenses. Modules - Displays the modules available with your product. A grayed-out entry means that module is not installed on your workstation. If no modules appear in the list, either your product contains no supported modules, or no modules have been installed. Check the box beside the module for which you want to check out a license. If you want to check out only the base product, do not check any of the modules. Duration - Specify the number of days that you want to check out a license. Remember that after licenses are checked out, they cannot be checked in before the license period expires. When the checkout period for the license expires, the product returns to normal, connected licensing using SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product.

Exploring the Interface The window consists of several components. Most of the software's user interface components are fully customizable. You can arrange your workspace in several ways:  Move windows around on the screen.  Display, hide, or customize toolbars using Toolbars on the View menu or the buttons on the Main toolbar.  Move a ribbon to the top or bottom of the drawing sheet.  Set viewing options for the active window by clicking Options on the Tools menu and setting the options you want on the dialog box.

User Interface Components Menu Bar and Menus (on page 38) Ribbons and Dialog Boxes (on page 39)

SmartSketch User's Guide

35

Getting Started with SmartSketch Toolbars (on page 40) Keyboard (on page 51) Mouse (on page 52)

Exploring the Window with Your Mouse Use the left mouse button to do the following:  Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them.  Drag a selected element.  Click or drag to draw an element.  Select a menu or toolbar command.  Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object. Use the right mouse button to do the following:  Restart a command.  Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The commands on the menu depend upon your mouse location and which elements, if any, are selected.

You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around on the drawing sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to indicate that they have been located. When you move the mouse away from a highlighted object, the object returns to its original color.

Using Ribbons and Dialog Boxes Because the software is Office-Compatible, you will find the ribbons and dialog boxes work just like those in Windows. A unique ribbon appears when you click a specific command or when you select an element. These ribbons help you control various settings for the active command. You can place a ribbon bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon to the top or the bottom, but not to the sides, of the window The following figure shows a ribbon. Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools: A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X appears to show that the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.

36

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to activate it.

A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit the text by highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or Delete.

A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases, you can also type a value in the field.

A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the list using the scroll bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option on the list and then click OK on the dialog box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

37

Getting Started with SmartSketch 

Using Toolbars

The toolbars give you quick access to commands. You can place a toolbar anywhere within the application window, either docked at the top, bottom, right, or left, or floating anywhere in your workspace.

On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you click and hold the command button. Fly-outs access commands that are closely associated with the button that you clicked. These types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner.

Arranging Your Work Space You can arrange the workspace in several ways:  Move windows around on the screen.  Display, hide, or customize toolbars using Toolbars on the View menu or the buttons on the Main toolbar.  Move a ribbon to the top or bottom of the drawing sheet.  Set viewing options for the active window by clicking Options on the Tools menu and setting the options you want on the dialog box.

Menu Bar and Menus The software's menu bar allows you to access all commands, divided by workflow or task. When you click a command, a description of the command appears in the message field at the bottom left of the main application window. You can also click the Help button on the Main toolbar, and then click a menu command to view a description of that command.

38

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Ribbons and Dialog Boxes A unique ribbon appears when you click a specific command or when you select an element. These ribbons help you control various settings for the active command. You can place a ribbon bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon to the top or the bottom, but not to the sides, of the window. Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools: A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X appears to show that the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.

Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to activate it.

A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit the text by highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or Delete.

A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases, you can also type a value in the field.

A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the list using the scroll bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option on the list and then click OK on the dialog box.

See Also Exploring the Window with Your Mouse (on page 36)

SmartSketch User's Guide

39

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Toolbars Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in the software. You can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in your workspace. You can also add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own.  To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu. The list shows all of the available toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To show a toolbar that isn't checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click the name of the toolbar to clear the check mark.  To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and then drag the toolbar to the new location.  On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you click and hold the command button. Fly-outs access commands that are closely associated with the button that you clicked. These types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner. 

  1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then click the Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the group that contains the command you want to add, and then in the Commands list, click that command and drag it to the toolbar in your workspace. To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the 3D model viewing area (except on another toolbar). If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Dimension toolbar, you can reset the toolbar to its original state: Click View > Toolbars. Click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to reset. Click Reset. Click OK.

Change Toolbar The Change toolbar contains commands that you can use to modify elements of your symbol. You can activate the Change toolbar by using the View > Toolbars command. Moves an element or a select set in small increments. You use the Delta box on the Nudge ribbon to define the size of the increment, and then use the arrow keys to "nudge" the element or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, and down). Move - Moves elements from one location to another. For more information, see Move Command (on page 212). Nudge - Moves an element or a select set in small increments. Offset - Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. For more information, see Offset Command (on page 217). Rotate - Rotates one or more elements. For more information, see Rotate Command (on page 332). Mirror - Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line that you define. For more information, see Mirror Command (on page

40

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch 335). Align - Allows you to align two or more elements in a selection set. For more information, see Align Command (on page 338). Scale - Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. For more information, see Scale Command (on page 341). Rectangular Pattern - Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern. For more information, see Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221). Circular Pattern - Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern. For more information, see Circular Pattern Command (on page 222). Delete - Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed on it. For more information, see Delete Command (on page 219). Bring to Front - Moves a selected element to the front of the display order. For more information, see Bring to Front Command (on page 368). Send to Back - Moves a selected element to the back of the display order. For more information, see Send to Back Command (on page 369). Pull Up - Moves a selected element up one position in the display order. For more information, see Pull Up Command (on page 369). Push Down - Moves a selected element down one position in the display order. For more information, see Push Down Command (on page 369). Group - Binds elements so that you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit. For more information, see Group Command (on page 365). UnGroup - Removes elements from groups that were defined using the Group command. For more information, see UnGroup Command (on page 367).

Dimension Toolbar The Dimension toolbar contains commands to dimension elements of your symbol. You can activate the Dimension toolbar with the View > Toolbars command or by clicking Dimension on the main toolbar. SmartDimension - Places several different dimensions. For more information, see SmartDimension Command (on page 280). Distance Between - Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key points. For more information, see Distance Between Command (on page 293).

SmartSketch User's Guide

41

Getting Started with SmartSketch Angle Between - Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points. For more information, see Angle Between Command (on page 281). Axis - Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. For more information, see Axis Command (on page 301). Coordinate Dimension - Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or more key points or elements. For more information, see Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294). Symmetric Diameter - Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and another element or key point. For more information, see Symmetric Diameter Command (on page 299). Measure Distance - Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points. For more information, see Measure Distance Command (on page 313). Measure Distance Along - Measures the distance along an object based on two points. For more information, see Measure Distance Along Command (on page 315). Measure Area - Displays the most recently selected area of the boundary in the current units. For more information, see Measure Area Command (on page 317). Character Map - Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. For more information, see Character Map Command (on page 249). Leader - Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. For more information, see Leader Command (on page 246). Balloon - Places a balloon containing text. For more information, see Balloon Command (on page 240). Dimension Text - Overrides a driven dimensional value with a text string. For more information, see Dimension Text Command (on page 306).

Draw Toolbar The Draw toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the interface. You can use the commands on this toolbar to place the basic elements of your symbol. Some commands on the Draw toolbar display fly-outs when you click and hold the command button. Fly-outs access commands that vary from but are closely associated with the original command that is displayed. Select Tool - Use to select, modify, and manipulate elements. For more information, see Select Tool (on page 201). SmartSelect - Creates a select set by drawing a rectangular or polygonal fence around objects based on points that you define. For more information, see SmartSelect Command (on page 202).

42

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch Line/Arc Continuous - Draws one line or a series of connected lines. For more information, see Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147). Place Doubleline - Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. For more information, see Place Doubleline Command (on page 159). Connector - Connects two elements together. For more information, see Connector Command (on page 156). Tangent Arc - Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. For more information, see Tangent Arc Command (on page 168). Arc by 3 Points - Draws an arc using three points. For more information, see Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165). Arc by Center Point - Draws an arc using three points. For more information, see Arc By Center Point Command (on page 166). Curve - Draws a smooth, open or closed curve. For more information, see Curve Command (on page 171). FreeForm - Draws freeform curves or splines. For more information, see FreeForm Command (on page 185). FreeSketch - Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing. For more information, see FreeSketch Command (on page 184). Circle by Center Point - Draws a circle using a center point and radius. For more information, see Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162). Circle by 3 Points - Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference. For more information, see Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161). Tangent Circle - Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements. For more information, see Tangent Circle Command (on page 163). Ellipse by Center Point - Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. For more information, see Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174). Ellipse by 3 Points - Draws an ellipse using three edge points. For more information, see Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173). Rectangle - Draws a rectangle using three points. For more information, see Rectangle Command (on page 176). Fillet Rectangle - Draws a rectangle using four points and a user-specified radius. For more information, see Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177). Polygon - Draws an n-sided polygon based on user-defined properties. For more information, see Polygon Command (on page 178). Polygon by Center - Draws an n-sided polygon based on

SmartSketch User's Guide

43

Getting Started with SmartSketch user-defined properties. For more information, see Polygon by Center Command (on page 180). Revision Cloud - Places a cloud around objects in a drawing. For more information, see Revision Cloud Command (on page 243). Point - Draws a point. For more information, see Point Command (on page 148). Text Box - Places a text box in a document. For more information, see Text Box Command (on page 231). Fillet - Draws a fillet between two elements. For more information, see Fillet Command (on page 353). Chamfer - Draws a chamfer, or bevel. For more information, see Chamfer Command (on page 351). Trim - Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions. For more information, see Trim Command (on page 343). Trim Corner - Draws a corner by extending or trimming two selected open elements. For more information, see Trim Corner Command (on page 344). Trim to Element - Trims the selected element to another selected element. For more information, see Trim to Element Command (on page 343). Trim to Point - Trims the selected element to a point in space. For more information, see Trim to Point Command (on page 345). Trim Inside - Trims within the selected element (partial delete). For more information, see Trim Inside Command (on page 345). Extend to Next - Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest element. For more information, see Extend to Next Command (on page 348). Extend to Point - Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another element. For more information, see Extend to Point Command (on page 349). Fill - Places a solid color or pattern inside a closed boundary. For more information, see Fill Command (on page 446). Mask - Masks out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. For more information, see Mask Command (on page 448).

44

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Image Integrator Toolbar The Image Integrator toolbar contains commands that you can use for viewing and manipulating images in a vector/raster drawing environment. You can manipulate all or part of an image using such edits as cut and move, copy and move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust contrast and brightness, or invert the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale and rotate images to match vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points. Image Integrator supports popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true color image formats including .GIF, .JPG, .BMO, .TIF, .CAL, .PC, .RLE, .COT, .CIT, .TG4, .CRL, .CMP, and .RGB. To use this functionality, you must first install Image Integrator using Add-Ins on the Tools menu. If you do not see the Image Integrator add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Custom setup to install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software. Insert Image - Places a raster image into your document. For more information, see Image Command (on page 547). Save Selected Image - Saves changes you make to the raster image to the image source file. For more information, see Save Selected Image(s) Command (on page 547). Image Undo - Reverses the last change made to the raster image. For more information, see Image Undo Command (on page 548). Image Redo - Reverses the last change most recent undo command. For more information, see Image Redo Command (on page 548). Rectangular Select Area - Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a rectangle around pixels that you define. For more information, see Rectangular Select Area Command (on page 549). Polygonal Select Area - Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a polygon around pixels that you define. For more information, see Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551). Contrast and Brightness - Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. For more information, see Contrast and Brightness Command (on page 552). Invert - Creates a negative image of the selected raster image, replacing each pixel color with its opposite on the color wheel. For more information, see Invert Command (on page 553). Fill - Fills the select area with the selected fill color. For more information, see Fill Command (on page 554). Position - Positions a raster image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. For more information, see Position Command (on page 556).

SmartSketch User's Guide

45

Getting Started with SmartSketch Image Properties - Allows you to view the properties of a raster image. For more information, see Image Properties Command (on page 557). Image Erase - Erases the selected image or selected edit area. For more information, see Image Erase Command (on page 558). Speckle Remove - Removes all unwanted areas of speckle in a binary image. For more information, see Speckle Remove Command (on page 559). Multi-Point Warp - Performs linear and non-linear transformations of images. For more information, see Multi-Point Warp Command (on page 560).

Isometric Toolbar The Isometric toolbar contains commands to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes. This type of drawing is called an isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the drawing in perspective or from another angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning the elements and objects in a drawing along three major axes.

The software supplies several tools to create these types of documents:  Isometric Rectangle  Isometric Circle  Isometric Line  Segmented Styles  

To access these commands, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK. After you enable the Isometric Toolbar Commands add-in, you can use View > Toolbars to toggle on/off the Isometric toolbar. Isometric line - Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric drawing. For more information, see Isometric Line Command (on page 190). Isometric rectangle - Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. For more information, see Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 192).

46

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch Isometric circle - Allows you to draw an isometric circle. For more information, see Isometric Circle Command (on page 188). Segmented style - Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element.. For more information, see Segmented Style Command (on page 193).

Main Toolbar The Main toolbar displays by default docked to the top of the SmartSketch window just underneath the menu bar. Most of the commands on this toolbar provide shortcuts for commands found in the menus. New - Creates a new document or template. For more information, see New Command (on page 64). Open - Opens an existing document or template in a new window. For more information, see Open Command (on page 65). Save - Saves the active document with its currently defined name, directory, and format. For more information, see Save Command (on page 94). Print - Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. For more information, see Print Command (on page 104). Cut - Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. For more information, see Cut Command (on page 220). Copy - Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. For more information, see Copy Command (on page 214). Paste - Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source document. For more information, see Paste Command (on page 215). Format Painter - Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected object and applies it to other objects as they are selected. For more information, see Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) (on page 215). Undo - Reverses an action. For more information, see Undo Command (on page 205). Redo - Repeats the most recent action taken or reverses the most recent Undo. For more information, see Redo Command (on page 206). Hyperlink - Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. For more information, see Hyperlink Command (on page 540). Dimension - Displays the Dimension toolbar. For more information, see Dimension Command (on page 281).

SmartSketch User's Guide

47

Getting Started with SmartSketch Change - Displays the Change toolbar. For more information, see Change Command (on page 331). Relationships - Displays the Relationship toolbar. For more information, see Relationships Command (on page 261). PinPoint - Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. For more information, see PinPoint Command (on page 270). Layers - Displays or hides layers. For more information, see Layers Command (on page 375). Symbol Explorer - Activates the Symbol Explorer window and the Atrribute Viewer. For more information, see Symbol Explorer Command (on page 385). Zoom Area - Enlarges the display of elements in the active window. For more information, see Zoom Area Command (on page 55). Zoom In - Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. For more information, see Zoom In Command (on page 56). Zoom Out - Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. For more information, see Zoom Out Command (on page 56). Fit - Fits all visible elements in the active view. For more information, see Fit Command (on page 57). Pan - Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to see other areas of the drawing or model. For more information, see Pan Command (on page 58). Help - Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current window. For more information, see What's This Help Command (on page 29).

Relationship Toolbar The Relationship toolbar contains commands that you can use to define relationships between elements. You can activate the Relationship toolbar with the View > Toolbars command or by clicking Relationships on the Main toolbar. Connect - Connects two elements or key points at one point. For more information, see Connect Command (on page 358). Horizontal/Vertical - Makes a line horizontal or vertical. For more information, see Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 359). Parallel - Makes two lines parallel. For more information, see Parallel Command (on page 359). Perpendicular - Makes two elements perpendicular. For more information, see Perpendicular Command (on page 359). Tangent - Makes two elements tangent. For more information, see Tangent Command (on page 361).

48

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch Collinear - Makes two lines collinear. For more information, see Collinear Command (on page 357). Concentric - Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle. For more information, see Concentric Command (on page 357). Symmetric - Makes elements symmetric about an axis. For more information, see Symmetric Command (on page 360). Equal - Makes elements equal. For more information, see Equal Command (on page 358). Lock - Controls elements so they cannot be modified. For more information, see Lock Command (on page 265). Relationship Handles - Displays any relationship handles on elements. For more information, see Relationship Handles Command (on page 264). Alignment Indicator - Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw. For more information, see Alignment Indicator Command (on page 263). Maintain Relationships - Places relationship handles as you draw. For more information, see Maintain Relationships Command (on page 264).

Schematic Toolbar The Schematic toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the interface when you open a drawing that is based on a template designed to create a schematic diagram. Schematic diagrams are primarily created using symbols, connectors, and text at a 1:1 scale. Schematic diagrams do not represent a logical flow. For more information about schematic templates that are available with the software, see SmartSketch Templates (on page 107). Select Tool - Use to select, modify, and manipulate elements. For more information, see Select Tool (on page 201). SmartSelect - Creates a select set by drawing a rectangular or polygonal fence around objects based on points that you define. For more information, see SmartSelect Command (on page 202). Connector - Connects two elements together. For more information, see Connector Command (on page 156). Delete - Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed on it. For more information, see Delete Command (on page 219). Text Box - Places a text box in a document. For more information, see Text Box Command (on page 231). Fill - Places a solid color or pattern inside a closed boundary. For more information, see Fill Command (on page 446). Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with

SmartSketch User's Guide

49

Getting Started with SmartSketch precision. For more information, see Grid Display Command (on page 272). Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. For more information, see Grid Snap Command (on page 273).

Symbol Authoring Toolbar As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, SmartSketch's Symbol Authoring option gives you the flexibility to create your own. There are several ways to create your symbols in SmartSketch. You can:  Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the line, rectangle, ellipse, and freeform tools.  Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol.  Revise an existing SmartSketch symbol. To use this functionality, you must first install Symbol Authoring using Add-Ins on the Tools menu. If you do not see the Symbol Authoring add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Custom setup to install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software. SmartPoint Properties - Places SmartPoints on a symbol. For more information, see SmartPoint Properties Command (on page 533). Symbol Origin - Defines the origin of the symbol that you are creating. For more information, see Symbol Origin Command (on page 518). Symbol Properties - Defines properties for a symbol. For more information, see Symbol Properties Command (on page 510). Lookup Table - Imports data from an open database connectivity (ODBC) data source to drive values for symbol parameters and attributes. For more information, see Lookup Table Command (on page 536). Symbol Representation - Defines different representations of the same symbol within one symbol document (.sym). For more information, see Symbol Representation Command (on page 517). Edit SmartText - Defines the contents of a SmartLabel. SmartLabels are associated to an object's attributes and displays those attributes as text in the document. For more information, see Edit SmartText Command (on page 523).

50

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Keyboard Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions or enter commands:

Standard Control Keys The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts the software supports. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter. Ctrl + A

Select All

Ctrl + C

Copy Text

Ctrl + N

New

Ctrl + O

Open

Ctrl + P

Print

Ctrl + S

Save

Ctrl + V

Paste Text

Ctrl + X

Cut Text

Ctrl + Y

Redo

Ctrl + Z

Undo

Function Keys Certain function keys work only when the appropriate command is active. For instance, F9 through F12 are only available when you use PinPoint. The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions. F1

Help

F3

Grid Snap

Alt + F4

Exit

Ctrl + F4

Close File

F5

Update Active View

Alt + F5

Previous Zoom Level

Ctrl + F7

Paste From Clipboard

F9

Toggle PinPoint Display

Ctrl + F9

Cut to Clipboard

F10

PinPoint Lock X axis

Shift + F10

Select First Menu Item

F11

PinPoint Lock Y axis

F12

Reset PinPoint Home

SmartSketch User's Guide

51

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Mouse Use a standard mouse or Microsoft IntelliMouse Features (on page 52) to quickly and efficiently manipulate different views of the drawing. Use the left mouse button to do the following:  Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them.  Drag a selected element.  Click or drag to draw an element.  Select a menu or toolbar command.  Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object. Use the right mouse button to do the following:  Restart a command.  Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The commands on the menu depend upon your mouse location and which elements, if any, are selected.

You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around on the drawing sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to indicate that they have been located. When you move the mouse away from a highlighted object, the object returns to its original color.

See Also Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse (on page 53)

Microsoft IntelliMouse Features You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse® with the software so that you can manipulate different views of the document faster and more efficiently. The newest version of Microsoft IntelliPoint Drivers (2.2) supports universal scrolling. Universal scrolling allows you to scroll up and down in any window that displays scroll bars by using the wheel button on the IntelliMouse. Universal scrolling prohibits the recognition of the scrolling behavior defined for the software. You must, therefore, identify the name of the software and any other applications as exceptions to universal scrolling. Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse (on page 53)

52

When you do this:

The view does this:

Rotate the wheel button forward

Zooms in at the current pointer location

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch Rotate the wheel button backwards

Zooms out at the current pointer location

Drag the wheel button

Pans from one location to another

Press Ctrl and drag the wheel button

Zooms the area of the window that you defined by dragging the pointer

Press Shift and click the wheel button

Fits the graphics on the document to the window

Press Alt and click the wheel button

Restores the previous view

You can perform any of these actions with a three-button mouse; you click the middle mouse button, instead of the wheel button. No action occurs when you click the wheel button just one time.

Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Start > Settings > Control Panel. Select the Mouse icon. On the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab. In the Universal Scrolling area of the dialog box, click Exceptions. On the Exceptions for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click Add. On the Add Exception for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click to open the Program Files folder. Next, click SmartSketch > Program > draft.exe. Then click Open. 7. Accept the new settings. The appropriate IntelliMouse drivers, or equivalent, must be installed in order to see the wheel tab on the Mouse Properties dialog box.

See Also Microsoft IntelliMouse Features (on page 52)

Status Bar The status bar is at the bottom of the SmartSketch main window. It provides information such as the status of a drawing document and the meaning of a command. Command information displays as you pause the cursor over the command button. In addition, the status bar displays the coordinates of the cursor position in the active drawing window. The units and precision are the same as the distance unit settings in the document properties (see View Document Properties (on page 62)). When the Grid Snap setting is turned OFF, the exact cursor location is displayed. When the Grid Snap setting is turned ON, the coordinates represent the "snapped to" position and not the true cursor position.

See Also Exploring the Window with Your Mouse (on page 36) Exploring the Interface (on page 35)

SmartSketch User's Guide

53

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Viewing Your Work You can manipulate windows and views to affect how you see a document on the computer screen. A window can be compared to a camera. When you look through a camera, you see a view of a real-world object. When you look through a window on the computer screen, you see a view of the objects in the document. In both cases, you can change the view by zooming in and out, and focusing on different parts of the document. You can also use the Microsoft IntelliMouse to zoom or pan views.

Windows When you start the software, the application window displays a blank document. You use commands on the File menu to create a new document or open an existing one. With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new windows that allow you to see more than one section of a document or more than one document. You can minimize open windows and display them as icons in the application work space.

Views Views are what you see in software windows. With the view commands, you can do the following:  Use Zoom Area to set the zoom area to see more detail in the document.  Use Zoom In to enlarge the display of elements around a specified point in the document.  Use Zoom Out to reduce the display of elements around a specified point in the document.  Use Pan to position another part of the document in the center of a view, fit all of the document in a view, or identify the area of the document you want to see.  Use Fit to restore the previous view of the document.  Use Previous to restore the previous view.  Use Toolbars to display or hide toolbars in the application window.

Drawing Sheets With drawing sheets, you can place different drawings on different sheets in a document. Working sheets are the drawing sheets on which you place most of your graphics. Background sheets are drawing sheets that allow you to define and display the border of a drawing sheet.

Layers Within each drawing sheet, you can place several layers so that you can group elements. Layers allow you to keep track of elements in the document and manipulate them more easily. You can also specify the way you want elements to be displayed in a window.

See Also Pan a View (on page 57) Restore a View (on page 57) Fit All Elements in the Active View (on page 57)

54

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Zoom Area 1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area . 2. On the drawing sheet, drag around the area that you want to zoom in on. The view zooms in on the area you fenced with the pointer. 

  

When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view zooms in at the current pointer location. You can also press CTRL and drag the mouse wheel to zoom an area or window. To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press . To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.

See Also Zoom Out (on page 56) Zoom In on an Area (on page 55)

Zoom Area Command Enlarges the display of elements in the active window. 



If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in an area by holding CTRL, pressing the mouse wheel or middle mouse button, and dragging the pointer. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom Area on the shortcut menu.

See Also Zoom In Command (on page 56) Zoom In on an Area (on page 55) Zoom Out Command (on page 56)

Zoom In on an Area 1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom In 2. Click on the area of the drawing you want to see in greater detail until it is the appropriate size.   

You can also click View > Zoom In. To exit the command at any time, press ESC. When the Continuous View Commands command is enabled, the Zoom In command remains active so that you can repeatedly select other points in the image you want to view in greater detail . To exit the command, click Esc.

See Also Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Zoom In Command (on page 56) Zoom Out Command (on page 56)

SmartSketch User's Guide

55

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Zoom In Command Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. 



If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom In on the shortcut menu.

See Also Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Zoom Out Command (on page 56) Zoom In on an Area (on page 55)

Zoom Out 1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Out 2. Click the view.     

.

You can drag the mouse to dynamically zoom out of the view. When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward, the view zooms out at the current pointer location. To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press . To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.

See Also Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Zoom Out Command (on page 56) Zoom In Command (on page 56) Zoom In on an Area (on page 55)

Zoom Out Command Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. Select a point to zoom out from, and the active view is redrawn with that point as the center of the display. This command shows more of the active view but at a lower resolution. 



You can also zoom out by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom Out on the shortcut menu.

See Also Zoom Out (on page 56) Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Zoom In Command (on page 56) Zoom In on an Area (on page 55)

56

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Fit All Elements in the Active View  On the Main toolbar, click Fit . Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any elements are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements. You can also click View > Fit or Ctrl + F. If you have a Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can press Shift and click the mouse wheel to fit the view.

See Also Fit Command (on page 57)

Fit Command Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any elements are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements.

See Also Fit All Elements in the Active View (on page 57)

Restore a View 

Click View > Previous.

   

You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu. You can also select the Previous option by right-clicking within the drawing area. You can also press ALT and click the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel to restore the view. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press .

See Also Previous Command (on page 57)

Previous Command Restores the previous view.  

You can use Tools > Customize to place the Previous button on a toolbar. You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.

See Also Restore a View (on page 57)

Pan a View 1. On the Main toolbar, click Pan . 2. Click in the view you want to pan.

SmartSketch User's Guide

57

Getting Started with SmartSketch 3. Click in the view again to show how far you want to pan.       

You can also drag the pointer to pan the view. When you drag using the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel, the view pans. Click the wheel to start the pan, and then click when the pan is complete. When you press and drag the mouse wheel and move the pointer from one location to another, the view pans from one location to another. To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press . To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.

See Also Pan Command (on page 58)

Pan Command Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to see other areas of the drawing or model. You can also right-click to access Pan on the shortcut menu.

See Also Pan a View (on page 57)

Switch to Another Open Document When multiple documents are open, you can switch between documents. Only one document at a time, called the active working document, can receive input. To switch between multiple documents, do one of the following:  If you can see a portion of the document that you want to switch to, click its window.  On the Window menu, click the document you want to work in. The document is displayed on top of other open documents.

See Also New Window Command (on page 59) Cascade Command (on page 59)

Window List Command Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list.

See Also New Window Command (on page 59) Cascade Command (on page 59)

Open a New Window 1. Click Window > New Window. 2. The software opens a new window and displays the same document as the active window.

58

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

New Window Command Opens a new window that displays the same document as the active window. The new window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes the active window. If you change the contents of the open document in one window, the other windows that contain the same document reflect the changes.

You can use Tools > Customize to place the New Window button on a toolbar.

See Also Cascade Command (on page 59)

Change the Window Layout When you have multiple windows open, you can use the commands on the Window menu to organize their layout.  To arrange open all windows so that they overlap, click Window > Cascade.  To arrange all open windows so that they fit horizontally in the SmartSketch window, click Window > Tile Horizontally.  To arrange all open windows so that they fit vertically in the SmartSketch window, click Window > TIle Vertically.

Cascade Command Overlaps windows diagonally across the screen. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Cascade Windows button on a toolbar.

See Also New Window Command (on page 59)

Tile Horizontally Command Arranges windows to fit horizontally on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen.

See Also New Window Command (on page 59) Cascade Command (on page 59)

SmartSketch User's Guide

59

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Tile Vertically Command Arranges windows to fit vertically on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen.

See Also New Window Command (on page 59) Cascade Command (on page 59)

60

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 3

Understanding Document Concepts SmartSketch provides quick and easy to use tools for setting up, saving, and printing documents. You can create documents by selecting one of many industry standard templates provided with SmartSketch, or you can open SmartSketch using NORMAL.igr as a starting template. Once a document has been created, the document itself can be saved as a template for future use. With Sheet Setup on the File menu, you can create unlimited sheets within a document. Each sheet acts like a separate drawing. You can make changes to each sheet individually, and then save them collectively in a multi-sheet document. The SmartSketch File menu provides several options for saving your documents, including the ability to automatically save open documents at specified intervals or to save an existing document in a new format. You can print your documents by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Document Explorer Command Activates the Document Explorer window. The Document Explorer window displays the contents of a document in a tree view format. You can view such items as the document properties, elements and styles. If you double-click on an element in the tree view, you can view additional information about the object, if any is available.

See Also Document Explorer Window (on page 62) View Document Properties (on page 62)

SmartSketch User's Guide

61

Understanding Document Concepts

Document Explorer Window Displays the active document in a tree view format. Fit Graphical View - Fits the drawing object you select in the Document Explorer tree to the active view of the drawing sheet. As long as the option is toggled on, each drawing object that you select in the tree view is fit into the graphical view. Add Element to Select Set - Selects objects in both the tree view and the document view. Objects that you select in one view are simultaneously selected in the other view. In the following illustration, when you select Symbol2d 671 in the Document Explorer tree view, the corresponding object (in this case, a Parametric Tower) is also selected in the graphic view As you click nodes in the tree view, the select set in the graphic view changes. Show Target Around Element - Locates objects in the active document. This feature is especially useful in large documents. Refresh - Reloads the display of the tree view. Filter - Opens the Filter Objects dialog box where you can specify which objects display in the Document Explorer tree view. You can select specific types of objects, all objects, or no objects.

See Also View Document Properties (on page 62)

Filter Objects Dialog Box Filter - Lists the drawing object types that you can include or exclude from the tree view of the Document Explorer. By default, all objects in the drawing are included. To exclude an object type, clear its check box. To include an object type, select its check box. OK - Accepts the changes and returns to the Document Explorer. Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes. Select All - Includes all drawing object types in the filter so that they are displayed in the Document Explorer tree view. Clear All - Excludes all drawing object types.

See Also Document Explorer Window (on page 62)

View Document Properties 1. Click File > Document Explorer. 2. Within the Document Explorer window, you can access several commands that allow you to change or filter the view in the window. For more information about these commands, see Document Explorer Window (on page 62).  

You can dock or undock the Document Explorer window on the left or right side of the main window. You can also resize the Document Explorer window.

See Also Document Explorer Command (on page 61)

62

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

Setting Up Documents When you start SmartSketch, a new, blank document opens. You can format each new document you create or use a pre-formatted template as a starting point for a new document and save the changes when you are finished. When you create a drawing, the drawing is displayed on your screen. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your document, and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your document. Any changes you make are temporarily stored in memory. You have to save the document to preserve the changes to your document. You can also save documents in a specific format.

Opening Existing Documents Open on the File menu opens existing documents. SmartSketch keeps track of the documents you open and displays them at the bottom of the File menu. Options on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries SmartSketch displays in the list. To open one of the documents, choose it from the list.

Setting Up Properties for a Document Properties on the File menu allows you to view, edit, and store properties for a document. Document properties can include the title, the author, and keywords that identify important information. These properties also can include document statistics, such as document size and the date that a document was created and last modified. Some properties, such as the date the document was last modified, are updated automatically.

Setting Up Units of Measure for a Document The units of measure settings for a document are stored as a property. You can set units of measure in both English and metric units for values such as length, area, or angles. Once you set the units of measure, all the measurements in the drawing are affected. For example, if you set the length unit of measure to inches, then all the measurements in the drawing display in inches. You can change the unit of measure at any time while you are drawing, and the document still retains complete accuracy of the measurements in the drawing. The precision readout determines the accuracy of the unit readout value by setting the number of significant figures to display. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm. When you set the units of measure for a document, the settings do not affect the dimensional values for the document. You can set units for the dimensional values with the Dimension Properties dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting a dimension and then clicking Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also set the dimension units by editing a dimension style with Dimension on the Format menu.

Working with Several Open Documents Several documents can remain open in the same session. You can use Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy information between the documents or within one open document. You can use

SmartSketch User's Guide

63

Understanding Document Concepts commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open documents so that you can view them easily. You can also use Object on the Insert menu to import objects, such as drawings, spreadsheets, or text created in other software, into an open document. You can link or embed the imported objects. You can also drag information from another document into an open document.

See Also Open a Document (on page 65) Save a Document as a Template (on page 143) Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Create a New Document 1. On the Main toolbar, click New

.

You can also click File > New. 2. In the Templates list, select the template you want to use to create the document. 



If you want to create a template, you can simply save the document to the TEMPLATE folder located in the folder where you installed the software. A different filename extension is not needed. You can change the folder where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the folder that you want to use on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.

See Also New Command (on page 64) New Dialog Box (on page 64)

New Command Creates a new document or template. You can use a template to create the document.

See Also Create a New Document (on page 64) New Dialog Box (on page 64)

New Dialog Box Creates a new document or template. Templates - Lists the templates available in the Template folder that is located in the folder where you installed the software. Select the template that you want to use to create a new document or template. You can change the default folder where templates are stored by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the folder that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box. If you change this setting, the Templates list on the New dialog box displays a list of the templates in the folder that you specified. Set as Default - Sets the selected template as the default for new documents. You can change the default setting by selecting another template in the list and clicking Set as Default.

64

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts See Also New Command (on page 64) Create a New Document (on page 64)

Open a Document Open a Document without Exiting the Software 1. On the Main toolbar, click Open

.

You also can click File > Open. 2. Select the folder containing the document you want to open. 3. Type the name of the document or select it from the list of documents. 4. On the Open dialog box, click Open.

Drag and Drop a Document 1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the document that you want. 2. Drag the document to the title bar at the top of the software window.      

Documents created using SmartSketch 1.0 or SmartSketch 2.0 are not supported in this version of the software. The bottom of the File menu displays the last four files you opened. In the Open dialog box, you can double-click the document name for the document to open the document. The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field. If you do not see the document you want to open, make sure the drive, folder, and type are correct. If you do not know the location of a document, you can look for the document. On the Windows Taskbar, click Start > Find.

See Also Open Command (on page 65) Open Dialog Box (on page 65)

Open Command Opens an existing document or template in a new window.

See Also Open a Document (on page 65) Open Dialog Box (on page 65)

Open Dialog Box Controls how a document is opened. When you position the pointer on this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, right click on a document, and click Select on the shortcut menu to automatically open a document. You can also perform other tasks like creating shortcuts and mailing your documents. The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field.

SmartSketch User's Guide

65

Understanding Document Concepts See Also Open Command (on page 65) Open a Document (on page 65)

Set Up a Drawing Sheet 1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want. If you want to set up a background sheet, click the Background tab and set the options you want. 



You can save the sheet setup as a default using Save Defaults on the Sheet Setup dialog box. The current settings will then be used as the default settings for any new drawing sheets you create in the document. You can set up options for an existing drawing sheet by double-clicking any sheet tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Sheet Setup Command Defines the properties of the working sheet. You can display and modify the following properties: the name, size, and scale used in the working sheet; and the properties of the working sheet margin. You can also select the background sheet you want to use. You can save settings only for the active working sheet. These settings can also be saved so that they are used when you add a new working sheet to the document. To display a working sheet, use Working Sheets. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Sheet Setup button on a toolbar.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Sheet Setup Dialog Box (on page 66)

Sheet Setup Dialog Box Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.

See Also New Sheet Command (on page 76) Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 66) Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 67) Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 67) Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information. Sheet size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet. Same as print setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print setup definition. For example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11.

66

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and height values. Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet. Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real- world object being described. Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world. Paper units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet. Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the size of non-scaled objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text height and line width. This setting does not affect dimension units. Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and inches, you can specify that you want to read and type values for text height in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of 0.00'-0.125") When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items appear on the printed document with the exact size that you specify. Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not change the numbers that you can type in the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole number. For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches, then the line length value is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches. If you set this control to 0.01 and you type a line length value of 3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.

See Also Change the Background Sheet (on page 79) Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) Defines the color, margin settings, and background sheet display information. Background sheet — Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for the working sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does not display any options. You must first create a background sheet before you can select it from the list. All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing the background sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working sheet to the values defined by the selected background sheet. Show background — Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected working sheet. Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.

See Also Create a Background Sheet (on page 78) Change the Background Sheet (on page 79) Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

67

Understanding Document Concepts Sheet name — Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this box to rename a drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu.

See Also Rename a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)

Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet 1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed. 3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not fit on the sheet. 4. Click File > Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size. 5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All dimensions appear in real-world units. If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document. If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use the File > Sheet Setup command.

See Also Sheet Setup Command (on page 66)

Most Recently Used Files Command Opens one of the documents that you worked on most recently. The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by clicking Tools > Options and selecting the General tab.

See Also Options Command (on page 464) General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465)

Set Document Properties 1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that you want, such as summary information or keywords. You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69)

68

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

View the Properties of a Document 1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, click the tab that contains the information you want to see. You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box. The Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. If the document has unsaved changes, you must save the document to update the property information.

See Also Display the Attribute Viewer (on page 410) Properties Dialog Box (on page 69)

Properties Command (File Menu) Retrieves general information about the current document. You can review and edit the following document information: the document summary, statistics, units, and Browser properties. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, you can review and edit the general, unit, behavior, and specific symbol properties for the document. This command is available only on the File menu.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68)

Properties Dialog Box Manages information about the properties of a document. You must save the document before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, the only tabs that appear are the General, Units, Browser, Symbols, and Behavior tabs.

See Also General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 71) Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72) Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72) Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 73) Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 71) Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72) Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 69) Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym extension. Insertion Type — Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type. Update — Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all.

SmartSketch User's Guide

69

Understanding Document Concepts Scale Factor — Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square when you drag it into the active document. Lock Scale — Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document. You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the symbol handles. Allow Rotation By Relationships — Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships. This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when it is dragged from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet. The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.

If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the underlined dimensional value.

When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.

70

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Nested Display — Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private. When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68) Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this document and click Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address in the Address box. Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home , the Symbol Explorer goes to the address that you type here. You can any address that you use in a web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer; for example, you can type http://www.smartsketch.com. If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at the symbols folder on your computer, you can type the full path to your symbols folder in the Address box. Each time you open this document and click Home in the Symbol Explorer, the symbol documents in the folder path you specified are displayed. Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set another folder for the Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog box to look in folders on your computer or a network drive.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68) General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document. If some of the following information is not available, the boxes display "Unknown." Filename — Displays the name of the document. Type — Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application used to create the document. Location — Displays the folder containing the document. Size — Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes. MS-DOS Name — Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a File Allocation Table file naming system. These types of documents have an eight-character name and three-character extension. Created — Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. Modified — Displays the date and time the document was last modified. Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Attributes — Displays the attributes of the current document. These settings are read-only. Read-Only — Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a read-only file for writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. Archive — Shows that the document is an archive document. Hidden — Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually cannot see this document in the Windows Explorer. System — Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the options in the Internet Explorer.

SmartSketch User's Guide

71

Understanding Document Concepts See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68) View the Properties of a Document (on page 69) Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document. The software automatically generates these properties when you create, save, or print the document. Created — Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. Creating Application — Displays the name of the application that created the document. Modified — Displays the date and time the document was last modified. Accessed — Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Last Saved By — Displays the name of the person who last saved the document. Saving Application — Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. Currently Opened By — Displays the name of the person who has the document open.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68) Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments for the current document. The software generates the author and template information when you create, save, or print the document. You can also edit these properties, with the exception of the template, unless the document is write-protected. Title — Specifies the title of the current document. Subject — Gives a general description of the current document. Author — Displays the name of the person who created the document. Keywords — Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. Comments — Specifies comments about the current document. Template — Displays the name of the document template that was used to create the document.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68)

Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym extension. Defines the symbol properties for a .sym document. With this tab, you can assign descriptive information that identifies the symbol. When you drag the symbol into a document, these values appear in the Attribute Viewer. For example, if you wanted to define a bill of materials, you can assign manufacturing information on this tab for a door symbol, place the symbol in a document, and then create a report that displays the manufacturing information.

72

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Name — Defines a property name. Type — Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can choose from Text, Number, Money, or Date. Value — Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer's name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value. Attributes — The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409) Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68) Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle values in a drawing. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to display. It sets the accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm. Length Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document. Angle Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document. Area Readout — Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document.

See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69) Set Document Properties (on page 68)

Managing Multi-Sheet Documents Drawing sheets are similar to pages in a notebook. You can place different sketches or drawings on different drawing sheets in the document. For example, you can draw one idea for a design on one drawing sheet and another idea on another drawing sheet, and then save both drawings in the same document. There is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

73

Understanding Document Concepts When you create a new document, a default sheet appears with a border and a title box. You can modify the default settings with Sheet Setup on the File menu. For example, you can give a specific name to a sheet by setting options with this command. If you want to insert new sheets, click New Sheet on the Insert menu.

Each sheet acts like a separate drawing and can have different scales and sheet borders. If you want to locate or use relationships between elements, you should place the elements on the same sheet. You can display a number of drawing sheets on top of each other and simultaneously view the drawings on all of the drawing sheets, much as you would view a stack of transparencies.

Areas of a Drawing Sheet A drawing sheet has two areas that affect the way you work - the sheet outline and the working sheet. The sheet outline (A) shows the orientation of the sheet and the default print region of the sheet. You can change the size and orientation of the sheet outline with Sheet Setup on the File menu.

You can draw new elements on the sheet outline or outside the borders of the outline. All new graphics that you create are placed on the active drawing sheet.

74

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts The sheet where you will create most of your graphics is called a working sheet. In a document, you can create as many working sheets as you need to plan your project. A working sheet can have a single background sheet attached to it.

Choosing a Sheet Size You can modify a drawing sheet's characteristics, such as the size and scale of the sheet, with Sheet Setup on the File menu. Sheet Setup also allows you to set the defaults for all new working sheets created in the document. You can do this by setting the options you want and then clicking Save as Default.

Drawing Sheet Scale Drawing sheets allow you to use a specified scale as you draw. When you specify the scale with Sheet Setup the File menu, everything on the drawing sheet is scaled except for dimensions and annotations. For example, if the scale is one inch to ten inches and you place a line 30 inches long, the line is three inches long in proportion to the drawing sheet and three inches long when printed. However, a dimension measures the length of the line as 30 inches. The dimension and annotation sizes in your working sheets are independent of the drawing view scale. For example, when you define the height and size of dimension text, these values specify how you want the dimensions to appear when you print the drawing. The graphics on the attached background sheet are displayed at a 1:1 scale. The scale set with Sheet Setup on the File menu does not affect them.

Manipulating Drawing Sheets At the bottom of the drawing sheet, you can see drawing sheet tabs that allow you to manipulate and display the drawing sheets in your document. When you open a document or create a new one, the tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in your document.

Attaching a Background Sheet After you set up the drawing sheet, you can attach a background sheet. A background sheet is used as a backdrop to the working sheet. For example, you can add borders to a drawing, draw a title block, insert a raster image, or draw geometry. You can make one background sheet and attach the same background sheet to several different drawing sheets.

When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet with the Sheet Setup command, the items on the background sheet are displayed and printed. The size of the working sheet is automatically set to the size of the background sheet you attach. This is so the paper sizes and graphics on both sheets line up.

SmartSketch User's Guide

75

Understanding Document Concepts Background sheets allow you to customize your borders and title blocks so that they match your company standards and requirements. You can use the background sheet delivered in a template or design your own background sheet. You can create tailor-made background sheets by adding your company logo, creating any other graphics that you need, and using various styles and options. A typical customization scheme would be to have a different background sheet for each standard-sized drawing (A, B, C, D; or A0, A1, A2, A3, A4).

Sheets and Document Templates You can re-use your sheets by creating and saving them in a document template. When you create a new document based on a template, all of the drawing sheets that are part of the template are copied into your new document.

See Also Activate a Drawing Sheet (on page 77) Move Sheet Border (on page 82) Create a Background Sheet (on page 78) Create a New Drawing Sheet (on page 76) Delete a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)

Create a New Drawing Sheet 

Click Insert > New Sheet, or right-click the sheet tab and click Insert. The new sheet is inserted after the active drawing sheet.

You can attach a background sheet to any drawing sheet using File > Sheet Setup. Click the Background tab on the Sheet Setup dialog box to find the background sheet settings.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

New Sheet Command Creates a new drawing sheet in the document using the default drawing sheet settings. You can change the default settings using Sheet Setup. You can create either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To create a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting New Sheet. To create a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting New Sheet. You can use the Tools >Customize command to place the Insert Sheet button on a toolbar.

See Also Change the Background Sheet (on page 79) Sheet Setup Dialog Box (on page 66)

76

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs On the current drawing sheet, click a scroll button next to the drawing sheet tabs. Clicking a scroll button displays the drawing sheet tabs so that you can access them easily and select a drawing sheet. Click the scroll buttons of the following picture to find out what each button does:

Clicking a scroll button does not display a different drawing sheet. If the document has only a few drawing sheets, the scroll buttons might not be available.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Activate a Drawing Sheet 

Click the tab of the drawing sheet you want to activate.



You can display an available shortcut menu by right-clicking while the pointer is over a drawing sheet tab. You can double-click any sheet tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.



See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets To display or manipulate a drawing sheet, you must click a drawing sheet tab. Drawing sheet tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in your document.

To select a drawing sheet 

Click a drawing sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed and the name of the drawing sheet appears in bold. This drawing sheet becomes the working sheet.

To select several drawing sheets 

Press and hold Ctrl and click one or more tabs.

To de-select several drawing sheets, press and hold Ctrl and click one or more current drawing sheet tabs.

To select a range of drawing sheets 

Click the first tab in the range, hold Shift, and then click the last tab in the range.

To clear the selection of all of the drawing sheets in a range, click any tab that is not part of the range.

To select all drawing sheets at once 

On the shortcut menu, click Select All Sheets.

SmartSketch User's Guide

77

Understanding Document Concepts To access this command, you must hold the pointer over one of the drawing sheet tabs and right-click. When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document.

To reorder sheets 

On the shortcut menu, click Reorder Sheets. From the Reorder Sheets dialog box, you can move a selected sheet up or down in the list to rearrange their display.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Working Sheets Command Displays all working sheets in a document. If a background sheet is attached to the working sheet, the graphics on the background sheet are displayed on the working sheet. When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet, the software automatically adjusts the size and the margin of the working sheet to match the size and margin of the background sheet. This command is available only on the View menu.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Activate a Drawing Sheet (on page 77) Create a New Drawing Sheet (on page 76)

Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu) Selects all the drawing sheets in the document. When you select all the sheets, all elements in the document are displayed at once, and the active sheet is displayed with bold characters. Only elements in the active sheet can be located. Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must move the pointer over a drawing sheet tab. You can also select multiple sheets by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking the sheets. This allows you to see data only on the desired sheets.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Create a Background Sheet 1. Click View > Background Sheets. 2. Click Insert > New Sheet. The background sheet is created using the default drawing sheet settings. 3. Click File > Sheet Setup. 4. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want. 5. On the new background sheet, draw any graphics, such as title blocks and borders, which you want to appear on your working sheets. 6. Click View > Working Sheets. 7. Click File > Sheet Setup. 8. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.

78

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts 9. Click the Background Sheet list box and select the name of the background sheet you just created to attach the new background sheet to the working sheet. 



You can double-click any sheet tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup. You can preview the background sheet by selecting the name of the background sheet from the Background Sheet list on the Working Sheets dialog box.

See Also Background Sheets Command (on page 79) New Sheet Command (on page 76)

Display Background Sheets 

Click View > Background Sheets.

See Also Background Sheets Command (on page 79) Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Change the Background Sheet 1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab. 3. Select a new background sheet from the list. If a background sheet has not been created, the list does not display any options.  

When you change the background sheet, the size and margins of your working sheet equal the settings of the selected background sheet. You can double-click any sheet tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Background Sheets Command Switches the view from a working sheet to the background sheet. When you set this toggle, all of the background sheets in the document are displayed as tabs at the bottom of window. All working sheet tabs are hidden. You can use a background sheet to draw graphics that you want to display on more than one drawing sheet. For example, you can draw borders and title blocks that contain your company logo, your name, and information about the drawings. This command is available only on the View menu. You can display background sheet graphics on any or all working sheets, using Sheet Setup.

See Also Display Background Sheets (on page 79) Change the Background Sheet (on page 79) Create a Background Sheet (on page 78)

SmartSketch User's Guide

79

Understanding Document Concepts

Rename a Drawing Sheet 1. On the drawing sheet, click the tab of the sheet you want to rename. 2. Click File > Sheet Setup. 3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name for the sheet you selected. You can also rename a drawing sheet using Rename on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu is available when you right-click on a sheet tab.

See Also Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 80)

Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) Renames a sheet. Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must move the pointer over a drawing sheet tab.

See Also Rename a Drawing Sheet (on page 80) Rename Dialog Box (on page 80)

Rename Dialog Box Renames a drawing sheet. New Name - Renames the active sheet when you type a new name.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Change the Background Sheet (on page 79)

Delete a Drawing Sheet 1. Click Edit > Delete Sheet. 2. Confirm the selection.  

You can also delete a drawing sheet using Delete on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu is available when you right-click on a sheet tab. Delete Sheet deletes the active drawing sheet and any drawing sheets whose drawing sheet tabs are selected.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

80

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

Delete Sheet Command Deletes the active drawing sheet and any other sheets whose tabs are selected. This command is available only on the Edit menu. You can delete either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To delete a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting Delete Sheet. To delete a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting Delete Sheet.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Delete a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)

Reorder Sheets 1. Click Edit > Reorder Sheets. 2. From the Reorder Sheets dialog box, select the sheet you want to move and click the appropriate Move Up/Down button. The sheets listed from top to bottom denote their left-to-right display in Smartsketch.

3. Click OK when you have finished. The sheets are now displayed in the new arrangement.  

Reordering sheets using this command does NOT change the print order of the sheets. You can also reorder drawing sheets using Reorder Sheets on the shortcut menu. You can get the shortcut menu by moving the pointer and right-clicking on the drawing sheet tab.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Reorder Sheets Dialog Box (on page 82)

SmartSketch User's Guide

81

Understanding Document Concepts

Reorder Sheets Command Rearranges the drawing sheet display. This command is available on the Edit menu and the drawing tab shortcut menu. Reordering sheets using this command does NOT change the print order of the sheets.

See Also Create a New Drawing Sheet (on page 76) Reorder Sheets Dialog Box (on page 82)

Reorder Sheets Dialog Box Rearranges drawing sheets in the SmartSketch display. The sheets listed from top to bottom denote their left-to-right display in Smartsketch. Move Up - moves the selected sheet up in the list. Move Down - moves the selected sheet down in the list.

See Also Reorder Sheets (on page 81) Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Move Sheet Border 1. Click File > Move Sheet Border. 2. Specify the options to move, scale, and select the paper size for the sheet.   

When you open a foreign data file and the software creates the graphic objects relative to their original X, Y positions, the objects often position off the existing sheet. Your changes to the sheet scale and size appear in the Sheet Setup dialog box. When you click the settings that you want on the Move Sheet Border dialog box, you can click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings apply to the active sheet. However, the settings are not final until you click OK.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Move Sheet Border Command Moves the active working sheet to reposition, scale, and select paper size. This command is available only on the File menu.

See Also Move Sheet Border (on page 82) Move Sheet Border Dialog Box (on page 83)

82

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

Move Sheet Border Dialog Box Allows you to reposition or scale a working sheet and selects paper size. When you click the settings that you want on this dialog box, you can click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings update the active sheet. However, the settings are not final until you click OK. Sheet Origin Location - Specifies the X and Y coordinates for the sheet origin. The sheet origin is the lower left corner of the drawing sheet. After setting these coordinates, click Apply. Interactive Move - Allows you to use the pointer to identify a location for the lower left corner of the sheet. Selecting this option automatically attaches the drawing sheet border to the pointer. Click once and the sheet is in the location that you want. You must click Apply for your changes to start. While you are moving the sheet border with the pointer, the Move Sheet Border dialog box is not displayed. It appears again after you click the pointer to complete the move. Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet. Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This ratio means that the representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real-world elements contained in the document. Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 1:2 ratio, the 1 represents the distance of the drawing sheet and the 2 represents the real-world distance. That is, every centimeter of paper is equal to two centimeters of real-world distance. Thus, the largest real-world element that you can represent on an 21.59 x 27.94 cm drawing sheet is 43.18 x 55.88 cm. When the first value is smaller than the second value, the sheet size is usually increased. When the first number is larger than the second number, the sheet size is usually reduced. Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world. Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet. Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the settings for the default system printer. For example, if the printer is set up as 27.94 x 43.18 cm paper, the drawing sheet size is set to 27.94 x 43.18 cm. Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered x and y values. Previous - Clears the last set of options that you applied to the drawing sheet.

See Also Move Sheet Border (on page 82) Change the Background Sheet (on page 79)

SmartSketch User's Guide

83

Understanding Document Concepts

Using Title Blocks The title block can include the information which enables the drawing to be intepreted, identified and archived. SmartSketch provides You can insert and modify title blocks for drawing documents in SmartSketch.

Title Block Properties Command Edits properties about the selected title block. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Title Block Properties button on a toolbar.

See Also Title Block Properties Dialog Box (on page 85)

Title Block Field Command Positions title block fields on the drawing. The command allows you to place drawing properties defined as title block information on the drawing. When you click Insert > Title Block Field, the Title Block Field ribbon appears in the toolbar area.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Title Block Field Ribbon (on page 84)

Title Block Field Ribbon Sets options for title block field placement on a drawing. You can access this ribbon when you click Insert > Title Block Field. Label Set - Specifies a property category. This list shows the categories of drawing properties available for the current drawing. The label set controls the fields listed in the Field dropdown list and the enabling of other options on the ribbon. Field - Lists the properties available in the selected Label Set. This is the information you are placing on the title block of the drawing. Display Label Names - Toggles between displaying the label name and the label value. More - Expands the ribbon to display more formatting options.

The options on the expanded ribbon include: Style - Lists and applies the available styles. Font - Lists and applies the available fonts. Font size - Applies a text size. Text Color - Sets the color of the font. Bold - Makes text bold. Italic - Italicizes text. Underline - Underlines text. Paragraph Alignment - Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area edges in edit mode.

84

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Border - Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to either display no border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow. Textbox Width - Sets the width of the text box. Textbox Height - Sets the height of the text box.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

Title Block Properties Dialog Box Views and edits properties about the selected title block.

See Also Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 85) Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86) Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86) Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 87) Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 87)

Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the title area of a drawing. Any information you add to this tab will overwrite the previously defined information in corresponding rows in the active drawing. Border - Specifies the border attribute that stores the name of border for the title block. This attribute also stores the dimensions of the border. ChargeNumber - Defines the charge number for the drawing. ChargeTitle - Describes the ChargeNumber box. The charge title text is placed to the left of the charge number. CompanyName - Specifies the name of the company for which the project is designed. Desc1 - Describes the drawing. This description is the first of four lines of text used to describe the drawing. Desc2 - Describes the drawing. This description is the second of four lines of text used to describe the drawing. Desc3 - Describes the drawing. This description is the third of four lines of text used to describe the drawing. Desc4 - Describes the drawing. This description is the fourth of four lines of text used to describe the drawing. DivisionLocation - Specifies the location of the division for which the project is designed. DivisionName - Specifies the name of the division for which this project is designed. DrawingNumber - Displays the unique identifier for the drawing. DrawingSize - Defines a standard note value for the border size. DrawingType - Defines the three-letter code to identify the type of drawing. For example, the type can be DGN. JobNumber - Defines the unique identifier assigned to a capital project or job. NoteLine - Specifies text for a miscellaneous note line. PlantName - Specifies the name of the plant or project for which the drawing is designed. ProjectVersion - Defines the number and letter sequence that identifies a particular generation of a document that was created since the last approved revision. RevisionNumbers - Defines the number of the current revision for this drawing.

SmartSketch User's Guide

85

Understanding Document Concepts Sheet - Defines the number of the page and the total number of pages that are associated with this one. For example, the value might be 3 of 5. SiteLocation - Specifies the site location for which the drawing is designed. SiteName - Specifies the name of the site where the plant is being constructed. Title1 - Specifies text for the first miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the area shown on the drawing. Title2 - Specifies text for the second miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the type of drawing. Title3 - Specifies text for the third miscellaneous title.

Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the signature area of drawings. ApprovedBy - Specifies the name of the person responsible for approving the drawing. ApprovedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was approved. CheckedBy - Specifies the name of the person responsible for checking the drawing. CheckedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was checked. DesignedBy - Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on the drawing. DesignedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was designed. Drawing Status - Defines the status code for the drawing. DrawnBy - Specifies the name of the person who drew the drawing, or created it. DrawnDate - Specifies the date the drawing was drawn or created. ExtraSignBy1 - Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing. ExtraSignBy2 - Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing. ExtraSignDate1 - Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name appears on this line. ExtraSignDate2 - Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name appears on this line. ExtraSignTitle1 - Defines the title of the person whose name appears on this line. ExtraSign Title2 - Defines the title of the person whose name appears on this line. MfgRepDate - Specifies the date that the manufacturing representative initials the drawing. MfgRepName - Specifies the name of the manufacturing representative who signed the drawing. PlantNumber - Defines the plant number. ProjEngineerDate - Specifies the date the project engineer initials the drawing. ProjEngineer ame - Specifies the name of the person who is the project engineer for the project using the drawing. SpecBy - Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on this drawing. SpecDate - Specifies the date this drawing was specified or designed.

Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) Specifies issue information. The combination of the IssueNo and IssuedRevision fields constitute a unique identifier for the Issue record and cannot be duplicated. A document can

86

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts contain any number of issue records. To delete an issue record, double-click that row and press Delete. If you add Issue data to a document and subsequently publish that document, the existing Issue data is deleted from the document and lost. IssueNo - Displays the issue number for the drawing. IssuedRevision - Displays the issue revision for the drawing. MaterialOrJobSpec - Identifies the job specification for the issued document. IssueDate - Shows the date issued. IssueReason - Shows the reason the document was issued.

Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) Sets properties for handling revisions. The Revision tab is always read-write. MajorRev_ForRevise - Specifies the major revision number for the drawing. For example, you can enter 1. MinorRev_ForRevise - Specifies the minor revision number for the document. For example, you can enter a. Version - Specifies the letter of the current revision. RevisedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who made the revisions. RevDate - Specifies the date of the revision. CheckedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who checked the revisions. CheckDate - Specifies the date the revisions were checked. ApprovedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who approved the revisions. ApprovedDate - Specifies the date the revisions were approved. RevisionDescription - Describes briefly the scope of the revisions.

Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) Sets notes for the item. ParentNotes - Type notes for the currently selected document. Notes - Type any additional notes for the currently selected document. The following graphics demonstrate how parent notes and notes work. The first graphic shows how notes can be added at different levels of the hierarchy. The Notes tab shows ParentNotes and Notes that have been entered for a particular document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

87

Understanding Document Concepts When the document is updated and displayed, the Note Region of the template contains the specified information.

Drawing Diagrams You can create diagrams quickly and easily with the software. To do this, you can use the following tools:  Templates  Symbols  Connectors  Annotations You can learn how to draw a diagram with a tutorial in the Learning Center. Click the Help menu and then click Learning Center.

Templates When you first open the software, you can select a template based on the industry solution that you need. The best templates to select for drawing diagrams are in the Process template folder. For example, you can select the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template.

88

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts When you open the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template, the Schematic toolbar automatically displays the buttons that you would need most often to create a diagram. These commands include Connector, Grid Display, Grid Snap, Text Box, and others. To use the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template, you must install the Process Solutions option. You can still draw lines, circles, and so forth with buttons on the Draw toolbar. To display the Draw toolbar, you can click Toolbars on the View menu.

Connectors Connector on the Schematic toolbar allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space. There are special connector styles that you can use in the diagram. Some examples in the Process Flow template include Primary Line, Secondary Line, and Electric Signal. On the Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box.

On the Connector ribbon, you can also select the line start and line end terminators that you want. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can apply.

Symbols The template automatically displays the symbols that you need for a diagram in the Symbol Explorer. For example, the Process Flow template offers you many kinds of symbols to include pumps, compressors, heat exchangers, and others.

To place these symbols, you can drag them from the Symbol Explorer into the document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

89

Understanding Document Concepts You can manipulate symbols with special handles that appear when you select the symbol. Some symbols have several different kinds of handles:

Black boxes on the outside corners of the range box lines represent scale handles (A). You can drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol. Yellow boxes in the middle of the range box lines represent standard parametric handles (B). You can drag a parametric handle to resize part of the symbol. A green plus sign represents a mirror handle (C). You can drag a mirror handle to create a copy of the symbol directly horizontal or vertical to the original symbol. A large green circle represents a rotate handle (D). You can drag this handle to rotate the entire symbol. Specific increments are displayed by the pointer while you rotate the symbol. A series of small green circles represents drag points (E). You can use these points to attach the symbol at a precise point to another symbol or element. A small green lock represents a lock handle (F). You can click the lock handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol was associated. A lock handle appears only if you drag the symbol to an element with one of the drag points on the symbol.

Text and Labels You can also drag labels from the Symbol Explorer. For example, the Process Flow template offers a collection of SmartLabels in the \PFD folder. Some SmartLabels display a question mark in the Symbol Explorer. You can also double-click on some SmartLabels and edit the text.

90

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts SmartLabels can assume the attributes of the element or symbol that you drag the SmartLabel to. You can edit the attributes of the SmartLabel in the Attribute Viewer.

If you want to quickly add text that is associated to an element, you can double-click any element in the diagram. A text label appears in the center or below the element. When you type in text and press Enter, the text label orients itself with the element. When you move the element,the text label moves with it. To add text that is not associated with an element, you can click Text Box on the Schematic toolbar.

Grids You can use a grid view and grid snap to place the items in your diagram at precise intervals. You can view the grid by clicking Grid Display on the View menu. When you select Grid Snap on the View menu, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.

Reports The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when you add symbols to a document. The reports work with symbols that have specific attributes assigned to them. You must have Microsoft® Excel™ 97 or later installed on your computer. The software includes several example reports.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Placing Symbols (on page 392) Creating Symbols (on page 381)

Saving and Printing Documents To keep your work for future use, you must give the document a name and save it. After you save it, the document is available each time you want to use it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

91

Understanding Document Concepts It's best to name and save a document soon after you start working on it. After that, it's a good idea to frequently save drawings or diagrams as you work. You should also be sure to save any template files that you change. You can print your drawings by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.

Saving Documents When you first save a new document, the software provides a default name and directory location. You can give the document a meaningful name and specify where you want to store the document. When you open an existing document, the software copies the document from its stored location and displays it on the screen. As you work, the changes you make to the document are displayed on your screen. To preserve these changes, you must again save the document. You can quickly save changes to an open document by clicking Save on the Main toolbar. After you save a document, it remains displayed on the screen. You can use Close to close the document and clear it from your screen, or you can use Exit to close the document and exit the software.

Saving a Copy If you need to make a copy of your work, click Save As on the File menu and type a different name for the document in the Save As dialog box. You can also save a document into other formats such as AutoCAD or MicroStation.

Closing a Document If you want to close a document without saving your work, click Close on the File menu and then, when prompted to save your work, click No. If you do want to save your work, click Yes. If you decide not to close the document at all, click Cancel.

Saving a Document Automatically You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more documents open. If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install it by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu.

Saving Documents to a Previous SmartSketch Version If you want to share drawings you create with users still using the previous version of SmartSketch, you can do so with the Save As command. Click Save As on the File menu and select SmartSketch 5.x in the Save as type list.   

92

In order to save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the software, you must do one of the following: Delete the SmartFrame that references the unavailable linked file. Make the link available by restoring it to its original location, or place the linked file in the same location as the file that references the link.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Sending a Document to Others After you finish drawing a sketch or adding notes to it, you can send the document to other users by clicking Send on the File menu. An e-mail message appears, allowing you to attach the drawing to the message. You can also embed or link the drawing to a Word document and send the document in e-mail to other users.

See Also Close Command (on page 99) Save a Document (on page 93)

Save a Document If you save a document that has not previously been saved, the software automatically prompts you to indicate if you want to save the changes.

To save the active document 1. Click File > Save. 2. If you have made changes after the document was last saved or if you have never saved the active document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of the following:  If you do not want to save your changes, click No.  If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name, and specify a folder and format to save it to.  If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.

To save a document to the previous version 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click File > Save As. Select the drive and folder for the new document. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document. In the Save As Type box, select SmartSketch 5.x (*.igr) so it can be shared with users still using the previous version of SmartSketch.



If you open a .sha file in SmartSketch, the software will not allow you to save it to a previous version.

To save a document in a different format 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click File > Save As. Select the drive and folder for the new document. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document. In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use.



If the active document is read-only, you can save changes only by saving the document with a new name. To save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the software (SmartSketch 5.x), you must do one of the following:  Delete the SmartFrame that references the unavailable linked file.



SmartSketch User's Guide

93

Understanding Document Concepts 

Make the link available by restoring it to its original location, or place the linked file in the same location as the file that references the link.

See Also Save As Command (on page 94) Save as Template Command (on page 143)

Save Command Saves the active document with its currently defined name, folder, and format. If you are saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a folder and format to save it to.

See Also Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

Save As Command Saves the active document to a new name, folder, and format. This command is available only on the File menu.

See Also Save a Document (on page 93) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94) Save As Dialog Box Specifies the name, location, and format of a document when you save it. The MicroStation and AutoCAD file types displayed in the Save as type list are set in the Foreign Data export options. After you install SmartSketch, only the latest version of a supported foreign file format displays. To change the version or select multiple versions, go to Tools > Options > Foreign Data > Export Options. For more information see the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467). To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the question mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box, and then click the control that you want information about. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts; send the document somewhere else, and other activities.

Saving a Document Automatically You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more documents open. If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, click Tools > Add-Ins. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, click the AutoSave check box and then click OK.

See Also Installing Additional Tools (on page 478) AutoSave Command (on page 95) AutoSave Dialog Box (on page 95)

94

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Set AutoSave Options You must install the AutoSave add-in using Add-Ins on the Tools menu before you set AutoSave options. 1. Click Tools > AutoSave. 2. Select the options you want from the AutoSave dialog box. 3. Click OK.

See Also AutoSave Command (on page 95) AutoSave Dialog Box (on page 95)

AutoSave Command Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. The AutoSave command is delivered as a default add-in. If you do not see AutoSave on the Tools menu, the AutoSave add-in is not been installed. To install the add-in, click Tools > Add-Ins. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, click the AutoSave check box and then click OK.

See Also Installing Additional Tools (on page 478)

AutoSave Dialog Box Save automatically every __ minutes - Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. Prompt Before Saving - Displays a dialog box whenever AutoSave begins saving documents. You can click one of the following buttons to answer the dialog box question: "Save changes in ?" Save backup - Saves a backup of the active document. Save active document only - Saves only the active document. Save all open documents - Saves all documents that are open. The Save As dialog box appears if the document has not yet been saved.

See Also AutoSave Command (on page 95)

Save a Document as a PDF File 1. Click File > Save as PDF. 2. On the Save as PDF dialog box, specify the options that you want. 3. Click OK.

See Also Save as PDF Dialog Box (on page 96) Save as PDF Command (on page 96)

SmartSketch User's Guide

95

Understanding Document Concepts Save as PDF Command Saves the current file as a PDF document. You can control such options as the resolution of the PDF file as well as the compression for embedded images. If you are saving a multi-sheet document, you can specify which sheets to save and whether or not to create bookmarks for each sheet. This command is available only on the File menu. If you are using a 64-bit version of Windows 7 or Windows XP, special settings are needed to save a file to PDF. For more information, see Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter for 64-bit Windows.

See Also Save a Document as a PDF File (on page 95) Save as PDF Dialog Box Converts the active drawing to a PDF document. Sheets - Displays options for specifying which sheets will be converted to PDF. With multi-sheet documents, you can specify that all sheets are converted or you can specify that only certain sheets are converted. Create bookmarks - Creates a bookmark for each sheet added to the PDF file. Resolution - Modifies the dots per inch, or "dpi". The greater the dpi, the better the clarity. Increasing the resolution setting increases the file size and can slightly increase the time required to process some files. Color - Creates a PDF using the colors available in the document. You can only create a color PDF from a color drawing sheet. Grayscale - Creates a PDF using a 256-color grayscale. Pure black and white - Creates a PDF that has no color or grayscale. Anything that is not pure white is drawn as black. JPEG compression - Compresses images embedded in your document according to the compression level you define. If your drawing contains a lot of images, compression settings are very important for achieving good image quality at a manageable file size. Use the pull-down menu to set the compression level. Compression levels in the High quality range do not noticeably affect image quality, and produce larger file sizes than settings in the Low quality range. However, using a mid-range compression level usually strikes the best balance in creating a compact file while still maintaining enough information to product high-quality images.

See Also Save as PDF Command (on page 96) Save a Document as a PDF File (on page 95)

Save as Image 1. Click File > Save as Image. 2. In the Save as Image dialog box, define the file format and resolution for the image. 3. To modify the compression factor for the selected file type, move the Compression factor slider to the left or right. 4. To define a specific area of the sheet to save as an image, click Define sheet area to save as image. 5. To force the new image file to be linked to a new SmartFrame on a new sheet, click Place image on new sheet. 6. To create the new image, click OK.

96

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts If you clicked Define sheet area to save as image, click and drag to define the area of the sheet that you want to save as an image. 7. Use the options in the Save As dialog box to provide the name and location of the newly created image file. 8. Click Save to store the new image file. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Save As Command (on page 94) Save as Image Command (on page 97) Save as Image Dialog Box (on page 97)

Save as Image Command Saves the graphic data on the sheet as a raster image and, optionally, links the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet. The Save as Image command is useful in preparing a sheet for plotting. This command is available only on the File menu. The new sheet has the same properties as the sheet that you converted to a raster image. You can define an area of the sheet to convert to an image, instead of using the default sheet area, by clicking Define Area and specifying the area to include in the raster image by defining two points. Define two points by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor to the second corner point. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Save as Image (on page 96) Save as Image Dialog Box (on page 97)

Save as Image Dialog Box Saves a snapshot of the graphic data on the active sheet as a raster file and allows you to link the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet. File Format - Allows you to specify the graphic file type for the new image. If you select JPEG as the file format, you can also customize the compression factor, also called Q-factor, using the Compression factor slider or the Value box. Resolution - Allows you to modify the default resolution for the new graphic. The default value is 400 dpi if the default units are not metric. If you set the units of measure to metric, the default units for the resolution are pixels per centimeter (DPCM). Compression - Allows you to specify the compression type for the image. Compression types vary based on the file format you select. Compression Factor - Allows you to specify the quality of compression versus file size for the image. The compression factor for an image is also referred to as the Q-factor. To change the compression factor, move the slider to the left to increase the file size and decrease compression. To create a smaller, lower quality image, move the slider to the right. A compression factor of 30 for JFIF and TIFF JPEG images provides optimal balance between quality and compression. For Intergraph JPEG images, a compression factor of 15 provides the optimal balance between quality and compression. Value - Specifies a numeric value for the compression factor of the image. As you move the Compression Factor slider, the value in the Value box changes. Define sheet area to save as image - Allows you to define the area of the sheet to be saved as an image. Select two points to define the area by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor

SmartSketch User's Guide

97

Understanding Document Concepts to the second corner point. If this option is not selected, the software saves the current sheet as an image. Place image on new sheet - Creates a new SmartFrame and links the new image file to the new SmartFrame when the image is created. The software places the SmartFrame on a newly created sheet. The size of the new sheet is the same as the source sheet unless you rotate the output, in which case the size of the new sheet is B x A, where the size of the source is A x B. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Save as Image (on page 96)

Send a Document to Others 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Open the document you want to send. Click File > Send. Select the recipients using your electronic mail application's dialog box. Type the subject and the accompanying message. Send the message with the document attached.

Send Command Activates your electronic mail application so you can send a mail message with the active document attached. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Send button on a toolbar.

See Also Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472)

Close a Document 1. Click File > Close. 2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of the following:  If you do not want to save your changes, click No.  If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.  If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.

See Also Close Command (on page 99) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

98

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

Close a Document Without Saving Changes Any changes not saved when you close a document or exit are lost and cannot be recovered. If you want to close the document without saving any changes, select the No button on the Close dialog box. When you open the document again, it will revert to the state when the last save was performed.

See Also Close Command (on page 99) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

Close Command Closes the active document. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Close command on a toolbar.

See Also Exit Command (File Menu) (on page 99) Close a Document (on page 98)

Exit Command (File Menu) Closes all open documents and exits the software. If you have made changes after the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a folder and format to save it to. This command is not available on the shortcut menu.

See Also Close a Document (on page 98) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

Printing Documents You can print your documents on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to high-end laser printers. Except for the color settings and a few special effects your drawing prints exactly as it appears on the drawing sheet.

Preparing to Print The printer you use affects the way the current document prints and displays text on the screen. Before you print a document, you must install and select the printer that you want to use. For more information about installation, see your printer documentation.

SmartSketch User's Guide

99

Understanding Document Concepts Before you print, you will want to choose a printer and the settings for it. To do this, click Print on the File menu and then click the printer that you want to use. You can set properties for the printer by clicking Properties. To set the print range and scale, click Settings.

Printing a Document As you work on a document, you might need to send a copy of it to a specified printer, plotter, or file. You can click Print on the File menu to do the following:  Print an entire document or specific sheets from a document.  Print a draft copy of a document.  Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. The software supports WSYWIG plotting, using standard Windows® plotting capabilities. The software also supports pen plotters, subject to the limitations of the device driver. Elements appear the same on the screen and in the printed document.  However, the fonts that you choose can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts, printer fonts, and screen fonts. Use scalable fonts, such as TrueType® fonts, to confirm that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. If you use printer fonts, you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font, the screen display of the document will closely match the printed document.

Printing Part of a Document You can print selected sheets in a document or a selected area. This practice is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. To print selected sheets, first select sheets in the document to make them active. To do this, you can click the drawing sheet tabs of the sheets that you want while pressing Ctrl. Then, you select Print on the File menu and click Selected Sheets on the dialog box. When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document. To print a selected area, you should first select the drawing sheets that you want to print. Then, you select Print on the File menu and click Print Area on the dialog box. After you click OK, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag over the area that you want to print. The Print Area dialog box then automatically appears and allows you to set options for printing the selected area.

Printing Time Required time for printing varies by document. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items:  Curved elements  Many fills that have complex colors, patterns, or textures  Large bitmaps  Links to various documents The type of printer that you have also affects the printing time. PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers because they can calculate faster. Some older versions of PostScript printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times.

100

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts See Also Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet (on page 102) Print to a File (on page 103) Print Several Documents Simultaneously (on page 103)

Print a Document Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the printer you will use before you begin working on a document. Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer you will use to print the document. For more information about how to install a printer, see the printer's documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click Print on the File menu and then click Properties. 1. Click File > Print. You can also click Print on the Main toolbar. 2. On the Print dialog box, in the Name box, select the printer you want to use. 3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want. 4. In the Print range box, specify the range of pages you want to print.  



You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. It is a good idea to save your document before you print it. This way, if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed after the last time you saved the document. You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.

See Also Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet (on page 102) Print to a File (on page 103) Print Several Documents Simultaneously (on page 103)

Set Printing Options 1. On the Main toolbar, click Print 2. Do one of the following:

.

To print

Do this

A selected area of a sheet

Under Print Range, click Print Area and then click OK. A set of crosshairs appears that you can drag to define the area. The Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set options for printing the area.

A range of continuous sheets

In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper.

SmartSketch User's Guide

101

Understanding Document Concepts

  

Non–continuous sheets

In the Sheets box, type the sheet numbers, separated by commas. For example, to print pages 1 and 6, type 1,6.

Selected sheets

In the document, select the sheets you want to print; then, on the Print dialog box, click Selected Sheets. This prints the selected sheets as a composite drawing, like layers on a single sheet of paper. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document.

An entire document

Click All Sheets. This is recommended only when all the sheets have the same orientation and paper size.

Multiple copies of the entire document

In the Number of Copies box, type or select a number of copies. To sort the sheets by sheet number, select the Collate Copies check box.

When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation. Click File > Sheet Setup to specify the drawing sheet size and scale.

See Also Print to a File (on page 103) Print a Document (on page 101) Print Several Documents Simultaneously (on page 103)

Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet Because the available fonts on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the printer to use before you begin working on a document. Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer to print the document. For more information about installing a printer, see the printer documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click Print on the File menu, and then click Properties. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

On the Main toolbar, click Print . On the Print dialog box in the Name box, select the printer you want to use. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want. In the Print Range box, click Print Area and click OK. When a set of crosshairs appears, drag them to define the area that you want to print. On the Print Area dialog box, set the options to print the area that you selected.



You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation. When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets print as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The



102

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts

 



software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document. Click Sheet Setup on the File menu to specify the drawing sheet size and scale. Saving your document before you print it is a good idea. This way, if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed after the last time you saved the document. You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Printing Documents (on page 99)

Print Several Documents Simultaneously The command line that you type to print several documents simultaneously uses the options that you set in the software, except for printer selection and the number of copies. Before you begin, review the options on the Print dialog box. On that dialog box, click Settings to review the options on the Settings dialog box. 1. Open a Command Prompt window.  Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.  Click Start > Run. In the Open box, type command and then click OK. 2. In the Command Prompt window, type a command line with the following syntax: smartsketch.exe/p/q/c Example: /p /q \\print1\laserjet /c2 “c:\temp\first file.igr” c:\temp\second_file.igr  

Spaces separate the document paths. If the printer name or filename contains a space, you must use double quotes. Press ENTER to print the document.

See Also Printing Documents (on page 99)

Print to a File 1. 2. 3. 4.

On the Main toolbar, click Print . On the Print dialog box, set Print to file. Click OK. On the Print to file dialog box, type the name of the file and select the folder to print to.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Print a Document (on page 101)

SmartSketch User's Guide

103

Understanding Document Concepts Print Command Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing characteristics. Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer, see the Windows documentation.

See Also Print to a File (on page 103) Print a Document (on page 101) Print Dialog Box (on page 104) Print Dialog Box Controls the way a document prints. Name — Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the configured printers available for printing. Properties — Accesses the Printer Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 105). Status — Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is read-only. Type — Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only. Where — Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected printer. This area is read-only. Comment — Displays any comments you input during printer configuration. This area is read-only. Print to file — Prints the document to a file, instead of a printer. You specify the file's name on the Print to file dialog box after you set the check box and click OK on the Print dialog box. This saves a document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer or plotter. Then, you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have installed. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts; send the document somewhere else, and other activities. Print Range — Displays options for selecting the print range. All Sheets — Prints all drawing sheets in the active document. Selected Sheets — Prints all the sheets that you selected as a composite document, as layers all on one sheet of paper. Sheets — Specifies the range of pages that you want to print. You can type the starting page you want to print as the "From" value and the ending page you want to print as the "To" value. In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper. Print Area — Accesses the Print Area dialog box. When you click this option and then click OK on the dialog box, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag the crosshairs to define the area that you want to print. Then, the Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set various options for printing the area that you selected. Copies — Sets options for the number of copies you want to print. Number Of Copies — Specifies the number of copies you want to print.

104

SmartSketch User's Guide

Understanding Document Concepts Collate — Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies. Pure Black and White — Prints a black and white document. Settings — Accesses the Settings dialog box.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Print a Document (on page 101) Print to a File (on page 103) Printer Document Properties Dialog Box Sets properties for the current printer that you selected on the Print dialog box. The settings available on this dialog box depend on the type of printer that you selected. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts; send the document somewhere else, and other activities. To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Print a Document (on page 101) Print Area Dialog Box Specifies the area that you want to print. Scale — Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document. Best Fit — Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. Manual Scale — Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the design length to 1. If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values. Paper Length — Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print. Design Length — Specifies a design length. Origin — Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper. Center — Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. X origin — Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin. Y origin — Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin. Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper. XY Range — Clears the previous defined print area and prompts you to define a new print area.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet (on page 102)

SmartSketch User's Guide

105

Understanding Document Concepts

Settings Dialog Box Controls the print area of a selected sheet. Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document. Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the design length to 1. If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values. Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print. Design Length - Specifies a design length. Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper. Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. X origin - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin. Y origin - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin. Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper. If you click Manual Scale and type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes change to reflect the values.

See Also Print Command (on page 104) Print Dialog Box (on page 104) Print a Document (on page 101)

106

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 4

SmartSketch Templates Templates are used as a starting point in creating a document. A template is a file that provides tools such as text, formats, geometry, dimensions, units of measurement, toolbars, and styles that are used to produce a new document that uses a specified format. You can either use one of the pre-defined templates SmartSketch provides or you can create your own. SmartSketch Industry-Specific Templates SmartSketch provides an extensive selection of templates on which you can base your documents. The template that you use depends on the type of information you want to put in the document. For example, if you want to create a drawing that contains a schematic of an electrical component, you can use an electrical schematic template. When you select a specific template, tools are available that allow you to create either a schematic diagram or a precision drawing.  Schematic diagrams are primarily created using symbols, connectors, and text at a 1:1 scale. Schematic diagrams do not represent a logical flow. The Schematic toolbar is available when you select a template designed to create a schematic diagram.  Precision drawings represent physical elements such as lines, arcs, curves, and rectangles that you draw precisely with the Draw toolbar. Precision drawings are created at real-world scale, and you can maintain relationships between elements in precision drawings. Additionally, when you base a document on a particular template, that template automatically points to the symbols that you would most likely use for that type of document. The Symbol Explorer displays the appropriate symbol set for the task. To base new documents on a template, choose New on the File menu and select the template from the list. You can also open the template and save the document under another name. Custom SmartSketch Templates If you find it necessary to use the same document settings over and over in different drawings, you can create customized templates. Document settings might include such options as drawing sheet settings, scales, actual elements that you draw, and a background sheet. To save a document as a template, use Save As Template on the File menu. By default, the software saves templates in the Template directory located in the directory where you installed the software. You can, however, save your template to a UNC path. A different file extension in the name of the document is not necessary. To preserve the data integrity of your custom template files from one software version to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that you open all your custom template files and save them to new file format.

See Also Create a Template (on page 143)

SmartSketch User's Guide

107

SmartSketch Templates

AEC Templates The AEC templates are precision templates designed according to accepted industry standards. The templates have imperial units in feet and inches, as well as metric units in meters and centimeters. AEC templates include:  ANSI, Architectural, and ISO standard sheet sizes and borders  Architectural fill styles The AEC template symbols are based on AIA, ASHRAE, and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs. The AEC templates also provide ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards. You must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option before you can use the AEC templates.

See Also Architectural Templates (on page 108) HVAC Templates (on page 110) Landscape Templates (on page 111)

Architectural Templates You use these precision templates to produce architectural designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards.  Architectural (Imperial)—This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.  Architectural (Metric)—This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

Production Drafting Workflow for Floor Plans You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. Set up the sheet .  Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. Select a border or create one.  The Architectural templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders from Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.



108

The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). From the View tab on the Options dialog box, set the grid settings to Grid style to Static, Grid spacing to 1, and Grid index to 1.

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Workflow A: Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline and SmartSketch. Use Trim, Trim to Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup between elements where walls overlap or do not intersect cleanly. Workflow B: Verify on the Tools menu that Maintain Relationships is set on. Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline, SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Then adjust the distance between walls (doubleline graphics) using Select Tool on the Draw toolbar to make precision distances with PinPoint. Use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup between elements.  Short cut keys F9 and F12 for PinPoint are useful when you draw walls.  Avoid trimming for openings, doors, or windows.  Press and hold Shift while using Place Doubleline; this action prevents a beginning or end cap from being placed. (Pressing and holding Shift while using Place Doubleline is useful for tracing.) Draw the interior walls.  Using the same techniques and commands you used to draw the perimeter walls, add the appropriate interior walls and adjust accordingly. Place door and window symbols.  Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Doors folder from the Plan Symbols folder in the tree view. Drag the door symbols onto the represented wall elements, and use the bold parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the door and the handles that appear to orient the door to the position you want. Repeat the same steps you used to place doors for placing windows and all other types of symbols. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Annotate the drawing. Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label windows and doors, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. Or use labels provided in the Label directory in the Plan Symbols directory. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content

Description

Elevation Symbols

Symbols of typical elevation view content based on AIA standards and other common designs.

Plan Symbols

Symbols of typical plan view content based on AIA standards and other common designs. Some symbols such as doors and windows can be modified by parameters that appear when the symbols are placed.

You must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option before you can use the Architectural templates.

SmartSketch User's Guide

109

SmartSketch Templates See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

HVAC Templates You use these precision templates to produce HVAC designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards.  HVAC (Imperial)—This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.  HVAC (Metric)—This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.  The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

Production Drafting Workflow for Double Line Duct Layout You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. 1. Set up the sheet - Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. 2. Reference a floor plan or open one - Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click File on the Open menu to open (translate) the file. 3. Place duct symbols - Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Double Line Duct folder from the HVAC folder in the tree view. Drag the duct symbols over the reference file, connecting one to another. Use the bold parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the duct.  

You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 4. Annotate the drawing - Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label double line ducts, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. 5. Select a border or create one -The HVAC templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.

110

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content

Description

HVAC (Intergraph)

HVAC symbols designed to best fit Double Line Duct and Single Line Duct Layout workflows. Several of these symbols are designed with special behaviors and parametric properties.

HVAC (ASHRAE)

HVAC symbols designed to ASHRAE standards.

To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Create a Template (on page 143)

Landscape Templates Use these precision templates to produce landscape designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards.  Landscape (Imperial)—This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.  Landscape (Metric)—This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

Production Drafting Workflow for Landscape Designs You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. Set up the sheet.  Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale for the design. The default scale is ¼ inches = 1 foot, which is appropriate for the average plan on a D Size sheet. Reference a floor plan or open one.  Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or use Open on the File menu to open (translate) the file. Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file. Create a foot print.  If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw tool bar, you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off.

SmartSketch User's Guide

111

SmartSketch Templates Place symbols.  Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: a. Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. b. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Annotate the drawing  Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label landscape symbols, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. Select a border or create one.  The Landscape templates are delivered with ten border sizes.  Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet.  Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content

Description

Elevations Symbols Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation symbols for commercial and residential Landscape design. Plan Symbols

Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols for commercial and residential Landscape design.

To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Site Templates You use these precision templates to produce site designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards.  Site (Imperial)—This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.  Site (Metric)—This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

112

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Production Drafting Workflow for Site Designs You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. Reference a floor plan or open one.  Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click the Open command to open (translate) the file. Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file. Create a foot print.  If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw toolbar, you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off. Place symbols.  Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: a. Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. b. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Annotate the drawing.  Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label site symbols, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. Select a border or create one.  The Site templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content

Description

Elevations Symbols

Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation symbols for commercial and residential Site design.

Plan Symbols

Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols for commercial and residential Site design.

To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

113

SmartSketch Templates See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Electrical Diagramming Templates This collection of industry-specific templates (both Imperial and Metric) includes task-specific toolbars and industry-standard symbols that allow you to quickly and easily create sophisticated electrical schematics. Using simple drag-and-drop methods, you can easily position electrical components into their appropriate locations on the drawing sheet. With intelligent routing - the Connector command – you can connect components at each symbol's connect points, or you can drag-and-drop components onto the connectors you've already placed. Many inline components such as resistors, batteries, capacitors, diodes, and switches auto-align and glue when dropped onto a connector. Drawing annotation is easy: simply double-click a component or connector, then type the text. Many symbols (such as resistors, batteries, and capacitors) have predefined SmartLabels that can be edited with a double-click selection. There is also an annotation symbol directory with drag- and-drop auto-sizing text boxes. The Control Loop Diagram template includes more than 200 control loop-specific symbols. The symbols are grouped into logical categories and include Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters. To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Solutions (on page 25) option.

See Also Control Loop Templates (on page 114) Electrical Templates (on page 115) Create a Template (on page 143)

Control Loop Templates You use this schematic template to produce control loop diagrams using Intergraph supplied symbols according to accepted industry standards.  Imperial Template—This template defaults to a B size sheet. The sheet background consists of two sections divided into two categories. The main sections are Field and I/O Building.  The Field section is divided into Instrument and Junction Box categories.  The I/O Building is divided into Termination Rack and I/O Cabinet categories. If you need a different configuration for the background, click Background Sheets on the View menu, and select a sheet and modify as needed. Then click Working Sheets on the View menu. The working sheet displays the changes that were made in the background sheet.

Control Loop Workflow You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet size is B with a scale of 1:1.

114

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Place your symbols. 1. The Symbol Explorer defaults to the Control Loop symbol set. The set is divided into logical components such as controllers, recorder, terminal strips, transmitters and others. Select a component and drag it to the location you want. A typical configuration might be as follows: Field—Instrument—Thermocouple, Junction Box- 3 Wire Terminal Strip; I/O Building—Termination Rack—3 Wire Terminal Strip w/ground and I/O Cabinet—Electrical Recorder. 2. Click Connector on the Draw toolbar and connect the components together as you want. 3. Connect points have been placed on each component where typical connections can be made. Edit attributes. 1. Some components have attributes associated with them that change the text associated with them. Select the component, and change the attributes you want to change in the Symbol Explorer. The text labels are updated to display the input values. The following symbol sets to aid in control loop diagramming. Content Description Control Loop Diagrams

Control Loop symbols categorized into the following groupings: Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Positioners, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips, Transmitters and Valves.

To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Solutions (on page 25) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Electrical Templates You use these schematic templates to produce electrical drawings according to accepted industry standards.  Imperial Template—This template is defined with ANSI sheet sizes and borders. The default sheet size is C with a 1:1 scale.  Metric Template—This template is defined with ISO sheet sizes and borders. The default sheet size is A1 with a 1:1 scale. Both templates point to the electrical symbol sets. The electrical symbols include main classifications of the following: Circuit Protectors, Contacts and Relays, Electron Tubes, Fundamental Items, High Voltage, Logic Gates, Qualifying Symbols, Rotating Mach, Semiconductors, Signaling and Readout Devices, Switches, Terminals and Connectors, Transformers and Inductors, and Transmission Path. You should design schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships set off (default setting).

Electrical Workflow 1 Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale.

SmartSketch User's Guide

115

SmartSketch Templates 2. Place an initial symbol correctly rotated. 3. Route a connector from that symbol to form a rough outline of the circuit. 4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the type of symbol or component needed, and drag the component onto the sheet and over the connector. 5. The connector is highlighted when the pointer moves over the element. Most of the components automatically align to the connector. 6. Drop the symbol, and it is placed, associated to the connector. Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation. 7. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer. 8. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select the text box and delete text from the symbol. 9. Continue adding or modifying connectors and adding components until the circuit is complete.

Electrical Workflow 2 Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale. 2. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the component onto the sheet to the location you want. 3. Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation. 4. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer. 5. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select the text box and delete text from the symbol. 6. Continue dragging and dropping components as needed to complete the circuit. 7. Using Connector on the Draw toolbar, connect the individual components. 8. Continue adding components and connecting them together until the circuit is complete.

Differences in Workflow 1 and 2 



 

116

Workflow 1 places the symbol or component on the connector or wire. It does not break the wire. It only masks out the connector beneath it. In this case the components are glued to the connector. To modify the circuit in such a case, you move the connector, and the symbols follow it to the new location. Workflow 2 places a connector or wire between the components that are placed. Workflow 2 is more of a real-world flow. In this case, you can select and move the components, and the connector or wires move to adjust to the new component location. You can combine the workflows. You must, however, remember which is the parent and which is the child when you combine the two. The following symbol sets aid in electrical schematic creation.

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates

Content

Description

Electrical Symbols

Circuit Protectors Contacts and Relays Electron Tubes Fundamental Items High Voltage Items Logic Gates Qualifying Symbols Rotating Mach & Comp Assembly Semiconductors Diodes Thyristors Transistors Signaling & Readout Devices Switches Terminal & Connectors Transformers & Inductors Transmission Path

To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Solutions (on page 25) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

General Diagramming Templates SmartSketch provides General Diagramming templates for mapping, basic diagrams, network diagrams, flowchart diagrams, workflow diagrams, and office layout diagrams. The general diagramming templates provide the following:  Imperial templates-These templates have imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial, ANSI, or Architectural text.  Metric templates-These templates have metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text. General diagramming template symbols are provided in the Symbol Explorer. Also, tools to create drawings using the general diagramming templates are available on the Draw toolbar. The dimensioning and text standard will vary with each template. For example, the Atlas Mapping Imperial template provides ANSI dimensioning and Arial text, while the Office Layout Imperial template provides ASA dimensioning and Architectural text.

See Also Atlas Mapping Templates (on page 117) Basic Diagramming Templates (on page 119) Directional Mapping Templates (on page 121) Flowchart Templates (on page 122) Network Diagram Templates (on page 124) Office Layout Templates (on page 126) Organizational Chart Templates (on page 128)

Atlas Mapping Templates You use these templates to produce maps.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text.

SmartSketch User's Guide

117

SmartSketch Templates Atlas Map symbols for the United States are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing window.

Mapping Workflow You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1. Draw the map. 2. Place map symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. 3. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. 4. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down the Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release the Ctrl key and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 5. When you drag and pause a symbol over an existing map symbol drop point, a tool tip appears, identifying the state to be placed adjacently. Dropping the symbol on the drop point ensures that the state boundaries match perfectly. Place text. 6. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active text settings in the file are used. 7. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. 8. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. Finish the drawing. 9. Finish the map by drawing details, adding text, or modifying the symbols to enhance the map. The following symbol sets aid in drawing maps. Content

Description

\PROGRAM United States Map symbols. These symbols FILES\SMARTSKETC have drag points as well as special behaviors H\SYMBOLS\DIAGRA for enhanced placement and modification. MMING \ATLAS MAP\US STATES

See Also Create a Template (on page 143)

118

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates

Basic Diagramming Templates You use these templates to produce business diagrams.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text. Basic diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.

Setting Up a Basic Diagram 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 2. Prepare to draw.  Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap.  For more grid options click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.  These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.  Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results.  You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.

Simple Diagramming Workflow 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

Optimal Diagramming Workflow 1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically during placement.  Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.  If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using grid snap or visual alignment.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.

SmartSketch User's Guide

119

SmartSketch Templates 

Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 2. Connect the symbols by using Connector.  When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.  When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear.  The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry.  If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without grid snap. 3. Place text.  Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.  The active text settings in the file are used.  To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text.  Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.  To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 4. Finish the diagram.  Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets are aid in drawing diagrams. Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI NG \BASIC

Common business diagramming symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

See Also Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

120

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates

Directional Mapping Templates You use these templates to produce directional maps.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Directional Map symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing window.

Directional Mapping Workflow 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1. 2. Draw a directional map.  Draw transportation routes first using Line/Arc Continuous or Curve on the Draw toolbar. Select a linestyle such as Rural Road or Railroad.  When you use Line/Arc Continuous, press Shift+A to draw an arc. To turn line mode back on, press Shift+L.  When you use Curve, press the left mouse button as you draw.  You can label transportation routes by double-clicking the line and typing the name of the road or railroad. The text automatically aligns to linear elements. 3. Place symbols.  Place directional map symbols to represent landmarks by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 4. Place text.  Double-click symbols or lines to place text.  The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for repositioning or editing text properties or moving properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text.  Right-click the highlighted text to edit properties.  To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.

SmartSketch User's Guide

121

SmartSketch Templates 5. Finish the map.  Draw details and modify the color or linestyles of the symbols to enhance the map. The following symbol sets aid in drawing directional maps. Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOL S\ DIAGRAMMING \DIRECTIONAL MAP

Directional Map symbols have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Flowchart Templates You use these templates to produce flowcharts and diagrams.  Imperial Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and Arial text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and TQM symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create flowcharts and diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.

Setting Up a Flowchart 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

You can create flowcharts and diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allows enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. Prepare to draw.  Set the drawing aids to your preferences using the SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap.  For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.  These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.

Drawing a Simple Flowchart and Diagram 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

122

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Drawing an Optimal Flowchart and Diagram 1. Place flowchart and diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement.  Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 2. Connect the symbols by using Connector.  When drawing connectors, set the clearance using Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.  When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear.  The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without grid snap. 3. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbols.  The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears.  Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock.  Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 4. Finish the diagram.  Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets are provided to aid in drawing diagrams. Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \FLOWCHART

Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and TQM symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

SmartSketch User's Guide

123

SmartSketch Templates See Also Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Network Diagram Templates You use these templates to produce network diagrams.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and ANSI text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text. Network Diagram symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create network diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.

Network Diagram Workflow You can create network diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size. The network symbols are accurately scaled to 1/10th of their true size so you should leave the sheet scale at 1:1, the default. 2. Prepare to draw.  Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static. Set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.  These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw.

Simple Network Diagram 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

Optimal Network Diagram 1. Place network diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.  If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.

124

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates 

2. 3.

4.

5.

Some network symbols mount into the rack or chassis symbols when you drag the symbol into a rack or chassis. When you pause over a drop point in a chassis or rack, a tool tip appears; for example, Attach Module. When you move a symbol, all associated symbols follow. To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the green lock. This frees the symbol from the element. A symbol is not associated to an element if a green lock is not displayed when you select the symbol. Add attributes to the network symbols by selecting the symbol and editing fields in the Attribute Viewer. Connect the symbols by using Connector, or by dragging in Cable symbols and then connecting the endpoints to network symbols. The result is a symbolized connector with attribution.  When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.  When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be placed on a target or any of the symbol vector geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled.  Note the connect points display a tool tip when the connector end point is drawn or modified over a port on the network symbol.  You can edit attribute information on the connector and the network symbols in the Attribute Viewer.  SmartLabels are provided for network symbols and cables. These SmartLabels appear in the Symbol Explorer in the network symbol directories. When you drag a network SmartLabel over the drag point (usually the lower left corner) of a network symbol, the label associates to the symbol and accesses the symbol attribute information.  The description attribute data is displayed in the label. The cable labels display the type and the speed-type of the cable. Place text.  Double-click on the symbols to place text below the symbol or connector. The active text settings in the file are used.  Right click on text to edit properties.  To move the text, select and highlight the text.  Click the green lock to unlock; then with the pointer, drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. Report on the network diagram.  Drag a report from the Symbol Explorer on to the sheet and follow the instructions. An Excel spreadsheet is updated from the attributes of all the network symbols in the file.  The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams.

SmartSketch User's Guide

125

SmartSketch Templates

Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI NG\ NETWORK DIAGRAM

Network diagram symbols that include Cables, Chassis, Cards, Modules, Input-Output Devices, Intelligent Network Devices, Network Accessories, Non-intelligent Network Devices, Physical Plant, and Servers and Storage devices. These symbols have attribution and special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Office Layout Templates You use these templates to produce Office Layout drawings.  Imperial Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ASA dimensioning, and Architectural text.  Metric Template - This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text. Office layout symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create office layout drawings appears on the left of the drawing window.

Office Layout Workflow 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1' for the Imperial template and 1:50 for the Metric template. 2. Prepare to draw.  Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap.  For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.  These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.  Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results.  You can set grid display and snap by right clicking. 3. Draw walls.  Click Place Doubleline on the Draw toolbar and set the thickness of the walls to be drawn in the ribbon.  Click the appropriate button on the ribbon to indicate whether you draw from the center of the wall or one of the edges (primary line buttons).  Draw the walls first.

126

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates 4. Next, use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup.  If you press Alt while drawing, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled.  When you draw the walls, you may want to select a neutral gray for the line color. After you draw the walls, you can avoid cleaning the intersections by color filling the walls with a solid fill of the same neutral gray color.  Use the door and window symbols to complete the floor plan. These symbols automatically align to the wall and can be mirrored, scaled and rotated after placement.  You can also use Place Doubleline for drawing office partitions, along-wall working surfaces, counter tops, work benches, stockroom shelves, custom bookcases, custom desks, and cat walks. If you press and hold Shift while drawing with Place Doubleline, the end caps do not automatically merge into another section of doubleline. This feature is useful for drawing partitions perpendicular to walls. You can use Fillet to round the corners of counter tops. 5. Reference or open an existing floor plan.  Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging the existing file into the drawing window. Or click the Open command on the File menu to open an existing floor plan file. You can reference or open any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document.  Place office layout symbols.  Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.  If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.  Office Layout symbols can be physically associated to walls or other symbols. When you move a symbol or a wall, all associated symbols follow.  To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the green lock to unlock the association. A symbol is not associated if a green lock is not displayed when the symbol is selected.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 6. Annotate the drawing.  Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. To label, double-click symbols, walls, or other drawn elements. The active text settings in the file are used for labels that you double-click.  To edit existing text properties, right-click text and select properties from the pop-up menu. To move text, click to select; then click the green lock to unlock.  Move by dragging the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 7. Finish the drawing.

SmartSketch User's Guide

127

SmartSketch Templates 

Change the color of symbols to enhance furniture or identify existing and new equipment. You can also use connectors to enhance the drawing by adding communication and computer networking lines. The following symbol sets aid in creating office layout drawings. Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI NG \OFFICE LAYOUT

Office Layout symbols have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Organizational Chart Templates You use these templates to produce organizational charts.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Org Chart symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create organizational charts appears on the left of the drawing window.

Automated Organizational Chart Creation 1. Load the add-in.  On the Main toolbar, click Add-Ins on the Tools menu and check the box for Org Chart Wizard. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Org Chart Wizard on the Tools menu and follow the instructions to continue.  This wizard creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. The completion of the wizard results in a new sheet added to the open file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors interactively as if the chart had been drawn manually.

Organizational Chart Workflow You can create organizational charts with Maintain Relationships set on or off. 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 2. Prepare to draw.  Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.  These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.

128

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates  

Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.

Simple Workflow Diagram 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

Optimal Workflow Diagram 1. Place Org Chart symbols by dragging them from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.  If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.  These symbols automatically expand to the size of the text. You can also size them by using the yellow handles.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol.  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 2. Connect the symbols by using Connector.  When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the connector appears.  When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear.  The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press the Alt key while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. 3. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.  The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for editing properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears.  Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click the highlighted text to edit properties.  Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 4. Finish the organizational chart.  Use color to modify the symbols and use connectors to enhance the drawing.  The following symbol sets aid in drawing organizational charts.

SmartSketch User's Guide

129

SmartSketch Templates Content

Description

\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMIN G \ORG CHARTS

Organizational Chart symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

See Also Organizational Chart Wizard (on page 131) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Workflow Diagram Templates You use these templates to produce workflow diagrams.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Work flow symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create workflow diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.

Drawing a Simple Workflow Diagram 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

Drawing an Optimal Workflow Diagram 1. Place symbols.  Place symbols by using the pointer to drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer.  While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement.  Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.  If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using Grid Snap or visual alignment.  You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press the Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 2. Connect the symbols.

130

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates 

Use Connector. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance on the ribbon to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the connector occurs.  When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear.  If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. 3. Place text.  Double-click symbols to edit text labels at the bottom of the symbols. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.  To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 4. Finish the diagram.  Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in drawing workflow diagrams. Content

Description

\PROGRAM Workflow Diagram symbols. These FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBO symbols have special behaviors for LS\DIAGRAMMING\WORKFLO enhanced placement and modification. W DIAGRAM

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Organizational Chart Wizard Creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. Adds a new sheet to the open file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors.

See Also Organizational Chart Templates (on page 128)

Mechanical Engineering Templates SmartSketch provides tools that let you create part drawings and assembly drawings that provide information for manufacturing a product. Part drawings (or detail drawings) show each part contained in a product. Assembly drawings show how all the parts fit together. These drawing templates (Metric and Imperial) are available with the GD&T (Geometric Dimension and Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols option. GD&T and Weld Symbols are symbol sets that let you create and place GD&T and Weld Symbols into SmartSketch drawings. The symbols are placed through a simple drag-and-drop operation from the Symbol Explorer. You can also place Text Fields that build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop operation. Several of the symbols feature multiple representations that you can easily access with a simple right-mouse click on

SmartSketch User's Guide

131

SmartSketch Templates your placed symbol. Once you see the representation you like, you simply left-mouse click it to change the display of the symbol in your drawing. GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are easily accessed with a simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit the input field to change its value. You can access these symbols when you open one of the Mechanical templates in SmartSketch. To use this functionality, you must install the Mechanical Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Mechanical Templates (on page 132) Create a Template (on page 143)

Mechanical Templates 

ANSI Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders, implements the ANSI Y14.5 dimensioning standard, and provides ANSI Y14.5 GD&T and American Welding Society (AWS) Weld symbols.  ISO Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders, implements the ISO dimensioning standard, and provides ISO GD&T and Weld symbols. The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

Part Design Workflow 1. Set up the sheet.  Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts. 2. Sketch the part.  Draw the elements, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and the SmartSketch Settings command. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your design intent. As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. You do not need to give much attention to the exact size of the part; it is often easier to dimension the part and change the dimensions later. 3. Dimension the part.  Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the part. These dimensions drive dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven elements. 4. Refine the drawing.  Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design.  If you plan to use the part in a mechanism or assembly, then select all of the geometry and create a symbol with an appropriate name.

Mechanism Modeling Workflow  

132

You can design mechanisms, using rigid body symbols. You should set Maintain Relationships to On in the mechanism file.

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates 1. Prepare the parts.  You must save each part in the mechanism as a symbol and turn Allow Rotation by Relationships on, using the Symbol Authoring tools, so the parts can act as a rigid body in the mechanism. 2. Start a new drawing.  You should create the mechanism in a new drawing with an appropriate sheet scale for the whole mechanism. Set the symbol browser to the location of the components. 3. Drag the parts.  Drag the parts into their rough location on the sheet, but do not give much attention to precision placement or orientation. 4. Connect the parts.  Use the tools on the Relationship toolbar to establish the relationships between the parts in the mechanism. Connect on the Draw toolbar allows you to connect a specific location on one part to a specific location on another part. Use relationship indicators to determine the connection type, such as end point to center point or end point to midpoint. You can also use specific tools to establish other relationships, such as tangent, parallel, perpendicular, colinear, concentric, and others. 5. Create driving dimensions.  Use SmartDimension on the Dimension toolbar or other dimensioning tools to establish the controlling dimensions for the mechanism. 6. Move the mechanism.  Select a driving dimension and change the value to move the mechanism into a specific configuration.

Production Drafting Workflow You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the ANSI standards. To produce a fairly complex production drawing, set Maintain Relationships off. 1. Set up the sheet.  Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the part. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts on an A-Size sheet. 2. Draw the views.  Draw a principle view of the part using the draw tools (with precision key-in values on the ribbon), SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Draw other views using SmartSketch Settings to align key edges from each view. 3. Annotate the drawing.  Use the text, dimensioning, GD&T symbols, and weld symbols to annotate the drawing. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. The following symbol sets are provided to aid in production drafting. Content

Description

Geometric Dimensioning Datum and feature control frames are and Tolerancing (GD&T) provided according to the ANSI Y14.5 or Symbols ISO standard. Components of each frame are provided as symbols with appropriate drag points to fit into the frames.

SmartSketch User's Guide

133

SmartSketch Templates Weld Symbols

The weld reference line and components are provided according to the American Welding Society (AWS) or ISO standard.

To use this functionality, you must install the Mechanical Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Process Diagraming Templates Process application templates (both Imperial and Metric) present industry-standard sheet sizes and properties so that you can produce:  Control Loop Diagrams – This template includes more than 200 control loop-specific symbols. The symbols are grouped in logical categories such as Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters.  Process Block Diagrams – This template includes 24 typical block diagram symbols. Each symbol has a double- click text action that lets you enter the text needed for each particular process in the diagram.  Ortho Piping Diagrams – This template delivers more than 850 ortho piping symbols, grouped by size and function. Each size contains 150# and 300# valves and valve assemblies, flanges, elbows, tees, and actuators. By using pre-defined line and double-line styles that depict the sizes and types of pipes, you can create both associative and non-associative piping layouts.  PFDs and P&IDs – The Process Flow and P&ID templates are grouped by ANSI, ISO, and Intergraph symbol standards. The ANSI symbol set contains approximately 150 symbols; the ISO symbol set contains approximately 240 symbols; the Intergraph PFD symbol set contains more than 370 symbols, and the Intergraph P&ID symbol set contains more than 860 symbols. Many Intergraph process symbols have a set of pre-selected attributes that can be edited via the Attribute Viewer (you can add additional attributes to any symbol). Every pipeline, instrumentation line, and symbol can have SmartLabels applied to add and display attribute information. Based on these attributes, reports- such as Vessel Reports, Pump/Compressor Reports, Heat Exchanger Reports, and Stream Reports- can be easily generated using delivered report macros. You simply drag-and-drop these macros into the diagram just as you would any other symbol in the Symbol Explorer.  Plot Plans – This template delivers 36 parametric symbols, which include Annotation, Equipment, Roads, Site, and Vehicles directories. When used with the Image Integrator option for SmartSketch, raster images can then be referenced and scaled to the correct size and orientation, and vector graphics can be drawn on top to accurately represent the new facilities. To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Ortho Piping Templates (on page 135) PFD and P&ID Templates (on page 136) Plot Plan Templates (on page 138) Process Block Diagramming Templates (on page 139) Create a Template (on page 143)

134

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates

Ortho Piping Templates You use this precision template to produce orthographic piping drawings, using common sized components and pipes.  Ortho Piping Template—This template has imperial units in feet and inches, with a precision of 1/32”. The sheet scale is set to 1/2” = 1’. ANSI, ISO, DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are available in the template. The default dimension type is ANSI. When you open this template, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

Ortho Piping Workflow 1 (Small Layouts)  You can create small layouts with Maintain Relationships set on.  Select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings. Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/2” = 1’. 2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of piping to be placed. A list of folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed. Place a line. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous 2. On the ribbon, select the appropriate line style. Click to place the line. 3. Drag one of the piping components into the document close to the end of the pipe where it is placed. Example 150# Gate Valve with flanges. If the orientation of the valve is not correct relative to the pipe, use the left or right arrow keys to rotate as needed. Click the symbol. 4. To display the Relationships toolbar, click Relationships

on the Main toolbar.

5. On the Relationships toolbar, click Connect . 6. Identify the center on one end of the valve as the first point to connect to. You can see the midpoint indicator as the pointer moves over the center of the end of the valve. 7. Identify the end of the line placed previously as the other end to connect. The valve moves to the end of the pipe. If Maintain Relationships is set on, the valve remains connected when modifications are made. 8. Place another line from the other end of the valve. Select the midpoint of the end of the valve from which to start. Place the line an approximate length. 9. From the 4” Els directory select the 90 degree elbow and drag it into the file. Use the rotate keys to rotate to a correct orientation. Connect the midpoint of the elbow to the end point of the 4” line. 10. Repeat the process as needed until the layout is complete. 11. Place dimensions between key components of the layout. Workflow method 1 is recommended for small layouts because the constraints needed to handle a large piping layout may make the system too slow for practical use.

Ortho Piping Workflow 2 (Large Layouts)  You should create large piping layouts with Maintain Relationships set off.  Be sure to select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings. 1. To set up the sheet, select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the piping layout. The default scale is 1/2” = 1’.

SmartSketch User's Guide

135

SmartSketch Templates 2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of components to be placed. A list of folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. Draw a single line, centerline, layout of the piping system to be drawn. Placing centerlines on a different layer is recommended. 4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the proper sized components to be placed, and drag the components onto the line. 5. When the components are placed in their proper locations, turn off the centerline layer. 6. Select Place Doubleline, a flyout on the Line/Arc Continuous. Set the placement option on the toolbar to Center Primary Line; then select a width. 7. Use relationship indicators to locate the midpoint of one of the components, and click the left mouse button. Use midpoint to locate the end of the next component that has been placed, and right-click. A doubleline representing the size of the pipe is placed. 8. Continue connecting components in this manner until all components are connected. 

To show pipes crossing, the doubleline representing the pipe on top can be filled or patterned with a blank color. The pipe that is to be displayed below can be selected and pushed to the bottom in the display. To select and push the pipe to the bottom, click Send to Back on the Change toolbar.  You can place pipes using the method in Workflow 1 with Line/Arc Continuous instead of using Place Doubleline. The following symbol sets aid in Ortho Piping layouts. Content

Description

Orthographic Piping Symbols Sizes 1,2,3,4,6,8,10,12 Inches

Each Size contains the following: 150# Valves 300# Valves Actuators Annotation Els Olet Reducers Welds and 2 Inch sizes also include 600# and 800# valves.

To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

PFD and P&ID Templates You use these schematic templates to produce process flow diagrams according to accepted industry standards.  PFD (Intergraph) Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams. The default symbol set is a subset of the Intergraph SP2D symbol set. The delivered set draws most PFDs. If you need other Intergraph symbols, you can copy them from the P&ID (Intergraph) symbol set.  PFD ANSI Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams based on ANSI Process Flow Standards. ASA Z32.2.3-1949.  PFD ISO Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams based on ISO Process Flow Standards. (General Rules—Flow Diagrams for Process Plants - ISO 10628)

136

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates 

P&ID (Intergraph) Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams and P&ID diagrams. The symbol set is the Intergraph SP2D symbol set, consisting of approximately 1000 symbols. You can reconfigure the symbol locations and directories to your specification for easy location.

PFD and P&ID Workflow You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared. Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the schematic drawing. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for the symbol sizes. Place symbols. 1. Drag in the major components of the PFD and place them at locations on the sheet. 2. These components usually include vessels, pumps, and heat exchangers. 3. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:  Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.  Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Enter attribute information for the individual components. 1. To enter data in the attributes, select the symbol and add the information in the Attribute Viewer. Attach nozzles to major equipment. 1. Nozzles are automatically aligned and can be placed anywhere on the major equipment. 2. From the Schematic toolbar select Connector. 3. Connect the major components together at the locations you want on each symbol.  Each symbol has predefined connect points; however, the connector can connect to any graphic location on the symbol.  The connector routes itself away from the original symbol and toward the target symbol.  You can attach connectors to connectors.  A connector being placed or modified can have its starting or ending point anywhere along another connector. Set connector flow direction at any time. 1. There are two methods to set the flow direction:  When you place the connector, you can use the options on the connector toolbar to select the starting and ending terminator for the connector.  You can drag an arrowhead symbol from the browser and connect it to the end of the connector. Drag inline symbol components such as valves onto the connectors. 1. The valve symbols have automated aligning turned on. This means that the valve automatically aligns to the direction of the connector. 2. Note that the valve is placed on top of the connector and hides the portion of the connector that the valve covers. To associate a text box with a symbol that does not already have associated text. 1. Double-click the symbol.

SmartSketch User's Guide

137

SmartSketch Templates 2. Then, type in text.  Moving the symbol causes the text to move and maintain its relative location to the symbol.  If a symbol already has associated text, double-clicking the symbol allows you to edit the text. 3. After you have placed components and connectors, you can modify the symbols and/or connectors by selecting and dragging them to a new location.  You can select and drag multiple symbols to a new location.  You can select and modify single connectors.  You can adjust segments of connectors to new locations or move and reattach endpoints. The following symbol sets aid in schematic drawings of PFDs and P&IDs. Content

Description

P&ID (Intergraph)

Intergraph Symbol set containing symbols needed for creating PFDs, P&IDs, and Material Handling drawings.

PFD (Intergraph)

Symbol set that is a subset of the P&ID (Intergraph) set. Symbols are adequate to create most PFDs. Other symbols from P&ID or other symbol sets can be copied to the PFD directory and are displayed for selection.

PFD (ISO Standard) Symbol set based on the ISO 10628 standard. General rules for flow diagrams for process plants. PFD (ANSI)

Symbol set based on ASA Z32.2.3-1949 ASME Y32.2.2.3 Graphical symbols for pipe fittings, valves and piping. To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26)

option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Plot Plan Templates You use these precision templates to produce plot plan and equipment layout drawings.  Plot Plan (Imperial) Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders.  Plot Plan (Metric) Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders, and implements the ISO dimensioning. The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.

138

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Plot Plan Workflow You can draw plot plans associatively or non-associatively. The default behavior is non-associative. To draw the plot plan associatively, set Maintain Relationships on. Set up the sheet. 1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet scale is 1 in:100 ft. for imperial and 1mm:1000mm for metric. Sketch the layout. 2. Draw the geometry for roads, buildings or equipment, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your design intent. As an example, with Maintain Relationships set on, the software remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. Drag any symbols that are needed for the drawing. 3. You can place symbols precisely, relative to other components using PinPoint or the precision Move. Dimension the part. 4. Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the layout. If Maintain Relationships is set on, these dimensions are driving dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven elements. Finish the drawing. 5. Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design. The following symbol sets aid in construction of plot plan drawings. Content

Description

Plot Plan

Assorted symbols to aid in the construction of Plot Plans. Symbols include direction arrow, buildings, vessels, tanks, vehicles, and others. Some of the symbols are parametric and can be changed in the content explorer. To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26)

option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Process Block Diagramming Templates You use these templates to produce process block diagrams.  Imperial Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text.  Metric Template - This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text. Basic Diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these two templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.

SmartSketch User's Guide

139

SmartSketch Templates Setting Up a Process Block Diagram You can create block diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. It is suggested that you accept the default, Maintain Relationships set off. Set up the sheet. 1. Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. Prepare to draw. 2. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.   

These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.

Drawing a Simple Diagram 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.

Drawing an Optimal Diagram 1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the pointer to drag from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Place multiple copies of a symbol by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting Stamp Here. 3. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. 4. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. 5. Connect the symbols by using Connector. 6. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the minimum distance from the symbol so that the first turn in the connector appears. 7. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. 8. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the alignment indicators are temporarily be disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. 9. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. 10. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. 11. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.

140

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates Finish the diagram. 12. Use fills and modify the elements in symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams. Content

Description

Process Block Diagrams

Common Basic diagramming symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.

To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Technical Drawing Templates You use these templates to produce technical drawings, sketches, and illustrations.  Imperial Template—This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text.  Metric Template—This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text. A set of simple drawing elements is also available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create precision drawings appears on the left of the drawing window.

Drawing/Sketching Workflow 1.

2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

Set up the sheet Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. Draw elements Use the tools on the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings, or drag symbols available in the Symbol Explorer. Place multiple copies of symbols by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting Stamp Here, or by pressing Ctrl while dragging a symbol from the Symbol Explorer. If Maintain Relationships is set on, relationships between drawn objects are established. As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. You can use Trim, Extend to Next, and Fillet to efficiently modify drawn geometry. Annotate the drawing Use text, dimensioning, and labels to annotate the drawing. Double-clicking on any drawn object (except fills, dimensions, and leaders) creates an associative text box. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. Finish the drawing Use patterns and fills and modify the symbols to enhance the drawing.

SmartSketch User's Guide

141

SmartSketch Templates To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26) option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Title Block Templates The Title Block templates delivered with the software include a variety of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes with inserted title block fields. The title block is generally displayed at the bottom of a drawing template. It can include signatures, revision and issue information, and other properties associated with the drawing.

You add drawing properties, such as revision information or issue requests, to the title block using the Insert Title Block Field or Title Block Properties commands when editing a template The title block templates provide the following:  Imperial templates - These templates have imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial, ANSI, or Architectural text.  Metric templates - These templates have metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text.

142

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch Templates

Create a Template 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click File > New. On the File New dialog box, select the Template to use as the basis for your new file. Click OK to create the new file. Complete any changes to be included as part of the template.

See Also Save a Document as a Template (on page 143)

Save a Document as a Template 1. Click File > Save As Template. 2. In the Save As Template dialog box, specify the directory in which to save the new template. 3. In the File Name box, type a unique name for the new template. You can use the extension .igr. It is not necessary to use a different file extension for templates.  

By default, the software saves templates in the Template directory located in the directory where you installed the software. You can, however, save your template to a UNC path. You can change the default directory where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.

See Also Save a Document as a Template (on page 143)

Save as Template Command Saves a document as a template. The template is stored in the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you installed the software. This command is available only on the File menu.

See Also Save a Document (on page 93) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

SmartSketch User's Guide

143

SmartSketch Templates

144

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 5

Drawing Basic Elements An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic geometric element—freeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.

You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two points to indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can right-click to end the operation. Right-clicking ends most operations in the software. You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With this method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and modification. If you want to place a precise line, click Line/Arc Continuous , type values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line. This method, sometimes called mouse-up drawing, is typically used for precision placement and when you want to draw elements that are related to each other. In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc Continuous and then type 3.0 in the Length box on the ribbon box and press ENTER to lock the length value.

When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around and click again to set the line's orientation angle.

SmartSketch User's Guide

145

Drawing Basic Elements If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.

See Also Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) Drawing Lines (on page 146) Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174) Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160)

Drawing Lines If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start the line. You click a second point to indicate where to end the line. If you do not want to place another line, right-click to end the operation. You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You then click on the drawing sheet to place the line. You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line. For example, you can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length value and then set the line's orientation angle graphically. You can set the color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.

See Also Draw a Line (on page 146) Drawing Doublelines (on page 158) Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 182)

Draw a Line 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 2. Click the point where you want the line to begin. 3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the line. 4. Do one of the following:  Right-click to end the line.  To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you want each line segment to end, and then right- click. If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again. 

146

Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements    

 

Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can drag the pointer to draw a line. You can press ESC to end a line or a line segment. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. When you use Point On on the SmartSketch dialog box, you can draw a line tangent to two curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first element. Use the SmartSketch dialog box options to establish a tangent relationship to the other element. If you do not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the elements, but is not tangent to them. You can use relationships to make an end point of a line tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another element. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line.

See Also Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) Line Ribbon (on page 147) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Line/Arc Continuous Command Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines, the second point of one line is the first point of the next line. You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be perpendicular or tangent to each other. You can create an open or closed shape by drawing lines and arcs in any combination. The last point of the line or arc is the first point of the next line or arc. The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press SHIFT + A. While drawing, you can toggle between the two modes by pressing SHIFT + A for arc mode or pressing SHIFT + L for line mode.

See Also Draw a Line (on page 146) Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 166) Line Ribbon (on page 147)

Line Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Line — Switches the drawing mode from arc to line. Arc — Switches the drawing mode from line to arc. Length — Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values. Angle — Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is counterclockwise from the X axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the X axis.

SmartSketch User's Guide

147

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) Draw a Line (on page 146) Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 166)

Draw a Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Point 2. Click to place a point. 



.

Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the coordinate boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. The coordinate origin is located at the bottom left corner of the window. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a point.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Point Command (on page 148)

Point Command Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled circle.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Draw a Point (on page 148) Point Ribbon (on page 148)

Point Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Point Command (on page 148) Draw a Point (on page 148)

148

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Drawing Connectors You can use a connector to join two elements together. Connector , located on both the Schematic and Draw toolbars, provides a convenient way to draw schematic diagrams and other types of drawings.

Connector allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space. Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. You can also modify the connector after you place it by inserting or moving a line segment, inserting or moving a vertex, or moving an element with a connector. There are special connector styles that you can use in your diagram. On the Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box. You can then draw a connector that displays the line style that you selected. For example, in documents based on the Process Block Diagram template, you can select Future and Phantom in the Line Style box on the ribbon. When you select Future and draw a connector, the connector appears as a dashed line.

When you select Phantom and draw a connector, it appears grayed out; the connector is highlighted when you point to it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

149

Drawing Basic Elements Besides line styles, you can also select line start and line end terminators on the Connector ribbon. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can apply.

See Also Connector Command (on page 156) Connector Ribbon (on page 157) Place a Connector (on page 150)

Connector Drawing Elements Connector on the Schematic toolbar allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space. There are special connector styles that you can use in the diagram. Some examples in the Process Flow template include Primary Line, Secondary Line, and Electric Signal. On the Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box.

On the Connector ribbon, you can also select the line start and line end terminators that you want. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can apply.

Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at any angle.

See Also Attach a Connector to an Object (on page 154) Connect Two Objects (on page 155)

Place a Connector 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector . 2. Click to begin drawing the connector or move the pointer over the element to highlight the potential key points or connect points.

150

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. The active point along the element is a filled red circle. You can connect to any point on the element. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at any angle. 3. After you select a starting point, the direction in which you move from that point determines the angle at which the connector is drawn. The following picture shows that the pointer has been moved away from the initial point in a downward direction.

 

  

You can generate two or more line segments with each click. When the pointer crosses the current line segment, the software automatically generates another segment. The following graphic shows a connector with three line segments although you clicked only once.

To switch between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments, click Diagonal Mode (Alt). If the element itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted appropriately so that the connector is perpendicular to the element. If you are connecting to a symbol, the connect point may have a pre-defined angle to which the connector must connect.

To create a connector path 

After you select a point to move from, you can click points to force a connector to go to a certain path.

To end the connector You can end a connector in the following ways:  After you place one or more connector line segments, right click to end the connector.  To attach the connector to another element, move the pointer over the element to display the potential connect points. However, you can connect to any point on the element.

SmartSketch User's Guide

151

Drawing Basic Elements 

When the point closest to the pointer is highlighted, you can click to define the end of the connector. The pointer snaps to connect points.



The software calculates the angle for the ending the connection point, based on how you approach the element. If the calculated angle is not correct when you move the pointer away from the point, you can move the pointer back over the point and try again. As you drag connected elements or symbols, the connections are maintained.

 

See Also Connector Command (on page 156) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

Modify a Connector To modify a connector, select the connector, using the Select Tool. You can then change the connector in several ways.

To insert a line segment 





152

To insert a line segment into the connector, click Insert Segment Mode (Shift) on the ribbon, or press Shift. The pointer changes to a directional arrow when the command is in Insert Segment mode, and the pointer is positioned over a connector segment. Drag the pointer diagonally to define the shape of the segment. The following graphic shows the connector dynamics display as you drag the pointer (A).

When you release the drag, the segment is inserted as part of the connector.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements To move a line segment 

To move a line segment, first move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line segment. Then click the segment and drag it to the location you want.

To insert a vertex  

To insert a vertex, first click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the ribbon, or press Alt. Move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line segment to which you want to add the vertex, and drag the segment to a new location. The pointer changes to a directional arrow. As you drag the segment, the software inserts a vertex. In the following graphic a vertex has been inserted in a horizontal line segment.

To move a vertex  

To move a vertex, move the pointer over the vertex. Then drag the vertex to move it. When Diagonal mode is not active, you can move the vertex only in a horizontal or vertical direction. The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are horizontal or vertical.



When Diagonal mode is active, you can move the vertex in any direction. This action means that connector line segments are not limited to horizontal or vertical orientation. The

SmartSketch User's Guide

153

Drawing Basic Elements following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are no longer horizontal or vertical.

To move an element with a connector 

To move an element that is connected, select the element with the connector and move it. The connector moves with the element. To find out how to move an element, click Related Topics.

To modify end points  

You modify end points to move a connector from one connect point to another or to move a connector point to another location. To move a connector, first select the connector. Then click the connector and drag it to a connect point or another location. After you connect a point, you can drag it to another connect point.

See Also Connector Command (on page 156) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

Format a Connector 1. Select a connector. 2. On the Connector ribbon, set the options you want.     

On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want. You can also format a connector before you attach it by setting options on the ribbon. Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line style formats. To change a line style, click the Style list on the ribbon, and select a style. To change clearance, type a value in the Clearance box on the ribbon.

See Also Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Connector Command (on page 156)

Attach a Connector to an Object 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector

154

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators. 3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points. The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. 4. Click the symbol to place the connector. The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked. Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.

See Also Connector Drawing Elements (on page 150) Modify a Connector (on page 152)

Merge Connectors 1. Select two connectors. The first connector selected drives the manner in which the merge occurs such that the properties of the first connector selected will be applied to the second connector. 2. Click the Merge Connectors button into a single connector.

on the Connectors ribbon. The connectors merge

If more than two connectors are selected, the Merge Connectors command is disabled on the Connectors ribbon.

See Also Reverse Connector Direction (on page 155) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

Reverse Connector Direction 1. Select a connector. 2. From the shortcut menu, select Reverse Direction. Right-click on the selected connector to display the shortcut menu. See Also Merge Connectors (on page 155) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

Connect Two Objects 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector . 2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators. 3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points. The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. 4. Click to start the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint.  

The direction in which you move from the start point determines the angle at which the connector is drawn. If the object itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjust appropriately so that the connector is perpindicular to the object.

SmartSketch User's Guide

155

Drawing Basic Elements 

If you press the ALT key while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at any angle. 5. Pass the pointer over the second target object. 6. Click to end the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint. If one of the connected objects is moved the connection and clearance is maintained.

See Also Connector Drawing Elements (on page 150) Modify a Connector (on page 152)

Split a Connector 1. Click a connector. 2. Click Split Connector on the Connector ribbon. 3. Click the point at which to split the connector. 

 

When you click within the range of a symbol on the connector, the software trims the two resulting connectors to the symbol's range. If the symbol has connect points, the software attaches the resulting connectors to the symbol at the connect points. This command displays the connect points located on a symbol. Split connector should not be used to trim a single connector to the edge of a symbol. In this instance, the connector should be modified directly with its end handles. The Clearance value on the Connector ribbon will determine the shortest length of a connector. Thus, if one end of a split connector is shorter than the clearance value, that segment length will be increased to match the value.

See Also Reverse Connector Direction (on page 155) Merge Connectors (on page 155) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

Connector Command Connects two elements together. Using a connector, you can connect to an element by connecting to:  Key points. Hollow gray circles indicate potential key points (such as endpoint, midpoint, and others) on an element, when the element is located by the pointer.  Connect points. Hollow red circles indicate potential connect points on a symbol.  Any point on an element. A solid red filled circle is displayed when the pointer locates an element at a point other than its key points.  

You must click the Connector command before you see the points for connecting on the element. You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.

See Also Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Place a Connector (on page 150) Connector Ribbon (on page 157)

156

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Connector Ribbon When you click Connector on the Draw toolbar, you can place a connector. After you select a connector, you can change it. Most of the options on the Connector ribbon are the same whether you are placing or modifying a connector. The only difference occurs when you select a single connector or multiple connectors for modification. When you select a single connector, the Split button becomes active. When you select multiple connectors, the Merge button becomes active. When you modify a connector, an additional option is available to insert a segment into the selected connector. This last option is Insert Segment Mode (Alt+S).

Ribbon Box Options Style - Sets the line style for the connector. Line Color - Sets the line color for the connector. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the connector line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width for the connector. Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for star ting the connector. Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector. Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles. Diagonal Mode (Alt) - Allows you to either place or modify a connector with diagonal segments.

Placing a Connector Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector. To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments, you also can press Alt.

Modifying a Connector Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected connector. This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or when you press Alt. Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This option is available only when you are modifying a connector. This option is active when you click Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S), or when you press ALT + S. Split Connector Mode (Shift) - Splits the connector at the selected point. This option is available only when you are modifying a connector. This option is active when you click Split Connector (Shift), or when you press Shift. Merge Connectors - Merges two connectors into a single connector, adding a segment between the connectors if necessary. This option is only available when you select two connectors. Clearance - Specifies the amount of space that the software maintains between the connector and the connected element (also known as range avoidance).

SmartSketch User's Guide

157

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Connector Command (on page 156) Modify a Connector (on page 152) Place a Connector (on page 150)

Drawing Doublelines You can use Place Doubleline to place a doubleline as you draw and clean corners as you place the lines. This command is very useful in drawing an architectural floor plan for a house or a factory. Place Doubleline

also miters joints and trims as it you draw. It puts endcaps on single lines.

On the Place Doubleline toolbar, you can define the thickness of the doubleline and whether you draw the doubleline from the left, right, or center.

See Also Place Doubleline Command (on page 159) Place a Doubleline Precisely (on page 658) Draw a Doubleline (on page 158)

Draw a Doubleline 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline . 2. Click the point to begin the doubleline. 3. Click the point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the doubleline. 4. Do one of the following:  Right-click to end the doubleline.  To draw a series of connected doublelines, click the points to end each doubleline segment, and then right-click. If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.         

158

PinPoint, in conjunction with Place Doubleline, allows you to place the doubleline relative to a known point. You can use driven dimensions to determine distances between doubleline elements. Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon to place precise lines. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment. You can use the software to make an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another element. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a doubleline. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints of the lines. If Maintain Relationships is set, you can use Selection to select portions of the drawing to be moved while the relationships are maintained. When you use Point On, you can draw a doubleline tangent to two curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first element. Use the software to establish a tangent relationship to the other element. If you do

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the elements, but is not tangent to them.

See Also Place Doubleline Command (on page 159) Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 159)

Place Doubleline Command Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. When you draw a series of lines, the second point of one line is the first point of the next line. This button is most effective if you use it in a document based on one of the architectural templates in the AEC category. This button appears on a set of fly-out buttons. If you cannot locate this button, click and hold Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.

See Also Draw a Line (on page 146) Place a Doubleline Precisely (on page 658) Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 159)

Place Doubleline Ribbon Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the drawing line type. Line Width - Sets the line width. Left Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the left side. Right Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the right side. Center Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the center. Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values. Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the x axis. Thickness - Determines the thickness of the doubleline. This thickness is the distance between the doublelines. To change the width of each of the individual lines, use Line Width.

See Also Draw a Line (on page 146) Place a Doubleline Precisely (on page 658)

SmartSketch User's Guide

159

Drawing Basic Elements

Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle by Center Point on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click a point to define the center of the circle. To place the circle, you click a second point to define the distance of the circle radius from the first point. You can use other commands on the Draw toolbar to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.

To place circles, click Circle by Center Point and while holding the mouse button down, draw freehand. After you close the loop, the circle appears. You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle by Center Point and then typing values into the ribbon. After you press ENTER, a circle appears around the pointer. You can then place the defined circle by clicking the point you want on the drawing sheet.

See Also Circle Ribbon (on page 161) Curve Ribbon (on page 171) Ellipse Ribbon (on page 173)

Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by 3 Points . 2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.

160

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements   

Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a circle. Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.

See Also Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161) Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Circle by 3 Points Command Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.

See Also Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points (on page 160) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Circle Ribbon Sets options for placing circles. Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle. Radius — Sets the radius.

See Also Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161) Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162) Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 162)

Draw a Circle by Center Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by Center Point 2. Click the location where you want the center point.

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

161

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Click to define the radius.

   

Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a circle. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.

See Also Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162) Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Circle by Center Point Command Draws a circle using a center point and radius.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Draw a Circle by Center Point (on page 161) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle . 2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on element relationship or a key point. 3. Click to make the circle tangent. 4. Do one of the following to define the radius:  Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want, and then click.  Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key point relationship with another element, and then click. 

162

Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it to a circle.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements  

 





You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first element, but not fixed in one position on it. After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the pointer along the element until the software recognizes a point on element relationship, and then click. The circle is then displayed dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until you make it tangent to another element or key point. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle. If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the diameter.

If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the diameter. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Tangent Circle Command Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.

See Also Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 162) Circle Ribbon (on page 161)

Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points . 2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc. 3. Do one of the following:  Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc.

SmartSketch User's Guide

163

Drawing Basic Elements 

Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and then click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc.

Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the third point is between the first two or beyond one of the first two.    

Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an arc. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.

See Also Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165) Arc Ribbon (on page 165) Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160)

164

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Arc by 3 Points Command Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc. The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to other elements.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 163) Arc Ribbon (on page 165)

Arc Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Radius — Sets the radius. Sweep — Sets the sweep angle.

See Also Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 163) Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 166) Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 165)

Draw an Arc by Center Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point 2. Click the point where you want the center point. 3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc. You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer.

   

Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an arc. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.

SmartSketch User's Guide

165

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Arc Ribbon (on page 165) Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160)

Arc by Center Point Command Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc and the next two points define the sweep.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 165) Arc Ribbon (on page 165)

Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements You must set the Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that are tangent to other elements. You must set SmartSketch Tangent on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw an arc tangent to two elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc . 2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can click the end point of a line or curved element, or any point on the element. 3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position you just clicked. If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element, move the pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different quadrant. 4. When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the first element, move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the tangent relationship with another element and then click.

  

Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc. If Maintain Relationships on the SmartSketch dialog box is set, the software places relationship handles.

See Also Arc Ribbon (on page 165)

Draw Connected Lines and Arcs 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 2. This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press SHIFT + A.

166

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Click the location to begin the line or arc. 4. Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones to specify if you want to draw a tangent or perpendicular arc. 5. If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the radius. After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode automatically. You can switch back to arc mode if you want to draw another arc. 6. Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing SHIFT + A to switch to arc mode and SHIFT + L to switch to line mode. 7. Right-click to finish. If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.

 

 

Instead of pressing SHIFT + L or SHIFT + A to switch modes, you can use Line or Arc on the ribbon. You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an element. First, move the pointer to the element to which you want to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes a Point On the relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the line to be tangent or perpendicular. Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings of the Line or Arc modes.

See Also Arc by Center Point Command (on page 166) Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165) Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch . 2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and clear the other element types. 3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not release the mouse button. 4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the mouse button as you draw each line and arc. If you release the mouse button while you are drawing, you can start drawing at the last end point you entered. Confirm that End Point is set on the SmartSketch dialog box. 5. When you have finished, release the mouse button.  

Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.

SmartSketch User's Guide

167

Drawing Basic Elements   



When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical and the arcs as tangent to the connected elements. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines meet. You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line or an arc.

See Also FreeSketch Command (on page 184) Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

Tangent Arc Command Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point defines one end of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an element you want the arc to be tangent or perpendicular to, then the second point defines the sweep. If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by 3 Points. In this case the first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc. While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation of the arc by passing the pointer through one of the four quadrants of the first point's intent zone.

See Also Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 166) Arc Ribbon (on page 165)

Draw a Curve 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve 2. Do one of the following:  To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.



To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.

3. Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points represent nodes on the curve. You must place at least three points to draw a curve.

168

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 4. Right-click to end the curve. 

   

You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a curve, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a curve. The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always smooth. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a curve.

See Also Change the Curve Type (on page 170) Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185) Curve Ribbon (on page 171) Curve Command (on page 171)

Insert a Node into a Curve 1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node. 3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.

4. Click to insert the node. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Curve Ribbon (on page 171) Draw a Curve (on page 168)

Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) Adds a node to a curve. Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate the curve.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 170) Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 169) Draw a Curve (on page 168)

Delete a Node from a Curve 1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node.

SmartSketch User's Guide

169

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Select the node you want to delete.

 

You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Curve Ribbon (on page 171) Draw a Curve (on page 168) Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 169)

Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) Deletes a node from a curve. Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate a curve. For more information, see Curve Ribbon (on page 171).

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 169) Draw a Curve (on page 168) Delete a Node from a Curve (on page 169)

Change the Curve Type 1. Select the curve. 2. Do one of the following:  To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.  To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you want to open, and then set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open. If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the node that was automatically activated when you selected the curve.   

You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Curve Ribbon (on page 171) Draw a Curve (on page 168)

170

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Change the Node Type 1. Select the curve. 2. Select the node you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the node to: Smooth, Symmetric, or Cusp.   

You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Draw a Curve (on page 168) Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 169)

Curve Command Draws a smooth, open, or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth, symmetric and cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end point of a curve are always smooth.

See Also Draw a Curve (on page 168) Change the Curve Type (on page 170) Curve Ribbon (on page 171)

Curve Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Open — Sets the curve type to Open. Closed — Sets the curve type to Closed. The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a curve or curve element is selected. Previous Node — Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit. Next Node — Activates the next node on the curve. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

SmartSketch User's Guide

171

Drawing Basic Elements Symmetric — Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the selected node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

Smooth — Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected node. The start point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

Cusp — Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.

See Also Curve Command (on page 171) Draw a Curve (on page 168) Change the Curve Type (on page 170)

Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by 3 Points 2. Click the location to begin the primary axis.

172

.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle.

4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.

The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.    

Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an ellipse. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.

See Also Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173)

Ellipse by 3 Points Command Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.

See Also Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points (on page 172) Ellipse Ribbon (on page 173)

Ellipse Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Primary — Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the primary axis.

Secondary — Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the primary axis.

SmartSketch User's Guide

173

Drawing Basic Elements Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

See Also Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173)

Draw an Ellipse by Center Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center . 2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis. 3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. 4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis. The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.   

Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an ellipse.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174)

Ellipse by Center Point Command Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point and the next point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.

See Also Draw an Ellipse by Center Point (on page 174) Ellipse Ribbon (on page 173)

Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons To draw a rectangle or square, click Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two different points to define the shape. If you want to precisely define dimensions, you can type values into the ribbon and press ENTER.

174

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements If you place dimensions on a rectangle or square, these are always driven dimensions. This means that if you edit the value of the dimension, the object does not change. You need to edit the width and height values on the ribbon to change the dimensions of the rectangle or square. Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle or square into individual lines. If you want to place a rectangle or square that has driving dimensions, you need to select Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar and place four separate lines in the shape of a rectangle or square. You can use the Polygon and Polygon by Center , also on the Draw toolbar, to draw an n-side polygon. The default settings for both polygon commands are for drawing an isosceles triangle. However, you can use the options on the Polygon and Polygon by Center ribbons to specify the number of sides and dimension values. Each polygon that you draw is really an object of grouped lines. Consequently, after the polygon is drawn there is no way to modify its dimensions. You can, however, use Ungroup on the Relationships toolbar to separate the polygon into its individual linear elements.

See Also Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177) Polygon Command (on page 178) Rectangle Command (on page 176) Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 183) Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 175)

Draw a Rectangle or Square 1. 2. 3. 4.

On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle . Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square. Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square. Do one of the following:  To draw a rectangle, click to define the height.  To draw a square, hold the SHIFT key, and then click. The command automatically makes the height equal to the width.



Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type values in the Width, Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.

SmartSketch User's Guide

175

Drawing Basic Elements 

Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a rectangle.



You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square. If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven dimensions. You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.

 

See Also Rectangle Command (on page 176)

Rectangle Command Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and rotation angle of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can also draw a square with this command.

See Also Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 175) Rectangle Ribbon (on page 176) Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174)

Rectangle Ribbon Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square. Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square. Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

See Also Rectangle Command (on page 176) Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 183) Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 175)

Draw a Fillet Rectangle 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet Rectangle

176

.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 

2. 3. 4. 5.

If the Fillet Rectangle button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle fly-out menu and select it from the list.  When drawing a fillet rectangle, it is useful to have Maintain Relationships turned on. Use Tools > Maintain Relationships to turn this command on and off. Click a location to specify one corner of the fillet rectangle. Move the mouse, and click again to define the rotation angle and the width of the fillet rectangle. Click a third point to define the height. Move the mouse backwards or forwards to define the fillet radius.

To increase the fillet radius, move the mouse towards the center of the rectangle. To decrease the radius, move the mouse away from the center of the rectangle. 6. Click in the drawing to place the fillet rectangle.



 





The fillet rectangle is not a single object. Rather, it is a collection of eight separate elements (four lines and four arcs) with relationships. As such, if you drag a line or an arc, you can stretch the entire fillet rectangle shape horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. To modify the fillets after placement, select any one fillet and change its fillet value. Changing one fillet does not impact the other three fillets. Instead of clicking to draw the fillet rectangle, you can type values in the Width, Height, Angle, and Radius boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. When typing a value into the Radius box, you must specify a positive number that is greater than 0. Also, the fillet radius must be less than one-half the size of the rectangle width or height. For example, if the rectangle dimensions are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less than 1.5". When using the ribbon to specify dimensions, you must define the width and the height of the fillet rectangle before defining the radius.

See Also Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177)

Fillet Rectangle Command Draws a fillet rectangle using four points and a user-specified fillet radius. The first two points define the width and rotation angle of the fillet rectangle, and the third point defines the height. The fillet radius can be specified dynamically using the mouse or by typing a value on the ribbon. The fourth point defines the placement of the fillet rectangle in the drawing.

See Also Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 176) Fillet Rectangle Ribbon (on page 178) Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174)

SmartSketch User's Guide

177

Drawing Basic Elements

Fillet Rectangle Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Width - Sets the width of the fillet rectangle. Height - Sets the height of the fillet rectangle. Angle — Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. Radius - Specifies the radius of the fillet. The value must be a positive number greater than 0 and less than 1/2 the value specified for the width or height. For example, if the dimensions of the rectangle are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less than 1.5".

See Also Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177) Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 176)

Draw an N-Sided Polygon 1. Click Polygon

on the Draw toolbar.

If the Polygon button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle fly-out menu and select it from the list. 2. In the Sides field of the Polygon ribbon, define the number of sides for the polygon. Since the default value for this field is "3", leaving the value unchanged results in an isosceles triangle. 3. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon. 4. Click a second point to complete the polygon. 

 

Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to specify start and end points for the polygon, you can type values on the ribbon bar. Each mouse-click places a polygon with the specified dimensions on the sheet. You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it. By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual elements, turn off Group after Placement on the Polygon ribbon.

See Also Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174) Polygon Command (on page 178)

Polygon Command Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.

See Also Polygon by Center Command (on page 180) Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174)

178

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 178) Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 179) Polygon Ribbon (on page 179)

Polygon Ribbon Sets options for drawing a polygon. Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Defines the width of the line. Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an ungrouped collection of individual elements. Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon. Length - Sets the length of the sides for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values. Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis. The angle increases in the counter- clockwise direction.

See Also Polygon Command (on page 178) Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 178) Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 179)

Draw a Polygon by Center point 1. Click Polygon by Center

on the Draw toolbar.

If the Polygon by Center button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle fly-out menu and select it from the list. 2. Click the location where you want to place the center point. 3. Click to define the radius. Because the default value for this field is 3, leaving the value unchanged results in an isosceles triangle. 4. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon. 5. Click a second point to complete the polygon.   

Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. Each mouse- click places a polygon with the specified dimensions on the sheet. You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it. By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual elements, turn off Group after Placement on the Polygon by Center ribbon.

See Also Polygon by Center Command (on page 180) Polygon Command (on page 178) Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174)

SmartSketch User's Guide

179

Drawing Basic Elements

Polygon by Center Command Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.

See Also Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 179) Polygon Ribbon (on page 179)

Polygon by Center Ribbon Sets options for drawing a polygon by center point. Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Defines the width of the line. Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an ungrouped collection of individual elements. Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon. Radius - Sets the length of the radius for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values. Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis. The angle increases in the counter- clockwise direction.

See Also Polygon by Center Command (on page 180) Polygon Command (on page 178) Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 179)

Drawing FreeForm Shapes As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by clicking and typing values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly sketch a design and let the software convert it into a precision drawing. FreeSketch and FreeForm allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the software convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch draws lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles, and FreeForm draws curves (splines). These commands can be found under Curve .

180

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in free space or use key points or end points of elements as reference points.

How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the pointer, the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns the sketch into a precise drawing. You can control the accuracy of the shape recognition using the ribbon options.

FreeSketch and FreeForm Options FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch interprets mouse movements. When Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as tangent. The first figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is set.

The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust Off is set.

FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse movements when drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing On is set.

SmartSketch User's Guide

181

Drawing Basic Elements The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing Off is set.

See Also Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185) Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 182) Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 182) Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 183) Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 183)

Draw a Line with FreeSketch 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch . 2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.

     

Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical when you finish drawing. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line.

See Also FreeSketch Command (on page 184) Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 184)

Draw a Circle with FreeSketch 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch 2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle.

   

182

Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer movements as a circle. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 

You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) FreeSketch Command (on page 184)

Draw an Arc with FreeSketch You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that are tangent to other elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch . 2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to draw an arc.

     

Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the connected elements. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the arc. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) FreeSketch Command (on page 184) Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180)

Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch

.

If FreeSketch is not displayed, click the Curve fly-out menu and select it from the list. 2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other Element Type buttons.

SmartSketch User's Guide

183

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle.

   

Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a rectangle or square. You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.

See Also Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) FreeSketch Command (on page 184) Rectangle Command (on page 176)

FreeSketch Command Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing. You can specify which of these elements you want to draw using the ribbon.

See Also Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 182) Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 182) Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185) Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 183) Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 183) FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 184)

FreeSketch Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Adjust On — Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal or vertical in the precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough sketch as tangent in the precision drawing. Adjust Off — Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your rough sketch. Line — Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch. Arc — Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch. Circle — Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch. Rectangle — Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.

184

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Draw a Curve with FreeForm 1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm 2. Drag to draw a curve.        

.

Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or cusp curves. You can use relationships to draw a curve that is tangent or perpendicular at its start point and end point. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles. You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key point of an element. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a curve.

See Also Draw a Curve (on page 168) Change the Curve Type (on page 170) Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

FreeForm Command Draws freeform curves, or splines.

See Also Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180) Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185) FreeForm Ribbon (on page 185) Drawing Diagrams (on page 88) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

FreeForm Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Smoothing On — Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the precision drawing by recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch. Smoothing Off — Draws elements that closely resemble the movements of your pointer, without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves.

SmartSketch User's Guide

185

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) FreeForm Command (on page 185) Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185) Drawing Diagrams (on page 88)

Creating Isometric Drawings If you want to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes, you can create an isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the drawing in perspective or from another angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning the elements and objects in a drawing along three major axes.

SmartSketch supplies several tools to create these types of documents:  Isometric Rectangle  Isometric Circle  Isometric Line  Segmented Styles You can also use Customize on the Tools menu to place the isometric drawing commands on a toolbar. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw in the Categories list, and then drag the various Isometric buttons to an existing toolbar or use them to create your own toolbar.

See Also Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 191) Draw an Isometric Line (on page 189) Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 187)

186

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Draw an Isometric Circle 1. Click Isometric Circle

on the Isometric toolbar.

If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

2. Click a point to define the center point of the isometric circle. 3. Click a second point to complete the circle. You cannot drag the pointer to draw the circle.  

You can set the plane on which to place the circle by setting options on the ribbon. You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Circle command. Click View > Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the Categories list, and drag the Isometric Circle button to an existing toolbar.

See Also Isometric Circle Command (on page 188) Isometric Circle Ribbon (on page 188) Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186)

SmartSketch User's Guide

187

Drawing Basic Elements

Isometric Circle Command Allows you to draw an isometric circle. You can use this button to create 2D circles that look like 3D circles.

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools > Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands checkbox, and click OK.

See Also Isometric Toolbar (on page 46) Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 187)

Isometric Circle Ribbon Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Top - Allows you to draw the circle on the top plane.

Left - Allows you to draw the circle on the left plane.

Right - Allows you to draw the circle on the right plane.

Diameter - Sets the diameter of the isometric circle. Radius - Defines the radius of the isometric circle.

188

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Isometric Circle Command (on page 188) Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186) Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 187)

Draw an Isometric Line 1. Click Isometric Line

.

If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

2. Click a point to start the line. 3. Click a point to complete the line. You cannot drag the pointer to draw the line.  

You can set the angle for placing the line by setting options on the ribbon bar. You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Line. Click View > Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the Categories list, and drag the Isometric Line button to an existing toolbar.

See Also Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186) Isometric Line Command (on page 190) Isometric Line Ribbon (on page 190)

SmartSketch User's Guide

189

Drawing Basic Elements

Isometric Line Command Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric drawing. This command creates 2D lines that look like they are in a 3D plane.

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools > Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands checkbox, and click OK.

See Also Isometric Toolbar (on page 46) Draw an Isometric Line (on page 189)

Isometric Line Ribbon Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Length - Sets the length of the isometric line. Angle - Sets the angle of the isometric line.

See Also Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186) Isometric Line Command (on page 190) Draw an Isometric Line (on page 189)

190

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements

Draw an Isometric Rectangle 1. Click Isometric Rectangle

.

If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.

To confirm that the isometric rectangle consists of lines that remain connected when you relocate them using the Select Tool command, turn on Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If this option is not on, Isometric Rectangle creates a rectangle composed of four separate lines that do not stay connected if you move each line. 2. Click a point to start defining the rectangle base. 3. Click a second point to complete the rectangle base. 4. Click a third point to complete the rectangle. You cannot drag the pointer to draw the rectangle. To set the plane on which to place the rectangle, you can set options on the ribbon.

See Also Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186) Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 192) Isometric Rectangle Ribbon (on page 192)

SmartSketch User's Guide

191

Drawing Basic Elements

Isometric Rectangle Command Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. You can use this command to create 2D rectangles that look like 3D rectangles.

To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools > Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands checkbox, and click OK.

See Also Isometric Toolbar (on page 46) Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 191)

Isometric Rectangle Ribbon Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Top - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the top plane.

Left - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the left plane.

Right - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the right plane.

Width - Sets the width of the isometric rectangle. Height - Sets the height of the isometric rectangle.

192

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186) Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 192) Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 191)

Format Part of an Element 1. Click Segmented Style

on the Isometric toolbar.



To enable the Isometric toolbar, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.  After you enable the Isometric Toolbar Commands add-in, you can use View > Toolbars to toggle on/off the Isometric toolbar. 2. On the ribbon, click the style or colors that you want to apply to part of an element. 3. Click the element to which you want to apply the style. The format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color.

 

Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element. If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color by using Segmented Style.

Segmented Style Command Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element. When you apply the line type, line weight, or color, the format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color. This is handy if you want to change the appearance of just part of an element.

If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color using Segmented Style. Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element.

See Also Isometric Toolbar (on page 46) Format Part of an Element (on page 193)

SmartSketch User's Guide

193

Drawing Basic Elements

Using Scaled Sketching In drawings, you can have multiple embedded views on a drawing sheet that are at different model scales (e.g. 1/4" = 1' and 1/8" = 1'). You can add graphics to the views and treat them as if they were actual model graphics. Use the Scaled Sketching command to draw all graphics at a consistent scale factor. The scale factor used is based on a user-selected SmartFrame.

See Also Scaled Sketching Command (on page 195) Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 195) Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 194)

Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar Follow the steps below to add the custom Scaled Sketching command to SmartSketch. 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools. 3. Select and drag the Scaled Sketch icon to a place on your toolbar. Now you can use the command from SmartSketch. This command will be available each time you open SmartSketch.

See Also Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 194) Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 195)

Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw or edit objects at a specific scale factor. Make sure you have added the Scaled Sketching command to your SmartSketch toolbar. See Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar (on page 194). 1. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.

Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 195) 2. To set the color of any objects not being edited using the scale factor, click Select color for referenced data . Click on the desired color from the color palette.

194

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Basic Elements 3. Insert a SmartFrame (see Working with Object, Linking and Embedding (on page 451)) and set the scale factor of the SmartFrame, or click on an existing SmartFrame. The scale is read and taken from that SmartFrame. The selected scale type is displayed in the Scaled Sketching ribbon.  

Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command. To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display at the value in which they were drawn. 4. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode to start drawing at the selected scale. The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value. 5. Use the application's drawing/editing commands to draw the desired graphics. 6. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.  



The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the document are retained. Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot undo any previous edits. The Undo command becomes enabled once you continue working in SmartSketch. Leaders must be placed on objects (Labels, Text Boxes, and so forth) that were placed during Scaled Sketch mode. If the objects were not placed during Scaled Sketch mode, the leader is not remembered in the SmartFrame after the view is updated.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Scaled Sketching Command Enables you to edit or draw new objects at a scale that is different from the drawing scale for the active sheet. You can select a SmartFrame in the current document. The system then uses the scale factor of that SmartFrame.

See Also Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 194) Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 195)

Scaled Sketching Ribbon The Scaled Sketching ribbon displays when you click Scaled Sketching on the SmartSketch toolbar. Select color for referenced data - displays a color palette for you to set the color of any objects not being edited using the scale factor. Scale Setting - displays the scale taken from the selected SmartFrame. Enter Scaled Sketch Mode - starts the system in using the scale factor for objects being drawn or edited. Finish - ends the scale mode.

SmartSketch User's Guide

195

Drawing Basic Elements See Also Scaled Sketching Command (on page 195) Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 194)

196

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 6

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements The software provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements. You can quickly move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto a drawing sheet. Moving or copying elements saves you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project.

Selecting Elements You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color. When an element is highlighted you can click to select it. You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements. You can also use a tool called QuickPick to select elements that overlap. To use it, hover the Select Tool pointer over the elements. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click to display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers; when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.

Moving Elements The software provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an element with the Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. You can also use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position on your drawing.

Copying Elements You can copy elements with one of many methods:  You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The selected item is placed on the Clipboard. Then, when you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet. The element will not change from its original form.  You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. After the pointer changes to show that the element can be copied, hold the CTRL key and drag the copy to its new location.  Formatting, such as line weight, line color, and line style, can be copied from selected objects and applied to other objects as they are selected using Format Painter on the Main toolbar.  You can make several copies of elements that are the same by selecting the element and clicking Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.  You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar to create copies.

SmartSketch User's Guide

197

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements Cutting and Deleting Elements You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the current document or into other documents. If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be permanently removed from the document. You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and pressing Delete on your keyboard. You can also permanently remove an element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar and then selecting Delete.

See Also Moving Elements (on page 210) Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213) Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219)

Display the Change Toolbar 

On the Main toolbar, click the Change icon

.

See Also Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219) Rotating Elements (on page 331) Moving Elements (on page 210) Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213) Mirroring Elements (on page 334) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Selecting Elements To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar. You can select lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can also select element groups, embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles on elements that indicate relationships.

Selecting Single Elements To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color. When an element is highlighted, you can click to select it. When you select an individual element, the following things happen:  The element changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color using Options on the Tools menu.  The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected element, such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify the element—drag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can select more than one element at a time, only one element can have handles at a time.  The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon.

198

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements 

If the element is linked or embedded into the current document, selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the selection color.

Selecting Multiple Elements You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements. You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely enclosed by the fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by the fence. Many manipulation commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate, act upon all elements in the selection set.

Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot highlight the element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a tool called QuickPick. To use it, hover the pointer over the exact intersection of the elements. When the software displays an ellipsis, or three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a small toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.

Clearing Elements To clear an element or a group of elements, you can click any point on the drawing sheet.

See Also Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214) Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202)

Select an Element 1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Do one of the following:  To select one element, click it.  To select more than one element hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each element.  To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects.  To select one of several overlapping elements, use QuickPick.  To select all elements, click Ctrl + A or right-click in the Drawing sheet and click Select All.

To select an element with QuickPick QuickPick helps you to select elements that overlap each other. 1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there.

SmartSketch User's Guide

199

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements 2. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the QuickPick toolbar near the pointer, with a button for each selectable element.

3. Move the pointer over QuickPick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.

4. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the QuickPick toolbar.

To clear a selection Do one of the following:  Click in free space.  Right-click in free space.  Select another element without holding the Shift or Ctrl key.  To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click the element while holding the Shift key.   

When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it. You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options. You can change the element highlight and selection colors with Options on the Tools menu.

See Also Select Tool (on page 201) Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements (on page 204) Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202)

200

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Select Tool Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify, and manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.

See Also Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214) Select Tool Ribbon (on page 201)

Select Tool Ribbon The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. After you select an object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for editing the selected object. To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Inside — Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected. Overlapping — Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as well as elements inside the fence. Top Down — Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to individual elements in a group. Bottom Up — Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as opposed to the whole group. Expand — Displays another ribbon depending on the items that you selected on the drawing sheet. This button appears when you select ten or more items on the drawing sheet. When you click it, another ribbon appears. The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For example, if you select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select several types of items, then only the common properties for those types of elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For example, if you select nine lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type, Width, and Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the Help topic for the selected element's ribbon. If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will appear if you click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten lines and then click Expand, a ribbon does not appear.

See Also Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214)

SmartSketch User's Guide

201

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Select All Command Selects all visible elements in a window. In addition to clicking Edit > Select All, you can also access this command when you position the pointer in the document and right-click.

See Also Selecting Elements (on page 198)

Select Elements Using SmartSelect 1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect . 2. On the SmartSelect toolbar, select the type of fence placement - Rectangle or Polygon . Complete one of the following actions:  Click Inside Fence on the SmartSelect toolbar to select all elements entirely inside the fence.  Click Overlapping Fence to select all elements entirely inside the fence and those elements outside but touching the fence at some point. 3. Place a fence around the elements you want to select by following the prompts in the Status Bar. -orClick Chain Selection and click on an element that is endpoint-connected to other elements. All endpoint-connected elements are automatically selected. 4. To locate groups of elements as opposed to individual elements in a group, click Top Down on the SmartSelect toolbar. -orClick Bottom Up group.

to locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole

You can click Locate Filter selected.

to define the types of drawing elements that can be

See Also SmartSelect Command (on page 202) SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203)

SmartSelect Command Opens a ribbon bar that provides different ways to create select sets. You can create a select set by:  Drawing a rectangular or polygonal fence around elements based on points that you define.  Using the Chain Selection command to select an element and all elements that are chained or connected to the element based on endpoint connection.  Using the Invert Selection command to clear the current element select set while adding new elements to the select set.

See Also SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203) Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements (on page 203)

202

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

SmartSelect Ribbon Rectangle - select elements defined by a rectangular fence. Drag the mouse to define a dynamic rectangular shape. Release the mouse to select the element(s) inside or overlapping the fence boundary. Creates a select area, or fence, by drawing a rectangle around points that you define. When you drag the mouse to define a rectangular fence, a dashed rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the correct size, release the mouse button to create the fence. The dashed fence outline disappears and the elements are selected. Polygon - select elements defined by a polygon-shaped fence. Click the mouse to define points for a dynamic polygon shape. Right-click the mouse to select the element(s) inside or overlapping the fence boundary. Chain Selection - select other elements that are endpoint-connected to the selected element. Inside - select elements inside a rectangular or polygon fence. Overlapping - select elements overlapped by a rectangular or polygon fence as well as elements inside the fence. Top Down - locate groups as opposed to individual elements in a group. Bottom Up - locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole group. Turn Filter On/Off - turn filtering for drawing elements on or off. When filtering is turned off, the Locate Filter command is disabled. Locate Filter - Opens the Define Locate Filter Dialog Box (on page 204) to specify the type(s) of drawing elements that can be selected. Invert Selection - remove selected elements from the select set while adding new elements to the select set.

See Also SmartSelect Command (on page 202) Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202)

Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements Use the Chain Selection command in the Select by SmartSelect ribbon to select multiple elements that are endpoint-connected. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect

.

2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Chain Selection . 3. Click to select a single element in the current drawing. Elements that are endpoint-connected to that selected element are also selected. Flter settings determine the type(s) of elements that can be selected. Use the Locate Filter command in the SmartSelect ribbon to specify the type(s) of drawing elements to be selected.

See Also Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements (on page 204) Selecting Elements (on page 198) Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202)

SmartSketch User's Guide

203

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Invert Selection Command Removes selected elements from the select set while adding unselected elements to the select set. The Invert Selection command is in the SmartSelect ribbon. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect

.

2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Invert Selection . 3. Elements in the active select set are cleared, and unselected elements are added to the active select set. Filter settings also determine the types of elements that can be selected. Use the Locate Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon to set the types of drawing elements to be selected.

See Also Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements (on page 204) SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203)

Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements The Locate Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon allows you to specify the type(s) of drawing elements selected. Follow the steps below to set up element filtering. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect . 2. From the Select by SmartSelect ribbon, use the Turn Filter On/Off toggle button to turn on filtering (the button will be pressed in). 3. Click Locate Filter . 4. From the Define Locate Filter dialog box, specify the desired element type(s) for selection. 5. Click OK to apply the filter.

See Also SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203) Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202) Define Locate Filter Dialog Box (on page 204)

Define Locate Filter Dialog Box Specifies the type(s) of elements selected with SmartSelect. Click Locate Filter on the SmartSelect toolbar to display this dialog box. Click to specify the element types from the list. This command is inactive if filtering has been turned off. Use the Turn Filtering On/Off command on the SmartSelect ribbon to enable and disable the use of filters during element selection.

See Also Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202) SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203) Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements (on page 204)

204

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Undo Actions Do one of the following:  To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo 

To undo more than one action, click Undo List actions you want to undo.

.

on the Main toolbar, and then select the

You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List button on the Main toolbar. You can place the button by selecting Tools > Customize > Edit, and then dragging it over to the Main toolbar. When operations are performed in the or in the SmartSketch Drawing Console, any actions in the SmartSketch Undo buffer are removed. Consequently, any undo actions must be performed manually.

See Also Redo Actions (on page 205)

Undo Command Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box.

Undo List Command (Edit Menu) Reverses an action based on what you select on the list.  You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options.  View manipulations are not included in the action list. To use Undo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag it over to a menu or the Main toolbar.

See Also Options Command (on page 464) Redo Actions (on page 205)

Redo Actions Do one of the following:  To reverse the most recent Undo action, click Redo on the Main toolbar. The Redo command is not enabled until an Undo action has been performed. 

To reverse more than one Undo action, click Redo List want to perform.

, and then select the actions you

You can perform a redo list action only if you have placed Redo List on a menu or on the Main toolbar. Select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag the button over to the menu or Main toolbar.

See Also Undo Actions (on page 205)

SmartSketch User's Guide

205

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Redo Command Reverses the most recent Undo action performed.

See Also Redo Actions (on page 205) Drawing Diagrams (on page 88) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Redo List Command Lists the most recent Redo actions if multiple Undo operations have been performed. To use Redo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then place it on a menu or on the Main toolbar.

See Also Options Command (on page 464) Redo Actions (on page 205) Undo Actions (on page 205)

Finding Elements The software has the ability to find items in your drawing. You can define search criteria based on an item type already placed in your drawing. When you have found all drawing items of a certain type, you can modify their properties or reposition them. When you find drawing items, the selected items are added to a select set. You can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them, if appropriate.

See Also Placing Symbols (on page 392) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Drawing Connectors (on page 149) Create a Template (on page 143)

Find a SmartSketch Object 1. Click Edit > Find. You can also click Ctrl + F to execute the Find command. 2. In the Find dialog box, use the options on the various tabs to define your search criteria. 3. Click Find Now to execute the search. 



Objects that match the specified search criteria appear as selected on the SmartSketch Drawing sheet. These objects are added to the select set. You can select Clear to void the results of the previous search and specify new search criteria. You can select Reset to return the Find options to their default settings.



You can use Tools > Customize to place the Find button



206

on a toolbar.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find Dialog Box (on page 207)

Find Command Searches for objects within a SmartSketch document based upon criteria you define. Instead of scouring each sheet in your SmartSketch document, you can use the Find command to locate geometric elements and symbols that have a specific format or a specific set of defined attributes. First, define your search criteria in the Find dialog box, and then execute the search. Items that match the defined criteria appear selected on the Drawing sheet.

See Also Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206) Find Dialog Box (on page 207)

Find Dialog Box Provides options for locating matching information or formatting, throughout a SmartSketch document. You can define your search criteria to look for as many (or as few) SmartSketch object types as you wish. Options for defining and refining search criteria can be found on the following tabs:

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206) Type Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 207) Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208) Style Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208) Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208) Text Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 209) General Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 209)

Type Tab (Find Dialog Box) Specifies the type of SmartSketch element, object, or attribute you wish to find. You can define the parameters of your search to encompass a wide- range of items, including geometric elements, SmartSketch symbols, or a variety of attributes. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

SmartSketch User's Guide

207

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box) Sets options for performing a search based on color, line weight, and line type. Color - Specifies the drawing color used in the search criteria. Width - Defines the line width used in the search criteria. Type - Specifies the drawing line type used in the search criteria. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset -Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

Style Tab (Find Dialog Box) Defines search criteria based on style attributes. Linear - Specifies the line style used in the search criteria. Fill - Specifies the type of fill used in the search criteria. Dimension - Specifies the type of dimension used in the search criteria. Text - Specifies the type of text used in the search criteria. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box) Specifies the layer of the SmartSketch document on which to conduct the search. Two options are available by default: All layers or the Default layer; however, if you have created additional layers in the SmartSketch document, they are also displayed. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

208

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements Text Tab (Find Dialog Box) Sets search criteria based upon text-based options. Text boxes and labels - Specifies the text string used in the search criteria. Attribute names - Specifies the attribute name used in the search criteria. Attribute values - Specifies the attribute value used in the search criteria. Match case - Limits the search criteria to include only the text with the same capitalization as the Text boxes and labels text. Bold - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is bold. Italics - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is italicized. Underline - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is underlined. Font name - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font name specified. Font size - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font size specified. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

General Tab (Find Dialog Box) Refines your search criteria to include a specific symbol name. Symbol name - Specifies the name of the symbol to be located when the search executes. Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet. Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in the SmartSketch drawing are cleared. Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.

See Also Find Command (on page 207) Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)

SmartSketch User's Guide

209

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Moving Elements You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods:   

Dragging elements with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. Specifying precision points with Move/Copy on the Change toolbar. Moving elements in small increments with Nudge on the Change toolbar. You can also click Scale

and Rotate

on the Change toolbar to move elements.

Using the Select Tool To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can drag the selected element to move it without changing its shape.

The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move it. If they are displayed, and you want to move the element and not modify it, position the pointer so it is not over a handle.

You can move an element with precision if you use the relationship indicators.

When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to honor the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a maintained parallel relationship with another element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a line and an arc share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.

Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select the line and click Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line moves without maintaining the relationship with the arc. You can then specify a 'from' point and a 'to' point by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying precision points with Move.

210

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements See Also Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Move an Element (on page 211) Move an Element Precisely (on page 212)

Move an Element 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Move

.

3. If you want to copy the elements, click Copy on the ribbon. 4. Click to define the 'from' point. 5. Click to define the 'to' point. After the elements move, the relationships with other elements are not maintained.   

 

   

You can click Move before you select elements to move. Using the Move command on the Change toolbar will break any relationships the element may have. You must move an element with the Select Tool (on page 211) to maintain its relationships. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can hold down the CTRL key while you click to position the elements. You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the "to" point. The values are relative distances along the x and y axes. You must click to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the selection set. When you move or copy elements, the "to" point becomes the next "from" point. The software maintains relationships within the select set if they are still applicable after you have moved or copied the elements. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while you are using Move. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Move at the point where you left off.

See Also Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Move Command (on page 212) Move Ribbon (on page 212)

Move an Element with the Select Tool 1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool . 2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. 3. Drag the element to its new position.

Move an element with precision 1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool . 2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location where the software recognizes a key point. 3. Begin to drag the element. 4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another element, or a relationship between the element you are moving and another element.

SmartSketch User's Guide

211

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the pointer away from any of the element's handles. Dragging a handle modifies the element instead of moving it.

See Also Moving Elements (on page 210) Selecting Elements (on page 198)

Move an Element Precisely You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position in your drawing. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool

.

2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . 3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be. 4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element. 5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element. PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag. 6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.

See Also Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

Move Command Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move one or more elements at a time, and you can move element groups.

See Also Move an Element (on page 211) Move an Element Precisely (on page 212) Move Ribbon (on page 212)

Move Ribbon Specifies the "from" point and "to" point when you move objects or elements. Copy — Copies the elements in the selection set. Step Distance — Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon boxes. For example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away from the "from" point would increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth. X — Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.

See Also Move Command (on page 212) Move an Element (on page 211) Move an Element Precisely (on page 212)

212

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Nudge an Element 1. Select a graphical object in the SmartSketch drawing. You can select multiple objects using the Ctrl key. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Nudge . 3. In the Delta box, specify a delta value to control how much the object moves. 4. Use the arrow keys to "nudge" the object or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, down). You can use Ctrl + arrow keys to move the object or select set a small delta. The Nudge command stays active until you select another command.

See Also Nudge Command (on page 213) Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211) Move Ribbon (on page 212)

Nudge Command Moves an element or a select set in small increments. You use the Delta box on the Nudge ribbon to define the size of the increment, and then use the arrow keys to "nudge" the element or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, and down).

See Also Move Command (on page 212) Nudge an Element (on page 213)

Copying and Pasting Elements You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking Copy on the Main toolbar. Copying places the selected item on the Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet. You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar, select the element, and press CTRL as you drag the element across the drawing sheet. You can also copy several selected elements in the same manner. When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied and retained when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related lines, the relationship is also copied. However, if you copy one of two lines that are related to each other, the relationship is not copied.

See Also Copy an Element (on page 213) Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214) Paste an Element (on page 215)

Copy an Element 1. Select an element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

213

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements You can also click CTRL + C to copy the selected element.  

After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents. When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you copied. To see the pasted element, you must drag it.

See Also Copy Command (on page 214) Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213)

Copy an Element with the Select Tool 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool . 2. Select one or more elements. 3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the element can now be copied. 4. Hold the CTRL key and drag the copy to its new location.

See Also Copy Command (on page 214) Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213)

Copy Command Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the elements are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a relationship with an element that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.

See Also Copy an Element (on page 213) Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214)

Copy a Format 1. Click the object with the formatting you want to copy. 2. Click Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) (on page 215) 3. Click another object to apply the new formatting. 

 

214

.

If a connector with a line terminator is selected as the object from which to copy, the terminator will be added to any other linear geometry selected with the Format Painter. This is the only way to apply terminators to linear geometry that is not a connector. You can apply format changes to multiple objects by dragging a fence around the desired objects. When copying a format from text to geometry, or vice versa, only the color is applied.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected object and applies it to other objects as they are selected. The two objects do not have to be similar. Format Painter will format all objects including text, dimensions, and groups; however, it will not re-format symbols

See Also Copy a Format (on page 214)

Paste an Element You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, and then paste the elements into the current document or another document. 1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste

.

You can also press CTRL + V to paste elements on the Clipboard into your document.     

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Copy or Cut again. You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty. You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste. If you are unable to see the symbol, element, fill, or document that you pasted into your SmartSketch drawing, click Fit on the Main toolbar Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste.

See Also Copy Command (on page 214) Cut Command (on page 220) Paste Command (on page 215)

Paste Command Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.

See Also Paste an Element (on page 215) Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 216)

SmartSketch User's Guide

215

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Paste an Element with a Different Format 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Cut or copy the element you want to paste. Click Edit > Paste Special. To embed the information, click Paste. To link the information, click Paste Link. In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the information. To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current document, click OK.

  

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Paste Special again. You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty. If you select an element as the insertion point and that element cannot be replaced, the Clipboard contents are not pasted at the insertion point. You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special. You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point. If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the document, the software replaces the selected data with the contents of the Clipboard. Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste Special.

   

See Also Paste Special Command (on page 216)

Paste Special Command Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. This command is available only on the Edit menu.

See Also Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 216) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 216)

Paste Special Dialog Box Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.

See Also Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 216)

Offset Elements You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select Offset before you select the elements. 1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset .

216

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements 2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset. 3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to offset the selected elements. 4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.

 

If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main toolbar. To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.

See Also Associative Offset Command (on page 218) Offset Command (on page 217) Associative Offset Command (on page 218)

Offset Command Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This command copies elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs and circles. Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element.

Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.

See Also Offset Ribbon (on page 218) Offset Elements (on page 216)

SmartSketch User's Guide

217

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Offset Ribbon Select Chain — Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is not selected, Offset selects only an individual element. Step Distance — Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy. Cumulative Offset — Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic element from the original graphic element. The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and cumulative offset (B).

See Also Offset Command (on page 217) Associative Offset Command (on page 218) Offset Elements (on page 216)

Associative Offset Command Draws an offset copy of a curve and applies an offset relation. This command copies elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs and circles. Associative Offset copies the original curve geometry at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element. The Associative Offset command is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, select Manipulation under Categories to display the Associative Offset button.

See Also Offset Elements (on page 216) Associative Offset Ribbon (on page 219)

218

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements Associative Offset Ribbon Associative offsets - Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.

See Also Associative Offset Command (on page 218) Offset Command (on page 217) Offset Elements (on page 216)

Cutting or Deleting Elements To delete elements, select the elements and click Cut on the main toolbar or press DELETE on the keyboard. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in another location. Pressing DELETE removes the element permanently. Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are automatically deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is deleted from the remaining line.

See Also Cut Command (on page 220) Delete Command (on page 219) Cut an Element (on page 220)

Delete an Element 1. Select an element. 2. Do one of the following:  Click Edit > Delete.  On the keyboard, press DELETE. When you delete an element and its relationships, the relationships are not pasted to the Clipboard and cannot be reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its relationships by immediately using Undo.

See Also Cut Command (on page 220) Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219) Delete Command (on page 219)

Delete Command Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this command. However, you can retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.

SmartSketch User's Guide

219

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements See Also Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219) Delete an Element (on page 219)

Cut an Element 1. Select an element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut

.

You can also press CTRL + X to cut the selected element. 



After you cut an element and its relationships from a document, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents. When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements from a document deletes the relationships. If there is a relationship between a selected element and an unselected element, you can do one of the following:  Cut and paste only the selected element.  Cut and paste both elements and their relationship.  Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then reconnect the relationship to another element.

See Also Cut Command (on page 220) Delete Command (on page 219) Paste Command (on page 215)

Cut Command Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.

See Also Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219) Cut an Element (on page 220)

Creating Patterns Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the same without using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting one or more elements and making several copies of it with Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the toolbar.

To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual member of the pattern and change it the way you would any other element.

See Also Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 222) Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 221)

220

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Draw a Rectangular Pattern 1. Select one or more elements to pattern.

2. On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern . 3. To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options on the ribbon. 4. On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to Rectangle. Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows. 5. On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern and click to identify the opposite corner of the pattern. 6. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.

If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.

See Also Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 223) Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221) Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 222)

Rectangular Pattern Command Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.

See Also Creating Patterns (on page 220) Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 221) Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 222)

Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.  Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set offset between members.  Fit to rectangle — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x and y axes of the pattern rectangle. Stagger — Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix, or whether every other row or column is offset from its default position. Options are None, for a straight matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows, and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns. Stagger — Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance. Stagger = 1/2 offset — Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X Offset or Y Offset value. Include last column — Controls whether to include the last staggered column in the pattern or to exclude the last column.

SmartSketch User's Guide

221

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.

See Also Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)

Rectangular Pattern Ribbon Options — Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box. X count — Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern rectangle. Y count — Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern rectangle. X offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the x axis of the pattern rectangle. Y offset — Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the y axis of the pattern rectangle. Angle — Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle. Finish — Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is created on the drawing sheet and you can select other elements.

See Also Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)

Draw a Circular Pattern 1. Select one or more elements to pattern.

2. On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern . 3. Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be. 4. Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows. 5. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.

If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.

See Also Circular Pattern Command (on page 222) Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 223) Creating Patterns (on page 220)

Circular Pattern Command Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.

See Also Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 223) Creating Patterns (on page 220) Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 222)

222

SmartSketch User's Guide

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Circular Pattern Ribbon Options — Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box. Count — Sets the number of copies in the pattern. Rows — Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is available only when Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Multiple inward or Multiple outward. Angle — Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between pattern members when Pattern control on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Incremental array. This box also sets the total sweep angle when Pattern control is set to Fit to arc. Row spacing — Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the pattern, as measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next. The bottom is the side closest to the center point of the circular pattern.

See Also Circular Pattern Command (on page 222) Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 222)

Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box Pattern control — Specifies how the pattern is constructed.  Incremental array — Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between members.  Fit to arc — Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc. Rows — Controls how pattern rows are arranged. Single row — Draws a single row of pattern members. Multiple inward — Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center than the last. Multiple outward — Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the pattern center than the last. Preview — Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.

See Also Circular Pattern Command (on page 222) Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 223) Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 222)

SmartSketch User's Guide

223

Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

224

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 7

Adding Text to Documents You can add text to documents using different types of tools:  Placing Annotations (on page 225), such as text boxes and balloons.  Labels (on page 250), such as text labels and SmartLabels. You also can add text using a drag-and-drop operation. For example, you can drag an Excel spreadsheet to a document to create a bill of materials.

See Also Engineering Fonts (on page 254) Place a Text Box (on page 230) Place a SmartLabel (on page 252) Create a Text Label (on page 251) Place a Revision Cloud (on page 242)

Placing Annotations An essential part of the drawing process is adding text, notes, and annotations. Annotations are text and graphics that give information about a drawing. You can add this information quickly and easily with the text and annotation commands in the software. To place annotations in a document, you can click one of the following buttons:  Text Box on the Draw toolbar



Balloon on the Dimension toolbar

SmartSketch User's Guide

225

Adding Text to Documents Annotations with Leaders When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options on the ribbon. The leader can point to another element or be placed in free space. Annotations with leaders have the following components:

(A)

Leader line

(B)

Break line

(C)

Graphic end

(D)

Annotation

You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of it. You can control the display of a leader break line and the graphic end and insert or delete vertices on a leader.

Adding Leaders You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader on the Dimension toolbar. All leaders have two ends - the notation end and the graphic end. The notation end, or the end that describes something, is often attached to a text box or the annotation itself; the graphic end is the end near the object being described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot on it. An annotation can have more than one leader. The graphic end of the annotation can point to an element or be placed in free space. The notation end of a new leader must connect to an annotation or the leader on an annotation.

226

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader to it with Leader

.

Annotations and Associations Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation moves when its associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other annotations in that they are always non-associative. If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves with the element.

If you point the graphic end of a leader to free space, the annotation is not associative to any element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative, you can select the graphic end of the leader and drag it to an element.

Formatting Annotations You can format an annotation several ways. If you want several annotations to look the same, you can apply a style by selecting it on the ribbon. You can apply dimension styles to balloons, but not text boxes. You can apply text styles to text boxes. If you want to format an existing balloon, click the balloon leader to select the balloon. Then, you can change the format of the balloon. If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit its properties with the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.

See Also Place a Balloon (on page 239) Place a Text Box (on page 230) Add a Leader (on page 245) Move an Annotation (on page 228)

SmartSketch User's Guide

227

Adding Text to Documents

Move an Annotation 1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the parts of the annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a part of the annotation or a handle.

2. Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new location. The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move an annotation. The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of an annotation.

To move a terminator 1. When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator handle to a new location along the element. If you drag the handle off the end of an open element, such as a line, an extension line automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.

228

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents 2. When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the terminator by holding the ALT key while you drag the terminator handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator in free space.

3. To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator handle to an element. The terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator connected to an element.

To move a leader line 1. Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The break line and annotation move and the leader line changes in length, but not orientation.

2. If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move the leader away from the annotation and attach it to another annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag the handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.

To move a handle Click a leader line and do one of the following: 1. Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.

SmartSketch User's Guide

229

Adding Text to Documents 2. Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and annotation.

3. Drag a vertex handle to a new location.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Place a Text Box 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box . 2. To place a text box, drag to define the location and size of the text box. To see the text box, begin typing text.  



   

When you place text by this method, the width measures exactly between the two points. Text is wrapped, if necessary. The height measures at least the height between the two points. If necessary, the height of the text box increases to fit all of the text.

To place a text box, you can also click a point, and begin typing text. When you place text by this method, the height and width are set to Auto mode. The size of the text box increases automatically to contain all of the text. The text does not wrap. You can also place a text box by double-clicking any element. A blinking pointer appears below or in the center of the element. You can press Enter to create a new line in a text box. When you are in edit mode, a border appears around the text box. To place a callout, you can add a leader to the text box using Leader on the Dimension toolbar.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Text Box Handles Text box handles manipulate the origin or the size of the text box while maintaining the relationship between origin and justification.

230

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents Handles on text boxes appear as an X square, a hollow square, or a solid square.

  

An X handle indicates the origin of the text box. Selecting an X handle modifies the origin. If you select a hollow handle, you move the text box; therefore, you are moving the origin of the text box. You select a solid handle to modify the text box along at least one axis. You do not modify the origin.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225) Place a Text Box (on page 230)

Text Box Command Places a text box in a document.

You can find this command on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.

See Also Text Box Ribbon (on page 231) Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Place a Text Box (on page 230)

Text Box Ribbon Formats a text box. To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Style — Lists and applies the available styles. Font — Lists and applies the available fonts. Font Size — Applies a text size. Text Color — Sets the color of the font. Bold — Makes text bold. Italic — Italicizes text. Underline — Underlines text. Paragraph Alignment — Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area edges in edit mode. You can also align the paragraph after you select text. Border — Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to display no border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow. More — Displays more options on the ribbon. Height — Sets the height of the text box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

231

Adding Text to Documents Width — Sets the width of the text box. 

If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is driving the dimension.  If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto Save. The same is true for Width.  If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you drag a text box, Width is not available. Angle — Sets the angle of the text box. Horizontal Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the document. Vertical Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the document.

See Also Resize a Text Box (on page 238) Format a Text Box (on page 440) Place a Text Box (on page 230)

More Text Box Ribbon Commands Height — Sets the height of the text box. Width — Sets the width of the text box. 

If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is driving the dimension.  If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto Save. The same is true for Width.  If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you drag a text box, Width is not available. Angle — Sets the angle of the text box. Horizontal Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the document. Vertical Text Orientation — Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the document.

Text Box Properties Dialog Box Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.

See Also Format a Text Box (on page 440) Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 233) Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 233) User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 236) Paragraph Tab (on page 422)

232

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) Border — Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box. Show border — Displays the outline of the text box. Border type — Sets the shape of the border around a text box. You can choose from a selection of common geometric shapes. Line style — Sets the line style for the text box. Border color — Sets the color of the border. Line width — Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box. Paragraph separators — Places a horizontal line between each paragraph in a text box. This option is only available if Show Border is selected. A paragraph is defined by a carriage return within the text body. Using the carriage return as the sole means to create a new line of text will result in a text object with many lines as shown in the following illustration:

As an alternative for controlling auto returns within the text body, you can restrain the width of the box during placement or through the Text Box Properties dialog box. Shadow — Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box. Shadow offset — Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text box. Fill color — Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.

See Also Format a Text Box (on page 440) Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 237) Edit a Text Box (on page 237)

Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) Sheet — Shows the drawing sheet for an element. Layer — Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet. Origin — Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes. All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is always in world units. Width — Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto (the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field. Height — Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto (the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field. Angle — Sets the angle of the text box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

233

Adding Text to Documents The text box always rotates about the origin. Text Orientation — Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically. Units Space — Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units. Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other units are also available. World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper. Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units" found in other CAD packages. Justification — Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text box) according to the horizontal and vertical components. The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are inside the outside edges of the text box. The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).

The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline, even if the line has been clipped out of the text box. The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of the text box. The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).

You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.

234

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents Horizontal — Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions. Vertical — Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and the text within the text box.  Text Baseline — Specifies the text area baseline.  Text Top — Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin.  Text Capline — Specifies the text area capline.  Text Half Ascender — Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of the text area.  Text Half Cap — Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and baseline.  Text Center — Specifies the center of the text area.  Text Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the text area.  Shape Top — Specifies the top edge of the shape.  Shape Center — Specifies center of the shape.  Shape Bottom — Specifies the bottom of the shape. Text Alignment — Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box). You must define horizontal and vertical components together. Horizontal — Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text:  Left — Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.  Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.  Right — Places the formatted text in the right of the text area. If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) Vertical — Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the text box:  Top — Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.  Center — Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.  Bottom — Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.  Justify — Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area. 

If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)  If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) Margins - Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area. Margins are in the same units as the text box.  Top — Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text area.  Bottom — Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of the text area.

SmartSketch User's Guide

235

Adding Text to Documents  

Left — Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text area. Right — Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the text area.

See Also Edit a Text Box (on page 237) Place a Text Box (on page 230)

Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) Text style — Displays the style for a text box. Font — Lists and applies the available fonts. Font size — Applies a text size. Font style — Lists the available font styles. Underline — Underlines text. Language — Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the lines wrap in the paragraph. Units space — Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must exist in the same units. Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units" found in other CAD packages. Font size type — Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile. Text color - Sets the color of the text. Alignment - Sets the alignment of the text. Line spacing - Sets the line spacing of the text:  Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.  1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.  Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines. Paragraph spacing — Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph. Before — Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. After — Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.

See Also Format a Text Box (on page 440)

User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) Attribute Set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected. Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.

236

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents Attributes — Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set. Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date. Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that you selected in the Type box. Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the table. Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a row in the table.

See Also Format a Text Box (on page 440) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

Move a Text Box Drag the text box to the location that you want. If handles of the text box are displayed, drag the highlighted border of the text box (or anywhere inside of the text box) to move it—dragging one of the solid square handles resizes it.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Delete Text in a Text Box 1. Select the text that you want to delete in the text box. 2. Press DELETE on the keyboard.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Apply a Border to a Text Box 1. Select the text box to which you want to apply a border. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 3. On the Border and Fill tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options for the type of border that you want.  

You can also apply a border by selecting a text box and clicking Border on the ribbon. To see a text box border that is greater than 2 mm, set Display As Printed on the View tab of the Options dialog box.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Edit a Text Box 1. Select the text box that you want to edit. 2. Double-click the box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

237

Adding Text to Documents 3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Resize a Text Box 1. Click a text box to display its handles. 2. Drag a handle until the text box is the size you want. You cannot drag hollow handles.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Use Spell Checker 1. Click Tools > Spelling.  The Spelling dialog box appears when the first word not found in the Microsoft Word main dictionary is found. The Suggestions box lists recommended replacements.  To leave the word unchanged: Click Ignore or click Ignore All.  To change the word not found: If necessary, click the desired word in the Suggestions list, then click Change or Change All. You can also type your replacement text in the Not in Dictionary box and then click Change or Change All.  To leave the word unchanged, and add it to the custom dictionary: Click Add. To leave the word unchanged and add it to the AutoCorrect list: Click AutoCorrect 2. Click OK when notified that the spell check is complete. 

You can click Cancel to close the spell checker at any time.



If you need information on any of the spell checking options, click Word Help.

to display Microsoft

Clicking the Options button in the Spelling dialog box will open the Spelling and Grammar dialog box; however, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in SmartSketch documents.  

If no spelling errors are found, the Spelling dialog box will not display. The Spell Checker checks text boxes and double-click labels. It does not check SmartLabels, text embedded in symbols, or text inside a leader.

See Also Labels (on page 250)

Spelling Command Uses the Microsoft Word spell checker to identify misspelled words and unknown words (that is, words that are not in Word's dictionary). You can choose the correction you want to make, or you can make your own changes. This command is available only on the Tools menu.

238

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents

Spelling Dialog Box Displays possible spelling errors within the SmartSketch document and offers suggestions for correcting the errors.

Dialog Box Options Not in Dictionary - Displays a possible error, such as a misspelled word or a duplicated word. The possible errors appear in highlighted text. You can edit the text in this box and then click Change to accept the correction. Suggestions - Lists suggested corrections for the highlighted text in the Not in Dictionary box. Spelling error replacement word suggestions are from the main dictionary and open custom dictionaries. Ignore - Leaves the highlighted text unchanged and finds the next spelling error. Ignore All - Leaves all instances of the highlighted text unchanged throughout the document and continues to check the remainder of the document. Add - Adds the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary box to the custom dictionary. Change - Accepts the current selection in the Suggestions box or accepts the edited text you have entered in the Not in Dictionary box. Delete - Deletes a duplicated word. If the error is a duplicate word, the Change button becomes a Delete button. Change All - Changes all instances of an error in the active document. AutoCorrect - Corrects the spelling error; however, unlike the functionality that exists in Microsoft Word, the software does not monitor words as they are typed and does not automatically corrects them. Options - Opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box. Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in SmartSketch documents. Consequently, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Undo - Reverses the most recent spelling check actions. Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the active document. Close - Closes the dialog box after a change has been accepted. After a change has been accepted, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.

Place a Balloon 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Balloon . 2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the text that you want to appear in the balloon. 3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the graphic end of the leader. The graphic end can be on an element or a point in free space.

SmartSketch User's Guide

239

Adding Text to Documents Click where you want to place the notation end of the leader.

To place a balloon without a leader, clear Leader and click the element to which to attach the balloon. You can also click a point in free space.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225) Balloon Command (on page 240) Balloon Ribbon (on page 240)

Balloon Command Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element or a point in free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape of the balloon, text presentation, and leader display.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225) Place a Balloon (on page 239) Balloon Ribbon (on page 240)

Balloon Ribbon Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon. Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles. Leader — Displays the leader line. Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader. Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font size defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension font size. Text — Specifies the text you want inside the balloon. Shape — Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes. Sides — Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only appears when you select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.

240

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents See Also Balloon Command (on page 240) Place a Balloon (on page 239)

Balloon Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties of a balloon.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241) Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241)

General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) Balloon Text — Enters text in the balloon. Balloon Height — Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font size defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension font size. Balloon Shape — Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes. Number Of Sides — Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You must click ? in the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the value you want.

See Also Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 241) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440)

Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation. Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation. Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text in the balloon annotation. Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.

Leader and projection line Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed. Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the annotation text. Enter a value to specify the size of the break line. For example, when Break Line is set to 1, the break line looks like the following picture.

Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element to which the leader is attached. This value is a ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons. Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.

Color and Width Color - Sets the color of an annotation.

SmartSketch User's Guide

241

Adding Text to Documents Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation. Type - Specifies the line type.

Terminator Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture to find out which terminator type you want to use.

Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font size. For example, in the following picture, the length is set to three times the size of the font.

See Also Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 241) Leader Properties Dialog Box (on page 247) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440)

Place a Revision Cloud 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Revision Cloud . 2. On the ribbon, select the size of the arcs you want to place in the Arc Mode list. 3. In the Caption box, type the text you want to place as a label for the revision cloud. If you don't want a label generated, leave the Caption box blank. 4. Click a point in the drawing to indicate the start point for the revision cloud, and then move the mouse to sketch the revision cloud.

242

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents As you move the mouse, the software displays the outline of the revision cloud in red.

5. To close the revision cloud, click again. End drawing the revision cloud near the point where you started drawing so that the final closing arc is not disproportionate in size to the other arcs that comprise the revision cloud. 6. If you typed text in the Caption field, the software displays the label in a red rectangle on your cursor at the bottom center of the revision cloud. Do one of the following:  Drag the rectangle to the appropriate location and then click to place it.  Right-click to place the label at the default location (bottom center of the revision cloud).

 

To move a revision cloud after placement, select the revision cloud and drag it to the appropriate location. You cannot modify the shape or the size of a revision cloud after placement.

Revision Cloud Command Places a cloud around objects in a drawing. Prior to placement, you can define an arc size small, medium, large, or random. You can also place a label within the revision cloud or add semi-transparent fill within its boundaries.

See also Place a Revision Cloud (on page 242) Revision Cloud Ribbon (on page 244)

SmartSketch User's Guide

243

Adding Text to Documents

Revision Cloud Ribbon Determines the size and shape of the revision cloud and the text within the revision cloud. Style - Sets the line style for the revision cloud. Line Color - Sets the line color for the revision cloud. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the revision cloud line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width for the revision cloud. Arc Mode - Defines the size of the arcs that are placed as you draw the revision cloud. You can specify that the arc sizes be drawn randomly, or you can specify that they are all either small, medium, or large. Caption - Specifies the text to be placed as a label for the revision cloud. If you do not want a label to be automatically generated, leave the caption blank. Fill Cloud? - Indicates whether or not the cloud is filled with a semi-transparent yellow fill. For no fill, leave the checkbox empty. The following illustration shows a revision cloud with that was drawn with the Fill Cloud? option turned on.

See also Place a Revision Cloud (on page 242)

244

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents

Add a Leader

1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader . 2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the notation end of the leader.

3. Click any element to place the graphic end of the leader, or click in free space.

 



You can place either end of a leader first. After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the notation end of the leader to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements that are valid for placing the graphic end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another text box. If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.

See Also Leader Command (on page 246) Leader Ribbon (on page 246) Placing Annotations (on page 225)

SmartSketch User's Guide

245

Adding Text to Documents

Leader Command Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. All leaders have two ends — the notation end and the graphic end. The notation end is the end that describes something and is often attached to a text box or annotation; the graphic end is the end near the object being described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot on it. You can place either end of the leader first. You can attach the notation end of a leader to one of the following:  Text box  Balloon  Another leader on a dimension or annotation You can place the graphic end of a leader in one of the following ways:  Attach it to an element.  Place it in free space.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225) Add a Leader (on page 245) Leader Ribbon (on page 246)

Leader Ribbon Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available styles. Break Line — Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader. Automatic Shape Connection Behavior — Specifies automatic, shape-changing connection point behavior for the notation (end) reference. If the option is selected, the notation end of the leader uses information from the notation object in combination with the current leader position to determine the attachment point and break line direction. If the option is not selected, the notation end of the leader attaches to the point on the notation object that was selected when the leader was created, and the break line direction will not automatically break away from the notation object. Break Line Along — If the option is selected, the break line displays at an angle along the notation object according to information provided by the object. For example, if a text box is at an angle, the break line displays parallel to the text box at the same angle. If the option is not selected, the break line remains in a horizontal position regardless of the angle of the notation object. Notation Object Attachment Lock — Locks the notation end of the leader to the notation object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object. Graphic Object Attachment Lock — Locks the graphic end of the leader to the graphic object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.

246

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents See Also Leader Command (on page 246) Add a Leader (on page 245)

Leader Properties Dialog Box Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using Add Leader.

See Also Leader Command (on page 246) Placing Annotations (on page 225) Add a Leader (on page 245)

Insert a Vertex in a Leader 1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.

2. Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a vertex. 3. Hold the ALT key and click.

4. Drag the handle to position the new vertex.

You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.

SmartSketch User's Guide

247

Adding Text to Documents See Also Leader Command (on page 246) Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Delete a Vertex from a Leader 1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.

2. Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.

3. Hold the ALT key and click the handle on the vertex.

See Also Leader Command (on page 246) Placing Annotations (on page 225)

Insert a Font Character into a Text Box 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

248

and place a text box.

On the Dimension toolbar, click Character Map . On the font character chart, click the character you want to insert. Click Select. Continue to click the characters you want, clicking Select after you click each character. On the Unicode Character Map dialog box, click Copy to copy the characters to the Clipboard.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents 7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the characters. 8. Press Ctrl-V to paste.

Character Map Command Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command when you type or edit text in a text box. 



If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to add the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove Programs. To place the Character Map button on a toolbar, click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools from the Categories list. Click and drag Character Map to an existing toolbar.

See Also Unicode Character Map Dialog Box (on page 249) Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 248)

Unicode Character Map Dialog Box Selects special characters for inserting into a text box. For additional information about using Character Map, click the Help button in the Character Map dialog box. Font — Lists the available fonts. Help — Opens the online documentation for using Character Map effectively and efficiently. Characters to copy — Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard. Select — Copies selected characters to the Characters to copy box. Copy — Copies the selected characters from the Characters to copy box to the Clipboard. Advanced view — Lets you display groups of characters to help in refining a search of a character's Unicode value. When you check the Advanced view check box, the Character Map dialog box displays additional options. Character set — Specifies the character set you want to search. If a character set is not available, choose a different font from the Fonts list. Go to Unicode — Allows you to type the four-digit Unicode value for the character you are looking for. This option is only enabled if you have selected Unicode in the Character set list. Group by — Specifies the group you want to use for your search. If you select Unicode Subrange, a list of category characters is displayed. Search for — Allows you to type all or part of the name of the character for which you are searching. Search — Executes the search based on the criteria you have defined.

See Also Character Map Command (on page 249) Placing Annotations (on page 225) Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 248)

SmartSketch User's Guide

249

Adding Text to Documents

Labels Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects or elements in the document. There are two types of labels: text labels and SmartLabels. Text labels are associated with an element or object. If you move the element or object, the text label moves with it. You can create text labels in a document by double-clicking an element or object. A text label appears near the element so that you can type text. The label appears at the location where the element is double-clicked, except for closed elements, such as a circle or rectangle. The label position on closed elements is the center of the element. When you enter the text that you want, the text label orients itself with the element.

Another kind of label, a SmartLabel, can be associated to an object or element's text attributes. A SmartLabel is often distinguished by a question mark in the display.

A SmartLabel displays the attributes of the element or object as text in the document. You can drag SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the current document. SmartLabels have an .sym extension. As you change an element's or object's attributes in the Attribute Viewer or the Properties dialog box, the SmartLabel's text displays those changes.

250

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents If an element or object has no attributes, and you drag a SmartLabel to it, the element or object picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you might want to assign attributes to a heat exchanger, such as pressure and material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and material type defined, and the heat exchanger does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material type are copied to the heat exchanger.

If an element already has existing attributes, a SmartLabel placed on the element displays the values for the existing attributes. For example, if the heat exchanger already has values for pressure and material type attributes, the values of those attributes are filled in for a SmartLabel placed on the heat exchanger. Not all SmartLabels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some SmartLabels contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the SmartLabel.

See Also Edit a Text Label (on page 252) Create a Text Label (on page 251) Edit a SmartLabel (on page 253) Place a SmartLabel (on page 252)

Create a Text Label 1. Double-click an element or object. A small, blinking pointer appears below the element or object. For a closed element, the pointer appears in the center of that element 2. Type the text in the label. 3. Click outside the label to complete it. The text label rotates to align with the element or object to which it is associated.

You can edit a text label like a text box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

251

Adding Text to Documents See Also Edit a Text Label (on page 252) Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250) Move a Label (on page 252)

Edit a Text Label 1. Double-click the label. 2. Type the text in the label. 3. Click a point outside the label to complete the operation. The text label rotates to align with the element or object to which it is associated. You can format a text label like a text box. Select the label and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Text Properties.

See Also Labels (on page 250)

Move a Label  

If a text label or Smart Labelis associated with an element or object, drag the element or object. The label moves with the element or object. If a label is not associated with an element or object, drag the label.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250)

Place a SmartLabel 1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . 2. Browse to the directory. 3. Drag the SmartLabel into the document. If you place the SmartLabel near an element in the document, the SmartLabel is associated with that element.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250)

Place Multiple Labels 1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar. 2. Double-click the symbol that you want to add a label to. A cursor appears below the symbol. Double-click the symbol away from any existing labels. 3. Type the text. 4. Right-click your mouse to deselect the text command.   

252

The associated label will move with the symbol. The symbol label text can be edited by double-clicking on the label. The associated label can be moved by selecting it, unlocking it, and moving it to the desired location.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Adding Text to Documents A small green lock represents a lock handle. You click the lock handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol is associated.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250)

Edit a SmartLabel 1. Double-click an element or object. 2. In the Attribute Viewer, type the values that you want for the label.  



You can edit the properties or parameters of a SmartLabel. You can also edit the properties of the elements or text in the SmartLabel. Select the SmartLabel and then click Edit Graphic Properties or Edit Text Properties on the shortcut menu. If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you cannot select or open the SmartLabel to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250) Place a SmartLabel (on page 252)

Edit Text Properties Command (Shortcut Menu) Allows you to edit the properties of the text in a SmartLabel. You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut menu. For more information, see Text Box Properties Dialog Box (on page 232).

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Place a SmartLabel (on page 252) Edit a Text Label (on page 252)

Edit Graphic Properties Command (Shortcut Menu) Allows you to edit the properties of the elements in a SmartLabel. You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut menu. Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433) Fill Properties Dialog Box (on page 447) Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 241) Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 365) SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box (on page 438)

See Also Edit a SmartLabel (on page 253) Edit a Text Label (on page 252) Create a Text Label (on page 251)

SmartSketch User's Guide

253

Adding Text to Documents

Engineering Fonts The engineering fonts delivered with the software contain industry-specific fonts, special characters, and symbols that you can use to annotate engineering drawings. These fonts include degree symbols, diameter symbols, and other special characters and symbols that are not usually included in a typical word processing package. Your choice of font should be based on the industry for which you are creating engineering drawings. The software provides TrueType® fonts; with TrueType fonts, what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. The screen display of the document closely matches the printed document. When you open a .dwg or .dgn document, the software provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD or MicroStation font. You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Options.

See Also Character Map Command (on page 249) Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 248) Place a Text Box (on page 230)

254

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 8

Drawing with Relationships As you move the pointer, the software automatically updates values in the ribbon, giving you constant feedback on the size and position of the element you are drawing. As you draw, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the element you are drawing by the pointer––this feedback is called a relationship indicator. This temporary display shows the look of the elements if you place the element at the current location.

The software gives you more information about the element that you are drawing by displaying relationships between the temporary, dynamic element and the following items:  Other elements in the drawing  Horizontal and vertical orientations  Origin of the element that you are drawing When the software recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship indicator at the pointer. As you move the pointer, the software updates the indicator to show new relationships. If a relationship indicator appears by the pointer when you click to draw the element, the software applies that relationship to the element. Relationship

Relationship Indicator

End point Midpoint Intersection Horizontal Vertical Point On Element Perpendicular Parallel Tangent Center

SmartSketch User's Guide

255

Drawing with Relationships For example, if the horizontal relationship indicator appears when you click to place the second end point of a line, then the line is exactly horizontal.

Relationships You can set the types of relationships you want the software to recognize using SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. The software can recognize one or two relationships at a time. When the software recognizes two relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the pointer.

Locate Zone You do not have to move the pointer to an exact position for the software to recognize a relationship. The software recognizes relationships for any element within the locate zone of the pointer. The circle around the pointer crosshair or at the end of the pointer arrow indicates the locate zone. You can change the size of the locate zone with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.

Infinite Elements The software recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs as if these elements were infinite. In the following example, the software recognizes a Point On Element relationship when you position the pointer directly over an element and also when you move the pointer off the element.

See Also Maintain Relationships (on page 264) Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

256

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing with Relationships

Display the Relationship Toolbar 

On the Main toolbar, click Relationships

.

Using Relationships as You Draw You can use relationships to capture and remember your design intent as your sketch. You can make your drawings associative by applying those relationships—or you can sketch designs that do not use relationships.

How Relationships Affect a Drawing You can move and change an element that does not use relationships in various ways without affecting other parts of the design. For example, when no relationships exist between two lines, you can move and change each line without affecting the other. When you modify a part of a drawing that has a relationship to another part of the drawing, the other part updates automatically. For example, if you apply a perpendicular relationship between the two lines and move one line, the other line moves with it. The software remembers the relationship between these two elements and always maintains the perpendicular relationship between the lines. You can manipulate either of the two lines and the software will move or modify the line automatically to maintain the relationship. Applying and maintaining relationships in the design simplifies changes to the design later. In the following drawing, all the relationships were automatically established as the design took shape on the drawing sheet. If you want to change the design, you simply modify one segment of it and all the relationships are maintained.

Applying and Maintaining Relationships You can place elements that are related to each other as you draw. First, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Relationship toolbar. You can also set Maintain Relationships using the Tools menu. Then, as you click commands on the Draw toolbar and place lines, arcs, and circles, you should watch the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. When a relationship indicator appears by the pointer, you can click to apply that relationship to the element that you are drawing.

Visualizing Maintained Relationships When you apply relationships, relationship handles appear on the related elements. The handles are symbols that show how elements are related. You can display or hide the relationship handles in your drawings by setting or clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu. Relationship

Relationship Handle

Colinear Connect Concentric Equal

SmartSketch User's Guide

257

Drawing with Relationships Relationship

Relationship Handle

Horizontal/Vertical Tangent Symmetric Parallel Perpendicular Lock For example, the following four lines appear with relationship handles (A) turned off and with relationship handles (B) displayed.

Applying Relationships to Existing Geometry You can apply relationships to geometry after you place it with the buttons on the Relationship toolbar. These buttons include parallel, tangent, connect, and so on. You can use relationships created with these buttons if you set Maintain Relationships on the Relationship toolbar.

Removing Relationships You can quit using all the relationships that you have applied to the drawing if you clear Maintain Relationships. You can also remove individual relationships by selecting a relationship handle and deleting it. Clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu hides the handles, but the relationships are still maintained and used in the design.

When to Maintain Relationships Maintaining relationships makes designing more productive and revisions much easier. However, relationships can slow drawing and changes on large data sets. You should decide whether to use relationships depending on the speed of your computer and the importance of easy revision. For conceptual sketching and diagrams, you might want to use relationships by setting Maintain Relationships. This method allows you to quickly get your ideas on paper and revise them easily using direct modification and driving dimensions. The kinds of projects in which you might want to use relationships include mechanical concepts, architectural details, layouts, and schematic diagrams.

When to Design Without Relationships For more complex projects where you initially need to draw with precision, you should not use relationships in the document. You can then draw with precision by using the PinPoint tool and entering values on ribbons. You can still use relationships within symbols. The kinds of projects

258

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing with Relationships in which you might want to draw without relationships include multiple-view drawings, floor plans, maps, and detailed designs. If you switch between using relationships and not using them while you draw, you can receive confusing results.

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Maintain Relationships (on page 264) Draw a Line Connected to Another Line (on page 653)

Intent Zones As you draw and modify elements, small quadrants called intent zones appear next to the pointer. The software uses intent zones to interpret your intentions as you draw. Intent zones allow you to draw and modify elements many ways using few commands. You do not need to select a different command for every type of element.

How Intent Zones Work When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the region around the clicked position into intent zones. By moving the pointer into one of these intent zones on the way to your next click location, you can tell the software what you want to do next. The last intent zone you move the pointer into is the active zone. To change the active intent zone, move the mouse pointer into the zone you want to use, and then move it to the position where you want to click next. You can change the size of the intent zones using SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.

Drawing Tangent or Perpendicular Arcs You can use intent zones to change the result of Tangent Arc. To draw an arc tangent to a line, first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the arc. Then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone and click to place the second end point of the arc.

If you want to draw a perpendicular arc instead, you can move the pointer back into the intent zone region and out through the perpendicular zone before clicking to place the second end point of the arc. The arc is then perpendicular to the line.

You can also use intent zones to define the arc direction.

SmartSketch User's Guide

259

Drawing with Relationships Drawing Arcs by Three Points When you use Arc by 3 Points, intent zones allow you to input the three points in any order. You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction.

Drawing Lines Tangent or Connected to Curved Elements Using intent zones with Line/Arc Continuous, you can draw a line tangent to a circle or arc. Or you can draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but not tangent to it.

See Also Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 163) Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 166) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

260

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing with Relationships

Draw with Relationships 1. Set the SmartSketch options so that the software recognizes the relationships you want to use. You can set the options with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. 2. On the Draw toolbar, click a drawing command. 3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet to find relationships. 4. Click when the software recognizes a relationship you want to use for the element you are drawing. When you click with a relationship indicator displayed at the pointer, the relationship is established in the drawing. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles as you draw. These relationships are maintained when you modify the drawing.

See Also Draw a Line Connected to Another Line (on page 653) Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 645) Connect Points While Drawing a Line (on page 646) Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 654) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Relationships Command Displays the Relationship toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to create relationships between two drawing elements. To maintain the relationship between elements when you modify either one of the elements, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Relationship toolbar.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Display the Relationship Toolbar (on page 257)

SmartSketch Settings Command Sets up what relationships are recognized by the software. The relationships selected on the SmartSketch dialog box are recognized as you draw.

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Draw a Line Connected to Another Line (on page 653) Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 645) Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 654) SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box (on page 262) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

SmartSketch User's Guide

261

Drawing with Relationships

SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing relationships. You can set pointer behavior and specify which relationships are recognized as you draw.

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 262) Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 262) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software as you draw. Set the relationships you want to recognize, and clear the relationships you do not want to recognize. Clear all relationships so that the software does not place relationship handles.

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) Cursor Setup — Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer. Locate Zone — Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around the pointer. The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so that you do not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part of an element is within the locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On relationship. The size of the locate zone is indicated by a circle around the center of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid. Intent Zone — Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing commands to interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid. Preview — Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected relationship.

The Preview option does not apply to changes made to intent zone values.

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

262

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing with Relationships

Suspend Relationships 1. Hold ALT. The software does not recognize any relationships while you hold this key. 2. Release ALT to re-activate the software's ability to recognize relationships.

See Also SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) Drawing with Relationships (on page 255)

Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command 1. Click Maintain Relationships

on the Relationship toolbar.



If the Relationship toolbar is not displayed, click Relationships on the Main toolbar.  You can also click Tools > Maintain Relationships to toggle on and off the Maintain Relationships command. 2. Draw as usual. The software automatically establishes recognized relationships. For each relationship, a relationship handle is placed on the related elements. Relationships cannot be established in certain cases.

See Also Drawing with Relationships (on page 255) SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Alignment Indicator Command Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw or modify elements. Alignment indicators work similarly to relationship indicators. If you click when a horizontal or vertical indicator line is displayed, the element you are drawing or modifying will be horizontally or vertically aligned with the element the indicator line leads to. The Alignment Indicator command is also available on the Relationship toolbar (on page 48).

See Also Draw with Relationships (on page 261) Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)

Delete a Relationship If the relationship handles are hidden, click Relationship Handles on the Relationship toolbar to display them. 1. Select a relationship handle. 2. Press DELETE.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Relationship Handles Command (on page 264)

SmartSketch User's Guide

263

Drawing with Relationships

Maintain Relationships Click Maintain Relationships

on the Relationships toolbar.

 If the Relationships toolbar is not displayed, click Relationships on the Main toolbar.  You can also click Tools > Maintain Relationships. When Maintain Relationships is set and you apply relationships to new or existing elements, the software places relationship handles on the elements. Elements that share relationships are associative; when you move an element, the other elements on the drawing sheet move according to the relationships they have with the element that you moved.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Maintain Relationships Command (on page 264) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Maintain Relationships Command Places relationship handles as you draw. When this option is turned on, the software places relationship handles for relationships that the software recognizes, and for relationships that you apply using the commands on the Relationship toolbar. You can also use Tools > Maintain Relationships to toggle this command on and off. The Maintain Relationships command is also available on the Relationship toolbar.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Relationship Handles Command (on page 264) Maintain Relationships (on page 264)

Display or Hide Relationship Handles Click Tools > Relationship Handles to turn on and turn off the display of relationship handles. If a checkmark appears next to Relationship Handles, the display is on. You can also click Relationship Handles relationship handles on and off.

on the Relationship toolbar to toggle

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Relationship Handles Command (on page 264)

Relationship Handles Command Displays any relationship handles on elements. The Relationship Handles command is also available on the Relationship toolbar.

See Also Relationship toolbar (on page 48) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Delete a Relationship (on page 263) Display or Hide Relationship Handles (on page 264)

264

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing with Relationships

Lock an Element or Key Point 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock. 2. Click an element or key point to lock the element and prevent it from being modified.

See Also Lock Command (on page 265) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Lock Command Controls elements so they cannot be modified. When you use this button, you can lock the length, angle, radius, or position of an element. You can also lock keypoints on elements, such as endpoints of a line or the center of a circle, in their absolute positions.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Lock an Element or Key Point (on page 265)

Insert a Detail View 1. Click Insert > Detail View. 2. Click the shape of the detail view, either Circular or Rectangular. 3. Click the Caption box and type a caption that the software places with the drawing detail. You can define the active font for the Detail View caption by using Format > Text Box. 4. Select a scale for the drawing detail in the Scale Factor box. You can click the scale factor box and type a value instead of selecting an available value from the pull down list. 5. Select an existing sheet for displaying the detail view in the Place detail on: combo box. 6. Select the Display envelope check box to display the boundary of the detailed view on the drawing. When displayed, detail view boundaries (envelopes) can be moved to a different location in the drawing to change the contents of the detail view. To do this, click the detail view envelope in the drawing. Then using the displayed center point, drag the envelope to a new location in the drawing. The contents of the detail view update to reflect the location of the envelope.      

You can use the F5 key to redraw (update) a detail view. The detail view is a SmartFrame. You can edit its properties by selecting the detail view and displaying the shortcut menu. The envelope, labels, and detail view can all be moved to different locations at any time. Labels can be edited at any time. The contents inside a detail view cannot be edited; however, if the contents inside the envelope are modified, changes are reflected in the detail view once the screen is repainted. If the detail view is deleted, the envelope and associated labels are also deleted. However, if the envelope or any labels are deleted, the detail view will remain. All detail views placed in the document are saved when you save the file as an AutoCAD DWG file. SmartSketch automatically creates a separate sheet in the resulting DWG file

SmartSketch User's Guide

265

Drawing with Relationships that contains detail view(s). The name of each generated sheet corresponds to the name of the sheet in SmartSketch containing the detail view(s). For example, if sheet25 contains one or more detail views in the SmartSketch document, the resulting AutoCAD DWG file will automatically create a sheet named sheet25, which contains the detail view(s).

See Also Detail View Ribbon (on page 266) Detail View Command (on page 266)

Detail View Command Places either a circular or rectangular detail view into your drawing. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Detail View button on a toolbar.

See Also Detail View Ribbon (on page 266) Insert a Detail View (on page 265)

Detail View Ribbon Places a detail view based on graphics inside a user-defined envelope. This command is accessed via the Insert menu. Circular detail - Places a detail with a circular envelope and detail view shape. Rectangular detail - Places a detail with a rectangular envelope and detail view shape. Caption - Specifies the label for the envelope and detail. Scale Factor - Specifies the factor to which the detail view is scaled. You can either select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value of your own. Place detail on - Specifies the sheet in the document in which the detail is to be placed. Display envelope - Turns on or off the display of the detail envelope.

See Also Insert a Detail View (on page 265)

266

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 9

Drawing Precisely Engineering and architectural diagrams and drawings require accurate measurements and precise positioning of elements and symbols. The software provides a variety of positioning and dimensioning tools that are easy to use but powerful enough for the most complex drawings. Many types of drawings require a drawing scale that makes it possible to represent very large or very small objects on a sheet of paper. You can set up your drawings with the drawing scale and measurement units you need to create a wide range of drawings. When you are positioning elements and symbols on a drawing sheet, speed and precision count. You can easily align symbols with other symbols or with locations indicated by guides, rulers, and grids. You can also position symbols at exact x-and y-coordinates in your drawing. You can also display the dimensions of elements in your drawings. With the software's measurement and dimensioning tools, you can calculate and display linear and angular dimensions. When you resize an element that has attached dimensions, the dimensions update automatically.

See Also Aligning SmartSketch Objects (on page 336) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267) Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Placing Elements in Precise Locations PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in a drawing. You can place a target point and then the software dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all element drawing commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.

How PinPoint Works PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw. The x and y coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in the window. You can change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon and then clicking a new position in the window. As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help lines show the PinPoint X- and Y-axis and the PinPoint orientation.

Locking and Freeing Values You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on the ribbon. When one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other coordinate by clicking a position in the window. Or you can set both values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for a locked value, you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing Backspace or Delete.

SmartSketch User's Guide

267

Drawing Precisely PinPoint Orientation In its default orientation, PinPoint's x-axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the x-axis to any angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure shows the PinPoint angle set to 20 degrees.

See Also PinPoint Command (on page 270) Move an Element Precisely (on page 212) Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

Draw with PinPoint 1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . 2. Click where you want the target point to be and run any drawing command. As you move the pointer, PinPoint displays the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to the target point. To provide precision input to the current command, click when the coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or type coordinate values in the X and Y ribbon boxes. You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.   

  

When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a multiple of the Step Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate value and help line become bold. If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that you want to use as command input, you can type the values in the X and Y ribbon boxes. When the PinPoint ribbon is active, you can use your function keys to toggle on/off the PinPoint command (F9), lock the X: box for data input (F10), or lock the Y: box for data input (F11). You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to lock one axis position, then graphically define the coordinate for the other axis. You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on the ribbon, and then click where you want the target point to be. You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the Angle box on the PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis clockwise.

See Also PinPoint Command (on page 270) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267) Draw a Line with PinPoint (on page 654)

268

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position in your drawing. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool

.

2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . 3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be. 4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element. 5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element. PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag. 6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.

See Also Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267) Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

Reposition the PinPoint Target Point Do one of the following:  

On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition Target . The target point is attached to the pointer. Click where you want the target point to be. Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.

See Also PinPoint Command (on page 270) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267)

Re-Orient PinPoint The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To re-orient the PinPoint x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive value rotates the horizontal axis counterclockwise. A negative value rotates the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically re-positioned to remain perpendicular to the x axis.

See Also Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

SmartSketch User's Guide

269

Drawing Precisely

PinPoint Command Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. The displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set and can reset at any time. Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing sheet, draw elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use PinPoint with all drawing commands. You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.

See Also Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268) PinPoint Ribbon (on page 270)

PinPoint Ribbon Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and distance values. Reposition Target (F12) - Attaches the target point to the pointer so that you can reposition the target point. Click where you want the target point to be. Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such that the PinPoint target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing command. Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon (on page 271) containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint. To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar. Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y position that was saved using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar. Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default horizontal orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line counterclockwise. Negative values rotate the horizontal line clockwise. Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental distance along the PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the target position and the current pointer location is an increment of the step value, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.

See Also Move an Element Precisely (on page 212) Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

270

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon When you click the Define PinPoint Origin PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed.

button on the PinPoint ribbon bar, the Define

To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Save PinPoint Origin — Saves the currently displayed X and Y values for each sheet in the document. Target X — Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the current pointer location to the value you type. Target Y — Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the current pointer location to the value you type.

See Also PinPoint Ribbon (on page 270) Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269) Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)

Placing Elements with a Grid The grid and its grid lines allow you to place elements in the document by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can use the grid if you want the elements to line up at regular intervals in the document. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document. When you use the View > Grid Snap command, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can view the grid by clicking View > Grid Display. The grid lines do not print. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog box. You can also adjust the brightness of the grid display using the View > Grid Brightness command. When you zoom in or out, the grid lines for a dynamic grid are generated dynamically. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can set up the increment settings on the View tab of the Options dialog box.

See Also Grid Display Command (on page 272) Grid Snap Command (on page 273) Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271)

SmartSketch User's Guide

271

Drawing Precisely

Place Elements with a Grid 1. Click View > Grid Display. This step is optional. You do not have to display the grid to align elements with it. 2. On the View menu, select Grid Snap. 3. Place the elements that you want with the grid.   

 

You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap. You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog box. When you perform Step 3, a red crosshair will appear at the pointer showing where an element's points are placed. Elements align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid snap does not work while you identify elements that are aligned along grid lines. To override this, press the ALT key while identifying these elements. Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators by pressing ALT.

See Also Grid Display Command (on page 272) Grid Snap Command (on page 273) Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271)

Grid Display Command Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid is not part of the document and does not print.  

You can also access Grid Display by right-clicking. You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box. The Grid Display command is available on the Schematic toolbar (on page 49).

See Also Grid Snap Command (on page 273) Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271) Place Elements with a Grid (on page 272) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267)

272

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Grid Snap Command Allows you to align elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, the software always aligns elements with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid lines do not print. Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators by holding down ALT.     

You can also access Grid Snap by right clicking in the SmartSketch document and displaying the shortcut menu. You can also use F3 to toggle on/off Grid Snap. You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box. You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap. The Grid Snap command is also available on the Schematic toolbar (on page 49).

See Also Grid Display Command (on page 272) Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267)

Modify Grid Intensity 1. Click View > Grid Brightness. 2. On the Grid Brightness ribbon, move the slider left or right to adjust the intensity of the grid display.  

To lighten the grid intensity, move the slider to the left; to darken, move the slider to the right. The SmartSketch grid display can be toggled on/off by clicking View > Grid Display.

See Also Grid Brightness Command (on page 273)

Grid Brightness Command Allows you to lighten and darken the intensity of the SmartSketch grid. Grids are the net-like lines that appear on the Drawing sheet. As with the lines on graph paper, these horizontal and vertical grids allow you to plot SmartSketch elements with a high degree of precision. The grid display can be toggled on and off by clicking View > Grid Display in SmartSketch. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Grid Brightness button on a toolbar.

See Also Modify Grid Intensity (on page 273) Grid Intensity Ribbon (on page 274)

SmartSketch User's Guide

273

Drawing Precisely

Grid Intensity Ribbon Adjusts the intensity of the grid display.

Drag the slider to adjust the intensity of the SmartSketch grid. Moving it to the left lightens the intensity; moving it to the right darkens the intensity.

See Also Grid Brightness Command (on page 273) Modify Grid Intensity (on page 273)

Dimensioning Drawing Elements Dimensions supply information about the size, location, and orientation of elements, such as the length of a line, the distance between points, or the angle of a line. Dimensions are associated with the elements they refer to, so you can make design changes easily.

You can use the commands on the Dimension toolbar to place the following types of dimensions:

274

(A)

Linear dimensions

(B)

Angular dimensions

(C)

Diameter dimensions

(D)

Radial dimensions

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely (E)

Dimension groups

Dimension commands on the Dimension toolbar have a ribbon that sets options for placing the dimension. When you select a dimension in the drawing, the same ribbon options appear. You can use the options to change the selected dimension.

Placing Dimensions To dimension elements, you can use a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar, such as SmartDimension, and then select the elements you want to dimension. As you place dimensions, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the dimension you are placing. This temporary display shows what the new dimension will look like if you click at the current pointer position. The dimension orientation changes depending on where you move the pointer. For example, when you click Distance Between on the Dimension toolbar and select an origin element and an element to measure to, the dimension dynamically adjusts its orientation depending on where you position your pointer.

Because you can dynamically control the orientation of a dimension during placement, you can place dimensions quickly and efficiently without having to use several commands. Each of the dimension commands uses placement dynamics that allow you to control how the dimension will look before you place it.

Placing Dimensions with the Dimension Axis The Axis command on the Dimension toolbar sets the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension. You must set Explicit on the Dimension ribbon to place dimensions that are perpendicular or parallel to new dimension axis.

Dimensioning While You Draw To dimension elements as you draw them, you can set Dimension Keyin Values Automatically with Options on the Tools menu. Although placing dimensions as you draw is convenient, it might be necessary to delete unneeded dimensions when you have finished your design.  

Dimension Keyin Values Automatically is available on the General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465). Dimensions placed with this option are only driven dimensions.

SmartSketch User's Guide

275

Drawing Precisely Using Dimensions to Drive Elements You can place a dimension that controls the size or location of the element to which it refers. This type of dimension is known as a driving dimension. If you use the ribbon to change the dimensional value of a driving dimension, the element updates.

Dimensions that are not driving dimensions are called driven dimensions. The value of a driven dimension is controlled by the element it refers to. If the element changes, the dimensional value updates. Because both driving and driven dimensions are associative to the element they refer to, you can change the design more easily without having to delete and re-apply elements or dimensions when you update the design. If you want to create a driving dimension, you must first set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. When you are placing dimensions, an option on the ribbon allows you to specify whether a dimension is driving or driven. A driving dimension and a driven dimension are distinguished by color. There are different colors for driving dimensions and driven dimensions in a dimension style.

Not-to-Scale Dimensions You can override the value of a driven dimension by editing its dimensional value. This makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15 millimeters.

Formatting Dimensions If you want two or more dimensions to look the same, you can select the dimensions and apply a style with the ribbon. If you want to format dimensions so that they look unique, you can select a dimension and edit its formats on the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.

Using Expressions in Dimensions There are many instances when the dimensions of individual features in a design are related. For example, the bend radius used to manufacture a sheet metal part is usually a function of the stock thickness. You can define and automate these types of design relationships with expressions. You can select a dimension and then use the Variables command on the Tools

276

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely menu to enter a formula. When the formula is solved, the dimensional value changes to the value that the formula calculates. You might want to use dimensions with expressions for the following purposes:  Drive a dimension by another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B  Drive a dimension by a formula; Dimension A = p * 3.5  Drive a dimension by a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = p * Dimension B

Setting or Modifying Units of Measure To set the units of measure for a dimension, you can use Properties on the Edit menu. To set the units of measure for a document, you can click Properties on the File menu and then click the Units tab.

See Also Dimension Groups (on page 295) Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 292) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Place a Driving Dimension (on page 305)

Types of Dimensions A linear dimension measures the length of a line or the distance between two points or elements. You can place linear dimensions with the Distance Between and SmartDimension commands. An angular dimension measures the angle of a line, the sweep angle of an arc, or the angle between two or more lines or points. You can place angular dimensions with the Angle Between and SmartDimension commands. A radial dimension measures the radius of elements, such as arcs, circles, ellipses, or curves. You can place a radial dimension with the SmartDimension command. A diameter dimension measures the diameter of elements, such as circles and ellipses. You can place a diameter dimension with the SmartDimension command.

SmartSketch User's Guide

277

Drawing Precisely The components of a dimension are as follows:

(A)

Projection line

(E)

Break line

(B)

Dimension line

(F)

Symbol

(C)

Dimensional value

(G)

Connect line

(D)

Terminator

See Also Move a Dimension (on page 303) Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 279)

Display the Dimension Toolbar 

On the Main toolbar, click Dimension

.

See Also Placing Annotations (on page 225) Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Dimension Command (on page 281)

278

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension You can place the following types of dimensions with SmartDimension:  Linear dimension  Angular dimension  Radial dimension  Diameter dimension 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension . 2. Click an element. The command determines the type of dimension to place, depending on the type of element you select, and displays the dimension dynamically so you can position it. 3. Position the dimension, and then click a point to place it. 



  

SmartDimension automatically determines the type of dimension to place based on the element that you select, such as linear, radial, or angular. However, you can specify a different dimension type. For example, if you click SmartDimension and then select a circle, by default Diameter is the active dimension type on the Dimension ribbon; you then place a diameter dimension. However, if you want to place a radial dimension instead, you can click Radius on the ribbon and then place the dimension. To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the dimension that you place is a driving dimension by default. You can change a dimension to driving or driven by selecting it and then clicking Driving/Driven on the ribbon. To place a horizontal or vertical dimension between the end points of an angular line, you must press SHIFT. A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be dimensioned.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Dimension the Diameter of a Circle (on page 651) Dimension the Length of a Line (on page 651)

SmartSketch User's Guide

279

Drawing Precisely

SmartDimension Command Places a dimension for the following:  Length and angle of a line



Radius and diameter of a circle



Length, angle, radius, and diameter of an arc



Radius of an ellipse or curve

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 279) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

280

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Angle Between Command Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points. You can place angular dimensions in stacked or chained dimension groups. You can also add angular dimensions to existing dimension groups.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 292) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

Dimension Command Displays the Dimension toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to place and modify dimensions and annotations.

See Also Display the Dimension Toolbar (on page 278)

Dimension Ribbon Sets options for dimensions. Some options on this toolbar are not available until you select an element on the drawing sheet. Dimension Style — Lists and applies the available dimension styles. Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values as appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension being placed and contains values as appropriate for the dimension. Dimension Value — Sets the dimensional value. Driving/Driven — Toggles the selected dimension between a driving and driven state. If you want to set this option before you place a dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. Auto Center Mark — Places a center line crosshair at the center of the radius of curvature being measured by the dimension. Jog — Offsets the projection line of a radial dimension. You can use this option to prevent the projection line that you are placing from overlapping other dimensions. Dimension Axis — Sets the orientation of dimensions placed by Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension. This option is not available until you select one of those buttons. This option is not available after you select the origin element. When you click Default, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the horizontal edge of the drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

281

Drawing Precisely When you click Implicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the element that you are dimensioning. When you click Explicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the element that you set the dimension axis to with the Axis on the Dimension toolbar. You can use Explicit when the default horizontal and vertical axes are not appropriate for the geometry that you are dimensioning. Complement — Places an angular dimension at the 180 degree complement. Half/Full — Toggles between half and full. When you toggle this option, the symmetric diameter appears as half or full. The following options are available only if you click SmartDimension button on the Dimension toolbar and select an element: Length — Places a linear dimension for the following:  The length of a line  The arc length of an arc  The horizontal or vertical distance between the end points of a line

Angle — Places an angular dimension for the angle of a line or the sweep angle of an arc.

   

282

Radius — Places a radial dimension for the following: Arc Circle Ellipse Curve

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely Diameter — Places a diameter dimension for an arc or circle.

Prefix — Opens or closes the Dimension Prefix dialog box for specifying prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix information. Dimension Type — Specifies the dimension type and the related tolerances.

Upper Tolerance — Sets the primary upper tolerance value. This option is available for tolerance or limits dimension types only. Lower Tolerance — Sets the primary lower tolerance value. This option is available for tolerance or limits dimension types only. Class — Sets the tolerance class. This option is available for the class dimension type only. You can set the deviation (letters) and the grade (numbers).

See Also Angle Between Command (on page 281) Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294) Distance Between Command (on page 293)

Dimension Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties of a dimension or dimension style. You can point to a dimension and right-click to access this dialog box from Properties on the shortcut menu.

See Also Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) General Tab (on page 284) Units Tab (on page 284) Secondary Units Tab (on page 285) Text Tab (on page 286) Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 286) Spacing Tab (on page 287) Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 288)

SmartSketch User's Guide

283

Drawing Precisely Name Tab Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or Modify on the Styles dialog box. Name — Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive. Based On — Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on. Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.

See Also Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419)

General Tab Sets general properties for dimensions. Color - Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.  Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.  Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.  Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes on driving dimensions are changed. Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual. Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing view. Manual- Scales the dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. For example, for a scale of 1:100mm, set the manual value to 0.01. Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.

See Also Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Units Tab Sets the primary units for dimensions. Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units — Sets the primary units for linear dimensions. Unit Label — Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label. Subunit Label — Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a subunit label. Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 255. This value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13 inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch.

284

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely Angular — Sets the units for an angular dimension. Units — Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or Radians. Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Zeroes — Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Delimiter — Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.  Period — Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.  Comma — Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.  Space — Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Secondary Units Tab Sets the secondary units for dimensions. Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units — Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension, it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit. Unit Label — Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Subunit Label — Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Round-Off — Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings with dual unit display. Zeroes — Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Dual Unit Display — Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430)

SmartSketch User's Guide

285

Drawing Precisely New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Text Tab Sets the text options for dimensions. Text - Sets text options for a dimension. Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text. Font Style - Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension. Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension. Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.

Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the dimension text looks like the following picture.

Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar. Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you type .5, the size of the tolerance text is half the size of the dimension text. Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423)

Lines and Coordinate Tab Dimension Lines — Sets options for dimension lines. A dimension line defines the measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends and a dimension in the center. Connect — Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines. Width — Sets the width of the dimension line. Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Break Line — Sets the size of the break line for the linear, angular, or radial dimension. This value is a ratio of the font size. The dimension break line is separate from the leader and balloon break lines. Coordinate — Sets options for coordinate dimensions.

286

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely Auto-Jog — Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option only when you place a coordinate dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two dimensions is less than the value set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a jog in the projection line. Common Origin — Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none. Text Position — Positions text in a coordinate dimension. Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Projection Line — Sets options for the projection line of a dimension. Display — Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter. Element Gap — Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Extension — Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Angle — Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings. Center Mark — Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element. Extend Center Mark — Displays projection lines on center marks. Extend Center Mark only works when the Center Mark option is selected as well.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Spacing Tab Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value. Text Clearance Gap — Sets the space between the text and the dimension line. Dual Display Vertical Gap — Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that dimensions display two units. Line Spacing — Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and the dimension text. Dimension Above Line Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension line. Horizontal Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance on dimensions. Vertical Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on dimensions. Vertical Limits Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit dimensions. Symbol Gap — Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set the space between the symbol and the dimension text.

SmartSketch User's Guide

287

Drawing Precisely Prefix/Suffix Gap — Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension text. Horizontal Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of the box on dimensions. Vertical Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the box on dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Terminator and Symbol Tab Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions. A terminator is a graphic symbol, such as an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader. Terminator — Sets options for terminators. Type — Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Examples of some of the terminator types are provided below. Arrow (Filled)

Arrow (Hollow)

Arrow (Open)

Back Slash

Blank

Circle

Dot

Slash

288

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely Size — Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is twice the size of the dimension text.

Inside Limit — Controls the terminator position relative to a dimension's projection lines. The Inside Limit is calculated as a constant times the dimension font size. For example, if the font size is 0.125 inches and the Inside Limit is set to 3 (3 x font size), any dimension with a value greater than or equal to 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the inside of the projection lines. Any dimension with a value less than 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the outside of the projection lines. Display — Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.

Freespace Type — Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free space. Origin Type — Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension. This setting affects dimensions only at placement. You can change the terminator's position after placement by dragging the terminator to the other side of the projection line. In the example below, the inside limit value is 3, the font size is 0.1 in., and the dimension line is .317 in. in length. Therefore: Dimension value > 3 (inside limit) * .01 (font size)

The inside limit affects newly-placed dimensions only. The setting has no effect if the dimension value is changed because of changes in the parent geometry. Datum Type — Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame uses an anchor terminator. Symbol — Sets options for symbols in dimensions. Placement — Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial and linear dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also hide the symbol. Not to Scale — Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon. Suppress Diameter — Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430)

SmartSketch User's Guide

289

Drawing Precisely New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Dimension Along a Curve Use the Dimension Along custom command to define or apply a constraint on the position of b-spline curved objects (for example, hull seams and stiffeners) a given distance above or below other objects. This command helps in designing seams and profiles on a shell or other curved surfaces. For example, when you place a longitudinal seam a certain distance above a deck, the girth dimension will be constant along the two b-spline curves in some cases, while other cases will require a varying girth dimension. The Dimension Along command can also be used to define radically-placed stiffeners on either a flat plate or a conical-ruled surface.

Add the Dimension Along Command to Your Toolbar Follow the steps below to add the custom Dimension Along command. 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, select Dimension. 3. Select and drag the Dimension Along icon to a place on your toolbar.

Place a Dimension Along a Curve Follow the steps below to use the Dimension Along command to measure or dimension a b-spline curve. The position of the controlled curve is modified if the dimension value is changed. The curve you are dimensioning must be a b-spline curve. 1. On the vertical toolbar, click Curve and draw the curve you want to measure. -orSelect the curve you want to measure. 2. Click Point on the vertical toolbar and place your two key points on the curve where you want the dimensioning to start and end.  

290

A key point can be an intersection, end point, midpoint, or center point. You can also dimension using the intersection of an object with a curve as a key point.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely The figure below shows a b-spline curve with two points, one placed directly on the curve and one away from the curve. The points are using the Normal (Arrow Backward) style.

3. Click Dimension Along and select the curve you want to dimension. 4. Click the first or starting point of the dimension, then click on the ending point of the dimension. The system displays the dimension measurement for the curve between the two selected points.

The arc above the measurement ( ) indicates that the dimension represents a curved dimension as shown in the figure above.

Align Dimensions With the Align Dimensions custom command, you can select linear dimensions and align them to a common point. In the SmartSketch drawing, select the linear dimensions that you want to align. 

To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key and click each linear dimension.

SmartSketch User's Guide

291

Drawing Precisely  1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

To select multiple objects using a select set, click Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and then drag a fence around the linear dimensions you want to align. Click Tools > Custom Commands. In the Custom Commands dialog box, navigate to \Program and click igrAlignDim412.ocx. Click Open. Click a point or an object in the SmartSketch drawing along which you want to align the selected dimensions. Right-click to exit the command. You can also press Esc to exit the command.

The Align Dimensions command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the command is active, you can select additional linear dimensions to align or create a new select set of linear dimensions to align.

Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons:  Distance Between  Angle Between 2. Click an element or key point to identify the origin element.

3. Click an element or key point to measure to.

4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer. 5. Click to place the dimension.

6. If you want to place another dimension, click another element or key point to select the next measurement element. The origin element for this dimension is the element that you selected in step 2. 7. Click to place the next dimension. 

292

After placing several dimensions, if you want to use a different origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to start over.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 

After you click the two elements that you want to place the dimension between, the orientation of the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.



Before you place a dimension between two elements or keypoints, you can use Axis to set the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance Between. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis. A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be dimensioned. If you place a manual linear dimension that is chained or stacked with an automatic linear dimension, the manual dimension is immediately replaced with a standalone dimension that is no longer attached to the automatic dimension. The new dimension is attached to a newly-placed point object whose position coincides with the connect point location of the automatic dimension projection line to which the manual dimension was originally attached. Because the new dimension is no longer chained or stacked with the automatic dimension, it does not move if the automatic dimension's position is modified.

 

See Also Angle Between Command (on page 281) Distance Between Command (on page 293) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Distance Between Command Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key points. You can place linear dimensions in stacked dimension groups.

You can place chained dimension groups.

You can also add linear dimensions to existing linear dimension groups.

See Also Angle Between Command (on page 281) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

SmartSketch User's Guide

293

Drawing Precisely Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 292) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

Coordinate Dimension Command Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or more key points or elements. The coordinate dimensions that refer to the common origin are members of a coordinate dimension group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on either side of the origin with respect to the dimension axis. You can also add additional coordinate dimensions to existing coordinate dimension groups.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 297) Place a Dimension Group (on page 296) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size, orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional values—you do not have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes. For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the value of the radius dimension changes the size of the arc.

To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and key points you want to relate. In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu before creating your dimension.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Driving Dimension (on page 305) Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension (on page 306)

294

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Dimension Groups You can place dimensions in dimension groups with several commands. This makes the dimensions easier to manipulate on the drawing sheet. All members of a stacked or chained dimension group share the same dimension axis.  Stacked dimension group



Chained dimension group

A coordinate dimension group is another type of dimension group. Coordinate dimensions measure the position of key points or elements from a common origin. All the dimensions within the group measure from a common origin. You should use coordinate dimensions when you want to dimension elements in relation to a common origin or zero point.

When you are placing dimension groups with Distance Between or Angle Between, the pointer position determines what type of dimension group will be placed. After you place the first dimension in a group and click the second element you want to measure, if the pointer is below the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a chained group.

If the pointer is above the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a stacked group.

SmartSketch User's Guide

295

Drawing Precisely You can place dimension groups with the following buttons on the Dimension toolbar:  Distance Between  Angle Between  Symmetric Diameter  Coordinate Dimension

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 297) Place a Dimension Group (on page 296)

Place a Dimension Group 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons:  Distance Between 

Angle Between



Symmetric Diameter

 Coordinate Dimension 2. Click an element that you want to measure.

3. Click to place the dimension.

4. Click another element that you want to measure.

5. Click to place the dimension in the dimension group.



296

The first dimension that you place in a dimension group is the origin dimension.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 

Coordinate Dimension places coordinate dimensions. Coordinate dimensions can only be placed in a group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on any side of the elements that you want to dimension.

See Also Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294) Dimension Groups (on page 295) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group

1. Click the element that the dimension measures.

2. Click a point for the dimension. This action adds the dimension to the dimension group.

 

If you change a dimension group, the group updates automatically. If you delete a dimension from the middle of a chained dimension group, the group splits into two groups.

SmartSketch User's Guide

297

Drawing Precisely 

If you place a dimension group using Axis and then delete the first or middle dimension from the group, this action deletes all the dimensions after the removed dimension.

See Also Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294) Dimension Groups (on page 295) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Symmetric Diameter. 2. Click an element or key point. This element or key point is the origin.

3. Click an element to measure or a key point to measure to.

4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer. 5. Click to place the dimension.

6. To place another dimension, click another element to measure or key point to measure to. The origin element for this dimension is the first element or key point that you selected. 7. Click to place the dimension. 

298

To use a different origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to resume editing.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 

After you click the two elements that you want to dimension between, the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.



Turn on Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as half. Turn off Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as full.

See Also Dimension Groups (on page 295) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Symmetric Diameter Command Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and another element or key point, multiplies the distance by two, and displays the value as a diameter. You can place dimensions that measure the symmetric diameter of elements in a dimension group. You can also add additional symmetric diameter dimensions to an existing dimension group.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension (on page 298) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

SmartSketch User's Guide

299

Drawing Precisely

Set a Dimension Axis 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Axis. 2. Click an element to which you want the dimension axis to be parallel or perpendicular.

3. Choose distance between, then place a dimension. You can now place a dimension that runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined.

4. To use the dimension axis that you set using Axis, click Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar. 5. On the ribbon, set Explicit in the Dimension Axis box. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis.

See Also Axis Command (on page 301)

300

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Axis Command Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. A dimension axis allows you to place dimensions that are perpendicular to or parallel to an element. The default axis in a drawing is perpendicular or parallel to the horizontal axis of a drawing sheet. Dimensions placed along the default axis look like this:

After you set a dimension axis with Axis, you can now place a dimension that runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined. To use the axis that you have just specified, you must set the type of dimension axis that you want to use on the dimension ribbon. You do this by clicking Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar. Then, you click Explicit in the Dimension Axis box on the ribbon so that you can use the dimension axis that you set with Axis.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 292) Place a Dimension Group (on page 296)

Set the Dimension Type Dimension types control how the dimension is displayed. You can set the dimension type before or after you place a dimension.  On the ribbon, click one of the options on the Dimension Type list on the palette to set the dimension type. In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see the type of dimension and an example of what the dimension will look like.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)

SmartSketch User's Guide

301

Drawing Precisely

Edit a Dimension Prefix 1. Select a dimension. 2. On the ribbon, click Prefix . 3. On the Dimension Prefix dialog box, type the characters that you want to appear as prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information in the appropriate boxes. While you type information in one of the boxes, you can also click a symbol at the top of the dialog box to add symbols to the prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information. 4. Click Apply to change the dimension that you selected.  

You can also use the Dimension Prefix dialog box while you place a dimension. You can change the prefix or suffix gap by selecting a dimension. Then, you can click Properties on the Edit menu. On the Spacing tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box, change the prefix or suffix gap. You can also set the superfix or subfix gap on this tab.

See Also Dimension Prefix Dialog Box (on page 302) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Dimension Prefix Dialog Box Adds prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix text to a dimensional value. You can use this dialog box while you place or edit a dimension.

(A)

Superfix

(B)

Prefix

(C)

Value

(D)

Suffix

(E)

Subfix

Special Characters — Applies a font character to the dimension prefix. You can use the buttons to apply font characters, such as a diameter, counterbore, depth, and initial length. Superfix — Specifies superfix information. Prefix — Specifies prefix information. Suffix — Specifies suffix information. Subfix — Specifies subfix information. Apply — Applies the prefix to the dimension.

See Also Dimension Ribbon (on page 281) Edit a Dimension Prefix (on page 302)

302

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Set the Dimension Units 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select a dimension. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. On the Dimension Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. Set the options you want to use for the dimension unit.



You can set the dimension units for a dimension that you are about to place using the Format > Dimension command. You can save the dimension unit settings in a dimension style using the Format > Style command.



See Also Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 308) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Move a Dimension 1. Click part of the dimension that you want to move. 2. Drag the dimension to a new location. The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move a dimension. The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of a dimension.

To move the dimension line 

Click the dimension line and drag the dimension.

To move the dimension text 1. Click the dimension text. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:

2. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:

SmartSketch User's Guide

303

Drawing Precisely 

Along the dimension line



Outside of the dimension line



Outside of the projection line

To move the terminator 

Click the terminator and drag it.

To move the projection line 

Click the projection line and drag it.

You can lengthen or shorten the projection line.

304

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely To move the leader break line 

For radial dimensions, you can move the break line of the leader line. Click the dimension text. Then, drag the text while pressing SHIFT.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size, orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional values—you do not have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes. For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the value of the radius dimension changes the size of the arc.

To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and key points you want to relate. In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu before creating your dimension.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Place a Driving Dimension (on page 305) Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension (on page 306)

Place a Driving Dimension 1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships. 2. Select an element. 3. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following commands:  SmartDimension  Distance Between 

Angle Between

SmartSketch User's Guide

305

Drawing Precisely The dimensions that you place will be driving dimensions by default.  

To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and, on the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension (on page 306) Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 307)

Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension 1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships. 2. Select the driven dimension that you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. The color of the dimension changes to indicate a driving dimension. 

 

To place a driving dimension, you must select Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the dimension that you place by default is a driving dimension. To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and click Driving/Driven. To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.

See Also Angle Between Command (on page 281) Distance Between Command (on page 293) Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 308) Axis Command (on page 301) Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Dimension Text Command Allows you to override a driven dimensional value with a text string.

See Also Override a Driven Dimension (on page 307) Dimension Text Ribbon (on page 306)

Dimension Text Ribbon Specifies a text string that can be used to replace a dimension value. Dimension text - Enter a text string.

306

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely See Also Dimension Text Command (on page 306) Override a Driven Dimension (on page 307)

Override a Driven Dimension 1. Click Dimension Text

on the Dimension toolbar.

If the Dimension toolbar is not displayed, click Dimension on the Main toolbar. 2. Select the driven dimension you want to override. 3. In the Dimension Text field on the Dimension Text ribbon, enter the text that will override the dimension. 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. If you select a driving dimension instead of a driven dimension, SmartSketch prompts you either to select another dimension or to right-click and exit the command.

See Also Dimension Text Command (on page 306) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 307)

Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element When you override the value of a driven dimension by editing the dimensional value, the resulting dimension is not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value of 15 millimeters to 30 millimeters, the actual size of the visible line remains 15 millimeters. Only the dimension text is changed; the line remains unchanged.

To change the value of a dimension without changing the actual element: 1. Select a driven dimension. A color that you set with Style on the Format menu indicates a driven dimension. You can also set the color by selecting a dimension and clicking Properties on the Edit menu. 2. On the ribbon, delete the dimensional value from the Value box and type a new value.   

To restore the dimension value to the original value of the element select a dimension, right mouse click and select Not to Scale on the shortcut menu. You can show dimensions that are not-to-scale by using Styles on the Format menu. This option places a zigzag or straight line under the dimensional values that are not-to-scale. To return the dimensional value to the value of the element it actually measures, delete all the characters from the Value box on the ribbon. You can also select a dimension and clear Not to Scale on the shortcut menu.

SmartSketch User's Guide

307

Drawing Precisely See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 308) Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 307)

Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) Returns a driven dimension to its actual value. You can use this command only on a dimensional value that has been edited. Editing a dimensional value overrides the original value and makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15 millimeters.

Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select a dimension.

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 307)

Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements Use the Drop Dimension to Graphics command, available from the Dimension shortcut menu, to convert a dimension into individual elements such as lines and text boxes. 1. From the active drawing sheet, place drawing elements and then place a dimension. For more information on using dimension commands, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274). 2. Right-click the dimension to open the Dimension shortcut menu. 3. Select Drop Dimension to Graphics. The dimension is converted into a group of elements. 4. With the group selected, click Ungroup from the Change toolbar. You can now select each individual element. In the figure below, a dimension has been placed for one side of a rectangle.

308

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely After the dimension is converted and ungrouped, each element, such as the text box, can be selected.

See Also Drop Dimension to Graphics Command (on page 309)

Drop Dimension to Graphics Command Converts or drops a dimension into a group of individual elements. This command is available from the Dimension shortcut menu, which is accessed by right-clicking on a dimension.

See Also Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements (on page 308) Document Explorer Window (on page 62)

Setting Paper and Model Units Each document in the software is a container of sheets, where each sheet is a virtual sheet of paper that displays model information. The software supports measurements in two different spaces: paper space and model space. The paper space units represent physical measurements on the virtual sheet. The model space units represent real-world measurements associated with the model. Within the drawing environment, "model space" is synonymous with the term "world space". You can define the relationship between paper space and model space on the Sheet Setup dialog box. The default relationship between the paper and model spaces is 1:1. In other words, one unit of model space is equivalent to one unit of paper space. For example, if a text box with a font size of 1 inch in paper space is compared to a vertical line 1 inch in length, the text box and line appear on the paper to have the same height. However, if you change the drawing scale to 1:2, the line appears half as tall on the sheet as the text. If you change the drawing scale to 2:1, the line appears twice as tall on the sheet as the text. In either case, if you select the line, the length readout remains at 1 inch. In the current software, you can place only balloons, leaders, and dimensions in paper space. These graphics annotate objects in the model space but appear in paper space. You can place text boxes in either paper space or model space. 

If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet with Insert > Object, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container

SmartSketch User's Guide

309

Drawing Precisely





document. You can set or change the size for dimension text and annotations by clicking Style on the Format menu. On the Style dialog box, you select the type of style you want to set or modify (dimension or text), and then click New or Modify to set the font size for dimension text or a text box. Changing the font size of dimension-text style or a text-box style changes only the dimension text or annotations with the modified style applied to them. You can also set the font size for individual dimension text or annotations by overriding the style that you applied. You do this by selecting the dimension or text box and editing its properties with Properties on the shortcut menu or from the Edit menu. You can adjust how the model units fit within the printable sheet area by clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu. On the Size and Scale tab, you can select a scale setting by clicking an item on the Select Scale dropdown list. The value that you select causes the model to resize within the printable area, but neither the paper unit information (dimensions and annotations) nor model unit information is scaled.

See Also Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73) Change the Background Sheet (on page 79) Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 68)

Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet 1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed. 3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not fit on the sheet. 4. Click File > Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size. 5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All dimensions appear in real-world units. If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document. If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use the File > Sheet Setup command.

See Also Sheet Setup Command (on page 66)

Measuring Distances and Areas You can also measure the length of a line or the diameter of a circle by selecting the element and looking at the value on the ribbon. For more detailed work, the software provides commands for measuring distances or areas in a drawing. Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances or areas with these commands.

310

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 

Measure Distance measures the distance between points on elements and points in free space.



Measure Area measures the area inside one or more closed boundaries.

The distances are shown using the current units of measure for the document. To set the units for measuring distances or areas, click File > Properties, and then set the units for the length, area, or angle of a drawing on the Units tab. This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions, click Format > Style and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click Edit > Properties and set the units for dimensions that you have selected. Bearing and Azimuth You can orient your drawing in an environment with a specific bearing and azimuth. This tool is useful for applications such as civil engineering. Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use the Tools > Custom Commands command to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Custom Commands dialog box, click Tools to access the command.

See Also Measure Area Command (on page 317) Measure Distance Command (on page 313) Measure an Area (on page 316) Measure a Distance (on page 311)

Measure a Distance 1. On the toolbar, click Measure Distance

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

311

Drawing Precisely 2. Click in free space or click a key point. This identifies the point to measure from.

3. Click a point to measure to. The distance between the two points appears next to the pointer. 4. Click another point to measure to. The distance between the last two points and the distance between the first point and the last point appear next to the pointer. 

  

When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the distances, as measured along the X and Y axes. When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer. When you are in the middle of a task, you can use Measure Distance at any time. You can press TAB to move between the distance and total distance. You can also press CTRL + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the value to a text box or ribbon field.

See Also Measure Distance Command (on page 313) Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 310)

Measure the Length of a Line Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance. For example, consider the following workflow. 1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.

2. Click Tools > Measure Distance and measure a distance. You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.

312

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 3. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still active—you can pick up where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.

Measure Distance Command Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points. When you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance at any time. When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the distances, as measured along the x and y axes.

When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer.

The Measure Distance command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on page 41).

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Measure a Distance (on page 311)

Measure the Distance Along an Object 1. On the toolbar, click Measure Distance Along . 2. Click a point or click a key point on the linear object. This identifies the point to measure from.

SmartSketch User's Guide

313

Drawing Precisely 3. Click the second point or key point to measure to. The distance between the two points appears next to the pointer.

For closed shapes (curves, circles, ellipses), the measurement will default to a clockwise direction. You can hold the Ctrl key to change the measurement direction to counterclockwise.

See Also Measure Distance Along Command (on page 315) Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 310)

314

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Measure Distance Along Command Measures the distance along a linear object based on two points.

For closed shapes (curves, circles, ellipses), the measurement will default to a clockwise direction. You can hold the Ctrl key to change the measurement direction to counterclockwise.

SmartSketch User's Guide

315

Drawing Precisely The Measure Distance Along command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on page 41).

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Measure the Distance Along an Object (on page 313)

Measure an Area 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Area . 2. Click inside a closed boundary to measure its area. The area and perimeter measurements for the closed boundary appear next to the pointer. The measured area appears as a gray fill.

As you click points, press SHIFT to display the total area and perimeter by the pointer.   

If you are measuring multiple areas and want to clear a measurement, click inside one of the filled, closed boundaries that you have measured while pressing the SHIFT key. When you are drawing elements or modifying a drawing, you can measure an area with Measure Area at any time. You can press TAB to toggle between the area and total area. You can also press CTRL + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the value to a text box or ribbon field.

See Also Measure Area Command (on page 317) Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 310)

316

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely

Measure Area Command Displays the most recently selected area and perimeter of the closed boundary in the current document units. When multiple closed boundaries are selected, the command displays the total area and perimeter of all selected boundaries in the current document units. Press SHIFT while clicking to add other closed boundaries to the current selection.

The Measure Area command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on page 41).

See Also Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274) Measure an Area (on page 316)

Set the Unit of Measure 1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. You can set the units for the length, area, or angle of a drawing. This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions, click Style on the Format menu and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click Properties on the Edit menu and set the units for dimensions that you have selected. 3. On the Units tab, set the options you want.

See Also Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 310) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Properties Dialog Box (on page 69)

Set Bearing Dialog Box Controls the selection of Default, Bearing, and Azimuth angle settings. Also controls the azimuth settings for Base Bearing and Direction. Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access the command.

Dialog Box Options Default - Sets defaults for bearing and azimuth. Bearing - Determination of position to refer to an angle.

SmartSketch User's Guide

317

Drawing Precisely Azimuth - Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a fixed point, based on a circle. Base Bearing - Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an angle. Direction - Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.

See Also Bearing and Azimuth Command (on page 318)

Set Bearing and Azimuth 1. From a customized toolbar, click Bearing and Azimuth. Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize to place it on a toolbar or menu. 2. Click Default, Bearing, or Azimuth to select the orientation for the drawing or element. 3. When you select Azimuth, you can change the current settings of Base Bearing and Direction.

See Also Bearing and Azimuth Command (on page 318)

Bearing and Azimuth Command Allows you to determine how to display the angle for the selected element. The Bearing and Azimuth Setup command is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, select Tools under Categories to display the Bearing and Azimuth Setup button. For more information, see Set Bearing Dialog Box (on page 317).

See Also Set Bearing and Azimuth (on page 318)

Using the Variable Table You can use the Variable Table to define and edit functional relationships between the dimensions of a design in a familiar spreadsheet format. The Variable Table is accessed with Variables on the Tools menu. There are two types of variables: dimensions displayed in the design and variables you create directly in the Variable Table. Dimension variables directly control elements of a design. The variable you assign must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. You can use variables to do the following:  Drive a dimension with another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B  Define a constant; pi=3.14  Drive a dimension with a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5  Drive a dimension with a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = pi * Dimension B  Drive a dimension with a formula that includes a function; Dimension A = Dimension B + cos (Dimension C)  Drive a dimension with a value from a spreadsheet, such as a Microsoft Excel document, by copying the value from the spreadsheet into the Variable Table. Besides Excel, you can use any other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.

318

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely Accessing the Variable Table After you select Variables on the Tools menu, a table appears with the following columns: Type, Name, Value, and Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.

Entering Data into the Variable Table When you open the Variable Table in the document, all the dimensional values for the dimensions on the drawing sheet appear in the columns. The name that appears in the Name column is automatically generated by the software. You can change the name to something more logical if you want.

Restricting the Display of Variables You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window:  You can display only the variables for dimensions that the software created.  You can also display variables that are associated with elements in the current document or the active window.  You can also display a set of elements that you have selected in the document.

Creating Expressions The system provides a set of standard mathematical functions. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the function. The Function Wizard is convenient when you forget the proper syntax for a math function. You start the Function Wizard by clicking Fx in the Variable Table. The function is written in the Formula column of the selected row.

Examples Suppose you draw a sheet metal bracket and you want to build a relationship between the bend radius and stock thickness. You can use a formula in the Variable Table to build and manage this relationship. The following example illustrates how the Variable Table would look if you built a relationship that changes the bend radius when the stock thickness changes. Type

Name

Value

Variable

Stock_thickness

.25

Dimension

Bend_radius

.375

Formula

1.5 * stock_thickness

Here are some more examples of how you might set up the Variable Table: Type

Name

Value

Variable

c

2.0 kg

Variable

d

10.0 rad

@c:\bearing.xls!sheet1!R6C3

Variable

e

20 mm

@c:\bearing.xls!sheet1R!6C3

SmartSketch User's Guide

Formula

319

Drawing Precisely Argument Conventions The following argument conventions are used in the Variable Table:  In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are not.  Argument names should follow the rules for Visual Basic.  In the text where functions and arguments are defined, required and optional arguments are not bold. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or optional.

See Also Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Edit an Existing Variable (on page 320)

Create a Variable with a Value or Expression 1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type for the variables value. The default type is Distance, which means that any expression created will be for a distance. For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimension, you must select Angular. To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list. 3. In the Name column, click an empty cell. 4. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press ENTER. 5. In the same row, in the Formula column, do one of the following:  Type the value that you want for the variable.  Type a simple expression for the variable. A simple expression consists of using basic mathematical operators to set up an equation using values and other variables. For example, if variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, you can type the following formulas when creating a new variable: Var1 * Var2 Var1 / 3.0 (Var2 + 5.0) * Var1 Var2 ^ 2 References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1. 6. Click Enter to create the variable.

See Also Open Source Command (on page 328) Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 328) Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326)

Edit an Existing Variable 1. In the document, select the dimensions that you want to appear in the Variable Table. 2. Click Tools > Variables. 3. The Variable Table automatically displays the dimensions that are selected in the document. To see other dimensions and variables, click Filter on the Variable Table window.

320

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 4. On the Filter dialog box, set the following options to specify which variables or dimensions are displayed in the Variable Table. For example, to see all the dimensions and variables in the Variable Table, set the following options:  In the Type box, select Dimensions and User Variables.  In the Named By box, select Both.  In the Graphics In box, select File. When you click OK, the settings are saved, so the next time you use Filter, the last settings are used. A convenient method of limiting the number of variables and dimensions displayed is to name the ones you use frequently. Then, on the Filter dialog box, in the Named By box, click Users to display the named variables and dimensions. 5. After a variable is displayed in the Variable Table, you can change any of its attributes, except its type and the unit type. On the Variable Table, in the Value column of a variable, type a new value to change the variable. 6. In the Formula column, click the cell and use one of several methods to create a new formula.  

To access Filters on the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right- click. The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.

See Also Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321)

Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine 1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is the unit type for the variables value. The default type is Distance. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list. In the Name column, click an empty cell. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press ENTER. In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell. Click Function Wizard. Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog box. Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the available functions and appropriate input. For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, some valid formulas using functions are as follows: Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2) Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )

SmartSketch User's Guide

321

Drawing Precisely References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1. 





You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and use them as variable formulas. You can write these functions in Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in a .BAS file. The Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the BASIC module, the specific function, and the necessary input and output. If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press CTRL + A after you have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This activates the Function Wizard with the function already selected for you. You can also type expressions with functions directly in the cell in the Formula column.

See Also Open Source Command (on page 328) Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 328) Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326)

Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet You can use Microsoft Excel to link a variable to a spreadsheet. Besides Excel, you can use other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. Click Related Topics for more information about how to create a variable. 1. In another application, such as Excel, open the document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships. You can edit this link by clicking the Edit > Links command. 2. Open the design document that you want to link to and click Tools > Variables. Arrange the windows of the spreadsheet document and the Variable Table in the design document so that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents. 3. In the spreadsheet, select the cell that you want to link to. It can be a single cell or two adjacent cells, where the first cell contains the value and the second cell contains the units.

4. Copy the selected cells. For example, if you are using Excel, click Edit > Copy. 5. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to. 6. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.  

To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right-click. Press ENTER to accept the value you pasted. When you edit the value in the spreadsheet, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. For example, when you link the dimensions in the design document to an Excel spreadsheet, you can change the dimensions of the design by editing the corresponding values in the Excel spreadsheet. The design document automatically updates. You can edit the links with Edit Links command on the shortcut menu.

322

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely See Also Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 328) Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326)

Edit a Formula Containing a Function 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > Variables. In the Variable Table, click a cell that contains a formula that has a function. Select a function that you want to replace. Click Function Wizard. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the function you selected. 5. Type a new function to replace the existing function. 6. Click Next. 7. Click Finish to replace the function in the formula.

See Also Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 324)

Insert a Function into a Formula 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Tools > Variables. In the Variable Table, click the function cell in which you want to insert the formula. Click Function Wizard. Click the function category and the function name. Click Next. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the arguments for the function. 6. Type the values for the arguments. 7. Click Finish to insert the completed function into your formula. You can type values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the boxes on the Function Wizard dialog box. These entries must produce valid values for the argument. If an argument is required, the word "required" appears in the display area on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.

See Also Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 323)

Format a Column 1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. Drag the appropriate grid lines to adjust the column width.

See Also Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 324)

SmartSketch User's Guide

323

Drawing Precisely

Variables Command Accesses the Variable Table, which operates much like a software spreadsheet. The Variable Table allows you to define and manipulate drawing variables and their values, as well as establish functional relationships between the design variables. For example, you can use the Variable Table to create expressions for dimensional values. You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window to display only the variables for dimensions that the software created, display variables that are associated with elements in the current document or the active window, or display a set of elements that you have selected in the document. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Variables button on a toolbar.

See Also Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323) Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 324)

Variable Table Dialog Box Displays, defines, and manipulates design variables and functional relationships between the variables. This table operates much like a software spreadsheet. The design variables can be dimensions in the document or variables defined with the Variable Table. The table consists of the following columns: Type, Name, Value, Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable. Unit Type — Specifies the unit of measure for the variable entered in the Variable Table. The box is located in the top left corner of the Variable Table. The default type is distance which means that any expression created will be a distance parameter. For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimension, you should change the unit type to angular. Then, the variable created will be an angular type, which can be used to control an angular dimensional relationship. Enter — Accepts the edits you have made in the cell. Cancel — Clears the contents of the cell and returns the cell to its previous value. Filter — Access the Filter Dialog Box (on page 326) so that you can restrict the display of variables in the Variable Table window. Function Wizard — Accesses the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 327). Help — Activates online Help for the Variable Table dialog box.

The following items describe the columns in the Variable Table: Type — Displays the variable type, generally the type of a dimension, such as DIM, VAR, SCALAR, and so forth. DIM refers to a dimensional relationship. VAR refers to a variable that you have created. This option is read-only. Name — Names the variable. By default, the software places the name of a dimension in this column. These names can be renamed to a more logical one, if you want. You must always name variables that you define when you create them. A variable must be named if you want to refer to it in the Formula column of another row. You can change the name by editing the Name cell and then selecting Check at the top of the Variable Table. Variable names should meet the following requirements:  They must begin with a letter.

324

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely 

They must contain only letters, numbers, and the underscore character; you cannot use punctuation characters and spaces.  They must be 40 characters or fewer. Value — Displays the current value of the variable. A variable always has a value. You cannot edit the value of a variable that has formula. You can edit driving dimensions with the Variable Table. Formula — Displays the function or relation that defines the value of the variable. You can enter a mathematical expression in a cell in this column to calculate the value for a corresponding dimension. If the Formula cell is empty, then the variable value is independent of other variables. When using variable names within a formula, the names are case sensitive. For example, the names var1 and Var1 reference two different variables. If a value is defined by a formula, the formula appears in the Formula cell. You can enter an algebraic expression in the formula cell to define the value of the variable. The single line expression must be in standard Visual Basic syntax. The formula can include any available function. The resulting value of the formula is shown in the Value column of the variable. The software provides a set of standard mathematical functions. You can also select Visual Basic functions that you wrote and saved. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the inputs to the function. If the function does not contain proper syntax, the software displays a message indicating that there is an error in the formula.

See Also Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 325) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

Alphabetical List of Functions The following functions are available in the Variable Table. They are referred to as math and trig functions. ABS

Returns the absolute value of a number

ATN

Returns the arctangent of a number

COS

Returns the cosine of a number

EXP

Returns e raised to the power of a given number

FIX

Returns the integer portion of a number.

INT

Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

LOG

Returns the natural algorithm of a number

RND

Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

SGN

Returns an integer indicating the sign of a number

SIN

Returns the sine of the given angle

SQR

Returns the square root of number.

TAN

Returns the tangent of an angle

SmartSketch User's Guide

325

Drawing Precisely The following functions are also available in the Variable Table. User, Visual Basic

Relates variables through a user function, usually defined with Visual Basic.

See Also Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Format a Column (on page 323) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) Restricts the display in the Variable Table to variables that you select on the Filter dialog box. The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File. To select this command from the shortcut menu, click Tools > Variables, and then pause the mouse pointer in the Variable Table window.

See Also Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Filter Dialog Box (on page 326)

Filter Dialog Box Controls which variables should appear in the Variable Table. Type — Specifies the type of variables that are displayed in the Variable Table. If you click Dimension, then only dimension variables are displayed in the Variable Table; these variables directly control elements of a design. If you click User Variables, then only logical variables that you created are displayed. This variable type cannot directly control a design. A user variable must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. Variables can control dimensional relationships by setting the dimensional relationship equal to the variable. Named by — Controls the view in the Variable Table so that only named variables are displayed. User — Displays only variables that you have named. System — Displays only variables, usually the dimensions, that the software has created. Both — Displays all variables that are named. Graphics in — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document, active window, or group of elements that you have selected. The default filter is set to Last selected window. Last selected window — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the active window. Select set — Displays variables that are associated with elements in a group that you have selected in the document. File — Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document.

326

SmartSketch User's Guide

Drawing Precisely See Also Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Format a Column (on page 323) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321)

Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box Selects the function you want to enter. Function Category — Selects subsets of all available functions. If you click the All in the Function Category box, all the available functions appear. If you select any other category, only those functions that belong to that category appear. Custom functions that you define are included either under their assigned categories or in the category you have defined if no other categories are assigned. See the Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 325). Function Name — Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in the selected category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a macro sheet is active. The display area describes the selected function. Next — Moves to the next dialog box of the Function Wizard. You should click Next after selecting the function you want to insert into the Formula Bar or the selected cell. After you finish typing values into the appropriate fields, the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box is displayed. This dialog box appears first if you are entering a math and trig function. If you select a function that you defined using Visual Basic, a dialog box appears first that allows you to open the document that contains the function. After you open the document, the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box displays. Finish — Inserts the function into the Formula Bar. If you do not type an argument, the software inserts the argument names as placeholders in the formula. Cancel — Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything into the Formula Bar or into the selected cell.

See Also Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Format a Column (on page 323) Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 323) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box Enters values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the fields. The dialog box changes according to the function you select in the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box. Your entries must produce valid values for the arguments. If an argument is required for the function to be entered successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets in the display area. FuncName — Displays the name of the function. FnSummary — Displays a summary of the function. Number — Displays the number of the function.

SmartSketch User's Guide

327

Drawing Precisely First Argument — Displays the argument of the variable. In the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box, if the selected variable is a subroutine that you defined, more than one box appears on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box. The check box to the right of the field indicates whether the variable is an input or output argument. Back — Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding one. Finish — Enters the completed function in the Variable Table.

See Also Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 327) Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 325) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Format a Column (on page 323) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

Open Source Command Opens a spreadsheet in the Variable Table that has been linked to it with Paste Link.  

Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must click the Tools > Variables command. To access the Open Source command, right-click the Formula box in the Variable Table. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Links. Select a link, and then click Open Source.

See Also Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 328) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Format a Column (on page 323) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Links data in a document to a cell in the Variable Table. Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select Variables on the Tools menu.

See Also Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326) Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322) Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320) Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321) Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)

328

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 10

Transforming Elements Using the software tools, you can easily change the shape, size, angle, or relationship of an existing element. The toolbars listed below contain most of the buttons that you can use to transform an element.

The Draw Toolbar Element handles can be used to quickly transform elements. For example, you can change an arc by clicking the element with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and dragging the element's handles. The selected arc is transformed to a straight line by dragging the mid-point handle. The selected arc is transformed to a circle by dragging an end point handle. The Draw toolbar also provides options for extending or trimming elements. You can click Extend to Next to extend an element, or you can click Trim or Trim Corner to trim an element. You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.

The Change Toolbar Elements can be mirrored by clicking Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can also mirror and copy elements. You can rotate an element a precise angle about a specified point by using Rotate on the Change toolbar. You can use the Rotate ribbon to change the Step Angle, Rotation Angle, and Position Angle values. You can also use the Change toolbar to scale elements. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. After clicking Scale on the Change toolbar, you can use the Scale ribbon to increase the Scale Factor value. You cannot use the Scale option to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.

The Relationship Toolbar You can also use the Relationship toolbar to transform elements. For example, selecting Equal and clicking two elements will make the elements equal in size. The software will only allow you to select elements that are valid input for a specific command. For example, if you use the Concentric button, only circles, arcs, or ellipses can be selected. When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.

See Also Changing the Shape of an Element (on page 330) Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

SmartSketch User's Guide

329

Transforming Elements

Changing the Shape of an Element You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with your pointer. When you select an element with the Select Tool, its handles are displayed at key positions.

You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its handles. The first figure shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The second figure shows the effect of dragging the mid-point handle.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Modify an Element with the Select Tool (on page 330) Change Command (on page 331)

Modify an Element with the Select Tool 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Select an element. 3. Position the pointer over one of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the element can now be modified. 4. Drag the element handle to reposition it. You can use relationships to position the handle precisely.  

330

To retain the angle or aspect ratio of the element you are modifying, hold the SHIFT key while you drag the element's handle. To suspend the effect of relationship handles so that you can modify the element more freely, hold the ALT key while you drag the handle. The software maintains relationships as appropriate for the modified element.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Change Command Displays the Change toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to manipulate elements.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Display the Change Toolbar (on page 198)

Rotating Elements Using Rotate on the Change toolbar, you can rotate one or more elements a precise angle about a specified point. You can first select the element and then click Rotate, or you can click the button and then the element. As you click to define the reference points for the rotation, the software dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation, you can type values in the ribbon. You can type increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new positions with a positive value. The Position Angle box displays an absolute angle of the new position of the rotation. You can type values in both of these boxes and preview the results. You then click to complete the rotation of the element. By default, a copy is made of the element when you rotate it. If you do not want a copy, you should clear Copy on the ribbon.

See Also Rotate Command (on page 332) Rotate an Element (on page 331)

Rotate an Element 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select one or more elements. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate . If you want to copy the rotated elements, click Copy on the ribbon. Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. 5. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and elements being rotated. The location and position of the reference axis defines the rotation 'from' point. 6. Position the elements where you want them and then click to define the rotation 'to' point.    

To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the ribbon. You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate. You can use relationship indicators to define the rotation 'from' and 'to' points. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy the rotated elements, you can hold CTRL while you click to define the 'to' point.

SmartSketch User's Guide

331

Transforming Elements 

Relationships between elements within the selection set are maintained if the relationships still apply after the elements have been rotated.  You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using Rotate. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at the point where you left off.

See Also Rotate Command (on page 332) Rotate Ribbon (on page 332) Rotating Elements (on page 331)

Rotate Command Rotates one or more elements a precise distance or angle about a specified point.

See Also Rotate an Element (on page 331) Rotate Ribbon (on page 332)

Rotate Ribbon Copy — Creates a copy of the element that you are rotating. If you do not want a copy of the rotated element, then clear this option. Step Angle — Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an element rotates from a temporary axis. The temporary axis is the line between the element's center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate the element from (B).

You can specify increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic.

332

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements Rotation Angle — Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point that you rotate from and the point that you rotate to. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) is shown with the point that you rotate the element from (B).

The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated element. The value is always positive.

Position Angle — Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the element, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point that you rotate to. The position angle is always a positive value that is measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

See Also Rotate Command (on page 332) Rotate an Element (on page 331)

SmartSketch User's Guide

333

Transforming Elements

Mirroring Elements To mirror an element, you can click Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror with or without making a copy.

See Also Mirror Command (on page 335) Mirror an Element (on page 334)

Mirror an Element You can mirror elements by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear element as a mirror axis. You can also mirror and copy elements.

To mirror about an existing mirror axis or linear element 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select one or more elements. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror . If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon. Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored elements are displayed dynamically on the other side of the axis.

If you locate a linear element, the element can be part of the selection set. 5. Position the pointer so that the mirrored elements are where you want them, and then click.

To mirror about a mirror axis that you define 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror. 3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.

334

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements 4. Define one end of the mirror axis by click in free space or by clicking a key point. The software displays the mirror axis and mirrored elements dynamically. 5. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored elements are in position where you want them to be, and then click.       

If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric relationship when you mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis is used as the symmetry axis. Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored elements if they are still applicable. You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to mirror and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click to position the elements. Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on the ribbon. You can use relationship indicators to define a mirror axis. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using Mirror.

See Also Mirror Command (on page 335) Mirror Ribbon (on page 335)

Mirror Command Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror without copying, or mirror and copy.

See Also Mirror an Element (on page 334) Mirror Ribbon (on page 335)

Mirror Ribbon Copy — Mirrors and copies the elements in the selection set. Position Angle — Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the point you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting the position angle to 0 extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.

See Also Mirror Command (on page 335) Mirror an Element (on page 334)

SmartSketch User's Guide

335

Transforming Elements

Aligning SmartSketch Objects Alignment involves lining up two or more objects vertically or horizontally, either by their edges or their centers. Almost all diagrams and drawings require aligning certain items with each other. You can rely on rulers, grids, and guides to help you place objects, or you can use these features along with the alignment functions.

Aligning Items Vertically You can align objects vertically in three different ways:  Align objects by their left sides  Align objects by their right sides  Align objects by their centers In the following illustration, the objects are aligned by their left sides:

The objects in the select set are moved horizontally from the place where they are selected until they are aligned with the left edge of the leftmost object in the select set. If two objects are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to the left or right of one another when you use vertical alignment.

Aligning Items Horizontally The Align command allows you to horizontally align objects in three different ways:  Align objects by their tops  Align objects by their bottoms  Align objects by their centers

336

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements In the following illustration, the objects are aligned horizontally by their tops:

The objects in the select set are moved vertically from the place where they are selected until they are aligned with the top edge of the top-most object in the select set. If two objects are vertically near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to the top or bottom of one another when you use horizontal alignment.

See Also Align Command (on page 338) Line Style Editor Command (on page 492) Align SmartSketch Objects (on page 337)

Align SmartSketch Objects 1. On the drawing sheet, select two or more objects that you want to align. 

To select more than one object, hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each object.



You can create a select set by clicking Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and then dragging a fence around the objects you want to include. 2. Click Align on the Change toolbar. To display the Change toolbar, click Change on the Main toolbar. 3. On the Align ribbon (on page 338), click the button that corresponds to the alignment type you want. 



 

When you use horizontal alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the top or bottom of one another. If two shapes are vertically near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind another object. When you use vertical alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the right or left of one another. If two shapes are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be placed behind another object. Alignment features only line up objects; they do not distribute an equal amount of space between aligned objects. You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and symbols.

SmartSketch User's Guide

337

Transforming Elements See Also Align Command (on page 338) Line Style Editor Command (on page 492)

Align Command Allows you to align two or more objects in a select set. You can create a select set by clicking Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and dragging a fence around the items you want to include. To select more than one object, hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each element. The six align options provide the flexibility of arranging objects with less dragging. You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and symbols.

See Also Drawing Precisely (on page 267) Align SmartSketch Objects (on page 337) Align Ribbon (on page 338)

Align Ribbon Align Left - Aligns the left side of objects in a select set. Align Right - Aligns the right side of objects in a select set. Align about Horizontal - Aligns the objects in a select set along their horizontal centers. Align about Vertical - Aligns the objects in a select set along their vertical centers. Align Top - Aligns the tops of objects in a select set. Align Bottom - Aligns the bottoms of objects in a select set.

See Also Align Command (on page 338) Line Style Editor Command (on page 492)

Scaling Elements Scale on the Change toolbar reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is the same along the x and y axes. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view. Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled. If not, the relationships are deleted. To define the new scale, you can click points on the drawing sheet or you can type a value in the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. You can also use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse.

See Also Scale an Element (on page 339) Scale an Element with Its Handles (on page 340) Scale Command (on page 341)

338

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Scale an Element 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select one or more elements. On the Change toolbar, click Scale . If you want to copy the scaled elements, click Copy on the ribbon. Click where you want the scale origin to be. The software displays a crosshair at the scale origin, and dynamically displays a line between the scale origin and the pointer.

5. Move the pointer until the elements are the size you want and then click.

       

Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled. You can click Scale before you select elements to scale. Instead of clicking to define the new scale, you can use the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to scale and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click to define the new scale. You can use relationship indicators with this command. You can use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse. You can use the Reference box on the ribbon to change how the command dynamics correspond to the Scale Factor. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.

See Also Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 68)

SmartSketch User's Guide

339

Transforming Elements

Scale an Element with Its Handles You can use handles to scale framed elements such as text boxes, symbols, and linked or embedded objects. 1. Select an element. 2. Position the pointer over one of its handles. 3. Drag the handle to scale the element or object. 



You can also click Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing; the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu. Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled.

See Also Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 68)

Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size When you insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation document into a drawing sheet using Object on the Insert menu, the object is automatically scaled to fit the print area of the drawing sheet. The print area size changes depending on the selected working sheet. In some cases, you might want to work in model space and not paper space. 1. Click Insert > Object to insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation object. 2. Highlight the inserted object with the Select tool. 3. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 4. On the Info tab of the Properties dialog box, click Scale (1:1). After you close the dialog box, the inserted object changes back to the original model size.  

If an inserted object was scaled before bringing it into the drawing sheet, you might need to adjust the scale on the Properties dialog box to get the results you want. After inserting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document, if you have not performed any other actions, you can click Undo on the Edit menu to change the object back to the original model size.

See Also Object Command (on page 456) Properties Command (File Menu) (on page 69)

340

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Scale Command Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is the same along the X and Y axis. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. You can use Scale to scale, or to simultaneously scale and copy.

See Also Scale Ribbon (on page 341) Scaling Elements (on page 338)

Scale Ribbon Copy — Scales and copies the elements in the selection set. Step — Specifies the step value for the Scale Factor. The step value causes the Scale Factor to be decreased or increased in increments as you move the pointer toward or away from the scale origin. For example, if you set the step value to 0.25, the scale increases in increments of 0.25 as you move the pointer away from the scale origin. Scale Factor — Specifies how much the software reduces or enlarges the element. A scale factor between zero and one reduces; a scale factor greater than one enlarges. Reference — Specifies how long the dynamic line from the scale origin to the pointer has to be in order to achieve a Scale Factor of 1. For example, if you set Reference to 1, for every inch you move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one. If you set Reference to 2, for every two inches you move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one.

See Also Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 68)

Extending or Trimming Elements You can trim, extend or split/segment elements with buttons on the Draw toolbar. You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.

SmartSketch User's Guide

341

Transforming Elements Relationships are added or removed as necessary when you trim or extend an element. For example, if you trim part of a circle and more than one arc remains, concentric and equal relationships are applied between the remaining arcs.

You can also draw a chamfer on two different elements with Chamfer on the Draw toolbar. The elements must be linear, but do not have to intersect. The elements cannot be parallel to each other.

When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer (B).

To place a fillet, you can click Fillet on the Draw toolbar and then select the elements you want to modify. As with any command, you can use a combination of clicks and ribbon input.

See Also Chamfer Command (on page 351) Extend to Next Command (on page 348) Fillet Command (on page 353) Change Command (on page 331)

342

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Trim an Element 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim . 2. Do one of the following:  To trim one element at a time, click each element you want to trim.  To trim more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements. When you release the mouse button, all the elements are trimmed.





Before you click an element to trim, you can use QuickPick to see which portion of the element will be trimmed. When you move the pointer over the elements, QuickPick highlights the portion of the element that will be trimmed if you click. If you trim an element that does not intersect any other elements, the command trims the entire element, effectively deleting the element.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim Command Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim to Element Command Trims open and closed elements to another selected element.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

SmartSketch User's Guide

343

Transforming Elements

Trim an Element to Another Element 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim to Element . 2. Select an element in the SmartSketch drawing. 3. Select the element you want to trim to. The Trim to Element command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the command is active, you can select additional elements to trim.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Corner . 2. Do one of the following:  Click each element you want to trim or extend.



Drag the pointer over one or more elements, and then release the mouse button. The parts of the element over which you dragged the mouse remain—other parts are trimmed or extended as necessary.

You can draw only one corner at a time by dragging the pointer.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim Corner Command Draws a corner by extending and/or trimming two selected open elements.

344

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements (on page 344)

Trim an Element to a Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim to Point . 2. Select an element in the SmartSketch drawing. 3. Click the point, either in space or on another element, to which you want to trim. The Trim to Point command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the command is active, you can select additional elements to trim.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim to Point Command Trims the selected element to a point in space.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim Part of Element 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Inside . 2. Click to define the first point of the element to trim. 3. Click to define the second point of the element. The Trim Inside command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the command is active, you can continue to trim parts of selected elements on the Drawing sheet.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Trim Inside Command Trims within the selected element (partial delete).

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)

Split Graphic Elements To break an object into equal segments 1. Click Split

on the Draw toolbar.

If the Split command is not displayed, click the Trim flyout menu on the Draw toolbar and select it. 2. On the Split ribbon, enter the number of breaks in the Segments field. Split mode is enabled by default whenever the Split command is selected. The Segment the Element button is used to toggle between Split and Segment modes. When

SmartSketch User's Guide

345

Transforming Elements the button is depressed, Segment mode is enabled; when the button is "up", Split mode is enabled. 3. Select a graphic element in the SmartSketch drawing. As long as the Split command is active, you can continue splitting SmartSketch elements by selecting them on the Drawing sheet.

To place points equally spaced along an element 1. Click Split on the Draw toolbar. 2. On the Split ribbon, click Segment the Element

to enable Segment mode.

The Segment the Element button is used to toggle between Split and Segment modes. When the button is depressed, Segment mode is enabled; when the button is "up", Split mode is enabled. 3. Then, enter the number of segments in the Segments field. 4. Select a graphic element in the SmartSketch drawing. As long as the Split command is active, you can continue splitting SmartSketch elements by selecting them on the Drawing sheet.

To split an element at a specific point 1. Select an element in the SmartSketch drawing. 2. Click Split

on the Draw toolbar.

3. On the Split ribbon, click Split/Segment at Point . 4. Click the point at which you want to split the element.    



As long as the Split/Segment at Point button is enabled, you can continue selecting points on the element. Certain elements, such as circles, require that you use two points to split the element. A graphic element is any primitive geometric shape, such as a line, circle, or arc. Split mode divides the selected element into an equal number of sections; Segment mode places equally spaced points along the selected element. You can toggle between these two modes to alternatively split and segment SmartSketch elements when the Split command is active. Press Esc or right-click an empty space on the active Drawing sheet to exit the Split command.

Split Command Provides a variety of modes for splitting graphic elements: Split mode, in which the selected element is divided into an equal number of sections, Segment mode, in which equally spaced points are placed along the selected element, and Split/Segment at Point, in which you can split the selected element at a specific point.

346

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements In Split mode, points display (as x's) on the selected object indicating where it will be divided. In the following illustration, the circle has been divided into four sections:

In Segment mode, points display on the selected object indicating where the segments have been spaced. In the following illustration, notice that the circle is segmented by four equally-spaced points.

In Split/Segment at Point mode, each point you specify on the selected object displays as In the following illustration, the line is divided at the point that was specified.

.

See Also Split/Segment Ribbon (on page 347)

Split/Segment Ribbon Sets options for dividing a graphic object. Split/Segment at Point - Allows you to divide an element at a specific point. Certain elements, such as circles, require that you use two points to split the element. Segment the Element - Toggles between Split mode, which allows you to divide a graphic object into equal sections, and Segment mode, which allows you to place equally spaced points along a graphic object. Number of Segments - Specifies the number of segments into which the graphic element is divided. The minimum number of segments that can be specified is two.

Extend an Element 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Next 2. Do one of the following:

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

347

Transforming Elements  

To extend one element at a time, click each element near the end you want to extend. To extend more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements near the end you want to extend. When you release the mouse button, all the elements are extended.



Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you move the pointer over elements, the software displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.



If an element does not extend in the direction you want it to, move your pointer closer to the end of the element you want to extend.

See Also Extend to Next Command (on page 348)

Extend to Next Command Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest element in the active window. The extension direction is determined by the position where you select the element to extend. For example, if you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line extends to the right. If there is no possible intersection between the element you want to extend and any other element in the view, the command does not extend the element.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Extend an Element (on page 347)

Extend an Element to a Point 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Point . 2. Select an element in the SmartSketch drawing. You can select multiple objects using the Ctrl key. 3. Click the point, either in space or on another element, to which you want to extend. Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you move the pointer over elements, the software displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.

348

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Extend to Point Command (on page 349)

Extend to Point Command Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another element. The extension direction is determined by the position where you select the element to extend. For example, if you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line extends to the right.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Extend an Element to a Point (on page 348)

Draw a Chamfer 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Chamfer . 2. On the ribbon, type a distance value in the Setback A box. The first linear element will be set back this distance from the corner. 3. Do one of the following:  To define the setback distance for the second linear element, type a value in the Setback B box on the ribbon.  To define the chamfer angle, type a value in the Angle box on the ribbon. 4. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback A value. 5. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback B value or the chamfer angle value. The lines that you select do not need to intersect, but they cannot be parallel. 6. Click to draw the chamfer.

SmartSketch User's Guide

349

Transforming Elements

350



You can draw a chamfer only between linear elements.



When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer.



You can draw a chamfer with equal chamfer angles. Click the two linear elements you want to use. When the chamfer is displayed dynamically, move the pointer until the setback distance you want to use is displayed, and then click.



You can switch the setback values for the linear elements. After you click the linear elements you want to use, move the mouse pointer to one side or the other of the temporary line display, then click.



When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw the chamfer in any of the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the chamfer.



You can easily draw more than one 45 degree chamfer with the same setback distance. On the ribbon, type a value in the Setback A or Setback B box. The value in the setback box is

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw equivalent chamfers.



You can draw a chamfer by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw the chamfer between. When you use this method, the setback distance and angle boxes on the ribbon are not active.

See Also Chamfer Command (on page 351) Chamfer Ribbon (on page 351)

Chamfer Command Draws a chamfer, or bevel, between two linear elements. You can control the chamfer angle and the setback distances for both elements.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Draw a Chamfer (on page 349) Chamfer Ribbon (on page 351)

Chamfer Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Angle — Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element. Setback A — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first linear element you select.

SmartSketch User's Guide

351

Transforming Elements Setback B — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the second linear element you select.

See Also Draw a Chamfer (on page 349)

Draw a Fillet 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet . 2. On the ribbon, type a radius in the Radius box. 3. Click one of the elements that you want to draw the fillet between. You can draw a fillet between arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, and curves. 4. Click the other element. 5. Click to draw the fillet.

352



You can draw a fillet without typing a radius. Click the two elements you want to use. Then move the pointer to a position that defines the radius, and click.



When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw a fillet at any of the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the fillet.



You can draw a fillet at a corner with one click. On the ribbon, type a value in the Radius box. Position the pointer over a corner, then click.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements 

The value in the Radius box is active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw fillets with the same radius.



You can draw a fillet by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw the fillet between. When you use this method, the Radius box on the ribbon is not active.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Fillet Command (on page 353) Fillet Ribbon (on page 353)

Fillet Command Draws a fillet between two elements. The elements can be arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, or curves.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Draw a Fillet (on page 352) Fillet Ribbon (on page 353)

Fillet Ribbon Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors Dialog Box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width. Radius — Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet. Trim — Removes the corner of the object where the fillet is created. No Trim — Leaves the corner of the object when creating a fillet.

See Also Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341) Fillet Command (on page 353) Draw a Fillet (on page 352)

SmartSketch User's Guide

353

Transforming Elements

Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements You can apply relationships as you draw and place elements by using the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. You can also apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet.

Applying Relationships to Existing Elements To apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet, click a button on the Relationship toolbar and then select the elements you want to relate. When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained. For example, selecting Equal and clicking two circles makes the two circles equal in size.

If a line and arc are not tangential, applying a tangent relationship modifies one or both elements to make them tangent.

When you use commands on the Relationship toolbar, the software allows you to select only elements that are valid input for that command. For example, when you use Concentric, the command allows you to select only circles, arcs, and ellipses. Perhaps you begin designing with a few key design parameters. You would usually draw known elements in relation to one another and then draw additional elements to fill in the blanks.

354

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements As you draw and add elements to the drawing, the relationships are maintained and additional relationships are applied.

Modifying Elements That Share Relationships If two elements share a relationship, the relationship is maintained when you modify either one of the elements. For example, if you move a circle that has a tangent relationship with a line, the line also moves. The elements remain tangent. If you move a circle that does not have a tangent relationship with a line, the line does not move.

Other elements that share relationships maintain them in the following ways: If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.

SmartSketch User's Guide

355

Transforming Elements If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain connected when either is modified.

If two lines are horizontal, they remain horizontal even if you change the position and length of one of the lines.

Deleting Relationships You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element. You select a relationship handle, and then click Delete. Relationships are automatically deleted when their deletion is necessary to allow a modification to occur. For example, if you rotate an element that has a horizontal relationship applied to it, the relationship is automatically deleted. If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and the element does not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a driving dimension. You can toggle the dimension from driving to driven, and then make the change.

See Also Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis (on page 360) Make Elements Concentric (on page 356) Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 358) Make Elements Collinear (on page 357) Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 359) Make Elements Tangential (on page 360) Connect Elements (on page 357)

Make Elements Concentric 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric 2. Click an arc or circle.

.

3. Click another arc or circle. One element moves to make the two elements concentric.

356

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Concentric Command (on page 357) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Concentric Command Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Concentric (on page 356)

Make Elements Collinear 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Collinear . 2. Click a line, and then click another line. One line moves to become collinear with the other. The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Collinear Command (on page 357) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Collinear Command Makes two lines collinear.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Connect Elements 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect 2. Click an element at a key point.

.

3. Click another element or key point. One element moves to connect the elements.

The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

SmartSketch User's Guide

357

Transforming Elements See Also Connect Command (on page 358) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Connect Command Connects two elements or key points at one point. This command also connects a key point on an element to a position that you select on another element.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Connect Elements (on page 357)

Make Elements Equal 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Equal . 2. Click an element. 3. Click another element. The elements become equal.  

You can make the following elements equal: two lines, two arcs, two circles, and an arc and a circle. You cannot make a line equal to an arc or circle.

See Also Equal Command (on page 358) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Equal Command Makes elements or dimension values equal. You can make the length of lines, the radius of arcs and circles, and the values of dimensions equal.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Equal (on page 358)

Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Horizontal/Vertical . 2. Do one of the following:  To make a line horizontal or vertical, click the line.  To make two key points horizontal or vertical, click a key point, and then click another key point. The current orientation of the line determines how it is positioned after you select it. For example, if a line is closer to a horizontal orientation than a vertical orientation, the line becomes horizontal.

See Also Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 359) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

358

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Horizontal/Vertical Command Makes a line horizontal or vertical, or horizontally or vertically aligns two key points.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 358)

Make Elements Parallel 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Parallel . 2. Click a line. 3. Click another line. One line moves to make the two lines parallel. The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Parallel Command (on page 359) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Parallel Command Makes two lines parallel.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Parallel (on page 359)

Make Elements Perpendicular 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Perpendicular . 2. Click a line. 3. Click a line, arc, or circle. One line moves to make the two elements perpendicular. The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Perpendicular Command (on page 359) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Perpendicular Command Makes two elements perpendicular. You can make two lines, a line and an arc, or a line and a circle perpendicular.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 359) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

SmartSketch User's Guide

359

Transforming Elements

Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis 1. 2. 3. 4.

On the Relationship toolbar, click Symmetric . Click a line that you want to use as a symmetry axis. Click an element. Click another element. The two elements become symmetrical about the axis.

The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Symmetric Command Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the first element selected, such as size and position, are maintained by the symmetric relationship.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis (on page 360) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

Make Elements Tangential You can make two elements tangential.

To make elements tangential where their end points meet 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent . 2. Click at a point where two end points meet. The elements are adjusted to make the two elements tangential.

To make elements tangential that are not connected at an end point 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent. 2. Click an element. 3. Click another element. One element moves to make the two elements tangential. The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)

360

SmartSketch User's Guide

Transforming Elements

Tangent Command Makes two elements tangential. You can make two circles or arcs tangential. You can also make a circle, or an arc, and a line tangential.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354) Make Elements Tangential (on page 360)

SmartSketch User's Guide

361

Transforming Elements

362

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 11

Arranging Elements You can arrange elements so that they can be more easily manipulated on a drawing sheet. Several features for arranging elements are provided in the software. The Group command on the Change toolbar allows you to group elements that reside in the same document and drawing sheet together. The elements can then be modified as a unit. You can ungroup elements by clicking Ungroup on the Change toolbar. You can also use Layers on the Main toolbar to arrange elements. Each time you draw an element it is assigned to the active layer. You can use Layers to see which layer is active or to change the active layer. The Display Manager on the Tools menu allows you to control the way elements appear on sheets or layers by changing settings such as, line type or color. Elements that overlap are displayed in the order they are drawn. A newly created element is placed in front of all other elements because it has the highest display priority. An element's display priority can easily be changed. You can pull an element up one position, push it down one position, send it to the back, or bring it to the front by selecting the appropriate command on the Change toolbar.

See Also Grouping Elements (on page 363) Element Display Priority (on page 367)

Grouping Elements A group is a set of elements that you have selected. The set behaves like any other select set. Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. For example, you could place the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern into a group. This would allow you to move, copy, or delete the entire pattern at once, as if it were a single element. The following list describes some of the properties of groups:  An element can be a member of only one group.  Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the same drawing sheet.  Any locatable element can be grouped.  Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so forth, can be grouped. You can use Group to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group, or you can nest individual elements and groups within a larger group. After elements are grouped, you can use Ungroup to ungroup all of the elements at the same time. You can also use Ungroup and QuickPick to remove one or more elements from a group.

Selecting Groups and Members of Groups The options on the Select Tool ribbon allow you to select an entire group or individual members of a group. If you set the bottom-up option, you can select individual members. If you select the top down option, you can select all the members. You can also use QuickPick to select one or more group members or an entire group.

SmartSketch User's Guide

363

Arranging Elements Performing Tasks on Groups After you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its members. For example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its members are moved, copied, or deleted. You can move or apply relationships to a member of a group and the changes do not affect the position of the other members of the group. When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including nested groups. The software creates a new group that contains all of the members of the original group. When you copy one member of a group, only that member is copied. If you use PickQuick to select a member of a group, you can perform tasks on the member individually, without affecting other members. In Catalog Manager, you cannot save a symbol with grouped elements; therefore you must ungroup all grouped elements before saving the symbol.

See Also Group Command (on page 365) Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364)

Group or Ungroup Elements Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The elements must reside in the same document and drawing sheet.

To group elements 1. Select two or more elements. You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Group

.

To ungroup elements 1. Select a group. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup

.

To remove one element from a group 1. Use QuickPick to select the element you want to remove from the group. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup      

364

.

You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can then ungroup the entire group or any of its members. You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group them. You can perform tasks on all members of a group by selecting the group and then selecting the command or ribbon option you want to use. You can use QuickPick to select and edit one or more members of a group. You can use the bottom-up selection method instead of QuickPick, to select individual group members. Set Bottom Up on the Select tool ribbon. You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if an element is part of a group. Select the element and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements See Also Group Command (on page 365) Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 365) Group Ribbon (on page 365)

Group Command Binds elements so that you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit. Grouped elements are usually related, such as the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern. When you select a group, the Group ribbon is displayed so you can edit the entire group or any of its members. The command is only active when one of the following conditions is met:  An element or set of elements is selected  More than one group is selected A group and another element are selected

See Also Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364) Group Ribbon (on page 365)

Group Ribbon Style — Sets the style for all of the elements in a group. Color — Sets the color for all of the elements in a group. Line Type — Sets the line types and styles for all of the elements in a group. Width — Sets the line width for all of the elements in a group.

See Also Group Command (on page 365) Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364)

Group Properties Dialog Box Displays the properties of the selected group.

See Also Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 366) User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 366)

SmartSketch User's Guide

365

Arranging Elements Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Name — Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it. Number of Items — Displays the number of elements in the group. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group. Is Nested Within Another Group — Shows whether the group is nested within another group. This label updates automatically when you nest a group using Group, or ungroup a group using Ungroup. Contains Nested Groups — Displays whether or not the selected group contains nested groups. Closed — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of these elements are connected; and whether the members of the group form a closed region. This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group. End-Point Connected — The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the end points of these elements are connected. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.

See Also Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 365) Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) Attribute Set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected. Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected. Attributes — Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set. Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date. Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in the Type box. Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the table. Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a row in the table. Preview — Displays the group you selected on the Drawing sheet.

See Also Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 365) Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

366

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements

Ungroup Command Removes elements from groups that were defined using Group. You can remove individual elements from a group. This command is active only if a group that can be ungrouped is selected on the Drawing Sheet.

See Also Group Command (on page 365) Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364)

Element Display Priority When 2-D elements overlap, their display priority determines which is in front. The first element you draw is displayed behind all other elements—it has the lowest display priority. A newly created element is displayed in front of all other elements—it has the highest display priority. For example, if you draw a circle, then an ellipse, and then a rectangle, the circle is displayed in back. The ellipse is displayed between the circle and the rectangle, and the rectangle is displayed in front.

Changing the Element Display Priority You can change an element's display priority by pulling it up one position, pushing it down one position, sending it to the back, or bringing it to the front. One click on the striped box changes the display priority.

You can change the display priority of a group the same way. The display priority of elements within the group does not change.

See Also Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369) Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 369) Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 369)

SmartSketch User's Guide

367

Arranging Elements

Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Bring to Front.  

When you select a single element, the element moves to the front of the display. When you bring more than one element or an element group to the front of the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.

See Also Bring to Front Command (on page 368) Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369)

Bring to Front Command Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the front of the display order.

See Also Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369) Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 368)

Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Send to Back  

.

When you select a single element, the element moves to the back of the display. When you send more than one element or an element group to the back of the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.

See Also Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 368) Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369)

368

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements

Send to Back Command Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the back of the display order.

See Also Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369) Bring to Front Command (on page 368)

Pull an Element Up in the Display Order 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Pull Up

.

When you pull more than one element or an element group up one position in the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.

See Also Element Display Priority (on page 367) Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369)

Pull Up Command Moves one or more selected elements or element groups up one position in the display order. If more than one element overlaps the selected elements, the selected elements do not move all the way to the front. To quickly move elements to the front, click Bring to Front.

See Also Element Display Priority (on page 367) Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 369)

Push an Element Down in the Display Order 1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Push Down

.

When you push more than one element or an element group down one position in the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.

See Also Bring to Front Command (on page 368) Pull Up Command (on page 369) Push Down Command (on page 369)

Push Down Command Moves one or more selected elements or element groups down one position in the display order. If the selected elements overlap more than one other element, the selected elements do not move all the way to the back. To quickly move elements to the back, click Send to Back.

SmartSketch User's Guide

369

Arranging Elements See Also Element Display Priority (on page 367) Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 369)

Using Layers to Arrange Elements Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can manipulate them more easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings also make it easier to keep track of different types of elements. Each drawing sheet in a document can contain several layers. When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which layer is active, or to change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main toolbar.

Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to control the way items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the Tools menu. With this command, you can set display criteria for any sheet and its associated layers in the current document. The display settings can include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects. If two windows are open for the same document, the display settings that you select with the Display Manager dialog box affect every window view of the drawing sheet.

Displaying Layers To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by selecting Layers. When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements assigned to the layers on the drawing sheet. For example, you can assign lines to one layer and closed elements to another layer. Then, if you turn off the layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only lines on the drawing sheet.

You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different layers on a drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent and they are assigned to different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the circle's layer is hidden, you can still see the tangent relationship handle on the line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent relationship handle is hidden.

370

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements appear on sheets or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color. You can also create custom colors for the display.

Layers and Layer Groups While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing sheet, layer groups give you another way to control the display of elements on drawing sheets. You can use Layer Groups on the Tools menu to define layer groups.

Creating New Layers You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer name on the ribbon. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.

Assigning Elements to Layers Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the layer to which an element is assigned. You can find out which layer an element is assigned to by selecting it and using Properties on the Edit menu.

See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Layers Command (on page 375) Control the Display of Elements in a Window (on page 371) Create a Layer (on page 374) Change the Layer of an Element (on page 376) Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377)

Control the Display of Elements in a Window 1. Click Tools > Display Manager. 2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements in a window. The color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the elements on the sheet. To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on the Sheets tab. The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the Layers tab. You can specify display settings for each layer in a sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you want. If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current drawing sheet, you can click Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to display or hide layers.

See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372)

Display Manager Command Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their associated layers in the document. You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.

SmartSketch User's Guide

371

Arranging Elements See Also Change the Active Layer (on page 376) Create a Layer (on page 374) Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372)

Display Manager Dialog Box Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their associated layers in the document. You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.

See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 372) Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 373)

Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet. Row Button — Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When you click a button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row. Clicking this button selects the drawing sheet or linked/embedded object so that you can modify its display. Any options you set on the Layers tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet or object that you selected. Sheets — Displays a list of sheets and linked/embedded objects in the current document. An arrow appears by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet or object by setting the options you want in the Color, Line Type, or Width columns. The Display and Lock options can only be set from the Layers tab. Display — Controls the layers listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to a layer, the elements on that layer are displayed in the active document.  A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.  You can set the box next to each layer to display all the elements.  On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off. Lock — Locks or unlocks layers in a view to control whether the software can locate elements on a layer. If a layer is locked, you can still see the elements on the screen, but you cannot locate them or perform actions on them. You cannot lock the active layer.  If the lock beside a layer appears locked, you cannot locate elements on the layer in the active document or drawing sheet.  If the lock beside a layer appears unlocked, the elements on the layer can be located. Color — Overrides a color for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object. You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Overrides a line type for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object. Width — Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object. OK — Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Cancel — Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.

372

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements Apply — Applies the current display settings without closing the Display Manager dialog box. Clear — Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time. Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.

See Also Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372)

Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window. Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be modified and is indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column. Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can control the display of each layer by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width columns. Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element, the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed). A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.  You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements.  On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off. Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the active document or drawing sheet. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you can locate it. Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color to an element. You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for an element or linked object. Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group. OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Apply - Applies the current display settings. Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time. Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.

See Also Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372) Modify Layers in a Layer Group (on page 377) Create a Layer (on page 374) Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377)

SmartSketch User's Guide

373

Arranging Elements

Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects appear in window, you can create custom colors for the display of sheets or layers. 1. Click Tools > Display Manager. 2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet you want to change the color of. 3. Click the cell in the Color column. 4. At the bottom of the palette, click More. 5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to create a new color. 6. Click Add to Custom Colors. 7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you created. This name appears on the palette that you access when you click a cell in the Color column.

See Also Colors Dialog Box (on page 374) Custom Color Name Dialog Box (on page 448) Display Manager Command (on page 371)

Colors Dialog Box Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity values or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define Custom Colors, the easiest way to experiment with different colors is to drag the pointer around on the color matrix. After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name dialog box appears, allowing you to save the custom color with a name. To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box and then specify a different color. To define a new custom color, click an empty custom color box, specify a new color, and then click Add To Custom Colors. To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.

See Also Custom Color Name Dialog Box (on page 448) Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372) Create a Fill Color (on page 445)

Create a Layer 1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers . 2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box and press ENTER. 

 

374

You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools menu. On the Groups dialog box, you type the name of a new layer in the Layers box and press ENTER. The name of the new layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet. You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layers Command (on page 375)

Display or Hide Layers 1. Do one of the following:  On the Main toolbar, click Layers .  Click Tools > Layers. 2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display dialog box displays all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The layers that appear in gray text are hidden or turned off. The layer that appears in red text is the active layer. 3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet. 4. Click Apply. If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than the current sheet, you can use Display Manager on the Tools menu. On the Display Manager dialog box, Sheets tab, click the sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column, click the layers you want to display or hide. These settings override the settings on the Layer Display dialog box.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layers Command (on page 375)

Layers Command Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes the layer of an element. You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated layers in the current document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.

See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Change the Active Layer (on page 376) Create a Layer (on page 374) Layers Ribbon (on page 375)

Layers Ribbon Layer — Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the active layer by selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet. Typing a new layer name creates a new layer. Change Layer — Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can change the layer of elements. This option is available only when you have selected a set of elements on the drawing. Layer Status — Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box has a Layer list that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing sheet.

See Also Layers Command (on page 375) Change the Active Layer (on page 376) Create a Layer (on page 374)

SmartSketch User's Guide

375

Arranging Elements

Layer Display Dialog Box Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet. You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current document with Display Manager on the Tools menu. Active Layer Only — Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the active layer changes, then the new active layer is displayed and the previous active layer is hidden. Layers — Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text shows that the layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows the layer is hidden. Bold, red text preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is active. Occupied Only — Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not appear on the list. Groups — Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you click this button, the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active drawing sheet. You can select a group from the list to display or hide these layers on the drawing sheet. On — Displays the layers in the selected layer group. Off — Hides the layers in the selected layer group. Apply — Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog remains displayed. Close — Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the dialog.

See Also Layers Command (on page 375) Change the Active Layer (on page 376) Create a Layer (on page 374) Change the Layer of an Element (on page 376) Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377)

Change the Layer of an Element An element can be assigned to only one layer. 1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Layers . 3. On the Layer ribbon, click Change Layer. 4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change all to list, click the layer to change the elements to. You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the element and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.

See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Layers Command (on page 375)

Change the Active Layer 1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers . 2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the Layer box. If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is created.

376

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements See Also Display Manager Command (on page 371) Layers Command (on page 375)

Change Layer Dialog Box This option is available only when one or more elements are selected. Current Layers — Lists the layers for all the selected elements. Change all to — Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer from the list changes the layer for all the elements in the selection set.

See Also Change the Active Layer (on page 376) Change the Layer of an Element (on page 376)

Create a Layer Group 1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new group and press ENTER. 3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the layers in the group.  

In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name already has a check mark, the layer is a member of the current layer group. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)

Modify Layers in a Layer Group 1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want to change by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers table, if the check box by the layer name is set, the layer is in the layer group. 3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or remove it from the layer group.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)

Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group 1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table. You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The name then highlights and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you to type the new name. 3. Do one of the following:

SmartSketch User's Guide

377

Arranging Elements  

To change the name of a group, type the new name and press ENTER. To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you want to change in the Layers table. Then, type a new name and press ENTER.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)

Layer Groups Command Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers on the current working sheet. This command is available only on the Tools menu.

See Also Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377) Create a Layer Group (on page 377) Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)

Layer Groups Dialog Box Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers for the active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active layer or a layer that has elements placed on it. Layers — Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet so that you can create new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers box to create a new layer. You can also add or remove layers in a layer group with the Layers table. When you select a group in the Groups table, the check boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the status of the layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you selected in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a member of the group. Groups — Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a new group by typing a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from the Groups table to display the layers in the group in the Groups table. To select a group, you must click the button on the left side of the row for a group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You can then add or remove layers in a group.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377) Create a Layer Group (on page 377)

Delete a Layer Group 1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group you want to delete. 3. Press DELETE.

See Also Layer Groups Command (on page 378) Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)

378

SmartSketch User's Guide

Arranging Elements

Remove Empty Layers 1. Click Tools > Remove Empty Layers. You can also click Ctrl+R. 2. On the Remove Empty Layers dialog box, use the Empty Layers list to specify which empty layers you want to remove from the active drawing sheet. The software removes any empty layers that exist in the current document.    

By default, the software selects all empty layers are selected. To exclude an empty layer from being removed, clear its checkbox. The dialog box will not list the Active Layer (if it does not contain any data) as a layer that can be deleted. If no empty layers exist, the following message is displayed:

See Also Remove Empty Layers Command (on page 379)

Remove Empty Layers Command Removes empty layers from the current SmartSketch document. If no empty layers exist, the software displays the following message:

 

You can click Tools > Remove Empty Layers or press Ctrl+R to access this command. You can customize any toolbar to include the Remove Empty Layers command. Click Tools > Customize. On the Toolbars tab, select the Tools category and then drag Remove Empty Layers to any toolbar.

See Also Remove Empty Layers (on page 379) Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box (on page 380)

SmartSketch User's Guide

379

Arranging Elements

Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box Empty Layers - Displays a list of layers in the active drawing sheet which contain no objects. Select All - Selects all layers in the Empty Layers list. By default, all layers are selected when you first open the dialog box. Clear All - De-selects all the layers in the Empty Layers list so that none of them are removed when you click OK.  

The dialog box will not list the Active Layer (if it does not contain any data) as a layer that can be deleted. The dialog box displays only when empty layers exist in the active drawing sheet. If no empty layers exist, the following message is displayed instead:

See Also Remove Empty Layers Command (on page 379)

380

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 12

Using Symbols in Documents Symbols increase drawing productivity because they allow you to access existing graphic data quickly and easily. With a symbol, you can place graphic information repeatedly without re-creating it. Symbols save you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project. Symbols are contained in documents with an .sym extension.

Parametric symbols are also available. You can modify these symbols by changing a parameter value.

See Also Placing Symbols (on page 392) Creating Symbols (on page 381) Editing Symbols (on page 395) Rotating Symbols (on page 403) Mirroring Symbols (on page 403)

Creating Symbols A symbol is a document with an .sym extension. You can create a symbol by selecting any geometry and clicking Create Symbol on the Draw toolbar. You must then define the origin by clicking the point that you want in the select set. After defining the origin, you can save the select set as a symbol with the Save As dialog box. Symbols that you create display a 90 degree rotation angle as a default behavior. To preserve the data integrity of your custom symbol files from one software version to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that you open all your custom symbol files and save them to new file format.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Create Symbol Command (on page 382) Create a Symbol (on page 381)

Create a Symbol 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Create Symbol . 2. Select a set of elements on the drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

381

Using Symbols in Documents When creating a symbol using different elements, press Ctrl while choosing elements with the Select tool. 3. Click a point on the drawing sheet to define the origin of the symbol.   

The Save As dialog box automatically appears at this point. You do not need to use Save As on the File menu to open this dialog box. On the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the symbol. Type the name that you want for the symbol. The software saves the document with an .sym extension. A specific symbol may be used up to 8192 times in a file.

See Also Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Create Symbol Command Allows you to create a symbol. The command is available on the Draw toolbar. This button is available only when you select elements.

See Also Placing Symbols (on page 392) Create a Symbol (on page 381) Open a Symbol Library (on page 385)

The Symbol Explorer You can use Symbol Explorer to drag symbols from a directory to the current document. You can also use Symbol Explorer to view document directories on your computer or a network drive. Symbol Explorer can also display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer. When you click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar, Symbol Explorer is displayed on the right side of the main window. The buttons on the Symbol Explorer are similar to the ones in the Windows Explorer. For example, you can click a Favorites button to go to one of your favorite web sites. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to point to a directory, you see a tree view, the contents of the directory, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you see the contents of that page, if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed. If Internet Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts you to install it.

Placing Symbols The main use of the Symbol Explorer is to drag symbols from a directory to the current document. The Symbol Explorer acts much like the Windows Explorer. To view symbols, you can type the name of the directory in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer; or you can click the Explore Elsewhere button and set the directory path that the Symbol Explorer looks in. If you click Home at the top of the Symbol Explorer, it displays the home page for the symbols that are associated with the template on which the active document is based. You can override this property by setting a new address with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties dialog box, you click the Browser tab to set the option.

382

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols, you can drag a symbol from the Symbol Explorer to the current document.

Displaying HTML Pages The Symbol Explorer can display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer. To view an HTML page in the Symbol Explorer, you must enter the entire directory path and filename in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. To view HTML pages on the World Wide Web, you must type the HTTP address in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. When you do this, the Symbol Explorer displays the HTML page of the address you entered. The Symbol Explorer can display any web site that you have permissions to access. HTML pages appear only if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed.

Searching Document Directories You can view the Symbols of any directory on your computer or the network with the Symbol Explorer. You can type the path of the directory in the Address Box; or you can click Browse and set the directory path on the dialog box. After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols of the directory that you want, you can double-click any document, much like the Windows Explorer, and the software that created the document opens and displays the document for editing. You can drag any document created by software that supports OLE 2.0 into the current document. These documents can include .igr, .dgn, .dwg, and .dxf types.

Symbol Explorer Settings When you set options for the Symbol Explorer, the current document stores and uses these the next time you open the document. You can define a different home page for each document in the Symbol Explorer with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties dialog box, you click Browser to set the option. When you set the address for the home page on the Properties dialog box, the Symbol Explorer goes to that address when you click the Home button at the top of the Symbol Explorer. The address can be a directory on a local or network drive or an HTTP address to a web page.

See Also Close the Symbol Explorer (on page 387) Move the Symbol Explorer (on page 388) Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)

SmartSketch User's Guide

383

Using Symbols in Documents

Symbol Explorer Window Displays files in a directory or World Wide Web pages (HTML pages). You can use the Symbol Explorer window just like you would the Windows Explorer or Windows Internet Explorer. You can also use Symbol Explorer to place symbols (.sym) from the Symbol Explorer window to the current document. Within the Symbol Explorer window, you can access several commands that allow you to change or filter the view in the window. For example, you can change the window to show only symbols. You can also add directories or web addresses to a list of favorites. If you want to place several copies of a symbol, you can click the Stamp Here command. To access these commands, place the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.

Window Options Back - Takes you backward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web page or a directory path. Forward - Takes you forward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web page or a directory path. Stop - Halts the loading of an HTML page. Refresh - Reloads the current HTML page or directory. Home - Takes the Symbol Explorer back to the home page that you set with Properties on the File menu. If you do not set the home page with this command, the Symbol Explorer opens the symbols directory associated with the template that the active document is based on. Explore Elsewhere - Accesses the Browse for Folder dialog box so that you can locate another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. You can use the dialog box to look in directories on your hard drive or a network drive. Address - Sets the current location for the Symbol Explorer. You can type in a directory or a World Wide Web address and then press Enter. Some examples of what you can type in are as follows: http://www.intergraph.com C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\  

If you want to view an HTML page on your hard drive, you must enter the entire path and filename in the address box. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view , a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install it.

See Also Close the Symbol Explorer (on page 387) Move the Symbol Explorer (on page 388) Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)

384

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents

Open a Symbol Library Before you place a symbol on the drawing sheet, you can set an option to link or embed the symbol with Options on the Tools menu. On the Options dialog box, click the Symbols tab to set the option. Before you open a symbol library, you must either have installed the needed symbols or place the CD-ROM for installing the software in the appropriate drive. 1. Click File > Open. 2. Select a template or create a document. For example, if you want to open a symbol library of architectural symbols, you can click an architectural template to create a document based on that template. 3. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . The software automatically displays the symbols library associated with the template. 4. Drag the symbols from the Symbol Explorer window into the document.  

If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbol directory associated with the current document or template. You can also use links from a web page to navigate in a symbol library. Sometimes a web page appears depending on the template for the current document.

See Also Placing Symbols (on page 392)

Symbol Explorer Command Activates the Symbol Explorer window and the Atrribute Viewer. The Symbol Explorer window allows you to organize and manage documents and symbols. You can browse document directories on the computer hard drive or the network. You can also view HTML pages on the Internet, the computer hard drive, or DVD drive.

See Also Open a Symbol Library (on page 385) Symbol Explorer Window (on page 384)

View File Type Command Filters the view in the Symbol Explorer window according to the document type that you select. For example, if you want to see only AutoCAD documents, you could select the AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg documents. This command is available only on the Symbol Explorer shortcut menu. To access, right-click on the Symbol Explorer content window and select View.

SmartSketch User's Guide

385

Using Symbols in Documents

View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer 1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window. 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the HTTP address and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: http://www.intergraph.com. The World Wide Web page appears inside the Symbol Explorer. If you cannot see the entire Web page, you can double-click the bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to undock it. You can then resize the Symbol Explorer window so that you can see the entire page. 



You can use many of the same tools to view web pages that are available in the Windows Internet Explorer. For example, if you click Back at the top of the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer returns to the previous page. If you open or create a document while Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document.

View Documents with the Symbol Explorer 1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window. 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory to go to and press Enter. For example, you can type the following: C:\DRAWING FILES. You can also change the directory by clicking Explore Elsewhere at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. 



 





386

You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If you want to view just one type of document, such as symbols, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click View, and then File Type. If you double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer, the software that created the document opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click the SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens. If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document. You can filter the view in the Symbol Explorer window to display only certain types of documents, such as MicroStation, AutoCAD, or other types. You can click View File Type on the shortcut menu in the Symbol Explorer window. For example, to display only AutoCAD documents, select the AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg documents. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents

Close the Symbol Explorer 

On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer

.

You can also close the Symbol Explorer by clicking Toolbars on the View menu. On the Toolbars dialog box, you should clear the Symbol Explorer check box.

Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer 1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . The Symbol Explorer opens on the right side of the main window. 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory that you want to go to and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\. You can also change the directory by clicking Explore Elsewhere at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. 3. Double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer. The software that created the document opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click on the SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens.  

You can drag any document that supports OLE 2.0 from the Symbol Explorer to the drawing sheet. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of the Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts you to install it.

Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer 1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Browser tab of the Properties dialog box, type the HTTP address of the home page that you want for the Symbol Explorer. In the Symbol Explorer, when you click Home, the Symbol Explorer displays the Web page for the address that you typed. The address that you enter on the Browser tab of the Properties dialog box is saved with the current template and document.  

 

You can also set the home page while the Symbol Explorer is open. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and, on the shortcut menu, select Set Document Home. If you do not set the home page for the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer displays the symbol directory that is associated with the template that the active document is based on. If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document. If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your computer, you can type the following syntax in the Address box: \..\ Open. Select the symbol document that you want to edit. The document has an .sym extension. Edit the symbol. Click File > Save.

You cannot edit the connect points, drag points, handles, or other properties of a symbol directly.

To Edit an Embedded Symbol 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select the symbol. Click Open on the shortcut menu. Edit the symbol. Click File > Update. The software changes the symbol in the current document. Click File > Close to close the symbol document and return to the document that contains the symbol.

If you change a linked symbol, the software also records those changes in the source document on your computer and the instance of the symbol in the current document.

396

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents To Edit Elements in a Symbol If you want to edit individual elements of a symbol, you must convert the symbol to elements in the current document. 1. Select the symbol on the drawing sheet. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Convert to convert the symbol to a group of elements.  

You can also select multiple symbols and convert them simultaneously; however, if the select set contains anything other than a symbol, Convert is not available. You must insert a symbol at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use Convert.

3. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup to separate the elements so that you can edit them individually. You can now edit the symbol elements just like ones that you created with one of the drawing commands.  

If you want to quickly edit a symbol, you can open the Symbol Explorer and double-click any symbol to for editing. If a symbol containing a Smart Label is placed into a document, you cannot select the Smart Label and open it to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new Smart Label.

See Also Convert Command (Symbol) (on page 397) Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles (on page 390) Properties Command (File Menu) (on page 69) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Convert Command (Symbol) Converts the selected symbol to another file format. For example, if you select a symbol, and click Convert, the symbol is converted to a group of elements on the drawing sheet. You can also use Convert with a symbol select set to convert multiple symbols simultaneously.

See Also Creating Symbols (on page 381) Editing Symbols (on page 395)

Symbol Ribbon The options provided by the Symbol ribbon depend on the type and content of the selected symbol.

Graphic Options The following options are available when a symbol is made up of only graphic elements. Style — Sets the drawing style. Line Color — Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type — Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width — Sets the line width.

Text Options The options below are available when a symbol contains a text label.

SmartSketch User's Guide

397

Using Symbols in Documents Font - Lists and applies a font for the label text. Text size - Applies a text size. Text Color - Sets the color of the font. Bold - Makes text bold. Italic - Italicizes text. Underline - Underlines text. Shape - Sets the shape of the border around the label. You can choose from a selection of common geometric shapes.

Graphic Elements and Text All the above options display for a symbol containing text and graphic elements.

Edit Symbol Properties 1. Click a symbol in a drawing. 2. Click Edit > Properties. 3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want to use.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409) Editing Symbols (on page 395)

Symbol Properties Dialog Box Defines the properties of a symbol.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409) Edit Symbol Properties (on page 398) Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400) Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 398) User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400) Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400)

Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have an .sym extension. Insertion Type - Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type. Update - Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all. Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square when you drag it into the active document.

398

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents Lock Scale - Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document. You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the symbol handles. Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships. This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when it is dragged from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet. The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.

If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the underlined dimensional value.

When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.

Nested Display - Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private. When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.

SmartSketch User's Guide

399

Using Symbols in Documents See Also Properties Dialog Box (on page 69)

Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Displays and allows you to set symbol placement options such as the symbol angle, layer on which you want to place the symbol, and coordinates for the symbol. Name - Displays the name of the parent document of the symbol. Layer - Specifies the layer on which you place the symbol. When you place a symbol, it is placed on the active layer. X Origin - Specifies the X coordinate of the symbol origin. Y Origin - Specifies the Y coordinate of the symbol origin. Angle - Displays the current angle of the symbol. You can specify a new angle. The number of degrees increases in the counterclockwise direction. For example, 90 degrees is at the top of the screen.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409) Edit Symbol Properties (on page 398) Edit a Symbol (on page 396)

Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Displays information about the parameters in the symbol. The parameters that appear on this tab are the same items that appear in the Attribute Viewer when you select the symbol. You can change the name of the value of the parameter, but not the name. When you change the value, you must click Apply for the change to take effect on the symbol.

See Also Edit Symbol Properties (on page 398) Edit a Symbol (on page 396)

User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Displays and allows you to set property options for each symbol that you place. This feature provides an administrative tool for tracking property information, such as the serial number of label text, for each placement of a symbol. Name - Defines a property name. Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can choose from text, double, number, boolean, money, byte, integer, date, or single. Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value. Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol. Add - Creates an attribute for the symbol. Delete - Deletes the attribute that you select in the Properties box.

See Also Creating Symbols (on page 381) Editing Symbols (on page 395) Edit Symbol Properties (on page 398)

400

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents

Create a Symbol Report You must have Microsoft® Excel™ 97 or later installed on your computer. 1. Open the Symbol Explorer. 2. Drag symbols from one of the following directories into the document:  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH).  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH).  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK. 3. In the Symbol Explorer, browse to one of the following directories, depending on the symbols you placed in the document:  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.  :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK\REPORTS. 4. Drag a REPORT.sym document into the document. 5. The software prompts you to update the report and, if you click OK, the software creates the report automatically.

See Also Delivered Reports (on page 412) Update a Symbol Report (on page 401)

Update a Symbol Report You must have Microsoft® Excel™ 97 or later installed on your computer. 1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. In the Custom Commands dialog box, navigate to the Update Report macro and then click Open. The Update Report macro (igrUpdateReport412.dll) is located in \Program.  

You must have a report selected before running the Update Report macro. You can use the Tools > Customize command, to add the Update Report macro to a toolbar or menu.

See Also Create a Symbol Report (on page 401) Delivered Reports (on page 412) Creating Symbols (on page 381) Editing Symbols (on page 395)

SmartSketch User's Guide

401

Using Symbols in Documents

Scaling Symbols You can use scale handles on a symbol to resize it. Four black scale handles are displayed on the corners of the range box of a symbol. You can drag any of the four handles up or down. You can also change the size of the symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar. You can modify different parts of some symbols with parametric handles. Standard parameter handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to the graphics in a symbol. The four standard positions where parameter handles can appear are top center, bottom center, left center, and right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging a parameter handle changes the value of the dimension by the length readout precision set on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box when the symbol is created. You can also scale a parametric symbol by selecting the symbol and then editing the values in the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer automatically appears when you select the symbol. For example, if you select the Para Tower symbol, you can change the Top attribute from 7.29 to 9.00 so that the height of the symbol increases.

See Also Labels (on page 250) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Scale a Symbol 1. Click a symbol in the document. 2. Drag one of the scale handles that appears as a black box on each corner of the symbol range box. 

 

402

You can change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and right-clicking. On the Parametrics tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, enter the value that you want and click Apply. You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and changing the values in the Attribute Viewer. You can scale a part of a parametric symbol. Drag one of the standard parameter handles. These handles appear as black boxes in the middle of each side of the symbol range box. Note that only one dimension of the symbol changes. For example, if you click the lower parametric handle on a box, only the height changes, not the width.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents See Also Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Mirroring Symbols You can use mirror handles to mirror a symbol about its center. The mirror handle appears at the right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging the mirror handle across the center of a symbol's range box causes the symbol to mirror about its center in dynamics. A center line for the X and Y axis appears through the range box of the symbol. The axes appear as solid when the pointer crosses one or both axes. When you manipulate a symbol, you see the same behaviors unique to that symbol that existed when you placed the symbol in the document.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250) Create Symbol Command (on page 382) Mirror a Symbol (on page 403)

Mirror a Symbol 1. Select a symbol in the document. 2. Click the mirror handle that appears as a green plus sign at the top right of the symbol's range box. 3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol.

See Also Mirroring Symbols (on page 403) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Rotating Symbols You can rotate a symbol by using one of the following methods:  Clicking Rotate.  Selecting the symbol's rotate handle to turn it.  Using a rotation angle.  Using relationships applied to the symbol.

Rotate Button To rotate a symbol, you can select the symbol and click Rotate on the Change toolbar.

Rotation Angle You can also rotate a symbol by the rotation angle. When you drag a symbol or align it to an element, you can press the left or right arrow keys. This rotates the symbol in 15 degree increments by default. Some symbols are designed to rotate at different increments. If the symbol is created with a rotation angle other than zero, you can rotate it by the defined step angle using the left and right arrow keys.

SmartSketch User's Guide

403

Using Symbols in Documents Relationships By default, when you rotate a symbol, it maintains its orientation on the drawing sheet. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is set in place with a lock relationship. When you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension, the symbol does not change its orientation. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale.

You can also allow symbols to change orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships applied to them. This is handy if you want to change the orientation of whole sets of geometry with one driving dimension or relationship. In the example, when you edit the driving dimension between the line and symbol, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the relationships applied to it.

For a symbol to rotate according to the relationships applied to it, you must first set an option by opening the symbol document (.sym) directly. You can open the document with Open on the File menu. Then, you must click Properties on the File menu. On the Behavior tab, you must set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box. After saving and closing the symbol document, you can drag the symbol into a document.

See Also Mechanism Modeling (on page 407) Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250) Create Symbol Command (on page 382) Rotate a Symbol (on page 404)

Rotate a Symbol 1. Select a symbol in the document. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate 



404

.

You can also rotate a symbol about its center with the appropriate handle. Click the green circle at the right of the range box for the symbol. Drag the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the range box for the symbol. Select the symbol and press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the symbol in predefined increments. The rotation angle can vary depending on how you created the symbol.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents See Also Rotating Symbols (on page 403) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Manipulating Symbols You can manipulate a symbol just like you would manipulate other graphics. For example, you can edit symbol properties, apply relationships, move it, or copy it. When you manipulate a symbol, it behaves as a single unit. You can view properties for the symbol in the Attribute Viewer that appears at the bottom of the Symbol Explorer. You can click any part of a symbol to move it around in a document. Some symbols are created with drag points that appear as green dots on the symbol. When you move the symbol around in the document, the pointer automatically attaches to the drag point that you used most recently. You can change drag points by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys. If you drag a symbol on an element in the document, the symbol is automatically associated with that element. When the element moves, the symbol moves with it. You must click one of the green drag points on the symbol and then move the symbol to the element. Some symbols cannot be associated with an element depending on what options were set when the symbol was created.

Aligning a Symbol with an Element Many symbols align automatically with elements in the document. When associated with an element, these symbols display a green lock handle. When the element moves, the symbol moves with it. You can click the lock handle to free the symbol from the associated element. When you unlock the handle, you can move the symbol away from the element. If you move the element, the symbols stays in its original position. You can use the lock behavior in many ways. For example, you can ensure that a door symbol moves with the wall to which it is attached if the lock handle on the door symbol is locked. If you want to move the wall, and not the door, you must click the lock handle on the symbol to unlock the door symbol from the wall. The door now remains in its current position when you drag the wall away from it.

Aligning a Symbol with Another Symbol Some symbols can be placed only on other symbols. These symbols are created with drop points that allow you to align the symbol to a precise point on another symbol. You cannot place a symbol with drop points on an element, such as line, arc, or circle. When a symbol has drop points, red dots appear to indicate the drop points defined on the symbol. These drop points let you know where you can place the symbol on the target symbol. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision.

See Also Adding Text to Documents (on page 225) Labels (on page 250) Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles (on page 390) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

SmartSketch User's Guide

405

Using Symbols in Documents Manipulate a Symbol (on page 406) Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points (on page 406)

Manipulate a Symbol 1. Click a symbol in the document. 2. Use any element manipulation command like Move, Copy, or Scale to manipulate the symbol in the drawing.  



You can edit a symbol by selecting the symbol and clicking Open on the shortcut menu. You can manipulate only the symbol, not its individual elements. You can convert the symbol to individual elements on the drawing sheet by selecting the symbol and clicking Convert on the shortcut menu. You can also select multiple symbols and convert them simultaneously; however, if the select set contains anything other than a symbol, Convert is not available. You can change the size of a symbol by selecting the symbol and then dragging one of the handles.

If you cannot scale the symbol with this procedure, select the symbol and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then, on the Behavior tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, clear Lock Scale.

See Also Convert Command (Symbol) (on page 397) Manipulating Symbols (on page 405) Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles (on page 390) Create Symbol Command (on page 382)

Unlock a Symbol From an Element 1. Select the symbol. 2. Click the green lock handle to unlock the symbol. 3. Drag the symbol away from the element.  

If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select the symbol and click the lock handle to unlock it. You can then move the symbol away from the target element. At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again, you can click the lock handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target element again. If you select another element or command after unlocking the symbol and moving it, you cannot re-establish the association with the target element.

See Also Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles (on page 390)

Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points 

406

Using a drag point, drag a symbol to another symbol. The available drop points appear as red dots.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using Symbols in Documents See Also Place a Symbol (on page 393) Place Copies of a Symbol (on page 394) Creating Symbols (on page 381)

Mechanism Modeling You can use mechanism modeling to check for clearances on moving parts. Mechanism modeling is a set of elements that are related to each other so that one group of geometry moves relative to another when the dimensions change. You can use any kind of elements for mechanism modeling, but symbols are the easiest elements to use. Symbols are easy to use because they act as one piece of geometry when you want to reposition them. For example, if you draw four lines that form a rectangle, you might want to connect the lines so that the rectangle has predictable behavior when rotated by a dimensional change. To do this, you must connect every line. The length of each line, the connections of the end points, and the angle between each line and its adjacent line must be defined as shown in the picture. If the same four lines were constructed and made into a symbol, the orientation and length of each line would always remain constant regardless of the orientation of the symbol. No relationships or dimensions for the geometry making up the symbol would be necessary as shown in the picture. If you change the angle from 90 degrees to 45 degrees, the geometry stays together with the symbol as a rigid body. The easiest way to create a mechanism is to use rigid body symbols and constrain the symbols to move like you want. Symbols can have two behaviors: rotating and non-rotating. The default behavior, non-rotating, means that the symbol cannot be rotated. The other behavior, rotating, allows rotation by relationships. This allows the symbol to rotate.

Example The field pump mechanism serves as a good example of a kinematics animation. The mechanism is made up of five symbols and only one dimension to control the mechanism movement. If you select the dimension and change the value of the dimension from 12 degree to 60 degrees, all the geometry moves together. The other symbols that are connected to each other move to their proper position based on the angle applied and relationships to the symbols and the behavior applied to each symbol.

See Also Create a Symbol (on page 381) Rotate a Symbol (on page 404) Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points (on page 406) Associate a Symbol with an Element (on page 392) Creating a Kinematics Animation (on page 647)

Attach a Connector to an Object 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector 2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators. 3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points. The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. 4. Click the symbol to place the connector.

SmartSketch User's Guide

407

Using Symbols in Documents The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked. Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.

See Also Connector Drawing Elements (on page 150) Modify a Connector (on page 152)

408

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 13

Working with Attributes Attributes can help you work more efficiently by allowing you to enter and edit values for a symbol, object, or element. Attributes can include such items as the manufacturer, price, and other data. Attributes include user- defined properties and parameters. A user-defined property is an attribute assigned to an element or object that defines a characteristic about that element or object. A property is usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost, weight, color, and so forth. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the appearance of the element or object. A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter is an attribute assigned to an element or object, usually a numerical value representing a dimension. Parameters are usually used in symbols to resize the length or width of a symbol. The Attribute Viewer displays the user-defined properties and parameters for a selected item. The viewer also allows you to edit the values of the properties or parameters.

User-defined properties also appear on the User tab of the Properties dialog box. Parameters appear only in the Attribute Viewer. You cannot edit the names of attributes; you can edit only their values. The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text. When editing attributes, you can only work on one element or object at a time. When more than one item in the document is selected, no attributes are displayed in the Attribute Viewer.

See Also Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer (on page 411) Move the Attribute Viewer (on page 410) Display the Attribute Viewer (on page 410) Edit Attributes (on page 411)

SmartSketch User's Guide

409

Working with Attributes

Display the Attribute Viewer 1. Select an object, or element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. If the selected item has assigned attributes, the Attribute Viewer opens and displays the properties and parameters. 

 

If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, place the pointer over a toolbar at the top of the document window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer. You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer. If you close the Attribute Viewer, you can open it again by pausing the pointer in the toolbar area, right-clicking, and clicking Attribute Viewer on the shortcut menu.

See Also Attribute Viewer (on page 410) Working with Attributes (on page 409)

Attribute Viewer Displays user-defined properties and parameters of an element, symbol, or inserted document. The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text. You can specify user-defined properties on the User tab of the Properties dialog box for an element or symbol.

Dialog Box Options Name - Displays the name of a user-defined property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in bold text. The Name is read-only. Value - Displays the value of a property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in bold text. You can change the value.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409) Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer (on page 411) Display the Attribute Viewer (on page 410) Edit Attributes (on page 411)

Move the Attribute Viewer  Drag the title of the Attribute Viewer to move the viewer. You can dock or undock the viewer inside the Symbol Explorer and place the viewer at a different location. 

410

To resize the Attribute Viewer like any document window, you can double-click the title bar of the viewer to undock it. Then, you can drag the sides of the viewer to resize.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Attributes 

The position of the Attribute Viewer does not stay the same if you close the software and then start it again. The viewer appears docked in the default position inside the Symbol Explorer.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409)

Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer 1. Click a cell in the Attribute Viewer. 2. Type new information or change existing information.     

You can delete text in the Attribute Viewer by pressing Delete. Double-click to highlight the whole word. Drag to highlight the word. You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute Viewer values. You can resize cells in the viewer by using the splitter bar between each cell at the top of the viewer.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409)

Edit Attributes 1. Select a symbol, object, or element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . 3. If the item that you selected has attributes, the Attribute Viewer appears in the Symbol Explorer window. 



 

 

You can use Attribute Viewer to view a symbol's user properties and parameters. These properties include the dimensions of the symbol and other items. To open the Attribute Viewer, double-click a symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click the Symbol Explorer button on the Main toolbar. In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters in the Name column. To change the values, click in the Value column, type the information that you want, and press Enter. You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute Viewer values. If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, point to a toolbar at the top of the document window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer. You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer. You can edit the parameters of a parametric symbol to automatically change the dimensions of the symbol.

See Also Working with Attributes (on page 409)

SmartSketch User's Guide

411

Working with Attributes

Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set 1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar. 2. Select the symbol set that you want to change. A symbol set is a group of identical symbols containing the same attributes. Only symbols containing the same attributes can be selected and changed simultaneously. You can select more than one symbol at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the symbols. 3. Make the desired changes in the Attribute Viewer window. 



The Attribute Viewer displays user-defined properties and parameters of a selected element, symbol, or object. User-defined properties appear in plain text; parameters appear in bold text. After you have changed an attribute, the change is applied to all symbols within the symbol set.

Delivered Reports The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when you add symbols to a document. The reports work with symbols that have specific attributes assigned to them. You must have Microsoft® Excel™ 97 or later installed on your computer. The software includes several sample reports. When you open a template, that specific template displays a default directory of symbols in the Symbol Explorer. You can find reports in the Reports directory of the default symbol directory. Examples that you can drag into your document include the following reports:  Network Reports—In the Network template, you can drag in reports listing network equipment contacts and reports inventorying equipment.  Process Reports—In the Process Flow template, you can drag in heat exchanger, pump and tower equipment reports and a stream report. To use the Process Flow template, you must install the Process Solutions option. The software prompts you to update the report when you add it to a document. After you add more symbols to the document, you can update the existing report by double-clicking it.

See Also Create a Symbol Report (on page 401) Create a Custom Report (on page 412) Report Generator Dialog Box (on page 413)

Create a Custom Report 1. Select a symbol with attributes from which you wish to create a report. 2. Click Tools > Report Generator. The Report Generator dialog box opens; the selected symbol's attributes display in the Report Fields.  

412

If you do not have a symbol selected, SmartSketch prompts you to select a symbol from your drawing. In the Report Generator dialog box, enter a name for the report.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Attributes 3. In the Items field, specify the maximum number of report items you wish to display. 4. Under Report Data, use the Criteria drop-down list to select the attribute that defines the selection criteria for the symbol, and then specify the text string you wish to use for the criteria.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 



 



For example, to generate a report of all the doors in a design, you can set the criteria to Class and enter Door in the Equals (=) field. From the Report Fields list, select the fields (attributes) you wish to display in the report. Under Data Orientation, use the Columns and Rows radio buttons to specify the desired orientation for the report. Use the Prompt for the Sheet Name check box to specify whether or not you wish to have the report prompt you for the sheet to report on. Click OK to begin the report generation procedure. Specify the location of the report file and click Save. The Report Generator creates a symbol file that contains an Excel spreadsheet with the selected field on it. When this symbol is dragged from the Symbol Explorer and dropped into a SmartSketch file, the Update Report macro (igrUpdateReport412.dll) fills in the actual data. You can run the Update Report macro at any time to update or replace the report. Select a report and then click Tools > Custom Commands. In the Custom Command dialog box, navigate to :\Program directory, and double-click igrUpdateReport412.dll. Once you have created a report symbol, you can use the symbol over and over in different files. The fields you select from the Report Fields list are placed in the report in the order that they appear in the list. You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the items you've selected. If you do not select the Prompt for the Sheet Name check box, the report data is obtained from the sheet in which the report is dropped.

See Also Delivered Reports (on page 412) Report Generator Command (on page 413)

Report Generator Command Allows you to create a custom report based upon specified symbol attributes. This command is available only on the Tools menu. The Report Generator creates a symbol file that contains an Excel spreadsheet with the selected fields displayed. When this symbol is dragged from the Symbol Explorer and dropped in a SmartSketch file, the Update Report macro fills in the actual data. Once you have created a report symbol, you can use the symbol over and over in different files.

See Also Create a Custom Report (on page 412) Delivered Reports (on page 412) Report Generator Dialog Box (on page 413)

Report Generator Dialog Box Sets options for creating a custom report based upon specified symbol attributes.

SmartSketch User's Guide

413

Working with Attributes Report Name - Specifies a name for the report. Items - Specifies the maximum number of items to appear in the report. Report Data - Defines the type of data used to generate the report. Criteria - Defines the selection criteria for the symbol. = (Equals) - Specifies a value that for the criteria you selected. Report Fields - Identifies the type of data displayed in the report. Fields are placed in the report in the order they appear in the list. Move Up / Move Down - Moves the selected field up or down in the Report Fields list. Data Orientation - Specifies how the data in the report is oriented. Columns - Orients the report data horizontally. Rows - Orients the report data vertically. Prompt for the Sheet Name - Directs the Report Generator to prompt you for a sheet to report on. If this option is not enabled, the report data is obtained from the sheet on which the report is dropped. Calculate Quantities - If enabled, adds a quantities field to the report. OK - Begins the report generation process. Cancel - Exits the Report Generator without creating a report. Help - Displays the online help topic for the Report Generator dialog box.

See Also Report Generator Command (on page 413) Delivered Reports (on page 412) Create a Custom Report (on page 412)

414

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 14

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors You can use color and style formats to make your drawing a more powerful communication tool, or simply to make it more aesthetically appealing. The software provides several different methods for formatting one or more geometric elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles. You can also format dimensions, annotations, and.

Styles To make elements that are the same type look alike, you can use styles to apply several formats at once. Styles are a collection of formats that are saved under a name. Styles allow you to save several formats so you can use them again and again. Using styles guarantees consistency in a drawing. To make an element look unique, you can select it and then format it directly. Formatting a few elements at a time takes more time than applying styles, but gives you greater flexibility. The software provides fills that you can apply to closed boundaries. A fill floods a closed boundary with a solid color or pattern. Besides fills, the software provides line types such as continuous, dash, chain, continuous chain, double chain, dot, and end gap. New line types can be created through Visual Basic Automation. The software provides several other tools for consistent drawings. You can save styles and background sheets in a template so that you can use them in other drawings.

Properties and Parameters You can edit the properties of an element, symbol, or object by selecting it and then changing properties on the ribbon. You can also Select the Element, right click, and select Properties on the shortcut menu. A property is a unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can display document properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File menu or Edit menu. Properties for elements or objects can be classified by three different types, as defined on the Properties dialog box:  Size properties, as specified on the Info tab affect physical characteristics of the element, such as the length.  Style properties, as specified on the Format tab, affect the format of the element.  User-defined properties, as created on the User tab. User-defined properties are usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost, manufacturer, and so forth. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no effect on the appearance of the element or object. For example, a valve symbol's style properties can include color, line style, and width. Other user-defined properties stored with the symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material. User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol. User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol.

See Also Applying Unique Formats (on page 431) Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 442)

SmartSketch User's Guide

415

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Format a Text Box (on page 440)

Applying Formats with Styles If you want elements that are the same type to look alike, you should use styles, a collection of formats that can be applied to the following items:  Geometric elements  Dimensions  Annotations  Fills Using styles ensures consistency. If you place or draw one or more elements, the formats in the style are applied directly to the elements. You do not have to spend time formatting as you draw. You can apply the formats in each style again and again. The software provides styles that you can apply to elements so that they conform to an engineering standard, such as ISO or ANSI.

Managing Styles Using the Format > Style command, you can create several styles so that elements in a drawing appear the way you want. You can use or modify the styles delivered with the software, or you can set up new ones that conform to your unique requirements. One or more styles can be stored in a template so that you can use them in other drawings. The software divides styles into types, such as text, dimension, line, and fill. A style type contains one or more styles. You can create styles for each style type. When you create a new document based on a template, the template is copied. The copy includes any styles that are in the template. Fonts are never copied into a document. If you want someone to view the fonts, and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person the fonts along with the document.

Including Styles from Other Documents in a Template If you want to make styles from other documents available in the current document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a style resource document to the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box. The Style Resources dialog box allows you to add style resource documents to the current template or document. Style resource documents can be any .igr document or .RSC line style file that contains styles native to that document. If you create a document based on a template, any style resource documents attached to the template are attached to the new document as well. When you reference a style resource document from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on the active document's ribbon. When you apply a style to an element on the drawing sheet, the style is copied from the style resource document to the current document. The fonts are added to the dropdown list on the ribbon as well, but are not copied into the current document.

Applying Styles The style type determines what type of item to which you can apply a style. A text style can be applied to text within a text box. A fill style can be applied to a fill. A line style can be applied to

416

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors any geometric element such as a line, arc, circle, or ellipse. A dimension style can be applied to a dimension or balloon. When you place dimensions or annotations, or draw elements, the formats from their default styles are applied automatically. For example, if you click SmartDimension on the Dimension toolbar, the ANSI style appears on the ribbon. Each dimension that you place receives the ANSI style. To apply a different style, you can change the style name on the ribbon before or after you draw or place an element.

Applying Styles to More Than One Element Selecting more than one element and then applying the same style to them removes any previous formats—the elements now all have the same formats from the style that you applied. To do this, you must select elements that are in the same style type, such as text, dimension, fill, or line. For example, you cannot apply a line style to a dimension. To preserve the data integrity of your custom styles files from one software version to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that you open all your custom styles files and save them to the new file format.

See Also Applying Unique Formats (on page 431) SmartSketch Templates (on page 107)

Apply a Style 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select the element you want to format. Click Format > Style. On the Style dialog box, in the Styles list, click the style you want to apply. Click Apply.

If you have formatted an element with Properties, or by setting options on the active ribbon, these formats are removed when you apply a style.

See Also Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 431) Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416) Apply a Style to a Group of Elements (on page 418)

Rename a Style 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Click Format > Style. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. In the Style box, click the style you want to rename. Click Modify. In the Name box, type the new name for the style. Click OK. Close the dialog box.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

SmartSketch User's Guide

417

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Apply a Style to a Group of Elements 1. Select two or more elements. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Type box, click the style type that you want. If you have selected several elements from different style types, the Style Type box is blank. 4. In the Style box, click the style that you want to apply to the elements. 5. Click Apply to change all the elements that you selected. If you select different types of elements, you can apply a style only to the elements that are in the style type that you selected on the Style dialog box. For example, if you select several lines and dimensions on a drawing, you can apply a line style only to the lines. You cannot apply a line style to the dimensions.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

Delete a Style 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Format > Style. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. In the Style box, click the style you want to delete. Click Delete. Confirm that you want to delete the style.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

Create a Style Using a Formatted Element 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select an element. Apply the formats you want to save as a style by setting the options you want on the ribbon. On the ribbon, click the Style box to select the current style name of the element. Type a new name to create a style using the formats applied to the element. Press ENTER. If you create a new style using the Style box on the ribbon, you cannot base the new style on any other style.

See Also Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 431) Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

418

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Create a Style with the Style Command 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Format > Style. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. Click New to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked. On the Name tab, in the Name box, type a name for the new style. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to apply to the new style.

See Also New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 421) New Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 422)

Change the Formats of a Style 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Format > Style. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. In the Style box, click the style you want to change. Click Modify to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to modify. After you close the dialog box, the software updates all elements formatted with the modified style throughout the document.



If an element has a style, you can override the style by editing the element's properties with the Properties command on the Edit menu. You can remove style overrides by re-applying a style. You can modify one or more styles using Style on the Format menu.

 

See Also Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 429) Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 430)

Save a Style to a Template 1. Open a document template. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, select the style you want to save to the template of the active document. 4. Click New or Modify. 5. On the dialog box that appears, click the Name tab. 6. Type a name in the Name text box, and enter other information on the dialog box, as needed. 7. Click OK to save the changes.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

SmartSketch User's Guide

419

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Add Styles to the Current Document You can reference a style resource document from any template or document. 1. Click File > Open and open the document to which you want to add a style resource. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. In the Style dialog box, click Resources. 4. In the Style Resources dialog box, click Add. 5. In the Add Style Resources dialog box, select the name of the style resources document that you want to add to the template, and then click Open. 6. In the Style Resources dialog box, click OK. 7. In the Style dialog box, click Apply and then click Close. 8. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous . 9. In the Style list, select a line style. Each line style that you select will be imported to the new file. 10. Click Format > Style. 11. In the Style dialog box, click Resources. 12. In the Style Resources dialog box, select the style resource document you previously added and click Remove. 13. Click OK to close the Style Resources and Style dialog boxes. 14. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate whether or not you want to save changes to the document. 15. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current document's ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the current document. The line styles are copied from the style resource document into the current document. The font styles are not copied. So, if you want another person to be able to view the same fonts in the document and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person a copy of the fonts along with the document. Sometimes you might attach several style resource documents that contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the style in the style resource document that is listed first in the Style Resources list takes precedence and will be listed on the ribbon of the active document.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

Style Command Modifies, creates, deletes, or applies styles.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416) Apply a Style (on page 417) Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419) Apply a Style to a Group of Elements (on page 418)

420

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Create a Style Using a Formatted Element (on page 418) Delete a Style (on page 418) Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) Save a Style to a Template (on page 419)

Style Dialog Box Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other options for working with styles. You cannot create or modify a fill style with this dialog box. To create a new fill style, you can type a name for a fill style in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style is saved with the current settings on the Fill ribbon.

Dialog Box Options Style type — Specifies the style type. If you are placing a new element, you can specify the style by clicking the appropriate style type in this box and then clicking the style that you want in the Styles box. You can also change the style of an existing element by selecting the element and then clicking Styles on the Format menu to set these options. Styles — Specifies the style. Before selecting an item on this list, you must first select the appropriate style type in the Style Type box. List — Specifies which styles appear in the Styles list. You can list only the styles in use, styles that you defined, or all styles. The only styles that appear in the list are styles that are saved in the current document. The styles saved in a styles resource document are not listed. However, if you click New, you can select a style from a style resource document to use as a base style for the new style that you are creating. Description — Displays a description of the settings in the style. Apply — Applies the style selected in the Styles box to elements that you selected. Applying a new style to elements that you selected removes the current formats for the element. New — Accesses one of the New Style Dialog Boxes so that you can create a new style. Modify — Accesses one of the Modify Style dialog boxes so that you can modify the style that you selected in the Styles list. Delete — Deletes the selected style from the document or template. Resources — Allows you to add style resource documents to the current template with the Style Resources dialog box.

See Also New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423)

New Line Style Dialog Box Creates a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. You can also define a new dash definition.

See Also Name Tab (on page 284) Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419) General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) (on page 422)

SmartSketch User's Guide

421

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Name Tab Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or Modify on the Styles dialog box. Name — Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive. Based On — Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on. Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.

See Also Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419) General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) Sets formats for a line. Style — Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element. Color — Sets the drawing color. Width — Sets the line width. Type — Defines how the line appears. Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.

See Also Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 429) New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 421) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432)

New Text Box Style Dialog Box Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other characteristics.

See Also Character Map Command (on page 249) Name Tab (on page 284) Paragraph Tab (on page 422) Name Tab Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or Modify on the Styles dialog box. Name — Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive. Based On — Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on. Description — Displays a description of the formatting options.

See Also Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419) Paragraph Tab Text Style - Displays the style for a text box. Font - Lists and applies the available fonts.

422

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Font Size - Applies a text size. Font Style - Lists the available font styles. Underline - Underlines text. Language - Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the lines wrap in the paragraph. Units Space - Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must exist in the same units. Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units" found in other CAD packages. Font size type - Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.  Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.  1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.  Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines. Paragraph Spacing - Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph. Before - Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. After - Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.

See Also Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 422) Format a Text Box (on page 440)

New Dimension Style Dialog Box Sets options for creating a new dimension style. A dimension style is a collection of dimensional formats, including primary and secondary units, text, spacing, and terminator type. Using a dimension style guarantees that the display of related dimensional information is consistent in a drawing. For example, if you want all driving dimensions to display in a specific color with vertical text above the base line, you can create a dimension style that contains those specific formats.

See Also Name Tab (on page 284) General Tab (on page 284) Units Tab (on page 284) Secondary Units Tab (on page 285) Text Tab (on page 286) Spacing Tab (on page 287) Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 288) Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 286) Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419)

SmartSketch User's Guide

423

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors General Tab Sets general properties for dimensions. Color - Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.  Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.  Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.  Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes on driving dimensions are changed. Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual. Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing view. Manual- Scales the dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. For example, for a scale of 1:100mm, set the manual value to 0.01. Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.

See Also Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Units Tab Sets the primary units for dimensions. Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units — Sets the primary units for linear dimensions. Unit Label — Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label. Subunit Label — Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a subunit label. Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 255. This value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13 inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch. Angular — Sets the units for an angular dimension. Units — Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or Radians. Round-Off — Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Zeroes — Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Delimiter — Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.  Period — Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.  Comma — Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.

424

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors 

Space — Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Secondary Units Tab Sets the secondary units for dimensions. Linear — Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units — Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension, it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit. Unit Label — Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Subunit Label — Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Round-Off — Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. Maximum Subunits — Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings with dual unit display. Zeroes — Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading — Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing — Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Dual Unit Display — Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Text Tab Sets the text options for dimensions. Text - Sets text options for a dimension. Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text. Font Style - Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension. Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension. Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.

SmartSketch User's Guide

425

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the dimension text looks like the following picture.

Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar. Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you type .5, the size of the tolerance text is half the size of the dimension text. Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Lines and Coordinate Tab Dimension Lines — Sets options for dimension lines. A dimension line defines the measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends and a dimension in the center. Connect — Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines. Width — Sets the width of the dimension line. Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Break Line — Sets the size of the break line for the linear, angular, or radial dimension. This value is a ratio of the font size. The dimension break line is separate from the leader and balloon break lines. Coordinate — Sets options for coordinate dimensions. Auto-Jog — Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option only when you place a coordinate dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two dimensions is less than the value set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a jog in the projection line. Common Origin — Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none. Text Position — Positions text in a coordinate dimension. Stack Pitch — Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Projection Line — Sets options for the projection line of a dimension. Display — Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter. Element Gap — Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size.

426

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Extension — Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size. Angle — Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings. Center Mark — Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element. Extend Center Mark — Displays projection lines on center marks. Extend Center Mark only works when the Center Mark option is selected as well.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Spacing Tab Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value. Text Clearance Gap — Sets the space between the text and the dimension line. Dual Display Vertical Gap — Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that dimensions display two units. Line Spacing — Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and the dimension text. Dimension Above Line Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension line. Horizontal Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance on dimensions. Vertical Tolerance Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on dimensions. Vertical Limits Gap — Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit dimensions. Symbol Gap — Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set the space between the symbol and the dimension text. Prefix/Suffix Gap — Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension text. Horizontal Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of the box on dimensions. Vertical Box Gap — Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the box on dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283) Terminator and Symbol Tab Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions. A terminator is a graphic symbol, such as an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader. Terminator — Sets options for terminators.

SmartSketch User's Guide

427

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Type — Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Examples of some of the terminator types are provided below. Arrow (Filled)

Arrow (Hollow)

Arrow (Open)

Back Slash

Blank

Circle

Dot

Slash

Size — Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is twice the size of the dimension text.

Inside Limit — Controls the terminator position relative to a dimension's projection lines. The Inside Limit is calculated as a constant times the dimension font size. For example, if the font size is 0.125 inches and the Inside Limit is set to 3 (3 x font size), any dimension with a value greater than or equal to 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the inside of the projection lines. Any dimension with a value less than 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the outside of the projection lines.

428

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Display — Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.

Freespace Type — Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free space. Origin Type — Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension. This setting affects dimensions only at placement. You can change the terminator's position after placement by dragging the terminator to the other side of the projection line. In the example below, the inside limit value is 3, the font size is 0.1 in., and the dimension line is .317 in. in length. Therefore: Dimension value > 3 (inside limit) * .01 (font size)

The inside limit affects newly-placed dimensions only. The setting has no effect if the dimension value is changed because of changes in the parent geometry. Datum Type — Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame uses an anchor terminator. Symbol — Sets options for symbols in dimensions. Placement — Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial and linear dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also hide the symbol. Not to Scale — Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon. Suppress Diameter — Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions.

See Also Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430) New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423) Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)

Modify Line Style Dialog Box Modifies a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics or a dash definition.

See Also Name Tab (on page 284) Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) (on page 422)

SmartSketch User's Guide

429

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box Modifies a style by allowing you to specify new characteristics.

See Also Name Tab (on page 284) Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419) Paragraph Tab (on page 422)

Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box Modifies a dimension style.

See Also Name Tab (on page 284) General Tab (on page 284) Units Tab (on page 284) Secondary Units Tab (on page 285) Text Tab (on page 286) Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 286) Spacing Tab (on page 287) Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 288) Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419)

Style Resources Dialog Box Lists style resource documents that are available to the current document. Resources can be any .igr document or MicroStation line style resource with an .RSC extension. The styles in the style resource document are available for use in the current document.

Dialog Box Options Style Resource Files — Lists the style resource documents that are attached to the current document. When you attach one of these documents to a template, the styles in the document appear on the Style dropdown list of the ribbon in the current document. A style is copied into the current document from the style resource document when you select this style on the ribbon. A style is also copied when you apply the style to an element or annotation on the drawing sheet. For example, if you attach DIMENSION.igr to the document, the dimension styles in DIMENSION.igr appear on the dropdown list when you select a dimension on the drawing sheet of the active document. You can then apply any of the styles to the dimension. The dimension style that you applied is then copied from DIMENSION.igr into the active document when you save it. Add — Allows you to add a style resource document to the Style Resource Files list with the Add Style Resource dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select .RSC or .igr documents and add them to the Style Resource Files list on the Style Resources dialog box. Remove — Removes a style resource document from the Style Resource Files list. You must first select a document in that list.

See Also Add MicroStation Styles to a Document (on page 599) Add Styles to the Current Document (on page 420)

430

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Reapply Style Dialog Box Redefines a style according to the formatting of selected element, or returns the formatting of selected element to that of the style currently applied to it. Style — Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element. Redefine the style using the selection as an example? — Changes the formatting of the current style to the formatting applied to the element that you selected. Return the formatting of the selection to the style? — Applies the formatting of the current style to the element that you selected.

See Also Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416) Apply a Style (on page 417) Apply a Style to a Group of Elements (on page 418)

Applying Unique Formats At times, you may want to make geometric elements, dimensions, fills, or annotations look different from other ones on the drawing. To do this, you can edit the formats of the element directly. When you do this, the formats are applied only to the selected element or the one you are about to draw. This overrides whatever settings are applied to it by the style, without changing the style.

Formatting Individual Elements Before you place or draw an element, you can set unique formats with the ribbon, without changing the style. The commands on the Format menu, except for Style, can also be used to set an element's formats before you place or draw it. For example, if you click Text Box, a style appears in the Style box on the ribbon. The style contains a format for bold fonts. If you turn Bold off on the ribbon, the text box that you place will not display bold text. You can also apply unique formats to an existing element, dimension, fill, or annotation. You can select the element and then edit the formats with the ribbon or the Edit > Properties command. For example, if you select a text box that has a style that displays borders, you can remove the borders with the Edit > Properties command. Since you are changing the element's format, and not its style, the style of the text box still contains borders. If you apply this style to any other text box, it will still display borders.

Formatting More Than One Element You can change the format of more than one element at a time by selecting the elements and formatting them the same way you would format an individual element. However, all the elements that you select must be of the same type. For example, if you select several text boxes, you can apply settings to all of them at once. You cannot apply the same settings to a dimension and a text box by selecting both of them at once.

See Also Format Dimension Command (on page 441) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

SmartSketch User's Guide

431

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Format a Geometric Element 1. Select a geometric element, such as a line, arc, or circle. 2. Click Edit > Properties. 

You can also right-click the selected element, and click Properties on the shortcut menu.  After selecting the geometric element, you can use the ribbon to edit such properties as line style, line color, line type, and line width. 3. On the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want.   

You can also format an element before you draw it by using the Format > Line command, or by setting options on the ribbon. Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line style formats. You can change the definition of a line style with the Style dialog box.

See Also Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors (on page 415)

Line Command Formats a new line as you place it.

See Also Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) Format Line Dialog Box (on page 432)

Format Line Dialog Box Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format menu.

See Also Line Command (on page 432) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432) General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) (on page 422)

432

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Properties Command (Edit Menu) Edits the properties of a selected element, group, symbol, dimension, or annotation. If you select a group of elements, you can edit only the common properties of that group. You can also edit the properties of a border around an inserted object, called a SmartFrame.  

Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate an element and then right-click. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Properties button on a toolbar.

See Also Applying Unique Formats (on page 431) Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors (on page 415) Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433)

Element Properties Dialog Box Sets the display properties and properties you define for elements.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432) Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 433) Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437) User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437)

Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) The contents of this tab vary depending on whether you selected or highlighted one of the following types of elements:

Line Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element. X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element. X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value. Angle — Sets the angle of a line.

Arc Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

433

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the arc. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Radius — Sets the radius. Start Angle — Displays the angle formed by the X axis and the first point of the sweep angle. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis. Sweep Angle — Sets the sweep angle.

Circle Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the circle. X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Radius — Sets the radius. Diameter — Sets the diameter of the circle. Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Curve Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Curve Type — Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit this field. Order — Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more accurate or precise than lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve command will be 4th order curves. Vertices — Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve. Nodes — Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the list, its x and y values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is also displayed. Length — Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value. Area — Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

434

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors The X/Y coordinate values are read-only.

Ellipse Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Center Point — Sets the X and Y values for the center point of a closed element. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Primary Axis — Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the primary axis.

Secondary Axis — Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the primary axis.

Rotation Angle — Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Point Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Coordinate — Sets the X and Y values for an element. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.

Fillet Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

435

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Radius — Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.

Chamfer Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Angle — Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.

Setback A — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first linear element you selected. Setback B — Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the second linear element you selected.

Rectangle Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element. Centroid — Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y coordinates. Height — Sets the height of the rectangle or square. Width — Sets the width of the rectangle or square. Angle — Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. Circumference — Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area — Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.

Connector Tab Options Type — Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet — Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer — Sets the layer that contains the element.

436

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Start Point — Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the connector. X — Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y — Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. End Point — Sets the X and Y values for the end point of a connector. X — Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. # Vertices — Sets the number of vertices for a connector.

See Also Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432)

Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) Style — Sets the drawing style. Color — Sets the drawing color. Width — Sets the line width. Type — Sets the drawing line type and style.

See Also Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432)

Format Tab (Connectors) These options display for connector properties. Style - Sets the drawing style. Color - Sets the drawing color. Width - Sets the line width. Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for starting the connector. Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector. Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.

See Also Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433) Format a Geometric Element (on page 432)

User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) Attribute set — Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Save — Places the attribute set on the element that you selected. Remove — Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.

Attributes Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Name — Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set. Type — Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.

SmartSketch User's Guide

437

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Value — Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in the Type box. Add — Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the table. Delete — Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a row in the table.

See Also Format a Geometric Element (on page 432) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors (on page 415)

SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box Sets properties for a frame, called a SmartFrame, that provides a border for an object when you insert or paste the object into the current document. You can scale the object by dragging one of the handles on the frame. Or, you can crop the object by pressing the SHIFT key and dragging one of the handles.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Embed an Object (on page 454)

Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) Provides information about frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other applications. Type - Displays the category of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element. You cannot edit the sheet. Name - Specifies the name for the selected element. This field is user-defined. The name that is entered in this field is also displayed in the Display Manager (Sheet tab). Layers - Sets the layer that contains the selected element. Origin - Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X and Y-axes. Behavior - Specifies how the SmartFrame reacts to changes made within its source. For example, if Fit Frame to Reference is selected and the size of the frame contents is expanded, the SmartFrame will also resize and attempt to encompass all the data. Conversely, if you resize the SmartFrame, the data inside is scaled so that it continues to fit within the frame. If Frame Fixed is selected, the SmartFrame does not react to changes made within its source, and resizing the frame will not affect the scale factor of the frame contents; consequently, the frame remains fixed in its original size and position. Height - Displays the height of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display purposes only. Width - Displays the height of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display purposes only. Scale (1:1) - Sets the scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects in the SmartFrame is the same size as the real-world object being described. Select scale - Sets the scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the SmartFrame in relation to the size of the real-world object. Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio.

438

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Use photographic style scale - Controls how paper-based items are scaled. When this option is enabled (and if the Display as Printed option on the View Tab of the Options dialog box is also enabled), text and geometry widths scale up. When this option is disabled, text and geometry widths stay true to size (even if Display as Printed is enabled). Link - Determines the way that the object links with a SmartFrame. This option is available only for linked objects. As Part of the Model (Public)- Allows the linked object to publicly appear in any document that links to the current document. Therefore, if you link an object to the current drawing and then link to the current drawing from another document, the current drawing and the linked object appear in the other document. For example, this setting is useful if you link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to appear in the current drawing with the comments. As Reference Only (Private)- Restricts the linked object from being displayed in any document that links to the current document. If the current drawing is linked to another document, the linked object does not appear in the other document. For example, this setting could be useful if you want to link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to display the drawing, but not the comments.

Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to format frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other applications. Show Border - Turns on/off the frame border around the object. Color - Sets the color of the border. Line Width - Sets the line width. Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for an element or linked object. View Shape - Specifies the geometric shape of the border. Two options are available: Rectangular and Elliptical. Changing the border shape can result in cropping the contents of the SmartFrame.

User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) Attribute Set - Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Save - Places the attribute set on the element that you selected. Remove - Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected. Attributes - Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press TAB. Name - Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set. Type - Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date. Value - Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that you selected in the Type box. Add - Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the table. Delete - Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a row in the table.

SmartSketch User's Guide

439

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Format a Text Box 1. Select a text box. 2. Do one of the following:  On the ribbon, set the options you want. To apply several formats at once, click a style on the ribbon.  On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options you want.  

 

You can format a text box before you place it by using the Format > Text Box command or by setting options on the ribbon. To format a group of text boxes quickly and easily, select several text boxes and apply a text style by clicking a style on the ribbon. You can modify a text style using the Format > Style command. If you apply a text style, you can override the formats of the style by setting options on the ribbon or Text Box Properties dialog box. To apply a border to a text box, click a border option on the ribbon. To change the settings for the border, you must select the text and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties to open the Text Box Properties dialog box where you can set the options.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Format Text Box Dialog Box (on page 440)

Text Box Command Formats a new text box as you place it.

See Also Character Map Command (on page 249) Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 237) Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 248) Edit a Text Box (on page 237) Place a Text Box (on page 230) Format a Text Box (on page 440) Format Text Box Dialog Box (on page 440)

Format Text Box Dialog Box Sets options for placing text boxes. You can access this dialog box by clicking Text Box on the Format menu.

See Also Paragraph Tab (on page 422) Format a Text Box (on page 440)

Format a Dimension or Annotation 1. Select a dimension or annotation. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties.

440

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors 3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want.    

You can format a dimension or annotation before you place it by using the Format > Dimension command, or by setting options on the ribbon. You can also set formatting options on the Dimension ribbon. You can also change a dimension style using the Format > Style command. Dimension styles apply to dimensions and all annotations, except text boxes and callouts. If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click to select the leader line of the balloon, and then you can change the formats of the balloon.

See Also Format Dimension Command (on page 441) Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Format Dimension Command Sets options for placing dimensions. The Format Dimension command allows you to override the style settings for the current active dimension style. These overrides are applied to new dimensions that are placed using the style. This command does not modify existing dimensions using the style nor does it modify the style dimension for the dimension style. Once a dimension has been placed with style overrides, subsequent modification of the style (using Format > Style) will not be applied to the existing dimension that was placed with the style overrides.

See Also Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441) Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)

Format Dimension Dialog Box Sets options for placing dimensions. You can access this dialog box with Dimension on the Format menu. You can define dimension styles with Style on the Format menu.

See Also Format Dimension Command (on page 441) Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440) General Tab (on page 284) Units Tab (on page 284) Secondary Units Tab (on page 285) Text Tab (on page 286) Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 286) Spacing Tab (on page 287) Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 288)

SmartSketch User's Guide

441

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries You can fill a boundary with a pattern or a solid color using Fill on the Draw toolbar. A fill is like other elements in that you can format it and move it around, but the fill is always associated with a boundary. The boundary can be made up of more than one element, but it must be closed on all sides. The following figure shows a pattern fill and solid fill.

The software provides styles for fills for various engineering standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and AIA.

Modifying Fills A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original orientation to an element regardless of the way you manipulate the element. For example, if you move the boundary, the fill moves with it. If you change the boundary, the fill changes to conform to the new boundary area.

A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. If you drag a fill to another region, the fill assumes the shape of the region where you dragged it. If you open a closed boundary, the fill changes color to indicate that it is disabled. If you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now active.

Formatting Fills Formatting a fill is similar to applying formats to an element. You can apply unique formats to fills using Properties on the Edit menu or by setting options on the ribbon. To make several fills look the same, you can apply a fill style by selecting the style on the ribbon. The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol. You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style. If you want to copy a fill style from one document to another, just create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a drop-down list on the Fill ribbon in the new document.

442

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Masking Objects You can mask out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. The software provides a lot of flexibility for creating a mask, such as shape, line style, with or without a label or border. The following illustrations show examples of masks placed in a drawing. The first example shows a rectangular mask, border shown with dashed line style, with a caption.

The second example shows a polygonal mask, border shown in green and no label.

SmartSketch User's Guide

443

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors See Also Fill Command (on page 446) Format a Fill (on page 445) Draw a Mask (on page 448)

Place a Fill 

You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If the software cannot determine the fill boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill color will be gray to indicate that the fill was improperly done.  If the software determines that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no fill. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fill . 2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want. 3. Click inside one or more closed boundaries that you want to fill.

 

 

If you open a closed boundary, the fill color changes to gray to indicate that it is disabled. If you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now active. When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically update to fit the new boundary. You can refill the new boundary by selecting the fill handle, then clicking Redo Fill on the ribbon to apply the fill to the new boundary. You can also refill an area by dragging the handle to the new area. To fill a boundary quickly, you can zoom in on it first using Zoom Area on the View menu. You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style.

See Also Fill Command (on page 446) Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 442) Refill a Modified Boundary (on page 446)

444

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Format a Fill 1. Select a fill. 2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want to update the fill.   





You can format a fill before you place it by setting options on the ribbon or using Properties on the Edit menu. You can apply several formats at once by clicking a new fill style in the Style list box on the ribbon. You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style list box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style. If you want to copy a fill style from one document to another, just create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a drop-down list on the Fill ribbon in the new document. The blank color on the Fill ribbon (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the color-picker grid) takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.

See Also Fill Command (on page 446) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors (on page 415)

Create a Fill Color When you change a fill by setting options on the ribbon, you can create custom colors for the fill. 1. Select the Fill command. The existing fill will be replaced by the pattern and color you select. 2. On the Fill ribbon, click Solid Color or Pattern Color. Pattern Color will not be selectable when Solid Color is selected. 3. At the bottom of the palette, click More. 4. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to create a new color. 5. Click Add to Custom Colors. 6. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you created. This name appears on the palettes for Solid Color or Pattern Color on the Fill ribbon.

See Also Colors Dialog Box (on page 374) Custom Color Name Dialog Box (on page 448) Fill Command (on page 446) Fill Ribbon (on page 446)

SmartSketch User's Guide

445

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

Refill a Modified Boundary When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically update to fit the new boundary. 1. Select the fill handle inside the fill. 2. On the Fill ribbon, click Redo Fill to apply the fill to the new boundary. You can also refill an area by dragging the fill handle to the new area.

See Also Fill Command (on page 446) Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 442)

Fill Command Places a fill inside a closed boundary. You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If the software cannot determine the fill boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill color will be gray to indicate that the fill was improperly done. Also, if the software determines that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no fill. You can modify fill properties using the Fill ribbon.

You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.

See Also Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Format a Fill (on page 445) Place a Fill (on page 444) Fill Ribbon (on page 446)

Fill Ribbon Displays the active settings for a fill. Style — Lists and applies the available styles. To define a new fill style, you can type a name in the box. The new style uses the current settings on the ribbon. Pattern Color — Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none (the cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors Dialog Box (on page 374). Solid Color — Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select none (the cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the pattern will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog Box. The blank fill color (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the color-picker grid for both the Pattern Color and the Solid Color) takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed.

446

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol. Redo Fill — Re-applies a fill to a filled area when the boundary changes. A fill can become disabled, and change color, if you modify its boundary by drawing another element or moving part of the existing boundary. If you click Redo Fill, the area surrounding the fill handle is filled again. Line Width — Sets the line width. Angle — Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the X axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.

Spacing — Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.

See Also Fill Command (on page 446) Format a Fill (on page 445) Place a Fill (on page 444)

Fill Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties of a fill.

See Also Format a Fill (on page 445) Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) Fill Tab (on page 447)

Fill Tab Formats a fill. This tab is available only if you have selected a fill or an element with a fill. Style - Displays the name of the style applied to the element. Solid Color - Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374). Pattern Color - Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog Box. Line Width - Sets the line width. Pattern Spacing - Adjusts the spacing of the pattern lines in a fill. Pattern Angle - Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.

SmartSketch User's Guide

447

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.

See Also Fill Properties Dialog Box (on page 447) Format a Fill (on page 445)

Custom Color Name Dialog Box Saves a color that you created with a name. This dialog box appears after you create a color with the Colors dialog box. Color Name — Specifies the name of the color that you created on the Colors dialog box. After you save the custom color with a name, the name appears on the color palette.

See Also Colors Dialog Box (on page 374) Fill Ribbon (on page 446) Create a Fill Color (on page 445)

Draw a Mask 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Mask . 2. Use the options on the Mask ribbon to specify the following:  Style, color, line type and width of the boundary object of the mask.  Placement mode of the mask - you can select rectangular mask, circular mask, or polygonal mask.  The text that will appear in the label.  Whether the border is shown or hidden. If Show Border is unchecked, the color setting is ignored and the border object color is set to "blank". 3. Click once in the drawing to indicate the start point for the mask. 4. Do one of the following:  For rectangular and circular masks, click a second point in the drawing to place the mask  For a polygonal mask, each click places a vertex for the mask. To finish placing vertices, right-click to place the mask in the drawing. 5. If you entered text in the Caption box, the software automatically places a label in the center of the mask area. To exit the command, press Esc.

See also Mask Command (on page 448) Mask Ribbon (on page 449)

Mask Command Masks out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. Three shapes are available for creating the mask - rectangle, circle, and polygon. You can create a mask with or without a caption (placed as a label in the center of the mask area), and you can show or hide the border of the mask.

448

SmartSketch User's Guide

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors See also Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 442) Draw a Mask (on page 448) Mask Ribbon (on page 449)

Mask Ribbon Determines the shape, style and placement mode of the mask boundary object. Style - Sets the line style for the mask. Line Color - Sets the line color for the mask. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors Dialog Box (on page 374). Line Type - Sets the line type and style for the mask. Line Width - Sets the line width for the mask. Rectangular Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to be rectangular. Circular Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to be circular. Polygonal Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to polygonal. Caption - Specify the text to be placed as a label for the mask. Leave the Caption box blank to not have a label automatically generated when you finish drawing the mask. Show Border - Specifies whether the border of the mask is displayed. Leave the checkbox unchecked to keep the border hidden.

SmartSketch User's Guide

449

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

450

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 15

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding SmartSketch supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to provide a flexible and efficient means of inserting and working with external objects. An object is data created in another application and inserted in a SmartSketch drawing. Part of the power OLE provides is the ability to update objects automatically if they've been modified in their source document, or edit objects in place. SmartSketch is fully compatible with OLE-compliant software, such as Microsoft Office. You can transfer text, numbers, sound bites, or intelligent graphics between documents that were created with SmartSketch and other Microsoft Office applications. For example, you can use Microsoft Word to create a materials report and then display the report in your SmartSketch document. You can also link a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the Variable Table in a SmartSketch document. You can then use the value in the spreadsheet to control the dimensions in the SmartSketch drawing. You can even create a document that contains a drawing created by SmartSketch, notes from Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet created by Excel, and an image created in Photoshop. You can insert objects into your SmartSketch drawings using any of the following methods:  Linking  Embedding  Cutting/Copying-and-Pasting

SmartFrames Any time a data file is inserted as embedded or linked, or pasted into SmartSketch, a SmartFrame is created containing the object. A SmartFrame usually appears as a rectangular outline in a document file, but it can also have other boundary type shapes (elliptical, for example).

SmartFrames provide ways for these objects to be manipulated, including moving, scaling, rotating, mirroring, and cropping. SmartFrames also contain properties for defining borders, styles and placement options. You can access these properties via the SmartFrames Properties dialog box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

451

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding Linking Linking takes data that's stored in one location (referred to as the source document) and places a reference to it in another location (referred to as the destination document). Linking allows you to use consistently updated versions of an object in multiple SmartSketch drawings. You can edit the linked object only by opening the source document and making your changes there. When you change the original data, the linked data automatically updates. You can link an object in a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.

Relative Paths for Linked Objects Linked objects placed in a SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links. You can think of a relative link as being a "child" of the SmartSketch drawing in which it is inserted. A relative link points to the location of the linked file in relation to the "parent" drawing. For example, a link to Building\Doors\door1.igr points to a file called door1.igr, which is located in the Building/Doors subdirectory inside the directory or folder where the parent drawing is located. The use of relative links in your SmartSketch projects enables you to create drawings that are portable, meaning you can copy or move an entire directory structure to another location without updating the file paths. The parent drawing must already exist as a saved file prior to inserting the linked object; otherwise, there is no "relative" location.

Embedding Embedding takes data from the source document and stores a copy of the information in the destination document. The copy becomes an independent version of the original information. Although editing the data in the original application has no effect on the copied version, you can edit the embedded object in-place from within the SmartSketch drawing. You can embed an object inside a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.

Linking and Embedding with Copy/Cut-and-Paste You're not limited to using the SmartSketch Insert menu to link or embed files. You can move information between documents or between locations using Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit menu in any OLE-compliant software. You can also move information between SmartSketch and other software by selecting the information in a document or a document in the Windows Explorer and dragging it to another location or another document. With this method, you simply select the information that you want to move, press the left mouse button, and drag the document to a location inside SmartSketch or another Office application. To finish the operation, release the left mouse button. If you want to copy the information, and not move it, press Alt while dragging the object. When you drop the information, a shortcut menu appears beside the pointer. The options on the shortcut menu allow you to select how you want to place the information in the destination document, such as pasting, linking, and so forth. If the software that you are copying or pasting to cannot edit the information, it will automatically store, or embed, the information in the document. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. If you cannot edit the information, the information is displayed as a static picture.

When Do I Link or Embed? Choosing whether to link or embed depends, in large part, on how you intend to use your SmartSketch drawing. Linking is useful when you want to share information in many different

452

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding places and have that information update automatically. For example, if you want to display a SmartSketch drawing in several different documents, you can link the drawing inside each document. Then, later, when you edit the drawing, each document automatically displays the results of the drawing updates. Another consideration is file size. Because linking only adds a reference to a file, the data does not significantly increase the size of the SmartSketch drawing. If you want to keep the document's size small, considering linking the data. If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file. If the document's size is not an important factor, then you might want to use embedding. Because an embedded object becomes part of the SmartSketch drawing, it will increase the file size. Embedding is also useful when you want to keep your data in one file, or if you want to distribute the data among several people who may not have access to the source application. For example, if you want to send out several drawings for review, you can embed your drawing document into a Word document and mail the Word document to each reviewer. Embedding information is also a good choice if the information does not require frequent updating. If you want to embed an object or edit an embedded object, you must have access to the software that created it.

See Also How Linking Works (on page 457) How Embedding Works (on page 453) Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 459) Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455) Embed an Object (on page 454) Link an Object (on page 458)

How Embedding Works When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the drawing. When you double-click the embedded object in SmartSketch, the software in which the object was created opens so that you can edit it. When you go back to SmartSketch, the object updates automatically with the changes that you made. The changes, however, exist only in the current drawing. You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed it.

Embedding an Object Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a SmartSketch drawing. First, click Insert > Object. On the dialog box, click Create New and then click Microsoft Word in the list. After you click OK, Word opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, click Update on the File menu in Word. You should then switch back to the SmartSketch document or drawing. A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the Word object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same process with any documents created with Office-compatible or OLE- compliant software. If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document, you can use the Insert > Object command. On the dialog box, you should select Create From File and then enter the name of the Word document to insert the entire document into the SmartSketch document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

453

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding If you want to embed the object, make sure the Link check box is not set. You can also embed information that you copied from another document. Copy the information, and then switch to the SmartSketch document, and use Paste Special to paste the information as an embedded object. If you want to use a mouse to embed objects, you can select the information in the source software and then drag it into another document. You can also drag the document that you want to embed from the Windows Explorer or into a SmartSketch document. The object is placed with the mouse drop point at the center of the object. When dropping SmartSketch documents, you can place the object coincident with the coordinate system of the container document. To do this, select Coincident on the Reference Files tab of the Options dialog box.

Editing an Embedded Object To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. The software that created both documents must support OLE. You can also click commands on the shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. To get the shortcut menu, select the embedded object and then right-click.

See Also Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 459) Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455) Embed an Object (on page 454) Link an Object (on page 458) Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 459) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

Embed an Object To Embed a New Object 1. Click Insert > Object. 2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New. 3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in which you want to create the object, and then click OK. The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your computer support linking and embedding. 4. To return to SmartSketch, do one of the following:  If the object was created in another application that is in a separate window, click Exit or Update on the File menu in that application. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document, click Yes.  If the software temporarily replaces some of the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object.  When you return to SmartSketch, a box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created. While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESCAPE key, the object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default location with the Tools > Options command. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.

454

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding To Embed an Existing Object 1. Click Insert > Object. 2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create from File. 3. In the File box, type or click the name of the object you want to embed, and then click OK. If you do not see the file that you want to embed, click a different drive or volume, directory or folder. A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created. While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESC key, the object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default location using the Tools > Options command. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.   

If you are working in the source software, you can embed an existing object using the Edit > Paste Special command. You can also embed an object by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows Explorer into a SmartSketch document. If you insert a SmartSketch document into the current document, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document.

See Also Object Command (on page 456) How Embedding Works (on page 453) Paste Special Command (on page 216)

Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software 1. 2. 3.  

Double-click the embedded object. Edit the object. Do one of the following: If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to SmartSketch. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to SmartSketch.

See Also Object Command (on page 456) How Embedding Works (on page 453) Paste Special Command (on page 216)

SmartSketch User's Guide

455

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding

Object Command Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The difference between linking and embedding is how data is stored and updated. The Object command inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it.  When you link an object to a document, the document stores information about where the object is located—the object is not stored in the document. When you embed an object in a document, a copy of the object is stored in the document.  When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that have links to that object update. When you make changes to an embedded object, only the copy of the object that is stored in the document updates.

See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455) Embed an Object (on page 454) Link an Object (on page 458)

Insert Object Dialog Box Create New — Creates a new object to insert into the file that is currently open. After you insert the object, you will be able to automatically enter information into it. Create from File — Inserts an entire document into the file that is currently open. You will be able to edit the inserted object with the program used to create the file. File — Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your document. Browse — Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into your document. Link — Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file. Result — Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the type of file you are inserting. To get help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark right corner of the dialog box, and then click on a dialog box control.

in the upper

See Also Object Command (on page 456) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

456

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding

Save Copy As Command (File Menu) Saves the active document to a new name, directory, and format. This command appears on the File menu when you double-click an inserted object on the drawing sheet.

See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Save a Document (on page 93) Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)

How Linking Works Suppose you are sketching a drawing with SmartSketch, and you want to include it in an engineering change request that was created in Word. You intend to update the drawing several times and want the change request to reflect the latest updates. A good way to keep the updates current is to link the drawing to the Word document and then periodically update the link.

Creating a Link You can create links between documents as easily as you cut and paste information. To create a link to an entire document, you insert information into the destination document with Object on the Insert menu. This is convenient when you do not want to switch away from the document in which you are currently working. You can also link information by dragging and dropping the document from the Windows Explorer into a SmartSketch document. To insert the document as a linked object, you must press CTRL + SHIFT while dragging and dropping the document; otherwise, the document is embedded. To create a link to just part of a document, copy the information in the source document and then use Paste Special in the destination document to create the link. To establish the link, you must save the destination document. The software that created both documents must support OLE.

Reconnecting or Changing a Link When you move a document or rename the source document, the links in the destination document are broken. To reconnect the link to the source document or change the link to another document, you can click Links on the Edit menu.

Updating a Link Suppose you linked revision notes in a Word document to your drawing. You have revised your notes in Word since you first created the link. You must now update the link in the document so that it displays the latest revisions to your notes. You can specify whether the updates happen automatically when you change the Word notes or if you must manually update the link in your original document. First, click Links on the Edit menu and then, on the Links dialog box, select the link that you want to set. You can then click Automatic or Manual. With Automatic set, SmartSketch updates the links every time you open the document. With Manual set, SmartSketch updates the links only when you click Update Now on the Links dialog box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

457

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding Editing Linked Information The best way to edit linked information is to change it in the source document. To edit the linked information, double-click on the linked object. If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file.

Breaking a Link If you do not need to automatically update the information displayed in the destination document, you can break the link using Links on the Edit menu. Once the link is broken, the information still appears in the destination document, but you cannot update the information or reconnect the link. You must create a new link instead.

See Also Object Command (on page 456) Paste Special Command (on page 216) Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 459) Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455) Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 460) Link an Object (on page 458)

Link an Object Make sure that you save the source document before you link the information.

Create a link to another document 1. In the software in which the information you want to link was created, open the source document and then select the information that you want to link. 2. Click Edit > Copy. 3. Switch to your original document. 4. Click Edit > Paste Special. 5. Click Paste Link. With this procedure, you can create a link only to an entire document; you cannot link to a selection in a document. 







458

The software creates links as automatic links by default. It updates automatic links each time you open the document and each time the data in the source document changes, whereas it updates manual links only when you specify. To change the way the software updates links, see Update a Link. You can also link information by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows Explorer onto the drawing sheet. You must press CTRL + SHIFT while dragging and dropping to link the information. If you do not press a key, the information will be embedded. If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the document, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document. In order to save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the software, you must do one of the following:

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding  

Delete the SmartFrame that references the unavailable linked file. Make the link available by restoring it to its original location, or place the linked file in the same location as the file that references the link.

See Also Links Command (on page 460) Links Dialog Box (on page 460) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Paste Special Command (on page 216)

Open an OLE Object for Editing 1. Select an OLE object. 2. Do one of the following:  If the object is linked, right-click to display the shortcut menu and click Edit Object > Open to open the source file in which the object was created.  If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.

See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

Edit a Linked Object 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Edit > Links to open the Links dialog box. In the Links list, click to select the linked object you want to edit and click Open Source. In the source file, make the changes you want to the linked object. In the source file, click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. In the source file, click File > Exit to return to the SmartSketch document.

You can also double-click a linked object from within the SmartSketch document to open up the source file and make any necessary changes.

See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

Change the Source for a Linked Object 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Edit > Links. In the Links list, click to select the link whose source file you want to change. Click Change Source. In the File Name box, type the name of the new source file.

If you do not see the file you want to open, navigate to a different drive, directory, or folder. 5. Click Close to return to the SmartSketch document. If you have other links to the same source file, make sure you change all links from the previous source file to the new source file.

SmartSketch User's Guide

459

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding See Also Links Command (on page 460) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

Break a Connection to a Linked Object 1. Click Edit > Links. 2. In the Links list, click to select the link you want to break. To select multiple linked objects, hold down the CTRL key and click each linked object. 3. Click Break Link, and then when the software prompts you to confirm that you want to break the link, click Yes. 4. Click Close to return to the SmartSketch document.

See Also Links Command (on page 460) Links Dialog Box (on page 460) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the Changes Close and Return are available only after you double-click an object and edit it.  Click File > Close > Return. The changes you made to the object are saved to memory.  

When you use Close and Return, you are not asked to save the document until you exit the software. You can use Revert to close the document without saving your changes.

See Also Edit a Linked Object (on page 459) Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 459) Close a Document Without Saving Changes (on page 99)

Links Command Edits or updates links to objects in another document. This command is available only on the Edit menu.

See Also Links Command (on page 460) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Edit a Linked Object (on page 459)

Links Dialog Box Displays information about links in a document including file name, file location, and whether the link is automatically or manually updated. Links — Lists the names, types, locations, and update settings of the linked source files in the active SmartSketch document.

460

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding Cancel — Closes the Links dialog box without saving any of the changes that you have made. Update Now — Updates the selected links. Open Source — Opens the selected file in the source application for editing. Change Source — Changes the source file for the selected link to a different file. Break Link — Breaks the link between the source file and the SmartSketch document. Data for broken links is no longer updated if the source file changes. After you break a link, it no longer appears in the Links list. Update — Allows you to specify whether your link is updated automatically or manually. If you select Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this document will be updated. If you select Manual, you will need to click Update Now to update information in your document.

See Also Links Command (on page 460) Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 459) Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455) Embed an Object (on page 454) Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 460) Link an Object (on page 458)

SmartSketch User's Guide

461

Working with Object, Linking and Embedding

462

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 16

Customizing the Software Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware, such as Microsoft Visual Basic. There are several ways to customize the software:

Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and menus delivered with the software. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu, you click Tools > Customize. From there, you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. For example, if you frequently use the File > Sheet Setup command, you can add Sheet Setup to the Main toolbar for quick access. The Sheet Setup command button is listed in File categories on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. For more information about adding commands to a toolbar, see Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471). If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software, first click View > Toolbars. Next, click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. After you click OK, the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. When you add commands or buttons to the menus or toolbars in the software, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.

Customizing with Custom Commands Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software, you can also create your own custom commands or macros that can be added to the menus and toolbars in the same manner. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. You can also run the custom commands directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the custom command. You can create custom commands in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA (inside Excel), Visual C++ Delphi, Visual Basic, and so forth. The software also includes a type library, which contains the objects, properties, and methods available with the product. The online Help that is delivered when you install the Programming Tools component provides a complete reference to the objects, methods, and properties. You can view the type library with Visual Basic's type library browser or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. A variety of custom commands are delivered with the software; use Tools > Custom Commands to view a list of those custom command. When you install the Programming Tools component, the software delivers a set of custom commands to \VB Examples\BIN. These files are stand-alone .EXE files and .DLL files, which can be launched directly from within the software. A README.TXT document is located in the source directory for each custom command and provides information on how you can use the command. For information about installing the Programming Tools component, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

SmartSketch User's Guide

463

Customizing the Software See Also Programming Tools (on page 27) Customize Command (on page 473) Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471) Delete a Command From a Menu (on page 472) Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472) Create a New Toolbar (on page 469) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Create a New Menu (on page 471)

Customize the Software with the Options Command You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can change such things as the screen appearance, document location, and display colors. 1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you want to customize. 3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate changes.

See Also Options Command (on page 464)

Options Command Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user information, and so forth. This command is available only on the Tools menu. You can use the Options command to set options for importing MicroStation or AutoCAD documents into the software.

See Also Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464) Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Options Dialog Box (on page 464)

Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid display by clicking the View tab.

See Also Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464) Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465) General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465) File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 466) View Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 468) Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 468) Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467)

464

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software

Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Controls color settings for the active document. Sheet - Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document. Sheet color is stored in the file. However, when you specify a sheet color on the Colors tab, it will override the sheet color stored in previously saved files. To allow the display of a saved sheet color, access the Colors tab and select Default before re-opening the drawing file. Highlight - Sets the highlight color. Selected Element - Sets the color of selected elements. Disabled Elements - Sets the color of disabled elements. This setting can also define the color of relationship indicators and their corresponding glyphs if Maintain Relationships is disabled. Select Tools > SmartSketch Settings to see the relationship indicators and their corresponding glyphs or images. Handles - Sets the color of handles when an element is selected. Also, if Maintain Relationships is enabled, the Handles option sets the color for the relationship indicators that display during element placement. Owner group - Sets the display color of the group containing the selected element during dimension placement. The color is used during dimension placement. For example, you could have elements that belong to different groups on top of each other. When you place dimensions, it could be difficult to determine which group a selected element is from. To clarify this situation, the dimension commands highlight the selected element and display the owning group in the Owner group color. For more information on placing dimensions, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274). If you set the sheet color the same as another control setting, the control color setting and the cursor color is automatically changed to a complementary color. For example, if you have both the Selected Element color and the Sheet color set to Yellow, the sheet background displays yellow and the selected elements display in a complementary blue color.

See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464) Maintain Relationships (on page 264)

General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries in the list of recently used files. Update Links Automatically At Open - Updates links automatically when the document is open and this option is set. Recently Used Files List - Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files area of the File menu when the Recent Files area is set.

SmartSketch User's Guide

465

Customizing the Software Dimension Keyin Values Automatically - Places dimensions for recognized step values or for values you type in a ribbon field while drawing a geometric element. For example, select Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. On the ribbon, type a value in the Width, Height, and/or Angle fields, press or , and then click the location in the Drawing sheet where you want to place the rectangle.

Display Unit Of Measurement Labels - Displays the units of measurement in the value field. Set printer paper size to sheet size - Automatically sets the printer paper size to match the sheet size (if the printer supports that size). Display XY coordinate readout - Displays the XY coordinate of the cursor position in the right side of the application window status bar. Undo Steps - Sets the number of operations that can be undone. Middle Button Operation - Sets up the middle mouse button so that it can be used for either scrolling or panning. The default action of the middle mouse button is Windows Scrolling.

See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464)

File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you create or use in the software. You can use the following types of documents:  Document  Templates that you define  Fonts  Macros  MicroStation references  AutoCAD references File Types - Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location. Location - Displays the designated location for each file type. Modify - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The folder selected with the dialog box is displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you select a location, you can delete it later by selecting the location in the Location column and pressing Delete.

466

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464)

Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) The Foreign Data tab is only available on the Options dialog box if you install the Translators (on page 28) option. Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a document or by clicking one of the following commands:  Paste Special on the Edit menu  Object on the Insert menu  Open on the File menu. Format - Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a document. When you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the appropriate Options, you can access a specific dialog box to set options for importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation (.dgn) documents. Import - Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. File Units - Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you insert or drag a document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting only when the document has units assigned that the software does not recognize. Orientation - Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import. Options - Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. Export - Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. Options - Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Options Dialog Box (on page 464)

Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Scale - Sets a scale option for importing a document. Coincident - Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at full scale (1:1) and coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left of the document graphic range and then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet shifts to include those graphics. If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not appear when you drag the pointer. Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the size of the drawing and 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet, but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

467

Customizing the Software Custom Scale - Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that you insert or drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the foreign document is one-and-a-half times its original size.

See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Working with CAD Drawings (on page 565) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464)

Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document. You can override the settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can press Ctrl to embed the symbol or Ctrl + Shift to link the symbol. Drag and Drop Default - Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the document. Embed - Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it on the drawing sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a copy of the symbol in the document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that symbol within the current document reflect those changes. Link - Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it into the document. Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol document. The symbol that you placed on the drawing sheet updates automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document, those changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.

See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464) Place a Symbol (on page 393)

View Tab (Options Dialog Box) Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the display of the graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar. Display - Controls the display. Display as printed - Displays the drawing as it appears on paper. This option is enabled by default. Style view scale - Controls the width of linear styles as displayed on the screen. This option is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings. Maximum line width - Sets the maximum width allowed for the display linear styles. This option is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings. Reset - Resets Style view scale and Maximum line width to their default values. This option is only available when Display as printed disabled. Window - Controls the window display. Vertical Scroll Bar - Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window. Horizontal Scroll Bar - Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active window. Sheet Tabs - Displays the drawing sheet tabs. Grid - Sets options for the grid. The grid display option must be checked from the view menu before these settings will be visible.

468

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid lines are not considered part of the document and do not print. Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid Style - Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic. When you zoom in or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines for a dynamic grid. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing. Grid Index - Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor grid lines, to be equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box. Grid Spacing - Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected options on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box determine the units that you can enter, such as inches or centimeters. You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu. Grid Density - Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor grid lines, between intersections with the grid lines. This option is available only if you select Dynamic in the Grid Style list box. Sheet outline - Sets options for the outline of the drawing sheet. Display - Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its boundaries. Use during fit - Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.

See Also Options Dialog Box (on page 464) Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464)

Create a New Toolbar 1. Click View > Toolbars. 2. On the Toolbars dialog box, click New. 3. On the New Toolbars dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar. When you click OK, the Customize dialog box appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. 4. On the Toolbars tab, click the category containing the command that you want to add. 5. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar. When you create a new toolbar, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

SmartSketch User's Guide

469

Customizing the Software

Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings If you customize a toolbar, you can restore the toolbar to the original settings. 1. Click View > Toolbars. 2. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to restore. 3. Click Reset. 4. Click OK.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471) Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473) Create a New Menu (on page 471)

Toolbars Command Creates new toolbars and displays or hides selected toolbars. You can also change toolbar color schemes and button sizes. This command is available only on the View menu.

See Also Customizing the Software (on page 463) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471) Toolbars Dialog Box (on page 470)

Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. The settings on this dialog box are remembered for the current user. Toolbars — Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to display, hide, or change. Toolbar name — Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected. New — Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new toolbar. Customize — Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. Reset — Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. Color buttons — Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are black and white. Large buttons — Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. Show ToolTips — Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over it. Classic icons — Displays the toolbar icons using the classic icons. If this option is not selected, toolbars use the high-color icons. OK — Saves changes and dismisses the dialog. Cancel — Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog. Help — Displays the Help topic for this dialog.

470

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software See Also Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) New Toolbar Dialog Box (on page 471) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471)

New Toolbar Dialog Box Names a toolbar that you selected on the Toolbars dialog box. You can type the name of the new toolbar in the box.

See Also Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471)

Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, click the category that contains the command you want to add. 3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

Remove a Command from a Toolbar 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, drag the button you want to remove from the toolbar and drop it outside the toolbar boundary. When you remove commands from the toolbars, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

Create a New Menu 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > Customize. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box. In the List box, click the name of an existing menu. Click Add Menu. The new menu is added after the existing menu.

If you want to add a menu to an existing menu, select the Place into selected menu check box before you click Add Menu. You can add commands to the new menu later to create a cascading menu. 5. In the List box, type the name of the menu and click anywhere away from the name to enter it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

471

Customizing the Software When you create menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

Add a Command to a Menu 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > Customize. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box. In the Commands box, click the name of the command that you want to add. In the Preview box, double-click the name of an existing menu that you want to add a command to. The Preview box expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 5. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. 6. Set the Place into selected menu check box. If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar, do not set the Place into selected menu check box. The name of the new command will be added to the main menu bar after the existing menu that you selected in the Preview box. 7. Click Add Command. The new command is added after the existing command. When you add buttons to the menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open. You can also add custom commands/macros to an existing menu. In the Categories box, select Custom Commands. The Commands box becomes the Macros box and displays a list of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can click Browse to change the active directory. When you do so, the macro list in the Macros box updates to display a list of macros in the specified location.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

Delete a Command from a Menu 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, double-click a menu in the List box. The List box expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 3. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the menu or the main menu bar. 4. Click Remove. When you delete a command from a menu, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

472

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software

Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings 1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, click Reset All. If you remove the Customize command from the Tools menu, you can restore it by positioning the pointer over a toolbar and, on the shortcut menu and clicking Customize.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473) Customizing the Software (on page 463)

Customize Command Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. This command is available only on the Tools menu.

See Also Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Create a New Menu (on page 471) Customize Dialog Box (on page 473)

Customize Dialog Box Customizes toolbar buttons and menus.

See Also Customize Command (on page 473) Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 473) Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 474)

Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands and macros from menus or the main menu bar. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. Categories — Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to the menu or main menu bar. When you select the category for a group of commands in this box, a list of commands specific to the selected category is displayed in the Commands box. When you select Custom Commands in the Categories box, the Commands box becomes the Macros box and displays a list of available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can use to open the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Commands — Specifies the command or macro that you want to add to the menu. If you select Custom Commands in the Categories list, the Commands box becomes the Macros box and displays a list of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can use Browse to change the active directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the Macros box updates to display a list of macros in the specified location. Preview — Lists the menus. Double-click on a menu name to see all the commands on a menu. When you click Add Command, Add Menu, Place into selected menu, or Remove, the changes show up on this list. This list also changes to allow you type in a name for the new menu that you want to add.

SmartSketch User's Guide

473

Customizing the Software Place into selected menu — Places a command or macro that you selected in the Commands box on the menu that you selected in the Preview box. If you do not set this option, then the macros or commands that you are adding are placed before or after the command or menu that you selected in the Preview box. Reset All — Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. Add Command — Places a command or macro on a menu or the main menu bar. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box. Add Menu — Places a menu on an existing menu or the main menu bar. When you add a menu with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you add a menu to an existing menu, this creates a cascading menu. After you click this button, you can type the name that you want in the Preview box and then click away from the name to enter it. Remove — Removes the command or menu that you selected in the Preview box. Description — Displays a description or result of the options that you selected before you apply them to a menu. Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the directory containing the macro you want to add to a SmartSketch menu. Browse appears only when you click Custom Commands in the Categories box.

See Also Delete a Command From a Menu (on page 472) Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472)

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Allows you to customize existing toolbars by adding or removing commands and macros. You can also create your own toolbars. Categories — Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to the toolbar. When you select the category, a list of toolbar buttons specific to the selected category is displayed in the Buttons box. When you select Custom Commands in the Categories box, the Buttons box becomes the Custom Commands box and displays a list of available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can use to open the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Buttons/Custom Commands — Specifies which button or macro from the active category you want to add to a toolbar. If you select a macro, you can also click Browse and change the active directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the Commands/Custom Commands box displays a list of macros in the specified location. Description — Describes the selected button displayed in the Buttons/Custom Commands box. Descriptions are not available for macros. Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the directory containing the macro you want to add to a toolbar. Browse appears only when you click Custom Commands in the Categories box.

See Also Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471) Create a New Toolbar (on page 469) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471)

474

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software Select Macro Directory Dialog Box Allows you to search for and specify the directory containing the macro you want to add to a SmartSketch toolbar. The Select Macro Directory dialog box changes the directory for listing macros on the Customize dialog box (on page 473). When you change the directory and click OK, you immediately return to the Toolbars tab on the Customize dialog box. The macros for the directory that you selected are listed in the Custom Commands box on the Toolbars tab. Custom Commands - Lists the files in the selected drive and folder location that match the type specified in the Save file as type list. Folders - Allows you to browse through and select a folder on the specified drive. Save file as type - Specifies the type of file you are saving. Drives - Lists the names of available drives. You can browse through the list and click on a drive name to select it. Network - Allows you to connect to a shared network folder.

See Also Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471)

Run a Custom Command 1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. In the Custom Command dialog box, locate the custom command you want to run. 3. Click Open. You can create custom commands with any programming tool that supports OLE automation, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.

See Also Customizing the Software (on page 463) Custom Commands Command (on page 475)

Custom Commands Command Opens the Custom Command dialog box. You can choose a macro and run it. Some macros are delivered with the software, generally in the [Installation Folder]\Program Files\SmartSketch\VB Examples folder. You can also create your own macros and store them in a location of your choosing. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Macro button on a toolbar. The following custom commands are delivered with SmartSketch:

2D Custom Commands    

Align Dimensions - Aligns linear dimensions that you select to a common point. For more information, see Align Dimensions (on page 291). Clear Manual Edits – Clears manual edits from the drawing. Highlight Manual Edits – Highlights in the drawing the label and dimension options, including filters that you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command. Run Extend - Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another element. For more information, see Run Extend Command.

SmartSketch User's Guide

475

Customizing the Software   

Run Highlight - Highlights in the drawing label and dimension options, including filters, that you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command. Run Place Girth Dimension - Places a girth dimension. For more information, see Run Place Girth Dimension Command. Run Trim - Trims open and closed elements to a point in space, to a point on another element, or performs a partial delete on a section of the element itself. For more information, see Run Trim Command.

3D Custom Commands SmartSketch also delivers 3D custom commands. These commands are run from Tools > Custom Commands on the main menu, rather than the Drawing Editor. For more information on using 3D Custom commands, see Custom Commands in the Common User's Guide.  Large Sector Utility – PROGID: DwgBinaryEditorCmd.FixSectorSize Converts existing production drawings from a small to larger sector format so that Microsoft structured storage limits and their corresponding errors are avoided.  Repair Style Path Command – PROGID: DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments Fixes the Symbol or Style path on a RAD document.  Synchronize Drawing Templates Command – PROGID: DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.SynchTemplates Synchronizes or copies a template from one drawing component to another.

See Also Run a Custom Command (on page 475) Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471) Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472) Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 476)

Custom Command Dialog Box Allows you to locate the custom command or macro that you want to run.

See Also Custom Commands Command (on page 475) Run a Custom Command (on page 475)

Assign a Shortcut Key 1. Click Tools > Customize Keyboard. 2. In the Customize Keyboard dialog box, click the command category that you want in the Categories list. 3. In the Commands box, click the command to which you want to assign a shortcut key. 4. Press the shortcut key combination you want to assign. For example, press CTRL and the key.  

476

You cannot use a single letter or alpha character (like "T"). You must begin each shortcut key combinations with CTRL, ALT, or a function key. The following keys cannot be used to define the shortcut key combination:  Punctuation keys

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software  Divide  Plus  Multiply  Shift  Scroll Lock  Pause  Num Lock 5. Click OK to save the shortcut key combination.  

To remove a shortcut key, select a command in the Commands list that has a shortcut key and then click Clear. You can also assign a shortcut key combination to a custom command: a. In the Categories list, select Custom Commands. b. Type the progid for the custom command in the Progid box, and then click Add to add the progid to the Commands list. c. Press the shortcut key combination you want to assign, and then click OK. d. Shortcut key mappings are saved locally in \SmartSketch\SmartKeysMappings.txt. You can share these mappings among multiple SmartSketch users by placing a copy of the SmartKeysMappings.txt file on a server and then referencing it with a UNC path. In the registry of each user's local machine, modify the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Intergraph\Applications\SmartSketch.Applicatio n\PrefSets\AddIns\SmartKeysManager\MapFile value so that it points to the file in the server location.

See Also Customize Keyboard Dialog Box (on page 477)

Customize Keyboard Command Uses shortcut keys to quickly accomplish tasks you perform frequently. Shortcut keys are one or more keys you press on the keyboard to complete a task. For example, pressing CTRL + N creates a new document or template, just as selecting New on the File menu or clicking New on the Main toolbar creates a new document or template. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Customize Keyboard button on a toolbar. The following keyboard combinations are not available: ALT+C, ALT+K, ALT+O, ALT+H, ALT+N, and ALT+P.

See Also Customize Keyboard Dialog Box (on page 477)

Customize Keyboard Dialog Box Categories - Sets the category from which you want to select a command to assign a shortcut key combination. When you select the category for a group of commands in this box, a list of commands specific to the selected category is displayed in the Commands box. Commands - Specifies the command to which you want to assign a shortcut key combination.

SmartSketch User's Guide

477

Customizing the Software Progid - Specifies the executable (.dll, .ocx, .exe) to which you want to assign a shortcut key combination. The Progid box displays only when you select Custom Commands in the Categories list. Delete - Removes the selected Progid from the Commands list. This button displays only when you select Custom Commands in the Categories list. Add - Adds the executable you entered in the Progid box to the Commands list. This button displays only when you select Custom Commands in the Categories list. Press new shortcut key - Displays the shortcut keyboard combination you defined for the selected command. Clear - Removes the shortcut key combination that displays in the Press new shortcut key box. Use shortcut keys - Enables the use of shortcut keys in the software. If this box is disabled, the shortcut key combinations that you have defined are inactive.

See Also Customize Keyboard Command (on page 477)

Installing Additional Tools Add-ins are commands or functions that add special capabilities to the software. To install an add-in, choose Add-Ins from the Tools menu. After you install an add-in, its commands or functions become an integrated part of the software until you remove the add-in.

Add-Ins Included with the Software The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the \Addins folder: Add-in

Description

Symbol Authoring Tools

Provides ready-to-use symbols and a tool set for creating your own symbols.

AutoSave

Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify.

ImageIntegrator

Enables large format raster display and provides image editing tools.

Isometric Toolbar

Activates an isometric toolbar while a given document is active.

Line Style Editor

Edits linear styles, linear patterns and point styles.

To Do List Manager Manages a To Do List for documents. Organizational Chart Wizard 



478

Creates organization charts quickly and easily.

The ImageIntegrator and Symbol Authoring Tools add-ins are only available if you install the Image Integrator (on page 25) and Symbol Authoring (on page 27) options. For more information about installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide, accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software. The Line Style Editor does not display in the Add-ins list until you click Tools > Line Style Editor to toggle it on for the first time. Once it has been added to the Add-ins list, you can

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software toggle on/off the Line Style Editor by selecting/deselecting it in the Add-ins list or by clicking Tools > Line Style Editor.

See Also AutoSave Command (on page 95) Add-Ins Command (on page 479) Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479)

Install or Remove an Add-In 1. Click Tools > Add-Ins. 2. To install an add-in, select the associated check box. The add-ins you install are active until you remove them.  

To remove, clear the check box associated with the add-in. The software removes the add-ins the next time you start this application. If the add-in you want to install is not listed in the Add-In Manager dialog box, click Browse and locate the drive, folder, and filename for the add-in.

See Also Add-Ins Command (on page 479) Installing Additional Tools (on page 478)

Add-Ins Command Allows you to select add-ins that are automatically available and ready to use when you start the software. This command is available only on the Tools menu. With Add-Ins, you can install or remove:  Add-ins that come with the software.  Add-ins that you create.

Available Add-Ins Lists the available add-ins. You can select or clear the add-in check boxes to install or remove add-ins in the software.

See Also Installing Additional Tools (on page 478) Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479)

Add-In Manager Dialog Box Allows you to install or remove supplemental features, such as the SmartPlant Line Style Editor from an application. Available add-ins - List all the supplemental applications and features which you can install. Additionally, you can click the Browse button and search for additional add-ins on your computer or network. Add-in description - Provides a brief description of the add-in selected in the Available add-ins field.

SmartSketch User's Guide

479

Customizing the Software

Install the To Do List Add-In The To Do List add-in allows you to define and manage tasks that are associated with a specific drawing. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. From the To Do List, you can perform tasks, defer them, or delete them altogether. Additionally, you can view properties for each task in the To Do List. 1. Click Tools > Add-Ins. 2. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the To Do List Manager Addin check box in the Available add-ins list and then click OK. Drag the To Do List toolbar and dock it at the top, bottom, or either side of the document window.  

The To Do List add-in remains active until you remove it. To remove the To Do List add-in, clear the associated check box. The software removes the add-in the next time you open the software.

To Do List Toolbar To Do List Manager - Displays the To Do List Manager Dialog Box (on page 481) where you can view, manage and define To Do List items for the active document, including tasks, status, priority, and any special instructions that need to be considered. To Do List Options - Displays the To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box (on page 482) where you can specify when you want the software to notify you if there are changes to the To Do List assigned to a drawing.

Create a To Do List The following procedure requires the To Do List add-in. For more information, see Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479). 1. Open a SmartSketch document. 2. On the To Do List toolbar, click To Do List Manager

.

    

If the To Do List toolbar is not displayed, do the following: Click View > Toolbar In the Toolbars dialog box, select To Do List in the list of toolbars. Click OK So that the To Do List toolbar remains visible, you can dock it to the top, bottom, or either side of the drawing window. 3. In the To Do List dialog box, type a description of the task in the Item box. 4. Select a status in the Status list. When a task is created, the status is set to Open. 5. In the Priority list, select a level of priority for the task. 6. In the Details box, enter any additional information that is pertinent to the task. 7. Click Add.

480

SmartSketch User's Guide

Customizing the Software 8. Click Apply and then repeat steps 1-7 to define as many tasks as needed. 9. When you are finished defining the To Do List tasks, click Close to return to the SmartSketch document.  

If you click Close before clicking Apply, none of the To Do List entries will be saved. When you save the document, the To Do List is also saved. You can use the To Do List Notification Options dialog box (on page 482) to request that the software notify you when the status or priority of a task on the To Do List changes.

To Do List Manager Command Displays the To Do List Manager Dialog Box (on page 481) where you can view, manage and define To Do List items for the active document, including tasks, status, priority, and any special instructions that need to be considered.

To Do List Manager Dialog Box Provides the ability to define, view, and manage tasks that have been associated with a specific drawing. Item - Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. You cannot modify the Item once it has been added to the task list. Status - Indicates the level of completion for the task. You can select from the following: Open, Reviewed, Complete, Rejected, and Resolved. When a task is created, the status is set to Open. Priority - Defines an order of importance to the task, with 1 being the highest priority and 4 being the lowest priority. Details - Allows you to enter freeform text about the task, such as information about the execution of the task. Add - Places the information you entered in the Item, Status, Priority, and Details fields into the next empty row in the task list. Modify - Updates the selected task with any changes you have made to Status, Priority, or Details. Delete - Removes the selected row from the task list.

See Also Create a To Do List (on page 480)

To Do List Options Command Displays the To Do List Notification Options dialog box (on page 482) where you can specify when you want the software to notify you if there are changes to the To Do List assigned to a drawing.

See Also Create a To Do List (on page 480)

SmartSketch User's Guide

481

Customizing the Software

To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box Provides the ability to specify when you want the software to notify you if there are status or priority changes to a task in the To Do List assigned to a drawing. A document with a To Do List is open - When this option is enabled, the software displays the following message when you open a document that contains a To Do List:

Item Status - Specifies that the software inform you when the status of the To Do List task meets the criteria you define. You can select from the following statuses: Open, Reviewed, Complete, Rejected and Resolved. When the item meets the criteria you have specified, the software displays a message similar to the following:

Item Priority - Specifies that the software inform you when the priority of the To Do List task meets the criteria you define. Four priority levels are available, with 1 being the highest level of priority and 4 being the lowest level of priority.

482

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 17

Using the Line Style Editor The Line Style Editor allows you to create and modify point styles, linear patterns, fill styles, and linear styles through a user-friendly interface. You can create custom styles based on existing ones, modify the properties of existing styles, or delete styles that are not used or referenced by others. Linear patterns and styles are defined by a series of strokes, called a stroke sequence. Each stroke appears either as a dash or a gap; however, point styles may be added to the stroke when necessary. The strokes, when used together in a stroke sequence, are placed in locations indicated by a stroke index, a number indicating the order in which the individual strokes appear in the sequence. The Line Style Editor appears as a frame in the SmartSketch window. The Line Style Editor toolbar appears at the top of the frame. A tree window displays line styles defined for the active document or within any applicable resource files, and a preview window at the bottom of the frame provides a graphic representation of selected styles. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area, and on the shortcut menu, and select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display. Using the Line Style Editor, you can create the following custom tools, which are saved within the active symbol (.sym) file. Point Styles — Holds graphical images used periodically throughout a line or as a terminator at the beginning or end of a line. Examples of common point styles might include arrowheads used at one end of a line or symbols drawn over a line to indicate what the line represents. Linear Patterns — Adds point styles, if applicable, to a series of dashes and gaps (strokes). When defining a linear pattern, you set both, the order in which dashes, gaps, and point styles appear, and the position of the point styles relative to the stroke. Linear Styles — Provides point styles and linear patterns in a format that can be used in drawings. When you define a linear style, you provide width and color to linear patterns so they can be applied to linear geometry. Fill Styles — Provides patterns or solid colors used inside a closed boundary. When you define a fill style, you provide a color and degree of transparency. When you define a pattern, you define such items as a pattern line color, degree of transparency, line width, spacing of the pattern lines, and so on. If you are using a Workshare environment, fill styles, point styles, linear patterns, and linear styles should not be created at a satellite site.

See Also Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492)

SmartSketch User's Guide

483

Using the Line Style Editor

Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar 1. From the Line Style Editor window, double-click in the open space on the right-hand side of the Line Style Editor toolbar. 2. On the Customize Toolbar dialog box, select a command from the Available buttons list and click Add. The command is placed in the Toolbar buttons list pane. 3. Use the Add button to place all desired command buttons into the Toolbar buttons list pane. 4. Select a command button in the Toolbar buttons list pane and click Remove button to remove it from the toolbar and place it in the Available buttons list pane. 5. Select a command button in the Toolbar buttons list pane. Use the Move Up and Move Down commands to change the display order of the command buttons in the toolbar. -orDrag and drop command buttons in the list pane to change their display order. Command buttons listed from top to bottom in the window list display left to right in the toolbar. 6. Click Reset if you want to clear all settings and return to the system default toolbar display. 7. Click Close when you have finished. You can write your own applications and run them from within the current document. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartSketch > Programming Help to get more information about creating your own macros. Programming Help is only available if you have installed the Programming Tools (on page 27) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.

Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style Editor) Allows you to customize the Line Style Editor toolbar by adding or removing command buttons. Available buttons - Contains command buttons that can be placed in the toolbar. The Separator command places an additional space between toolbar buttons. Add - Adds selected command buttons from the Available buttons list pane. Remove - Removes selected command buttons from the Toolbar buttons list pane. Toolbar buttons - Contains command buttons that display in the Line Style Editor toolbar. Close - Closes the dialog box and automatically saves all changes. Reset - Restores the default toolbar command buttons. Move Up - Moves the selected command button up in the Toolbar buttons list pane. Move Down - Moves the selected command button down in the Toolbar buttons list pane. Command buttons listed from top to bottom in the window list display left to right in the toolbar.

484

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor

Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style You can use the Line Style Editor to create customized linear styles. In this sample workflow, you will create a line similar to the one in the following illustration:

The process to create a new linear style involves the steps listed below. 1. Create the text. 2. Create a new point style. 3. Add the style to the linear patterns. 4. Add a style to the linear styles. 5. Test the new linear style.

Create the Text 1. Click Text Box on the Draw toolbar and place a B on the drawing sheet. This text will become part of the new point style.

2. Right click the text box, and click Properties to open the Text Box Properties dialog box. 3. On the Info tab, change the Justification for the Horizontal and Vertical options to Shape Center.

SmartSketch User's Guide

485

Using the Line Style Editor

In your new line style, each occurrence of the letter "B" will be centered horizontally and vertically in the line.

Add a New Point Style 1. Click Point Styles in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style Create New Point Style dialog box.

to open the

You can also right-click on Point Styles and select Add Style from the popup menu to open the Create New Point Style dialog box. 2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new point style, and then click OK.

486

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor 3. In the Point Style Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe Point Style in the Notes box, and click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears in the Point Styles list.

4. On the drawing sheet, select the letter "B", and then click Define Point Style Graphics 5. Move the cursor back to the drawing sheet and click on the "B" to place the origin of the point style.

.

Add a Style to Linear Patterns 1. Click Linear Patterns in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box.

to open

You can also right-click on Linear Patterns and select Add Style from the popup menu to open the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box. 2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new linear pattern, and then click OK.

3. On the Linear Pattern Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe in the Notes box. 4. In the Stroke sequence definitions section, select 1 in the Stroke index list.

SmartSketch User's Guide

487

Using the Line Style Editor 5. Set the Dash length to 0.500 in.

6. 7. 8. 9.

488

In the Stroke index list, select 2. Set the Gap length to 0.25 in. In the Point style section, select BuriedPipe in the Name list. In the Position along stroke box, type 50.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor 10. In the Orientation list, select Always up.

As you define properties for the new linear pattern, the Preview pane displays an image of the new style. 11. Click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears in the Linear Patterns list.

Add a Style to Linear Styles 1. Click Linear Styles in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style the Create New Linear Style dialog box.

to open

You can also right-click on Linear Styles and select Add Style from the popup menu to open the Create New Linear Style dialog box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

489

Using the Line Style Editor 2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new linear style, and then click OK.

3. In the Linear Style Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe Linear Style Property in the Note box. 4. In the Color list, select Red.

490

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor 5. In the Linear pattern list, select Buried Pipe.

SmartSketch User's Guide

491

Using the Line Style Editor 6. Click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears under Linear Styles.

Test the New Linear Style 1. Click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. 2. On the Line ribbon, select BuriedPipe in the Style list. 3. Draw a line on the drawing sheet.

See Also Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492)

Line Style Editor Command Allows you to create and modify point styles, linear patterns, fill styles, linear styles, and fill styles through a user-friendly interface called the Line Style Editor. You can create custom styles based on existing ones, modify the properties of existing styles, or delete styles that are not used or referenced by others. You can use Tools > Customize to place the Line Style Editor button on a toolbar.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496) Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 497) Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492)

Line Style Editor Toolbar The following commands are available on the toolbar at the top of the Line Style Editor. Create New Style — Creates a new point style, linear pattern, fill styles, or linear style. Depending on what you have selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor, clicking this button will open either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, Create New Fill Style, or Create New Linear Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style. Copy Style — Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor. Import Style — Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is available only when you have selected a style object in a resource file. Delete Style — Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not in use or referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style. Properties — Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.

492

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor Place Point Style Graphics — Places the selected point style graphic into the active drawing so that it can be modified using the standard drawing tools. This command is available only if you have selected a point style in the tree. Define Point Style Graphics — Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics in the active drawing. This command is available only when you have selected a point style in the tree and one or more objects are selected in the drawing. Show Styles in Resource Files — Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource files in the tree window. Resource files are attached to a file using the host application. Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document, while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496) Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 497) Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles (on page 497) Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 498)

Create Custom Point Styles On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Point Styles. 4. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492), click Create New Style . 5. Name the new point style and add any applicable notes on the Point Style Properties dialog box. 6. Draw the image for the new point style in the drawing sheet. 7. Select the image using the Draw > Select Tool command. 8. On the Line Style Editor toolbar, click Define Point Style Graphics. 9. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.   

You can also access the Create New Point Style dialog box by right-clicking on Point Styles in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style. Use the Redefine Point Styles (on page 504) procedure to define a new image for the point style or to reset the origin of the point style. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display.

See Also Create New Point Style Dialog Box (on page 494) Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498)

SmartSketch User's Guide

493

Using the Line Style Editor

Create New Style Command Creates a new point style, linear pattern, fill style, or linear style. Depending on what you have selected in the tree window of the SmartSketch Line Style Editor, clicking this button will open either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, Create New Fill Style, or Create New Linear Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style.

See Also Create New Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 495) Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 494) Create New Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 495) Create New Point Style Dialog Box (on page 494)

Create New Point Style Dialog Box Defines a new point style for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new point style.

See Also Create Custom Point Styles (on page 493) Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498)

Create Custom Linear Patterns In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Patterns. 10. Click Create New Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 11. On the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box, name the new linear pattern. 12. If applicable, select the existing linear pattern on which the new one should be based, and click OK. 13. Configure the settings on the Linear Pattern Properties dialog box as necessary. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display. You can also access the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box by right-clicking on Linear Patterns in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.

See Also Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 494) Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box (on page 499)

Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box Defines a new linear pattern for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new linear pattern. Based on — Select an existing linear pattern on which to base the new pattern.

See Also Create Custom Linear Patterns (on page 494) Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box (on page 499)

494

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor

Create Custom Linear Styles 1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Styles. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display. 2. Click Create New Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 3. On the Create New Linear Style dialog box, name the new linear style. 4. If applicable, select the existing linear style on which the new one should be based, and click OK. 5. Configure the settings on the Linear Style Properties dialog box as necessary. You can also access the Create New Linear Style by right-clicking on Linear Styles in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.

See Also Create New Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 495) Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 501)

Create New Linear Style Dialog Box Defines a new linear style for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new linear style. Based on — Select an existing linear style on which to base the new style.

See Also Create Custom Linear Styles (on page 495) Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 501)

Create Custom Fill Styles 1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Fill Styles. 2. Click Create New Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 3. On the Create New Fill Style dialog box, name the new fill style. 4. If applicable, select the existing fill style on which the new one should be based, and click OK. 5. Configure the settings on the Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503) as necessary.  

You can also access the Create New Fill Style dialog box by right-clicking on Fill Styles in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style. You can use the Tools menu to toggle on/off the Line Style Editor.

See Also Create New Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 495)

Create New Fill Style Dialog Box Defines a new fill style for the active document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

495

Using the Line Style Editor Style name - Enter a name for the new fill style. Based on - Select an existing fill style on which to base the new style.

See Also Create Custom Fill Styles (on page 495) Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503)

Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles 1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style, fill style, linear pattern, or linear style you want to copy. 2. Click Copy Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 3. Name the new item on the dialog box that appears, either the Copy Point Style Dialog Box (on page 496), the Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 496), the Copy Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 497), or the Copy Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 497). 4. Modify attributes of the new styles on the applicable Properties dialog box that appears. You can use the Tools menu to toggle on/off the Line Style Editor.

Copy Style Command Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor.

See Also Copy Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 497) Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 496) Copy Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 497) Copy Point Style Dialog Box (on page 496)

Copy Point Style Dialog Box Creates a copy of an existing point style, which you can modify as necessary for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new point style.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496)

Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box Creates a copy of an existing linear pattern, which you can modify as necessary for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new linear pattern.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496)

496

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor

Copy Linear Style Dialog Box Creates a copy of an existing linear style, which you can modify as necessary for the active document. Style name — Type a name for the new linear style.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496)

Copy Fill Style Dialog Box Creates a copy of an existing fill style, which you can modify as necessary for the active document. Style name - Enter a name for the new fill style.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496)

Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles 1. Find the line style you want to import from a resource file, and select it in the tree in the Line Style Editor. If styles in resource files are not displayed in the tree, click Show Resource File Styles on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 2. Click Import Style on the Line Style Editor toolbar. The software copies the style from the resource file into the active document. Styles that appear bold in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document, while non-bold styles are from the resource files.

Import Style Command Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is available only when you have selected a style object in a resource file.

See Also Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles (on page 497)

Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles 1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the style you want to delete. 2. Click Delete Style on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). You can use the Tools menu to toggle on/off the Line Style Editor. You cannot delete point styles used to define linear patterns or linear styles or linear patterns used to define linear styles.

SmartSketch User's Guide

497

Using the Line Style Editor

Delete Style Command Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not in use or referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style.

See Also Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 497)

Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles 1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the style you want to modify. 2. Double click the selected item. 3. From the appropriate Properties dialog box, make your changes as necessary. Refer to the Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498), Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box (on page 499), Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503), or Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 501) for additional information about the fields on these dialog boxes. You can use the Tools menu to toggle on/off the Line Style Editor.

Properties Command Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.

See Also Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503) Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box (on page 499) Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 501) Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498)

Point Style Properties Dialog Box Displays specific descriptive information and an image of the selected point style. Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the point style. Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the point style. World units define the width of the point style in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the point style on paper. Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles defined in World units. When using the Line Style Editor to create new styles, if a linear style uses a linear pattern and/or point style it is recommended that they all have the same units. Preview — Displays the point style image.

See Also Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 498)

498

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor

Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box Displays specific descriptive information and attributes of the selected linear pattern. Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear pattern. Based on — Displays the name of the pattern on which this linear pattern was based. Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles defined in World units. When using the Line Style Editor to create new styles, if a linear style uses a linear pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units. Phasing — Select how dashes will be displayed.  Normal — Repeats the stroke sequence without altering the strokes between repetitions.  Autophasing — Adjusts the length of stretchable strokes so that the line always starts and ends with a dash.  Single Stroke Sequence — Scales the stroke sequence uniformly so that the first stroke sequence begins the line and the last stroke sequence appears at the end of the line. Fraction of first dash (%) — Set a numeric between 0 and 100 that represents the fraction of the first dash to be used as the last dash of a line when the phasing is set to Autophasing or Single Stroke Sequence. Display dashes — Indicates whether dashes in this pattern are visible. Break on change in direction — Indicates that a break in the linear pattern occurs whenever the line changes direction. Stroke index — Indicates the location within a stroke sequence where each stroke is displayed. Each stroke within a sequence appears as a gap or a dash. Information about the stroke located in a selected index location appears in the remaining fields in this section of the dialog box. Dash length — Set the length of the current stroke. Fixed length — Indicates that the length of the stroke is definite and cannot be lengthened or shortened for phasing. Stretchable — Indicates that the active stroke may be altered for phasing. Dot — Indicates that the stroke should be displayed as a dot. Selecting the Dot option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by the selection. Zero length — Indicates that the active stroke has no length. A stoke with no length is often used as a place holder for a point style or as the last stroke if no gap is wanted between cycles. Selecting the Zero Length option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by the selection. Name — Select a point style from this list box to apply to the active stroke. Angle — Set the angle which the point style should be rotated when it is displayed. This value is measured from the selected Orientation. This field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.  

The angle appears in the default units set in the host application; however, the field accepts any unit of measure applicable to an angle. A positive value in this field rotates the point style in a counter-clockwise direction about its origin, while a negative value results in clockwise rotation.

SmartSketch User's Guide

499

Using the Line Style Editor Orientation — Specifies the reference from which rotation is measured, as specified in the Angle field. This reference may be the sheet or the line to which the point style is applied. This field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.  Relative — Indicates rotation should be calculated from the slope of the line.  Absolute — Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the sheet.  Always Up — Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the slope of the line, but that the x-axis of the point style is aligned with the line before the specified rotation is applied. In other words, if a line is horizontal, the top of the point style is aligned toward the top of the page, or if the line is vertical, the point style is aligned toward the left side of the page before the rotation is applied. This setting allows you to ensure that text within a pattern is displayed so that it is readable from left to right or from bottom to top. Even if a line is drawn from right to left the images within the pattern are displayed as if the line was drawn from left to right. Position along stroke (%) — Using a numeric value between 0 and 100, set the fraction into the stroke from which the X and Y offsets are measured. For example, if you set this value to 50, the offsets will be measured from the middle of the selected stroke. This field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box. X offset — Distance along the stroke, at which the point style's origin is located. This distance is measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box. Y offset — Distance perpendicular to the stroke at which the point style's origin is located. This distance is measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box. Add stroke — Creates a new stroke. A new number will be added to the Stroke index list box, and the new stroke is made active in the dialog box. Remove stroke — Removes the active stroke from the linear pattern. This button is available only when more than two strokes exist. 

To create a solid line with superimposed point style images, create dashes and apply the point styles relative to those dashes. Then create gaps with zero length.  When you turn off the Display dashes command on this dialog, point styles applied to the linear pattern are still displayed positioned relative to the invisible dashes. Preview — Displays the linear pattern image.

See Also Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 498)

500

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor

Linear Style Properties Dialog Box Displays specific descriptive information, attributes, and an image of the selected linear style. Notes — Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear style. Based on — Displays the style on which this linear style was based. Units — Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles defined in World units. When using the Line Style Editor to create new styles, if a linear style uses a linear pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units. Component index — This list contains a number for each of the components within the linear style. Information about the component selected in this field is displayed in the remaining fields in this section of the dialog box. Override point style color — Indicates that the color specified for this component will override the color defined for any point style used as the component. Override point style width — Indicates that the width specified for this component will override the width defined for any point style used as the component. Do not print — Displays objects using this linear style on screen but does not print them. The option is applied per component. For example, a style can have two components, both of which will display but only one of which will print. Color — Select the color to be used for the active component. If the component you are defining is a point style, and the color you select is not the color with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style color check box. Transparency (%) — Indicate how transparent the drawn line will be. Zero (percent) indicates that you will not be able to see through the line at all, while 100 (percent) indicates the line will not be visible, as it will be completely transparent. Linear pattern — Select a defined linear pattern to use as the active component in the linear style. Width - Select the width to be used for the active component. If the component you are defining is a point style, and the width you select is not the width with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style width check box. Offset — Specify the distance the active component should be placed from the centerline of the linear style. The offset distance appears in the default length units set in the host application; however, the field accepts any distances in any unit of measure applicable to a distance.

SmartSketch User's Guide

501

Using the Line Style Editor Crossover orientation — Controls how the component with an offset crosses over the component without an offset. As such, this option is typically used on a style with two components, one of which has an offset and one which does not. In the following illustration, the darker line is the component without the offset, while the lighter line is the component with the offset and the Crossover orientation.

Start terminator — Select the point style with which you would like to start the line. End terminator — Select the point style with which you would like to end the line. End cap type — Indicate the type of cap you want to place at the end of the line. You can choose from a rounded, flat, squared, or triangular end. For examples of each type of end cap, see the following graphic.

Join type — Select the kind of join you want to use for line strings and complex strings created through automation. You can choose from rounded, beveled, and mitered joints. For examples of each type of joint, see the graphic below.

The selected type of joint is not applied to regular lines joined at the end point.

502

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Line Style Editor Add component — Creates a new component. A new number will be added to the Component index list box, and the new component is made active in the dialog box. Remove component — Removes the active component from the linear style. This button is available only when more than one component exists. Preview — Displays the linear style.

Fill Style Properties Dialog Box Displays specific descriptive information and attributes of the selected fill style. Fill color -Specifies the current fill color. Fill transparency (%) - Specifies the degree of transparency for the fill color. Defining a high degree of transparency for the fill color makes it more "see through", and any background pattern will be more visible. Conversely, a low degree of transparency makes the fill color less "see through"; consequently, the pattern is less visible. Pattern Name - Specifies the name for the current pattern. Transparency (%) - Specifies the degree of transparency for the pattern. When you define a high degree of transparency for the pattern, it becomes less visible against the fill color. If you define a low degree of transparency for the pattern, it stands out against the fill color and is more visible. Units - Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern that occurs in the fill style. World units define the width of the linear pattern in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the linear pattern in the fill style on paper. Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles defined in World units. Rotation - Sets the angle of the pattern lines in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.

Spacing - Sets the spacing between the pattern lines. Width -Sets the line width of the pattern lines.

See Also Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 498)

Show Styles in Resource Files Command Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource files in the tree window. Resource files are attached to a file using the host application. Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document, while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.

See Also Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496) Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 497)

SmartSketch User's Guide

503

Using the Line Style Editor

Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet From the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to insert into the drawing sheet. 4. Click Place Point Style Graphics on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492). 5. Click in the drawing sheet where you want to place the graphic. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display.

Place Point Style Graphics Command Places the selected point style graphic into the active drawing so that it can be modified using the standard drawing tools. This command is available only if you have selected a point style in the tree.

See Also Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet (on page 504)

Redefine Point Styles 1. In the drawing sheet, draw the image you want to define as a point style. 2. Click Select on the Draw toolbar, and then select the image on the Drawing sheet. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to redefine with the new image. 3. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492), click Define Point Style Graphics 4. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.

.

To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display.

See Also Create New Point Style Dialog Box (on page 494) Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498)

Define Point Style Graphics Command Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics in the active drawing. This command is available only when you have selected a point style in the tree and one or more objects are selected in the drawing.

See Also Redefine Point Styles (on page 504)

504

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 18

Symbol Authoring As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, the Symbol Authoring option gives you the flexibility to create your own. There are several ways to create your symbols. You can:  Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the line, rectangle, ellipse, and freeform tools.  Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol.  Revise an existing symbol. To use this functionality, you must first install Symbol Authoring using Add-Ins on the Tools menu. If you do not see the Symbol Authoring add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Custom setup to install the Symbol Authoring option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.

Planning Your Symbol After you have determined the need for a symbol, you need to decide how you want that symbol to behave. The goal is to create a symbol that acts the way a user expects it to. When you create a symbol, it displays the following default behaviors:  90 degree rotation angles  Handles for scaling, rotating, and mirroring You can change these default behaviors with commands on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.

Checklist for Consideration When planning your symbol, the first item to consider is what happens when you add text to a symbol. Do you want to add text to the shape? If so, you should consider the position and appearance of labels, text boxes, or balloons. A SmartLabel can be associated with attributes that you define. You can also define symbols that resize as a user adds text to the symbol. The second item you should consider is what template will you want to use with the symbol. The scale of the template affects how the symbol looks when it is dragged in from the Symbol Explorer. For example, the scale for the Architecture (metric) template is set to 1:100 mm on the Sheet Setup dialog box. Consequently, some symbols that you drag into documents based on that template may appear small. The next item for you to decide is what happens when you manipulate the symbol. Do you want to size, mirror, flip, and rotate the symbol freely? Do you want the symbol to move with an element? You can set different options on the Symbol Properties dialog box. You can create SmartPoints on a symbol to determine how the symbol attaches to connectors, other symbols, or elements in a document. How smart should you make the symbol? You can create symbols that have text and parametric attributes. You can create text attributes using SmartText by clicking the Edit SmartText button on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. You can create parametric attributes by adding driving

SmartSketch User's Guide

505

Symbol Authoring dimensions to the symbol and then adding the dimensions to the Parameters tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box.

Controlling Display Properties You can control display properties for symbols in various ways. You can change the properties of various elements in the shape by applying styles or setting options such as line weight and color on the ribbon bar. You can also determine what handles appear on the symbol by setting options on the Symbol Properties dialog box. On this dialog box, you can also set options for how the symbol displays when a user drags it into the document. For example, if you want the symbol to display as separate elements, and not a unified symbol, you can click the Discrete Objects option on the Behaviors tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box.

Creating Flexible Symbols with Handles Your symbol might need more control than users can implement by simply selecting the symbol and dragging. You can add different types of handles to give the user more control over the symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Create a Symbol (on page 381) Create Symbol Command (on page 382) Edit a Symbol (on page 396)

Create a Parametric Symbol To create a parametric symbol, you must take the following steps in the order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.

Create a Symbol with Driving Dimensions 1. Click File > New. 2. Draw the elements that you plan to use in the symbol. 3. On the Main toolbar, click the Dimension button . 4. On the Dimension toolbar, click the SmartDimension button  

.

On the ribbon bar, make sure that Driving/Driven is set, if you have turned it off when previously placing dimensions. Do not use the Angle button on the ribbon bar if you want users to rotate the symbol.

You can use any of the dimension buttons on the Dimension toolbar to place your dimensions.

506

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring 5. Click an element. 6. Click to place a driving dimension.

Repeat this step to place up to four driving dimensions. These dimensions are used to create the parametric handles for the height and width of the parametric symbol. You can use up to four dimensions for the parametric handles.

7. Select the elements that you want for the symbol and create a symbol.

Set Up Parametric Handles 1. Open the symbol document that you just created. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties . 3. The Parameters tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box automatically displays the driving dimensions in the symbol document. 4. On the Parameters tab, select a driving dimension in the table by clicking the appropriate row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select the row that displayed the value 30.000 mm.

If you move the Symbol Properties dialog box to one side of the document window, you can see the dimension that you selected on the Parameters tab highlighted in the document. 5. In the Symbol Parameter box, select a row to apply Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to the row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select Right.  



You can also click Apply. Selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right determines the place on the finished symbol where the yellow parametric handles appear. For example, if you select Top and Left, the parametric handles appear at the top center and left center of the symbol range box. While creating a parametric symbol that grows when text is added, you must identify the two primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth, instead of selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right.

SmartSketch User's Guide

507

Symbol Authoring 6. Repeat the previous two steps as necessary for the number of handles that you want to appear on the symbol. You can identify up to four parametric handles. In the current example, for the dimension 20.000 mm, you would want to select Bottom

7. Click File > Save. 8. This procedure creates drag handles that appear as square yellow handles on the symbol's range box. You can place the symbol and use the drag handles to move the symbol in the document. In a new document, drag the symbol that you created.

The parametric handles do no support grid snap. You cannot define a step distance. Parametric handles change the represented dimension by the precision units defined on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box. You can access the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Define Symbol Properties 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties . 3. On the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the properties that you want for the symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Define Handles for a Symbol 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button 3. On the Behaviors tab, select the type of handles that you want.

.

To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

508

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring

Add a Symbol Attribute 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. 3. 4. 5.

On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties . Click the Attributes tab. Type the attribute name in the Name box. Select the attribute type from the Type list. The available attribute types are Text, Date, Number, Boolean and Money. 6. Type the attribute value in the Value box. 7. Click the Add button. The software adds the attribute at the bottom of the attribute list. You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Modify a Symbol Attribute 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties . Click the Attributes tab. Select an attribute in the attribute list. Change the attribute data. Click the Modify button. The software updates the attribute data in the attribute list.



If you change the attribute name in the Name box, the Add button becomes active, and the Modify button becomes inactive. You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes.



To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Remove a Symbol Attribute 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. 3. 4. 5.

On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties Click the Attributes tab. Click an attribute in the attribute list. Click the Remove button. The software deletes the symbol attribute.

.

To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

509

Symbol Authoring

Attach a Help File to a Symbol 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties. 3. On the General tab, type the name of the compiled Help file (.CHM) you want to attach in the Help File box. 4. In the Help Context box, type the Help context identifier that is mapped to the Help topic you want to display. 5. Click OK to return to the document, and then click File > Save to save the symbol.   

You can access the Help topic by right-clicking on the symbol and selecting Help on the shortcut menu. For more information on mapping context IDs and creating compiled Help, see the Microsoft HTML help authoring tools available from the Microsoft website. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Define an Icon for a Symbol 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties. 3. On the Icons tab, set the options that you want. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Symbol Properties Command    

Defines properties for a symbol. These properties can include the following items: A special Help document for the symbol The types of handles the symbol displays Special custom macros that execute when you drag the symbol Custom behaviors that occur when you place the symbol in a document To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)

option.

See Also Symbol Properties Dialog Box (on page 511)

510

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring

Symbol Properties Dialog Box Allows you to create properties for a symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 511) Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 511) Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 513) General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514) Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514) Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514) Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 515)

Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to add attributes to a symbol.

Tab Options Name - Defines a name for the attribute. Type - Defines the type of data you can use in the Value box. Select either Text, Date, Number, Boolean or Money as the type of data displayed in the Value box. Value - Defines a default value for the attribute. Add - Adds the attribute. Modify - Writes the edits that you have completed for the Type and Value boxes and updates the list of attributes to reflect the changes. Remove - Clears the information displayed in the Name, Type, and Value boxes and removes the attribute. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) This tab only appears when you are editing a symbol file (.sym). It does not appear when you are inside a regular SmartSketch file (.igr).

Tab Options Label - Select this check box if you are creating a SmartLabel. Selecting Label enables the Graphics Fit to Text and Place leaderline options also located on this tab. See also SmartLabels. Mirror About Target Object - Allows the symbol to mirror about the element or object to which you are attaching the symbol. Glue to Target Object - Specifies that the symbol moves with the element or object to which it is attached. When this option is enabled, the glued symbol may be opened and modified; however, it cannot be broken down to its individual components until it is no longer glued (attached) to another element.

SmartSketch User's Guide

511

Symbol Authoring Align Parallel with Target Object - Ensures that the symbol aligns parallel to the element or object to which the symbol is being attached, no matter where you move the element or object. Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships that you apply to it. If the check box is cleared, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of the way you change its relationships. The check box is cleared by default. When you clear it, a symbol maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the related symbol or other elements. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.

If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as the underlined dimensional value indicates. When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships checkbox, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships applied to it. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships. Honor layer display - Allows you to turn on and off the display of layers in a symbol file. For example, if you create a symbol with multiple layers and enable the Honor layer display check box, you can turn on/off any layer so that the items on that layer will display/not display. Additionally, the layers are created (if they do not exist) in the file in which you place the symbol. Graphics Fit to Text - Allows you to define a symbol that stretches to fit the text height and width of a text box in the symbol, when you edit the text. This checkbox is available only when you select the Label checkbox. This checkbox only affects parametric symbols or symbols created with one closed shape that is a rectangle, circle, or ellipse. The parametric symbol must have two driving dimensions defined as parameters on the Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514). These parameters must be identified as TextHeight and TextWidth. Scale Handles - Specifies that the symbol has scale handles. You can drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol uniformly in the X and Y directions. Mirror Handles - Specifies that the symbol has mirror handles. You can drag the mirror handle across the mirror line in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol. Rotate Handles - Specifies that the symbol has rotate handles. You can drag this handle to rotate the entire symbol. Split Element on Drop - Allows a symbol to split elements on which you place the symbol. This behavior is intended primarily to split connectors when placing an inline symbol, but also will split most other elements. When a symbol is placed, the element is trimmed back to the range of the symbol. Place leaderline - Allows you to define a symbol that places a leaderline from the symbol to the object on which it is placed. Once the symbol is placed, you can use the options on the Leader ribbon (on page 246) to edit leader properties. A leaderline is only valid when the symbol contains a text object. In cases involving multiple text objects, the leaderline is attached to the

512

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring first text object created in the symbol. This checkbox is available only when you select the Label checkbox. Drop As - Defines the graphical output when you place a symbol in a document.  If you select Symbol, the symbol remains and behaves as a symbol when you place it in a document.  If you select Group, the symbol changes to a group of elements or objects when you place it in a document.  If you select Discrete Objects, the symbol is broken up into individual elements and objects that you can edit separately. Step Rotation - Determines the increment for rotating the symbol when you place it while pressing the Left and Right arrow keys on the keyboard. If you enter 0 in the box, you cannot rotate the symbol with the Left and Right arrow keys when you place the symbol in a document. Double-Click Label Position - Allows you to define a label's location when a user double-clicks a symbol to add a text label. For example, if you select the Top radio button, you can double click to add a text label above the symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Labels (on page 250)

Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to specify processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. The command can be a .DLL or .OCX file that you created. For example, if you create a symbol for a heat pump, you might want to place a Calculate Volume command on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu appears when you place the heat pump symbol in a document, select it, and click the right mouse button. The Calculate Volume command appears on the shortcut menu. When you click the Calculate Volume command, a Visual Basic program appears that allows you to calculate the volume of the heat pump.

Tab Options Name - Specifies the name of the process that appears on the shortcut menu. Programmatic identifier - Specifies which process is executed when a specific command is selected on the shortcut menu. Type the ProgID of registered files directly in the list box and press Apply. The ProgID is assigned when you create the .DLL or .OCX file. See the documentation for Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's. Add - Places the values specified in the Name and Programmatic identifier fields in the list of custom actions. Modify - Allows you to edit the Name and Programmatic identifier data associated with the selected custom action. Remove - Deletes the selected custom action from the list. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

513

Symbol Authoring General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Help File - Specifies a special Help file (.CHM) that you can use to display special information about the symbol that you create. For example, you could use a Help file to explain different ways to place a door symbol. Help Context - Defines a Help context identifier for calling a specific topic in a Help file. The Help file must be compiled with the Help context identifier mapped to the Help topic.   

To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option. For more information on mapping context IDs and creating compiled Help, see the Microsoft HTML help authoring tools available from the Microsoft website. Right-click a symbol that has a Help file attached, and then click Help on the shortcut menu to display its Help topic.

Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Defines the symbol icon that you see in the Windows Explorer or the Symbol Explorer. Automatic - Uses the elements and objects in the current document window to create the symbol. This is handy if you want to see what the symbol looks like without opening it. Use Active Sheet - Allows you to save the latest changes in the symbol document to the symbol icon. Use Bitmaps - Allows you to select a bitmap document to display as the symbol icon. You might want to assign the same icon to a group of symbols that you are creating. For example, you can assign your company logo to an entire library of symbols. Small - Displays a small icon. Large - Displays a large icon. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Automatically displays all the dimensions in the symbol document. You can use this tab to create symbols that fit to text. You can also use this tab to define drag handles for resizing when you place the symbol in a document. The information that appears in the Value and Symbol Parameter columns also appears in the Value and Name columns of the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer displays this information when you place or select a symbol in a document. Name - Displays the name of the dimension or variable that you selected in the table. You can select a row in the table by clicking the row. If you want to see which dimension in the symbol corresponds to the row that you have selected, you can move the dialog box to one side of the document window. The corresponding dimension is highlighted in red. Symbol Parameter - Displays the parameter that you assign to the dimension. To assign the symbol parameter, you must first click a row in the table. You can then type in your own name for a symbol parameter or select one from the dropdown list. If you want to create a symbol with parametric handles for resizing the symbol, you must assign the following symbol parameters to dimensions in the symbol document: Top, Bottom, Right, and Left.

514

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring Driven dimensions cannot have parametric attributes or parametric handles for resizing the symbol. Driven dimensions appear grayed out. You cannot select a driven dimension in the table. Name Column - Displays the name of a dimensional value in the symbol document. Value Column - Displays a dimensional value or variable in the symbol document. Formula Column - Displays a formula for calculating the dimensional value. Symbol Parameter Column - Displays the name of the parameter that you assigned in the Symbol Parameter box below the table. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define processes that can execute when you place a symbol in a document and then perform actions on that symbol, such as dropping it (during placement), double-clicking it, or clicking the Properties command on the Edit menu. Type the ProgID directly in the appropriate Programmatic identifier text box and click Apply. The ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the documentation for Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's.

Tab Options On drop - Specifies a process that executes when you drag a symbol in a document. On double-click - Specifies a process that executes when you double-click a symbol in a document. On property change - Specifies a process that executes when you select a symbol in a document and click the Properties command on the Edit menu. You might want to select this and display a Properties dialog box that you created, rather than the one that is delivered with the software. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document Before you begin, you must create a symbol document that contains all the different elements that you would want to show up as several different versions of the same symbol. For example, if you want a symbol to appear as either a box, triangle, or circle, you must draw the box, triangle, or circle in the document and create a symbol. You can add new elements and further modify the symbol at any time during the next steps. You cannot include the same element in different representations. You must create a copy of that element in the document to allow it to appear in different representations. 1. Click File > Open to open a symbol document (.sym). 2. Select two or more elements that you want to show up as a representation of the symbol. You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group. 3. On the Change toolbar, click Group

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

515

Symbol Authoring You cannot place one element in more than one group. To include the same element in different representations, you must copy the element and include it in a different group. 4. Define a separate group for each representation that you want to save in the symbol document.

You can create the representation more easily if you keep each group in a separate section of the document at this point in the procedure. Do not allow the groups to overlap. You can define a common origin for all the groups later in the procedure. 5. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Representation . 6. Select a group that you want to appear in the representation. The name of the group automatically appears in the Group Name box on the Define Symbol Representation dialog box. This name is automatically generated by the software. 7. In the Representation Name box, type a name. The name you enter appears as a command on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol in a document. 8. Click the Add button to enter the name in the table. The order in which the names appear in the table is the order in which the commands appear on the shortcut menu. For example, if you enter the following names in the table in the following order, that is the order in which they will appear on the shortcut menu for the symbol: Representation Name

Group Name

Flanged Globe

Group 235

Screwed Globe

Group 236

Bell Spigot Globe

Group 237

Welded Globe

Group 238

Soldered Globe

Group 239

9. Repeat these steps for each representation that you want to appear on the shortcut menu. 10. Select each group and move it to a position that is on top of the other groups. You should position each group so that they share a common origin. You can adjust the symbol origin by clicking Symbol Origin Authoring Tools toolbar.

516

on the Symbol

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring 11. Click OK to close the Define Symbol Representation dialog box and return to your SmartSketch drawing. 12. Click File > Save. You should close the symbol document before dragging and dropping the symbol into a document. 

After saving the symbol, you should test the different representations that you defined. Close the symbol. Drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer into a new document. Select the symbol and click the right mouse button. Make sure that the names of the representations appear on the shortcut menu.



You can change the name of a group by clicking a row in the table, entering a new name in the Group Name box, and clicking the Modify button. You can insert or delete names from the table at any time. The group name listed first in the table is the default thumbnail for the symbol.

 

To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Symbol Representation Command Defines different representations of the same symbol within one symbol document (.sym). The names of the representations that you define appear on the shortcut menu for the symbol when you drag the symbol into a document. When you click the name of the representation, the symbol changes to display the elements that you included in the representation. For example, you can define different representations of a valve with different types of actuators. When you drag the symbol into the document, you can choose which valve that you want to display from the shortcut menu.

To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box (on page 518)

SmartSketch User's Guide

517

Symbol Authoring

Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box Allows you to define several different representations of a symbol in one symbol document. For example, you might want to place a valve symbol. But you might want the actuator on the valve to display in several different positions. Rather than create several different symbols, you can define representations of the same symbol with the actuator appearing in different representations. After you place the symbol in a document, you could choose the representation that you want. You can choose it by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the representation name from the shortcut menu. The position of the actuator changes based on the representation that you selected. You must define a group in the symbol document before you can use this dialog box.

Dialog Box Options Representation name Column - Displays the name of the representation that you entered in the Name box below. You must select a group in the document, enter a name in the Name box, and then click the Add button. Group name Column - Displays the name of the group. The software automatically assigns the name. You cannot change this value. Representation name Box - Allows you to enter the name that you want for the representation. You must select a group in the document before you can enter a name for the group in the Name box. This is the name of the representation that appears on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol in a document. Group name Box - Displays the name of the group that you selected in the symbol document. The software automatically assigns the name of the group. You cannot change this value. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Redefine the Origin of a Symbol 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Origin . 3. Click a point to redefine the origin of the symbol. The symbol origin is the point that the mouse cursor uses to drag the symbol into a document. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Symbol Origin Command Defines the origin of the symbol that you are creating. The origin of the symbol is the point that the mouse cursor uses to place the symbol in a document. When you click Symbol Origin, the symbol origin appears where it was originally placed. You can then click any position or key point on an element to define the origin. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

518

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring

Managing Text in Symbols You can add text to symbols by creating text boxes and balloons, placing text labels, or creating SmartLabels with SmartText. SmartText defines the text attributes for the symbol. The Edit SmartText command is used to define the contents of a SmartLabel that is associated to attribute names and values. One or more attribute names can be associated to a label. The values of the attributes can be predefined or the values can remain null. When a SmartLabel containing attribute values is dragged and dropped on to a symbol, the attribute names and values in the SmartLabel are loaded on the symbol. When a SmartLabel that contains null values is dragged and dropped on a symbol that has the same attribute name(s), the values are read from the target symbol and displayed in the SmartLabel during placement. In the following example, a SmartLabel has been created and associated with a "code" attribute. Notice that no value for the attribute is defined in the SmartLabel:

Consequently, when the SmartLabel is dropped on a symbol that contains the same attribute with a value defined, the symbol's "code" is displayed:

Although users can then edit the values of the text attributes in the Attribute Viewer, they cannot change the names of the attributes. ot all labels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some labels contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the label. These are called text-driven symbols. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

519

Symbol Authoring

Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart Label To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option. 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. Delete existing graphics unless you want the graphics displayed with the SmartLabel. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Edit SmartText . 3. In the Property box, enter the attribute information that you want the SmartLabel to display. 



The property specifies the attribute name of the object that you want to label such as Name, Code, Class, Manufacturer, Cost, Location, or Description; consequently, the information in the Property box must match the symbol's attribute Name field. Symbol attributes are displayed in the Attribute Viewer:

4. Enter the information that you want in the Value box. The values of the attributes can be predefined, or the values can remain null. When a SmartLabel containing attribute values is dragged and dropped on to a symbol, the attribute names and defined values in the SmartLabel are loaded on the symbol. Conversely, when a SmartLabel that contains null values is dragged and dropped on a symbol that has the same attribute name(s), the values are read from the target symbol and displayed in the SmartLabel during placement 5. Select or type the format that you want in the Format box. The format can be any format supported by Visual Basic. The format type you specify must match the format type of the 6. Click Insert Field. The information displays in the Existing text box. 7. Repeat steps 3-6 to define additional attributes for the SmartLabel to display. 8. When finished, click OK to return to the SmartSketch document. 9. Select Symbol Properties on the Symbol Authoring toolbar. 10. On the Behaviors tab of the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the Label and Glue to Target Object check boxes and then click OK. 11. Save and close the symbol file.

520

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring You can test the SmartLabel by dragging it from the Symbol Explorer and dropping it on a symbol or object.   

The SmartLabel placed on the object displays the attribute values that are already assigned to the object. If the object does not have attribute values, the default value displays. The Font button in the SmartText Editor dialog box determines the format of the characters that you want to appear in the SmartLabel. If you want to remove a field, you can either select and edit the field in the SmartText Editor box and press Delete or select the label text on the symbol and delete it. You can also edit label text directly on the symbol or redefine the fields in the SmartText Editor box. You cannot select individual characters between the angle brackets of the SmartText field. You can select only the entire field.

Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. Double-click a label in the symbol. 3. Type the text that you want and press Enter. If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you can edit the label by selecting it and making the necessary changes. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Create a Leader for a SmartText Label 1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader . 2. Click the SmartText Label to place the annotation end of the leader. 3. Click any element to place the terminator end of the leader, or click in free space.  



You can place either end of a leader first. After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the annotation end of the leader to a SmartText Label, the command then allows you to select only elements that are valid for placing the terminator end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another SmartText Label. If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)

option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

521

Symbol Authoring

Define a Text-Driven Symbol To create a symbol that resizes to fit any text, you must take the following steps in the order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.

For a Symbol with a Circle, Rectangle, or Ellipse 1. In a symbol document, draw a rectangle, circle, or ellipse.   

On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center. On the Info tab, set Vertical in the Text Alignment group to Center. On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center.

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button 3. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox. 4. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.

.

For a Parametric Symbol 1. Create a parametric symbol (on page 506) While creating the parametric symbol, you must identify two primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth. 2. Open the new symbol document that you just created. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box 4. Click the center of the symbol to place a text box. 5. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool and select the text box. 6. Click Edit > Properties. 7. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional flow for text if you add characters to the text box. You can specify the direction by the options that you click. For example, if you want the text in the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of the element, you can set the following options:  On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center.  On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center.  On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center. 8. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button 9. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox. 10. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.

.

If you want to create a symbol that has text associated to attributes, you can define a SmartLabel that contains SmartText for the symbol. SmartLabels that contain SmartText are associated with text attributes for the symbol. When you attach a symbol with a SmartLabel to an element or object in a document, the symbol attributes assume the values of the element attributes. If the element or object does not have attributes, then the element or object assumes the attributes on the symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

522

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring

Edit SmartText Command Defines the contents of a SmartLabel. SmartLabels are associated to an object's attributes and displays those attributes as text in the document. You can drag and drop SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the current document. If the object has values assigned to its attributes, the SmartLabel displays those values. However, if you drag and drop a SmartLabel on an object that has no attributes, the object picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you want to assign attributes to a valve, such as pressure and material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and material type defined and the object does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material type are copied to the valve. For more information, see SmartText Editor Dialog Box (on page 523). To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartText Editor Dialog Box Places and edits SmartText in a symbol. When you create SmartText in a symbol, you are defining the text attributes for the symbol. When the symbol is placed in a document, you can edit the values of the attributes in the Attribute Viewer. SmartText is typically used to create a SmartLabel.

Dialog Box Options Existing text - Specifies the text that appears in the SmartLabel. You can type in plain text or enter a field by defining information in the Item, Property, Value, and Format boxes. Font - Determines the format of the characters that you want to appear in the SmartLabel. You can define such things as font, font style, and font size. For example, you can select Arial Bold. Item - Defines the type of object to which the SmartLabel is associated. Property - Names the attribute of the object that you want to label such as Manufacturer, Cost, or Location. The name you enter in the Property field must match the name of the attribute you want the SmartLabel to display. You can use the Attribute Viewer to view object attributes. Value - Identifies the value of the property based on what appears in the Format box. The values of attributes can be predefined, or the values can remain null. Format - Identifies the format of the object attribute specified in the Property field. For example, if you entered a text attribute, such as Cost, the logical format is String (that is, text=string). The format is any format supported by Visual Basic. Insert Field - Enters the information that you specified in the Property, Value, and Format boxes into the SmartText Editor box. If you want to remove a field, you must select the field in the SmartText Editor box and press Delete. Then you can define a new field. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

523

Symbol Authoring

Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields The following workflow shows you how to create a symbol containing a SmartLabel with SmartText fields that display the values of symbol attributes in SmartSketch. This workflow can be broken down into three main processes: 1. Create a symbol containing the attributes to display. 2. Create a SmartLabel and edit the SmartText fields to obtain values from the symbol attributes. 3. Combine the symbol and the SmartLabel into a single, wrapper symbol that can be placed into a drawing file, which is then dissolved, leaving the original symbol and SmartLabel in the drawing file. The steps required to complete each of the three sections are listed below. Example symbols and attributes are provided so that you can work through the processes.

Create the Symbol with Attributes 1. Draw the graphics for the symbol. You can draw your own symbol or use a pre-existing symbol delivered with SmartSketch. The figure below represents a tank.

2. Select the graphics, and then click Create Symbol

524

from the Draw toolbar.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring 3. Define the symbol origin.

4. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name, and then click Save. For this example, use the name Inner_Graphics.sym. This is the name of the symbol instance when the SmartSymbol is placed as a discrete object. SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer. Make sure you are looking in the correct file location. 5. Click the Inner_Graphics symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar area to open the symbol file for editing. 6. Click Tools > Add-Ins > Symbol Authoring Tools.

SmartSketch displays the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. 7. Click Symbol Properties on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. 8. Click the Attributes tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box, and then enter the attribute values for the following fields:  Name - Specifies the name of the attribute to show in the Attribute Viewer.  Type - Defines the type of attribute.  Value - Specifies the default value for the attribute

SmartSketch User's Guide

525

Symbol Authoring 9. Click Add after you enter each value, and then click OK to close the Symbol Properties dialog box. For this example, enter the following two attributes: Attribute A  Name - Tag Prefix  Type - Text  Value - ? Attribute B  Name - Tag Number  Type - Number  Value - 1 10. Click Save to save the symbol attributes, and then close the symbol file. 11. Select the original graphics you drew to create the tank, and then press DELETE. Now you are ready to create a SmartLabel to display the symbol attributes you just added.

Create a SmartLabel Containing SmartText 1. Click Text Box

and type in your text. In the example, type in A-B in the text box.

2. Select the text box you created, and then click Create Symbol from the Draw toolbar. 3. Define the symbol origin. 4. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name. For this example, use the name Inner_SmartLabel.sym. SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer. 5. Click the Inner_SmartLabel symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar area to open the symbol file for editing.

6. With the text box selected, click Paragraph Alignment alignment. For this example, select Center.

, and then select the text

7. Click Edit SmartText on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. 8. Highlight the A in the SmartText Editor dialog box, and then set the Property, Format, and Value fields for the attribute to display. For the example attribute A, enter the following:  Property - Tag Prefix  Value - ?  Format - String 9. Click Insert Field after entering the above fields for Attribute A. 10. Now highlight the B in the SmartText Editor dialog box, and then set the Property, Format, and Value fields for the attribute to display. For the example attribute B, enter the following:

526

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring  Property - Tag Number  Value - 1  Format - General Number 11. Click Insert Field after entering the above fields for Attribute B, and then click OK. SmartSketch shows the values for A and B in the symbol.

12. To create the label, click Symbol Properties on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, and then click the Behaviors tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box. 13. Click Label and Glue to target object options, and then click OK.

14. Click Save , and then close the file. 15. Select the original text box in the SmartSketch document, and then press DELETE.

Create the Wrapper Symbol for Placement into SmartSketch 1. Select Inner_Graphics.sym, representing the tank, from the Symbol Explorer, and then drag it into the document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

527

Symbol Authoring 2. Select Inner_SmartLabel.sym from the Symbol Explorer, drag it into the document, and then attach it to the Inner_Graphics symbol.

You can check the SmartLabel by changing the attribute values in the Attribute Viewer. The value of the text changes in the document. 3. Select both symbols, and then click Create Symbol 4. Define the origin.

from the Draw toolbar.

5. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name, and then click Save. For this example, type the name Wrapper.sym. SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer. 6. Click the Wrapper symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar area to open the file for editing. 7. Click Symbol Properties on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. 8. Click the Behaviors tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box.

528

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring 9. Set the Drop as field to Discrete Objects, and then click OK. This behavior causes the wrapper symbol to be removed on placement, leaving the individual objects (symbol and SmartLabel) in the drawing file so they can be selected and edited separately. 10. Click Save , and then close the file. 11. Select the original graphics, and then press DELETE. You can now use this symbol in your work to modify and display symbol attribute values.

Integrating Programs with Your Symbol You can kick off special processes from your symbol when a user performs an particular action, such as double-clicking the symbol, dragging it, or even modifying the symbol. The special process can be a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file that you created in other programming software. You can select an action from the Standard Actions tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box. You can also specify special processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. You define these processes on the Custom Actions tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Add Symbol Commands Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in the following directory: :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\CustomActions\. 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button . 3. On the Custom Actions tab in the Name box, type the command name that you want to appear on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu appears when you select the symbol in a document and then right click. 4. In the Command box, select the name and path of the .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file. This command runs when you place a symbol and select the command on the shortcut menu. You can also add commands to the shortcut menu by setting options on the Standard Actions tab. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

529

Symbol Authoring

Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in one of the following directories, depending on what action that you want to use to start the executable file. For example, if you want a special process to run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must place the executable file in the DropActions subdirectory.  :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\DoubleClickActions  :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\DropActions  :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\ModifyActions  :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\PropertyActions  :\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\RightClickActions 1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties . 3. On the Standard Actions tab, select the options that you want. For example, if you want a special process to run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must enter the ProgID directly in the On Drop box. The ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the documentation for Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's. If you want to create special commands for the shortcut menu that appear when you select the symbol in a document, you can set options on the Custom Actions tab. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring option.

Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols Symbols are actually groups of graphic elements with defined behaviors and properties that are saved in an .sym document. You can enhance a symbol's display and performance during symbol design and creation. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol. This gives the appearance that the underlying lines have been broken at the edges of the symbol. In reality, the lines still exist beneath the symbol. You can apply a fill to any closed boundary. Placing many fills in a document can significantly increase the size of the document. A single fill can be used for the symbol by filling an area that represents the outer edges of the symbol and displaying the detailed graphic linework on top of the fill. The blank color can be used with any graphic object besides fill, so experiment and you might find other uses for this masking capability. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

530

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring

Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking Before you begin, create a symbol with the outermost elements on a separate layer. If the symbol has already been drawn, just select the elements that form the outer edges of the symbol and move the select set to a new layer named Boundary. 1. Turn off all other layers in the symbol document, except the layer containing the boundary of the symbol. 2. Create a layer named Fill. This helps to organize the elements that make up a symbol. 3. With the Fill layer active and the Boundary layer displayed, click the Fill button on the Draw toolbar. 4. On the Fill ribbon bar, change the style to Solid, and then select the blank color from the pallet. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9.

The blank color is located in the lower right corner of the standard color pallet. Click inside the bounding line elements to place the solid blank colored fill. You can see the blank fill when grid display is turned on. Click to select the fill. With the fill selected, click the Send To Back button on the Change toolbar. This pushes the blank fill to the back of the symbol and allows the detailed elements that make up the interior of a symbol to display on top of the blank fill. Turn on the display of the other layers containing interior graphics. Save the symbol. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)

option.

Defining SmartPoints SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol. Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect points in free space on any part of the document or on an element. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Define SmartPoints for a Symbol 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties . All the SmartPoints appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, set the properties for the SmartPoint. 4. Click Insert. 5. In the document, click to place the SmartPoint. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Defining SmartPoints (on page 531) Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol (on page 533) SmartPoint Properties Command (on page 533)

SmartSketch User's Guide

531

Symbol Authoring

Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties

.

Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Connect point check box. 4. In the Connect point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the connector should attach to the SmartPoint. 5. 6. 7. 8.

You can also type a value in the Connect point angles box. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you attach a connector to the SmartPoint on the symbol. Click Insert. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint. Click Apply. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)

option.

Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties

.

Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drag point check box. 4. In the Drag point order box, type a number to define the drag point order for the SmartPoint. 5. Click Insert. 6. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint. 7. Click Apply. 8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to place additional SmartPoints with drag point attributes. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring option.

Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties

.

Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drop point check box. 4. In the Drop point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the symbol should attach to another object. You can also type a value in the Drop point angles box. 5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you attach an object to the SmartPoint on the symbol. 6. Click Insert. 7. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint.

532

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring 8. Click Apply. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol 1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoint Properties

.

Any existing SmartPoints appear in the document. 3. In the document, click a SmartPoint. The SmartPoint's properties display on the SmartPoint Properties dialog box. 4. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, modify the properties for the SmartPoint as desired. 5. Click Apply. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartPoint Properties Command Places SmartPoints on a symbol. SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol.

Connect point attribute Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect points in free space on any part of the document or on an element. You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.

Drag point attribute A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging a symbol. This attribute, when combined with the drop point attribute, allows precise attachment between symbols.

Drop point attribute Drop points allow for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

533

Symbol Authoring

SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box Behaviors Tab Connect point - Assigns the connect point attribute to the SmartPoint. Connect point angles - Defines the angle at which the connector line attaches to the connect point on the symbol. Connect point ToolTip - Specifies the ToolTip that appears when you attach a connector to a connect point on the symbol. Drop point - Assigns the drop point attribute to the SmartPoint. Drop point angles - Defines the angle at which a dropped symbol attaches to the SmartPoint on the symbol. Drop point ToolTip - Allows you to define the ToolTip that appears on the drop point of the symbol when you place it. You can use a drop point when you are placing a symbol on another symbol. The ToolTip is useful for quickly displaying important information that you want a user to know about the symbol. For example, you could define a ToolTip for a network card symbol that displays the words Network Card. If you attempt to drop the network card symbol near a hub symbol, the ToolTip appears as a visual reminder of the type of symbol that you are placing. In drawing network diagrams, you do not want to connect a network card symbol to a hub symbol. Drag point - Assigns the drag point attribute to the SmartPoint. Drag point order - Allows you to define the order that the drag points attach to the pointer when you drag the symbol. You can cycle through the drag points when dragging the symbol by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys on the keyboard.

Information and Format Tab Style - Sets the style of the SmartPoint. Color - Sets the color of the SmartPoint. Width - Sets the size of the SmartPoint. Layer - Sets the layer where the SmartPoint displays. X - Specifies the x dimension of the SmartPoint. Y - Specifies the y dimension of the SmartPoint. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Symbol Lookup Tables Symbol lookup tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol using import data from a spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data source. Lookup tables are ideal for use with Ortho and Structural content. These imported values save time, allowing you to use a single key column to specify numerous attribute and parameter values for a symbol. The Lookup Table command takes a snapshot of the specified data source and generates an .xml file containing the information in the data source. When you have generated the .xml file containing the data, you can select a particular set of values for the selected symbols from a combo box in the Attribute Viewer. This combo box contains the list of values in the key column defined in the data source.

534

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

Set Up an ODBC Data Source 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. On Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools. On Administrative Tools, double-click Data Sources (ODBC). On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click the User DSN tab or the System DSN tab, depending on the type of data source you want to use. Refer to Microsoft Windows Help for more details on the different types of data sources. Click Add. On the Create New Data Source dialog box, select a driver for the data source. Click Finish. The system displays the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box. Enter the necessary information on the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box.

The ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box contains different settings for each driver type. 9. On the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving the changes. 10. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring option.

Generate a Lookup Table 1. Set up an ODBC Data Source (on page 535). 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In SmartSketch, on the Symbol Authoring toolbar, click Lookup Table . Select the option that you want from the Data Source list. Select the option that you want in the Table list. Drag columns from the Table list to the Driven By column in the Data Map. Double-click an entry in the Driven By column to specify it as the unique Key Column. Click OK. Click Save. The software writes the contents of the selected table into an .xml file. Each entry in the Key Column list must be unique. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)

option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

535

Symbol Authoring

Lookup Table Command Imports data from an open database connectivity (ODBC) data source to drive values for symbol parameters and attributes. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

See Also Lookup Table Dialog Box (on page 536)

Lookup Table Dialog Box Allows you to assign data sources and tables to use with the Lookup Tables command, to save information to an .xml file, and to open existing .xml files for editing.

Select Data Source - Specifies the open database connectivity (ODBC) Data Source. Select a Table - Specifies the table from the ODBC Data Source. Data Map - Specifies the parameters and attributes to use for the symbol. Attribute/parameter - Lists the attributes and parameters for the symbol. Driven by - Displays the column from the data source that drives an attribute or parameter. Drag columns to Driven by - Lists the columns in the specified table. You can drag these column names to the Driven by column in the Data map. Define Key - Defines the unique Key Column used to differentiate among the various symbol parameter sets. Clear Column - Deletes the selected value in the Driven by column. Open - Opens an existing .xml file and displays the information in the Lookup Table dialog box for editing. Save As... - Saves the information from the data source to a new .xml file.

536

SmartSketch User's Guide

Symbol Authoring OK - Saves the information from the data source to an .xml file. Cancel - Closes the Lookup Table dialog box without saving the information. Help - Displays Help for the dialog box. To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

537

Symbol Authoring

538

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 19

Using the Internet You can view the World Wide Web from within SmartSketch with a special tool called the Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer is available only if you have installed Internet Explorer 5.0 or later. After you click the Symbol Explorer icon on the Main toolbar, the Symbol Explorer appears on the right of document window. You can type the URL or directory path of an HTML page in the Address Box and press Enter to view the HTML page.

See Also Hyperlinks (on page 539) Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer (on page 539)

Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer 1. In the Internet Explorer, click File > Open. 2. On the Open dialog box, browse to and select the document that you want to open inside the Internet Explorer. Because SmartSketch is an ActiveX document, its toolbars and menus appear inside the Internet Explorer, along with the contents of the document that you selected. You can also drag a SmartSketch document from the Windows Explorer to the Internet Explorer. The document automatically opens inside the Explorer.

Hyperlinks You may want to link an element or object in a document to other documents, such as a web page. The Hyperlink command on the Main toolbar is used to create, edit, and follow hyperlink addresses attached to objects in a document. You can also click Insert > Hyperlink to activate the Hyperlinks command.

See Also Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Delete a Hyperlink (on page 541)

Insert a Hyperlink 1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink You can also click Insert > Hyperlink. 2. Click the object or element to insert a hyperlink and to display the Add Hyperlink dialog box. 3. Click the Source field and type the URL or directory path of a HTML page. 

You can also link to files on the intranet or your computer. For example, you can type the following path: D:\MYFILE.htm.

SmartSketch User's Guide

539

Using the Internet 

You can also click the Browse button to open the Link to File dialog box and navigate to the file you wish to link. 4. Click Add. By default, SmartSketch inserts the URL or filename in the Name field. If you link to a SmartSketch document which contains multiple sheets, you are prompted to select which sheet to link to. 5. Click the Name field and type a logical hyperlink name, if desired. 6. Click the Set as default link check box to identify this link as the default link for the object. 7. Click OK to accept the hyperlink.   

  

To stop the Hyperlink command, press Esc. You cannot add hyperlinks to elements contained in nested symbols. While in the Add Hyperlink dialog box, repeat steps 3 through 6 to add any number of hyperlinks, URL addresses, or file paths to an element or object. If you add more than one hyperlink, you must choose a link as the default. Right click on any drawing object to display a list of associated hyperlinks. The text which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object.

See Also Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Hyperlinks (on page 539)

Hyperlink Command Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. You can enter a link to a file or a web page on the Internet.

See Also Hyperlinks (on page 539) Delete a Hyperlink (on page 541) Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Insert a Hyperlink (on page 539)

Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Inserts a hyperlink to a selected object, symbol, text, connector, or element. Source - Specifies the URL or directory path of a HTML page. (http://. . . ) for the hyperlink. (Browse) - Opens the Link to File dialog box. From here you can navigate to the file you wish to link. Add - Adds the hyperlink to the selected object. Name - Specifies a logical name for the hyperlink. The text which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object. Set as default hyperlink - Identifies the link as the default link for the object. OK - Closes the dialog box and saves the hyperlink. Cancel - Closes the dialog box without saving the hyperlink.

540

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Internet See Also Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Hyperlinks (on page 539)

Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Removes hyperlinks from objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. To see the shortcut menu, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then right-click.

See Also Hyperlinks (on page 539) Delete a Hyperlink (on page 541) Follow a Hyperlink (on page 542)

Delete a Hyperlink 1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink

.

You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command. 2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. 3. 4. 5. 6.

The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. On the shortcut menu, click Remove Link. On the Select Link To Remove dialog box, click the hyperlink that you want to remove. Click Remove. In the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box, click the OK button.

The Select Link to Remove dialog box only displays if an object has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box displays after you select Remove Link from the shortcut menu.

See Also Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Hyperlinks (on page 539) Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 541)

Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Allows you to open the web page or file at which the hyperlink is pointing. To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then right-click.

See Also Delete a Hyperlink (on page 541) Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Follow a Hyperlink (on page 542) Insert a Hyperlink (on page 539)

SmartSketch User's Guide

541

Using the Internet

Follow a Hyperlink 1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink

.



You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command.  Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. A tooltip displays the name of the default link.  The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. You can also click Show Links on the shortcut menu. All the elements or objects with hyperlinks highlight. 2. Click the left mouse button to follow the hyperlink. 



When an object has more than one hyperlink, the default hyperlink can be set via the Set as default link check box. If you do not select a default hyperlink, SmartSketch uses the first hyperlink assigned to the object as the default. If the hyperlink points to a SmartSketch document, then SmartSketch opens the document. The browser opens all other documents.

See Also Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 541) Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Hyperlinks (on page 539)

Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu) Displays all the hyperlinks in a document. When you click this command, all the elements or objects that have a hyperlink are highlighted. To access this command, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then right-click.

See Also Hyperlinks (on page 539) Follow a Hyperlink (on page 542) Insert a Hyperlink (on page 539)

542

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Internet

Edit a Hyperlink 1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command. 2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. 3. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Link.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Right-click to display the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu, you can also use Add Link, Edit Link, and Remove Link to modify the hyperlink. On the Select Link To Edit dialog box, click the hyperlink to edit. Click Edit. On the Edit Hyperlink dialog box, click either the Source or the Name field and type your changes to the hyperlink. Click the Make default link check box to identify this hyperlink as the default link for the drawing object. Click OK.

The Select Link to Edit dialog box only displays when an object has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Edit Hyperlink dialog box displays after you click Edit Link.

See Also Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 543) Hyperlink Command (on page 540) Hyperlinks (on page 539)

Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Allows you to change the web addresses or paths for hyperlinks that are applied to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then right-click.

See Also Hyperlinks (on page 539) Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543) Follow a Hyperlink (on page 542) Insert a Hyperlink (on page 539)

SmartSketch User's Guide

543

Using the Internet

544

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 20

Working with Raster Images Images created by lines of pixels are called raster images, and the code that represents the pixels in the raster image is called raster data. The format of the raster data in the document determines how the pixels are arranged when the image is displayed. Raster data is unintelligent. A line segment in a raster image cannot be manipulated as a line segment. Rather, it must be manipulated as the collection of pixels that form the line segment. A vector data document is a collection of coherent, geometric elements. Vector data is intelligent. A line segment in a vector file can be manipulated as a line segment. A vector data object is an indivisible entity. A raster image, by contrast, is composed of pixels, arranged to give the appearance of lines, shapes, and characters. When zoomed out, a raster image appears as contiguous lines and shapes. However, if you zoom in, it becomes apparent that a raster image consists of individual foreground pixels, represented as small squares on the screen.

Displaying Raster Images Image Integrator allows you to display and manipulate raster images along with the vector data on the drawing sheet. When you save the current document, which contains vector graphics, you can save a link to a raster image along with it. This structure can be useful in many ways. For example, if a shopping center is planned for a piece of property, and proposals are sought for the design of the shopping center, an aerial photograph may be taken of the property. The photograph can then be converted into a raster image. Proposals can be submitted as vector documents that each contain a link to the original raster image. In this way, different proposals for the shopping center can be easily evaluated, with each proposal starting from the same raster image of the property.

Inserting an Image To insert a raster image, you must first install Image Integrator using Add-Ins on the Tools menu. If you do not see the add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Custom setup to install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option. After installing Image Integrator, you can then insert the raster image using the Image command on the Insert menu. You can only link the image; you cannot embed it. To edit various properties of the image border, you can select the image and click Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also insert raster images, edit their properties, and make other modifications using the commands on the Image Integrator ribbon.

Positioning an Image After you insert a raster image into a document, you can use Position to align the image with a vector element or a group of elements. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single click on the source image. To use Position, select an image and then click Position on the Image Integrator toolbar.

SmartSketch User's Guide

545

Working with Raster Images Defining Source and Target Points by Clicking and Dragging Clicking and dragging (on the image border or within the borders) allows you to drag the image frame to the needed target location. When the image is released the source image will reposition, and display a crosshair, representing the location of the first source point. A second point will be required on the source image to reposition (rotate and/or scale) the image. Click and drag on (or within) the image border, move to the needed location and release. The source image will be repositioned, scaled, and rotated about the two points. The location where the source image is released represents the corresponding target points. These target points can be another image file, a vector element, or nothing at all. The source image will be skewed about the two points.

Defining Source and Target Points Using a Single Click When you define source points using single clicks, you must also use single clicks to define the target points. Depending on where the source and target points are placed, you can use this method to move, scale, rotate, and skew the source image to match a target image.

See Also Insert a Raster Image (on page 546) Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image (on page 551) Fill an Image Area with Color (on page 553) Save Changes to a Linked Image (on page 547) Redo Changes to Images (on page 548) Invert Colors in an Image (on page 553)

Insert a Raster Image 1. Click Insert > Image. 2. In the Look In field, select the directory containing the raster image you want to insert. 3. In the File Name field, type the name of the raster image or select it from the list of raster images. You can narrow the list of available raster files by selecting the file type(s) from the list. 4. The image frame will dynamically attach to the mouse cursor. You can position the frame and click to place the image at a 1:1 scale. Click and drag to place the image at a user-defined scale.  

All inserted images are "linked". Embedded images are not allowed. You can also insert a raster image using the Insert Image command on the Image Integrator toolbar. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator option.

See Also Image Command (on page 547)

546

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images

Image Command Places a raster image into your document. This command is available on the Insert menu and on the Image Integrator toolbar. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator option.

Save Changes to a Linked Image When you make changes to a linked raster image, the software does not save changes to the image source file when you save your document. If you want to save changes to the image source file, you must use the Save Selected Image(s) command on the Image Integrator toolbar. 1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images that you want to save. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Save Selected Image(s)   

.

The software saves changes to the source files for the selected images. Once you save changes to the image source file, you cannot undo them. The software saves changes to the source files for the selected images. Once you save changes to the image source file, you cannot undo them. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Save Selected Image(s) Command Saves changes you make to the raster image in the image source file. You can select multiple images and then use this command to save changes to all their source files. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Undo Changes to Images To undo the most recent reversible change made to the image, click Image Undo Image Integrator toolbar.

on the

The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Undo Command (on page 548)

SmartSketch User's Guide

547

Working with Raster Images

Image Undo Command Reverses the last change made to the raster image. The Image Undo command reverses or purge raster data edits and raster transformations. The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Redo Command (on page 548) Redo Changes to Images (on page 548)

Redo Changes to Images 

To reverse the most recent Undo change to a raster image, click Image Redo Image Integrator toolbar.

 

The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent Image Undo action. The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo command.

on the

To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Image Redo Command Reverses the last change most recent undo command. The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent change that was reversed. The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo command. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Undo Command (on page 548) Redo Changes to Images (on page 548)

Select a Rectangular Area of an Image 1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select area. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Rectangular Select Area

.

To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option. 3. Drag to define the rectangular select area on the image. When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. You can use the Alt, Shift, and Space Bar keys to modify the default behavior of the Rectangular Select Area command. 4. Release the mouse button to end the rectangular select area. When you complete the rectangle, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted outline.

548

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier

Result

Shift

Constrains the select area to a square with the same aspect ratio.

Alt

Adds a new area to an existing select area (union).

Space Bar

Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference).

Space Bar + Alt

Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection).

Shift + Alt

Constrains the select area to a square and adds a new area to the existing select area.

Shift + Space Bar

Constrains the select area to a square and subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area.

Shift + Space Bar + Alt

Constrains the select area to a square and designates the overlapping area as a new select area.

Rectangular Select Area Command Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a rectangle around pixels that you define. A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes. When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the desired size, release the mouse button to create the select area. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline. As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier

Result

Shift

Constrains the select area to a square with the same aspect ratio.

Alt

Adds a new area to an existing select area (union).

Space Bar

Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference).

Space Bar + Alt

Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection).

Shift + Alt

Constrains the select area to a square and adds a new area to the existing select area.

SmartSketch User's Guide

549

Working with Raster Images Shift + Space Bar

Constrains the select area to a square and subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area.

Shift + Space Bar + Alt

Constrains the select area to a square and designates the overlapping area as a new select area.

To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551)

Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image 1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select area. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Polygonal Select Area . To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option. 3. Click to define the first point of the polygon select area. When you select the first point, a dynamically drawn solid line connects the first point to the cursor. 4. Click to define additional points to define the shape of the polygon select area. As you define additional points, the software dynamically displays a solid outline of the polygon. 

While drawing a polygon-shaped select area, you can back up a point at a time using the Backspace key. When you press the Backspace key, the last line segment in the solid outline is deleted, and you can continue creating the select area from the previous point. You can continue pressing the Backspace key until you are at an appropriate point to begin defining the polygon again.  You can also use the Alt and space bar keys to modify the default behavior of the Polygonal Select Area command. 5. Right-click to end the polygon. When you complete the polygon, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted outline. 



As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier

Result

Alt

Adds a new area to an existing select area (union).

Space Bar

Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference).

Space Bar + Alt

Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection).

The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command.

See Also Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551)

550

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images

Polygonal Select Area Command Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a polygon around pixels that you define. A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes. Following the first point, click the points to define the polygon. Points are placed when you release the mouse button. To remove a point or back up, press the Backspace key. Right-click to end the polygon. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline. As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier

Result

Alt

Adds a new area to an existing select area (union).

Space Bar

Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference).

Space Bar + Alt

Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection).

The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Rectangular Select Area Command (on page 549)

Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image Select the image or images for which you want to adjust the contrast and brightness. You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want. 1. Click Contrast and Brightness on the Image Integrator toolbar. 2. In the Contrast and Brightness dialog box, make changes to the contrast and brightness settings by dragging the sliders or clicking in the grid. 

As you move the two slider bars in the grid, the corresponding values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes change.  In the grid, the horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the image. 3. To review settings in the Preview window, click Preview Current Settings. 4. To store the new contrast and brightness settings, click Store.  

You can also change brightness and contrast values by typing the values directly into the Contrast and Brightness boxes. To change both the contrast and brightness at the same time, drag the intersection of the sliders to a new position, or click the new position in the grid.

SmartSketch User's Guide

551

Working with Raster Images 

 

By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to show the sliders' default position. To view only the original image in the Preview window, click View Original Image. To view the results of the last stored settings in the Preview window, click Preview Stored Settings. This option is only available if you stored gradation settings previously. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Contrast and Brightness Command Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. You can modify these two attributes individually using the two-dimensional grid or the edit boxes in the Contrast and Brightness dialog box. The 2-D grid also allows you to modify contrast and brightness together by clicking anywhere in the grid. The intersection of the two lines moves to the point you click. You can also select the intersection of the two lines and dragging it within the grid to adjust the brightness and contrast at the same time. For more information, see Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box (on page 552). To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) options.

See Also Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image (on page 551)

Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image.

Dialog Box Options Contrast and Brightness Grid - Allows you to modify the contrast and/or brightness of an image by dragging the horizontal and vertical lines in the grid. The horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the image. You can also modify the contrast and brightness at the same time by clicking anywhere in the grid to move the intersection of the two lines. By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black non- editable outline appears to show the sliders' default position. As you move the sliders, the values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes for both attributes dynamically change. Contrast - Specifies the contrast for the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the Contrast box to change the contrast. When you type a value, the Contrast slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new value. If you move the Contrast slider or both sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates in the Contrast box. Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the Brightness box to change the brightness. When you type a value, the Brightness slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new value. If you move the Brightness slider or both sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates in the Brightness box. View Original Image - Displays the image using original gradation value settings in the Preview window. Preview Current Settings - Displays the image using new gradation value settings in the Preview window.

552

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images Preview Stored Settings - Displays the image using stored gradation value settings in the Preview window. This option is only available if you stored gradation values previously. Store - Stores the current gradation value settings. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Contrast and Brightness Command (on page 552) Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image (on page 551)

Invert Colors in an Image 1. Select the image or images that you want to invert. You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want. 2. Click Invert  



on the Image Integrator toolbar. Image pixel values are inverted.

Inverting the colors in a binary image swaps all foreground and background pixel values. Inverting the colors in a positive continuous tone image to a negative converts the brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 90% converts to 10%. Inverting the colors in a negative continuous tone image to a positive converts the brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 10% converts to 90%. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Invert Command Creates a negative image of the selected raster image, replacing each pixel color with its opposite on the color wheel. You can invert both grayscale and color images. If an area is selected in the image, the invert conversion applies only to the select area, and changes are applied directly to the image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Fill an Image Area with Color 1. Select the image that you want to modify. 2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By default, the entire image is selected. 3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Fill . 4. In the Fill dialog box, click Edit to select the color that you want to use to fill the image area. 5. Under Opacity, drag the slider to define the level of transparency you want for the fill color. As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes.

SmartSketch User's Guide

553

Working with Raster Images 6. To fill the selected area with the selected color, click OK. 



Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. You can also define the opacity for the fill by typing the percentage in the Value box. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Fill Command (on page 554)

Fill Command Fills the select area with the selected fill color. You can also set the opacity of the fill. Setting the opacity allows you to fill the select area with a certain degree of transparency. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.

See Also Fill Dialog Box (on page 554)

Fill Dialog Box Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.

Dialog Box Options Fill color - Specifies the current fill color. You can change the fill color by clicking Edit. Edit - Allows you to select a new fill color. Clicking Edit displays the standard Windows Color dialog box to allow you to select from existing colors or define your own custom color. Select opacity - Specifies the opacity for the fill color. To change the opacity, drag the slider bar to the left or right. As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes. Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. Value - Allows you to enter the opacity value for the fill color. If you enter a value here, the Select opacity slider moves to reflect the new value. Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator option.

Position an Image by Dragging

554

1. With the Select Tool

active, select the raster image.

2. Select the Position

command from the Image Integrator toolbar.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images 3. Click the image (on or within the image border) for source point one and drag the displayed outline to the appropriate position and release the mouse button at target point one.

When you drop the image in its new location, source point one (S1) displays on the image.

4. Click the image again for source point two (on or within the image border), and drag the displayed outline to scale and rotate the image to the appropriate angle and release the mouse button for target point two. During a drag operation, hold down the Ctrl key to restrict movement to 45 degree increments for placing the second target point. You can also hold down the Shift key to restrict movement in placing the second target point.   

Clicking and dragging produces an outline of the source image that contains a crosshair, representing the source image being dragged to the target location. The second point entered on the source image enables you to scale and rotate the image by clicking and dragging. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Position Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 555) Position an Image by Clicking (on page 556)

Position Command (Shortcut Menu) Positions an image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single click on the source image.

SmartSketch User's Guide

555

Working with Raster Images To select this command on the shortcut menu, you must first select a raster image and then right-click. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator option.

Position an Image by Clicking 1. Click Select

from the vertical toolbar.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Select the Position command from the Image Integrator toolbar. Single click the source image to select source point 1. Single click the target location to place target point 1. Single click the source image again to select source point 2. Single click another location on the target to place target point 2.



When you use single clicks, the image is not moved into position until the second target point is defined. You can to exit the command by right-clicking the mouse or by pressing the Esc key.



Position Command Positions a raster image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single click on the source image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

View Image Properties 1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images for which you want to view properties. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Properties

556

.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images  

If you select multiple images, only the fields that have a common property for all the selected images display information in the Image Properties dialog box. You cannot edit image properties. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Properties Command (on page 557)

Image Properties Command Allows you to view the properties of a raster image. Image properties are not editable. If multiple images are selected, only the fields that have a common property for all the selected images display information. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Properties Dialog Box (on page 557) General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)

Image Properties Dialog Box Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Properties Command (on page 557) Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)

General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image. Type - Specifies the image type, such as BMP, TIFF, JPG, and so on, and data type of the image, such as binary, RGB, or grayscale. Location - Specifies the storage location for the image source file. Resolution - Specifies the resolution for the image source file in pixels/inch or pixels/centimeter and microns. Size - Specifies the file size of the image source file on disk. Created - Specifies the creation date for the image source file. Modified - Specifies the last modification date for the image source file. If you make changes to the image in the product and click Save Image on the toolbar, this modification date updates with the date you saved the image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Properties Command (on page 557) Image Properties Dialog Box (on page 557) Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)

Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image.

SmartSketch User's Guide

557

Working with Raster Images Width - Specifies the actual width of the raster image. Height - Specifies the actual height of the raster image. Number of lines - Specifies the number of lines in the selected image. Pixels per line - Specifies the number of pixels per line in the selected image. Orientation - The scanline orientation of the selected image, such as ULH, URH, and so on. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Properties Command (on page 557) General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)

Erase Part of An Image 1. Select the image that you want to modify. 2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By default, the entire image is selected. 3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Erase

.

If you do not select an area of the image, the entire image is erased. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Image Erase Command (on page 558)

Image Erase Command Erases the selected image or selected edit area. By default, the entire image is selected; however, you can use the Rectangular Select Area Command (on page 549) and the Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551) to create a select area in the raster image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Erase Part of An Image (on page 558)

Remove Speckles from an Image There are three ways to designate speckle size.

Edit the size field on the Speckle Remove dialog box. 1. Select a binary image. 2. Click Speckle Remove on the Image Integrator toolbar. The selected image displays in a Preview window. 3. On the Speckle Remove dialog box, select the unit of measure from the Speckle size drop-down list. When you change the units of measure, the speckle size automatically converts to the new units. 4. Click OK.

558

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images Draw a box to determine the maximum speckle size to remove 1. Select a binary image. 2. Click Speckle Remove on the Image Integrator toolbar. The selected image displays in a Preview window. 3. Click inside the Preview window and drag to define the box. The Speckle size field automatically updates when you draw the box. 4. Click OK.

Select a representative speckle in the image. 1. Select a binary image. 2. Click Speckle Remove on the Image Integrator toolbar. The selected image displays in a Preview window. 3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select a representative speckle inside the Preview window. The Speckle size field automatically updates when you select a representative speckle. The cursor changes to an eyedropper. 4. Click OK. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Speckle Remove Command Removes all unwanted areas of speckle in a binary image. Speckles are small, unwanted areas of foreground data. To remove a speckle, the software looks for a rectangular boundary around a potential speckle. The boundary is limited by the maximum speckle size you specify. You can specify speckle size 3 different ways.  Edit the size field on the Speckle Remove dialog box.  Draw a box to determine the maximum speckle size to be removed.  Select a representative speckle in the image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Fill an Image Area with Color (on page 553)

Speckle Remove Dialog Box Speckle size - Displays default size and units. If inches are selected as the units on the Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 73), the default size is .050 in. If centimeters are selected as units, the default size is 0.127 cm. If any other units are selected, the default size is 40.0 pixels. You can change the units of measure at any time. Available units on the drop-down list are inches, centimeters, and pixels. When you change the units of measure, the speckle size automatically converts to the new units. Preview control pad - Controls what is displayed in the preview window. When you define the speckle size, you can store this setting or go back to the initial setting. To preview the command again, you draw another rectangle, select an existing hole or edit the size of the field, and select the Preview button again.

SmartSketch User's Guide

559

Working with Raster Images

Warp an Image Using Multiple Points 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Select the image to be warped. Click Multi-Point Warp on the Image Integrator toolbar. On the Multi-Point Warp Ribbon (on page 560), enter the first source point. Select the desired zoom factor and the warp model. Click Warp Options to open the Warp Options Dialog Box (on page 561). Collect the desired number of points for the warp. Click Finish to execute the warp. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Multi-Point Warp Command (on page 560)

Multi-Point Warp Command Performs linear and non-linear transformations of images. A warp is a two-dimensional topological transformation in which a source area is fitted to a destination area. Usually, a warp is used to counteract some undesirable influence on the original raster data. For example, a satellite photograph which includes asymmetrical curvature may need to be fitted to a square grid for mapping purposes. Essentially, a warp is a reverse interpolation to remove unwanted distortions and arrive at a desired raster data form. The source is the raw, distorted data, and the destination is the desired data after the warp operation. The relationship between source and destination is specified by the warp model and by a series of source/destination point pairs. These pairs specify the relationship between the original drawing and the drawing after the warp. Warping changes the scale of the drawing. Therefore, if you have already determined the position of your raster drawing in relation to your vector drawing, you will lose the previously set scale when you warp. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Multi-Point Warp Ribbon (on page 560)

Multi-Point Warp Ribbon Options - Opens the Warp Options dialog box in which you can define the warp parameters, load point pairs, and/or save point pairs. In order to perform a warp, you must locate two or more pairs of points. Cancel/Finish - Allows you to cancel or execute the command. Once you have entered the minimum number of required pairs of points (as determined by the Model type), the Finish button is enabled. Clicking Finish warps the selected raster image based on your input. You can, however, click Cancel at any time. Zoom - Allows you to modify the zoom factor for the zoom window. When the Zoom button is clicked off, the Zoom factor list is disabled; when the Zoom button is clicked on, the Zoom factor list is active. You can choose a zoom factor from 1 to 10. When Zoom is enabled and you click on an image, a new window opens to show you the area that you zoomed in on by the amount specified in the Zoom factor list. This allows you to refine the location of the point you placed in the main image. If Zoom is on, you must place perform a "refining" click in the Zoom

560

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images window to get the point selected and to hide the Zoom window. The software will then prompt you for the next point. Clicking the next point again opens the Zoom window where you can refine the selected point. This sequence continues until you click Finish on the Multi-Point Warp ribbon. Model - Specifies the model (Helmert, 1st Order Polynomial, or Projective) on which you want to base the image transformation or warp. Projective is not listed as a model type unless Resample is selected on the Warp Options Dialog Box (on page 561). The model you select determines the minimum number of required source/destination points, as well as how the selected image is transformed.  Helmert - This model, sometimes referred to as an Orthogonal warp, performs a general data file rotation, X and Y axes translations, single value scaling, and orthogonality of perimeters. This warp is proportional and cannot be "rubber sheeted". The minimum number of points is 2, and will also create residuals if more than 2 point pairs are selected. In effect, the Helmert warp operates more like an interactive scale and rotate function. No distortion is created with this method. General use includes engineering type applications.  1st Order Polynomial - This model uses a first order polynomial to mathematically best fit the data. This is the stereotypical "rubber sheet" warping. A minimum of three point pairs will ensure that the source/destination points are placed exactly, while other portions of the drawing will be placed as close as mathematically possible.  With 3 point pairs, there will be no residuals (errors).  Projective - Projective warping will determine exact placement of 4 control points (corners). Although this warp is categorized as a Linear warp, second order polynomials are used to determine the location of the fourth point. This model eliminates the "best fit" results of Affine warping when applied to rectangular data. While accuracy of the fourth point is substantial, the time required to calculate results using this model is also substantial an may deter use with large data sets. With all models, selection of more than the minimum number of points will introduce residuals (errors). For warps with no residuals, use the following number of point pairs: 1st Order Polynomial (3); Helmert (2); Projective (4).Keep in mind that no residuals does not necessarily produce the best or desired results. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Warp Options Dialog Box Warp Model - The default warp model is Helmert for the first invocation of the Multi-Point Warp command. The last used model becomes the next default model. The Warp Model dialog box setting automatically changes the associated ribbon bar setting, and vice-versa Resample - The default is unchecked. When Resample is unchecked, the Warp command is display only, meaning that warp settings are applied only to the image display and are not saved. This takes less time and is useful for viewing and printing. When Resample is unchecked, Helmert and 1st Order Polynomial are the only two Warp Model options available. When Resample is checked, warp settings are applied to the image itself when you save it. When checked, there are three Warp Model options available (Helmert, 1st Order Polynomial, and Projective).  Helmert - This model, sometimes referred to as an Orthogonal warp, performs a general data file rotation, X and Y axes translations, single value scaling, and orthogonality of perimeters. This warp is proportional and cannot be "rubber sheeted". The minimum number of points is 2, and will also create residuals if more than 2 point pairs are selected. In effect, the Helmert warp operates more like an interactive scale and rotate function. No distortion is created with this method. General use includes engineering type applications.

SmartSketch User's Guide

561

Working with Raster Images 

1st Order Polynomial - This model uses a first order polynomial to mathematically best fit the data. This is the stereotypical "rubber sheet" warping. A minimum of three point pairs will ensure that the source/destination points are placed exactly, while other portions of the drawing will be placed as close as mathematically possible. With 3 point pairs, there will be no residuals (errors).  Projective - Projective warping will determine exact placement of 4 control points (corners). Although this warp is categorized as a Linear warp, second order polynomials are used to determine the location of the fourth point. This model eliminates the "best fit" results of Affine warping when applied to rectangular data. While accuracy of the fourth point is substantial, the time required to calculate results using this model is also substantial an may deter use with large data sets. Points - Automatically updates with the appropriate number of points as different warp models are selected. You cannot edit this field, however you can collect as many points as you desire (over the minimum required) for any warp model. Point Number - Displays the Source and Destination point pairs. When you place your first set of points (Source/Destination), it is considered to be point number 1 (point pair). The second set is point number 2, and so on. Source (in) - Displays the X and Y value for each Source point. The values are displayed in inches. Destination (wu) - Displays the X and Y value for each Destination point. The values are displayed in working units. Residual - Displays the X and Y value for each point's residual error. The residual error for each point pair represents the error involved in modifying the Source point to its corresponding Destination point. Mean square error - Displays the measure of how well the transformation model selected fits the point pairs defined. It is the average of the individual point errors (divided by the Degrees of Freedom). Delete - Allows you to delete a point pair from the points window. When a point pair has been defined and highlighted in the points window the Delete button is enabled. Selecting the Delete button causes the highlighted point pair to be removed from the points window, and all the remaining points will be reassigned the next number available (incremented by 1 or however many point pairs were deleted). For example, if you have 3 point pairs defined, and delete point pair 1, point pair 2 becomes the new 1, and point pair 3 becomes 2. If you collect another pair, it becomes point pair 3. You can delete multiple point pairs with the Delete button. After highlighting the first point pair to be deleted, holding down the Ctrl key allows you to select any combination of other point pairs. Holding the Shift key selects all the point pairs from the first one highlighted to the second one. This works exactly like selecting files in Windows Explorer. Load - Allows you to load previously defined point pairs. Selecting this button displays the Load Points Dialog Box (on page 563). Save - Allows you to save the currently collected points shown in the points window to a file on disk. This allows you to reuse the defined point pairs for future warps. Selecting this button displays the Save Points Dialog Box (on page 563). To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

See Also Fill an Image Area with Color (on page 553)

562

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with Raster Images

Load Points Dialog Box Allows you to load previously defined point pairs. Once you load the point pairs, you can use them to warp, or transform, the selected raster image. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

Save Points Dialog Box Specifies the name of, location of, and file format for the point collection displayed in the Points window on the Warp Options dialog box. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.

SmartSketch User's Guide

563

Working with Raster Images

564

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 21

Working with CAD Drawings ®

Use SmartSketch's CAD translation capabilities to translate or reference MicroStation and ® AutoCAD files for use with SmartSketch. You can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and then save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation provides equivalent objects to and from which elements or entities may be mapped during translation. Translator options let you customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and units are imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565) Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

Working with MicroStation Files CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports MicroStation font and linestyle (*.RSC) resource files, resulting in near perfect visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export MicroStation drawings. Invisible MicroStation information such as database linkages, tag data, and user data is preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. You can even import MicroStation cell libraries as SmartSketch symbols, further enhancing your re-use of existing data. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Opening and Saving MicroStation Files SmartSketch supports opening and saving MicroStation files in two ways: you can either select a MicroStation file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, or you can create a reference file from a MicroStation file. If you use the method for selecting a MicroStation file and translating it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, you can click Open on the File menu. After you have opened a MicroStation file using this method, the resulting file is in a SmartSketch format (igr). If the MicroStation file extension is not a .DGN extension, you may need to use a utility to define other extensions as MicroStation files. If you use the method for creating a reference file from a MicroStation file, you can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display and, if MicroStation is available on your PC, edit the MicroStation file while working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D MicroStation file upon placement. Once a MicroStation file has been referenced using this method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and elements on the drawing sheet. The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) and setting the format to MicroStation, you can configure the settings for importing MicroStation data that applies to both of these methods.

SmartSketch User's Guide

565

Working with CAD Drawings Roundtrip of MicroStation data (importing MicroStation data to SmartSketch data and exporting back to MicroStation data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as tags, database linkages, and user data are not supported during export to the MicroStation file format.

Other Methods for Importing MicroStation Data You can use the following methods to move MicroStation (.dgn) documents into SmartSketch:  Cutting and pasting.  Dragging.  Inserting the information as an object. When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.

Inserting as an Object Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The software recognizes the geometry of the inserted document. You can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by double-clicking it. Object inserts any OLE 2.0-enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or a CAD document, such as .dgn. You can then edit the inserted object by double-clicking it. If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file.

Saving SmartSketch to MicroStation You can save a SmartSketch document as a MicroStation document. Before you do this, you can adjust the translation options with Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click Export Options. When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DGN document, the active sheet is saved. On the Options dialog box, you can map SmartSketch layers to MicroStation levels (1–63). All the remaining layers are placed on the last layer or level of the foreign document. The layer names are preserved, whether you are importing or exporting MicroStation documents. If you save a SmartSketch document with raster reference files as MicroStation documents, only the files of the same type (.DGN) can be exported back into.

See Also Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import (on page 581)

566

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings

Command Comparison with MicroStation This command comparison lists MicroStation commands and their equivalent commands in the software. MicroStation

Software

A Active ...Color (CO=)

Style Command (on page 420)

...Font (FT=)

Text Box Command (on page 231)

...Keypoint

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...Style

Style Command (on page 420)

...Weight(WT=) Array .....Polar

Circular Pattern Command (on page 222)

....Rectangular

Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)

B C Change ...Color

Select Tool (on page 201) and Properties Command (on page 498)

...Level

Display Manager Command (on page 371)

...Style

Style Command (on page 420)

Construct ...Tangent Arc1

Tangent Arc Command (on page 168)

Construct Bisector ...Angle

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) and SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...Line

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

Construct Circle ...Tangent to Three Elements

Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Construct Line

SmartSketch User's Guide

567

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...AA1

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Construct Perpendicular ...From ...To

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Construct Tangent ...Between ...Circle 1

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...Perpendicular ...To ...from Element Copy Element

Select Tool (on page 201) and Copy Command (on page 214)

Copy Parallel

Move Command (on page 212) with copy option

...by Distance

Move Command (on page 212) with copy and step distance option

Create Cell

Symbols

Create Chain ...Manual

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

Crosshatch

Style Command (on page 420); Fill Command (on page 554)

D Define Cell Origin

Symbols

Delete ...Element

Select Tool (on page 201) with Delete Command (on page 219)

...Partial

Trim Command (on page 343)

Delete Cell

Select Tool (on page 201) with Delete Command (on page 219)

Dimension ...Diameter Extended

SmartDimension Command (on page 280)

...Radius

568

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...Save style

Format Dimension Command (on page 441)

...Size Arrow ...modify text location

Select Tool (on page 201)

...settings

Format Dimension Command (on page 441)

...text style E Enter data field ...commands

Text Box Command (on page 231)

Exit

Exit Command (File Menu) (on page 99)

Extend Element 2

Extend to Next Command (on page 348)

Extend Line ...Intersection

Extend to Next Command (on page 348) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...by Keyin

Select Tool (on page 201)

F Fence ...Change Color ...Change Level

Select Tool (on page 201); Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

...Change Style

Select Tool (on page 201)

...Change Symbology

Select Tool (on page 201); Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

...Copy

Select Tool (on page 201) with Copy Command (on page 214)

...Delete

Select Tool (on page 201) with Delete Command (on page 219)

...Move

Select Tool (on page 201) with Move Command (on page 212)

...Stretch

Select Tool (on page 201) with Move Command (on page 212)

Fence Array ...Polar

SmartSketch User's Guide

Select Tool (on page 201) with Circular Pattern Command (on page 222)

569

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...Rectangular

Select Tool (on page 201) with Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)

Fence Rotate ...Original

Select Tool (on page 201) with Rotate Command (on page 332)

Fence Scale ...Copy

Select Tool (on page 201) and Scale Command (on page 341) with copy option

...Original

Select Tool (on page 201) and Scale Command (on page 341)

File Fence (FF=) Fillet ...Modify ...Nomodify

Fillet Command (on page 353) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...Single

Fillet Command (on page 353) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and Trim Command (on page 343)

Fit

Fit Command (on page 57)

G Graphic Group

Select Tool (on page 201) with Group Command (on page 365) and UnGroup Command (on page 367)

H Hatch

Fill Command (on page 554)

I Identify ...Cell

Select Tool (on page 201) and select a symbol.

Increment Text

Macros (Custom Commands Command (on page 475)) with Text Box Command (on page 231)

Intersection

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

J Justify ...Center

570

Text Box Command (on page 231)

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...Left ...Right K L Levels ...Off (OF=)

Display Manager Command (on page 371)

...On (ON=) Lock ...Axis

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

...Grid M Measure ...Area

Measure Area Command (on page 317)

...Area Element ...Distance Points

Measure Distance Command (on page 313)

...Radius

Select Tool (on page 201) or SmartDimension Command (on page 280)

Mirror Copy ...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 335) with copy option ...Line Mirror Original ...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 335) ...Line Modify ...Element

Select Tool (on page 201) (Use direct manipulation of the handles)

Modify Arc ...Angle ...Radius Move ...Element

SmartSketch User's Guide

Move Command (on page 212)

571

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...Up/Left/Right/Dow n N O P Place ...Lstring Point

FreeSketch Command (on page 184)

...Mline

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

...Note

Text Box Command (on page 231)

...Shape

Rectangle Command (on page 176)

...Shape Orthogonal ...Text

Text Box Command (on page 231)

Place Arc ...by Center

Arc by Center Point Command (on page 166)

...by Edge

Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165)

...by Radius

Tangent Arc Command (on page 168)

Place Block

Rectangle Command (on page 176)

...Rotated

Rectangle Command (on page 176)

Place Cell ...Absolute

Symbols

Place Circle ...Center

Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162)

...by Diameter ...by Edge ...by Radius Place Ellipse

572

...Half

Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174) and Trim Command (on page 343)

...Quarter

Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173) and Trim Command (on page 343)

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

...by Center

Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174)

...by Edge

Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173)

Place Line

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

Place Point

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Place Text

Text Box Command (on page 231)

Plot

Print Command (on page 104)

Q Quit ...Stop

Close Command (on page 99)

R Rename Cell (CR)=

Symbols

Reset (button)

Right mouse button.

Rotate ...Copy

Rotate Command (on page 332) with copy option

...Original

Rotate Command (on page 332)

S Save

Save Command (on page 94)

Scale ...Copy

Scale Command (on page 341) with copy option.

...Original

Save Command (on page 94)

Select Cell ...Absolute

Symbols

Set ...Linefill

Style Command (on page 420) ; Fill Command (on page 554)

Set Coordinates

PinPoint Command (on page 270)

Show Library

Symbols

SmartSketch User's Guide

573

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

Software

Stop Drawing

Screen automatically refreshes.

T U Undo

Undo Actions (on page 205)

Update

Screen automatically refreshes.

V W Window ...Area

Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.

...Center

Pan Command (on page 58) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.

X Y Z Zoom ...In

Zoom In Command (on page 56) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.

...Out

Zoom Out Command (on page 56) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.

See Also Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565)

Task Comparison with MicroStation This task and term comparison lists MicroStation tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in the software. MicroStation

SmartSketch

A Active Depth

The active depth of a 3-D element is maintained through OLE servers as an attribute when a MicroStation file is embedded in a software file.

B

574

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

SmartSketch

C Cell

Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link a MicroStation cell or convert a cell library.

Command Window

The ribbon allows you to give and receive feedback when you are using a command.

Compress

It is not necessary to compress documents in the software.

D Default

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to pre-define the default settings of elements.

Data Point

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) is used to draw geometry.

Data Button

The software uses the left mouse button for providing input points.

Dimension Units

The Dimension Command (on page 281) allows you to specify the units you want to use when you place dimensions.

Dimension Format

The Dimension Command (on page 281) allows you to specify how your dimensions appear when you place them.

Drop Status

The Ungroup Command (on page 367) allows you to remove an element from a group.

Design ".dgn" file

Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing. Drawing sheets are part of the software document.

Dynamic Update

The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the pointer.

E Element Attributes

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the attributes of elements.

F Fence

The software provides group selection and manipulation using Select Tool (on page 201) and edit commands.

Font

Font support includes TrueType fonts

G Graphics Cursor

The pointer is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations.

Graphics Screen / Graphics Window

The windows of the software allow you to create graphics and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the window.

H

SmartSketch User's Guide

575

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

SmartSketch

Handles

Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for modification.

Hatching

The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.

I Identify

Select Tool (on page 201) allows you to identify elements for selection and manipulation.

J K L Level

The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to define layers and styles for layers.

Line style

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the line styles of elements.

M MicroCSL

The software allows you to program and customize.

Mirror

The Mirror Command (on page 335) allows you to move elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.

N O Origin

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The software Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate positions and points on elements including elements on symbols.

P Parameter

The software allows you to define user properties of elements and objects.

Pull-down Menus

The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for command selection.

Q R

576

Real World Units

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then scale to real-world units.

Relative Coordinates

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings MicroStation

SmartSketch

Reset Button

Reset by releasing a button or by selecting a new command.

S Screen Menu

The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for command selection.

Seed File

Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new drawing.

T Tags

The software provides a mechanism for using database features.

Tentative Snap

Points on elements as you draw such as midpoints and end points.

U

The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate the key

UCS (User Coordinate System) Icon

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Update

Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.

V View

Views are used to display the information in a window. Windows display drawings from a particular viewpoint.

W Working Units

The software allows you to specify the working units you want to use when you draw.

X Y Z Z Depth

The z value of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through OLE servers when a MicroStation file is embedded into a software file.

Zoom

The Zoom Out Command (on page 56) and Zoom Area Command (on page 55) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command (on page 57) changes the display of a window to display all elements.

See Also Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565) Working with CAD Drawings (on page 565)

SmartSketch User's Guide

577

Working with CAD Drawings

MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Conceptual Design Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, this software is a natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the MicroStation (.dgn) file format to complete downstream tasks in MicroStation.

Details You can use the software to add annotations to existing MicroStation files by inserting a MicroStation file in your document with Object on the Insert menu and then adding annotations and text. You can then save the added annotations, dimensions, text, and graphics as a MicroStation document with Save As on the File menu.

578

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings If you do not have MicroStation but need to provide files in MicroStation format, you can create the document in the software and then save the file in MicroStation format.

Project Management Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to integrate MicroStation drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing files from several sources and combine them into a single project book. You can then add details using the software and save the files in MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the project. You can also assemble entire projects and then detail the project using the software. You can then save the files in MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the project.

SmartSketch User's Guide

579

Working with CAD Drawings You can also use documents created with the software as a central location for all project information—both graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into a MicroStation file that has been opened with the software.

Review and Redlining The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining MicroStation drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D MicroStation drawing in your document and then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and revise on top of the native data. After reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.

580

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings See Also Save As Command (on page 94) Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565)

Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import When you translate MicroStation data into SmartSketch, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Visual Fidelity Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:

Colors MicroStation and SmartSketch use the same format for colors, and they each store them in the industry standard red, green, blue (RGB) format. During import, MicroStation colors are automatically translated to the corresponding RGB values in SmartSketch, resulting in a perfect color match.

Widths SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that corresponds to standard metric pencil leads: .13 mm, .18 mm, .25 mm, .35 mm, .5 mm, .7 mm, 1.0 mm, 1.4 mm, and 2.0 mm. When you open a MicroStation document, a default mapping determines which SmartSketch line width is assigned to go with which MicroStation weight. You can change any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) after you select Options on the Tools menu).

Linestyles The core MicroStation linestyles 0-7 default to matching SmartSketch linestyles, unless they are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. MicroStation User Defined Line Styles (UDLS) are supported directly. If you use the Style Resources dialog box, you can attach a MicroStation linestyle resource (*.RSC) file as a resource for linestyles to use in a document.

Patterns Non-associative MicroStation patterns are imported as groups. Associative patterns are not translated into SmartSketch.

Font Styles SmartSketch supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows NT and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType™ engineering fonts. SmartSketch also supports MicroStation fonts. When you open a .DGN document, SmartSketch provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font is assigned to which MicroStation font. You can change to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double-clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.

SmartSketch User's Guide

581

Working with CAD Drawings References MicroStation references are imported as SmartSketch reference files, which use the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, weights, line styles, patterns, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.

Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature SmartSketch automatically calculates the sheet scale when you import MicroStation documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must uncheck the Fit imported data to active sheet check box on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert a MicroStation document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.

Using MicroStation Fonts and Styles in a SmartSketch Document If you want to make line styles from MicroStation resource files available in a SmartSketch document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file from the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box. When you attach a .RSC file from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on the ribbon for the active document. MicroStation resource files for line styles are treated as a document setting. If you want to have all documents that are created by importing use the same styles, you must create an .IGR template with those styles attached. You then specify the .IGR template as the template to use during import of MicroStation documents.

Data Fidelity Data fidelity is a phrase that describes how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing equivalent element types with mapped entities to SmartSketch. SmartSketch also provides support for non-displayed data such as database linkages, units, and coordinates. SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:

Units MicroStation files are determined by the master and sub-unit labels in the file.  If meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the resulting SmartSketch document has the closest matching units set on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box.  If no meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the File Units setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated or referenced MicroStation files.

Coordinates MicroStation data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate the MicroStation files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced MicroStation file coordinate positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box.

582

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.

Levels MicroStation level numbers, names, or both are preserved as SmartSketch layer names, but the color and linetype settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle settings apply directly to the resulting elements. Within a SmartSketch document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. When translating foreign files into SmartSketch, the levels in MicroStation keep the same names. The MicroStation Export Options dialog box provides a layer mapping table, due to the limit of 63 levels in MicroStation. You can access this dialog box with the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu.

Cells When you translate a .DGN document, the default is to translate cells into symbols. You can change this default with Options on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded groups. This action translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in SmartSketch. MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into SmartSketch as a group. However, for MicroStation V8, the Import Cells2 as Symbols setting has been added to the itmstn.ini configuration file to define whether Type 2 cell headers are imported from MicroStation V8 files as symbols or groups. A group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the name of the cell, its origin, and any other data characterizing the cell. There is, therefore, enough information stored in the group to reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future. When you import a MicroStation document that has cells, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \Program\itmstn.ini to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0. If there is no Delete Symbol Definitions setting in the .ini file, the software presumes the setting is set to 1; consequently, the symbols that are embedded into the drawing sheet are deleted after the MicroStation document is imported into the drawing sheet.

Cells with Attribute Data When translating a .dgn document, the default is to translate all cells containing attribute data into symbols with Labels (on page 250).

3D Data All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box. The following information is an entity-to-element map when you translate files using Open on the File menu. MicroStation

SmartSketch

Line

Line

Linestring

Linestring

SmartSketch User's Guide

583

Working with CAD Drawings Bspline Curve

Bspline Curve

Shape

Linestring

Ellipse

Ellipse

Arc

Arc

Complex String

Complex String

Complex Shape

Complex String

Bspline Surface

Bspline Curve

Curve

Bspline Curve

Cone

Flattened wire frame

Surface

Group

Dimension

Dimension

Text

Text

Text Node

Text

Cell

Group

Shared Cell

Symbol (Shared Embed)

Multiline

Group

Point String

Points

Reference

Reference

Raster

Reference

Database Linkages

Dynamic Attribute set on the element

Tags

Dynamic Attribute set on the element

User Data

Dynamic Attribute set on the element

  





The Image Integrator option must be downloaded to support import of raster reference files. MicroStation symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (for example, rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols. None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using SmartSketch commands. However, if MicroStation software is installed on your computer, then you can click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This action opens the MicroStation reference file in the MicroStation application. If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file and then update the reference file in SmartSketch. If you change the inserted information (copied from MicroStation), the original information does not change.

See Also Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export (on page 587)

584

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings

MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current document. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 585) Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586) Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586) Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586)

General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) Cell Library - Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a cell library is imported, a symbol document with an .sym extension is created. Units of Resolution - Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for MicroStation cell libraries. Cell libraries do not have units and depend on the MicroStation document for their units of resolution. These settings have no effect on translating documents with a .dgn extension; the settings only affect documents with a .CEL extension. Cells - Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you import a MicroStation document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open ITMSTN.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0. Options - Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet or embedded symbols. Symbol documents have an .sym extension. For example, type 2 cells are imported as groups and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols. Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create a document. Browse - Accesses the Browse dialog box. Fit imported data to active sheet - Places the MicroStation data on the active drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.

See Also MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

SmartSketch User's Guide

585

Working with CAD Drawings Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) Maps the MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. The core MicroStation line styles (0 - 7) default to equivalent SmartSketch line styles unless they are mapped on the Linestyle Tab. The number values listed below can be used in the line style table to map MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. When mapping line styles use the line style number, not the line style name. MicroStation

SmartSketch

Line Style

Number

Line Style

Number

Solid

0

Normal

9

Dotted

1

Dashed

10

Medium Dotted

2

Dotted

11

Long Dotted

3

Dash Dot

12

Dot Dash

4

Dash 2Dot

13

Short Dash

5

Chain

18

Dash Dot Dot

6

Double Chain

20

Long Short Dash

7

2Dash Dot

21

See Also MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.

See Also MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

586

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings

Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export When you translate SmartSketch files into MicroStation data, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Visual Fidelity Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to MicroStation by providing support for the following different areas:

Colors When SmartSketch colors are saved to a .DGN file, a color table containing matching colors is created and attached to the resulting .DGN by default. If a seed file with a color table attached is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu), SmartSketch colors are automatically mapped to the closest RGB equivalent colors in that table.

Widths SmartSketch default widths are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation widths on the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu).

Linestyles SmartSketch line styles are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. If styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the SmartSketch file being exported, the line style names are transferred to the resulting .DGN file. If a style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that style will be used. If there is no style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns a default style. Linestyles that are not mapped on export are stroked to give them a more correct appearance. The default length of the stroking line is 0.1 millimeters (mm).

Fill Styles Basic fill styles such as Normal are automatically recreated as MicroStation associative hatch patterns in the resulting .DGN files. Fill styles that use symbols such as Earth (in AEC templates) are exported as individual elements in the resulting .DGN file. Objects containing blank fill styles are exported; however, the blank fill styles themselves are not exported.

Font Styles SmartSketch default font styles (TTF) are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation font styles on the Font tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the font tab, it defaults to font 3 (Engineering) in the resulting MicroStation file. If font styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the SmartSketch file being exported, the font style names are passed into the resulting .DGN file, provided it has not been mapped in the font mapping table. Mappings override automatic behaviors. If a font style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that font style will be used. If there is no font style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns the default font 3 (Engineering) style.

SmartSketch User's Guide

587

Working with CAD Drawings References MicroStation .DGN files that are referenced in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation reference files in the resulting MicroStation file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation raster files in the resulting MicroStation file. Linked and embedded references, including .DXF, .IGR, .DGN, and DXF file types, will be saved as MicroStation reference files during export to MicroStation. Embedded files will be saved in the same location as the master file; linked files will be save in the same location as the original linked file. Inserted objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during the export to the MicroStation file format.

Multiple Sheets Only the active sheet and background sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to a MicroStation file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported. The active background sheet graphics are merged into the resulting .DGN file.

Data Fidelity Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in MicroStation. SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with elements in the file. SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:

Units If a seed file is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box, then the units of that seed file are used in the resulting file. Otherwise, the following chart indicates what happens to SmartSketch units as they are exported to MicroStation units.

588

IGR Primary Units

MSTN MU MSTN Resolution

inches

IN

1000:254

feet

FT

12:8000

meters

M

1000:10

millimeters

MM

1000:100

centimeters

CM

1000:100

manometers

NM

Seed file values unchanged

yards

YD

Seed file values unchanged

miles

MI

Seed file values unchanged

kilometers

KM

Seed file values unchanged

tenths

TE

Seed file values unchanged

hundreds

HN

Seed file values unchanged

thousands

TH

Seed file values unchanged

poles

PL

Seed file values unchanged

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings rods

RD

Seed file values unchanged

chains

CH

Seed file values unchanged

furlongs

FR

Seed file values unchanged

Coordinates SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate to the MicroStation files.

SmartFrames and Detail Views SmartFrames that exist on the active sheet are preserved upon translation to the MicroStation file; Detail Views - whether on the active sheet or on a background sheet - are also preserved upon translation to the MicroStation file.

Layers to Levels SmartSketch layer names are preserved as MicroStation level names and numbers, but the color and linestyle settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle layer settings are applied directly to the resulting elements. Any translated levels past Level 63 are combined together on Level 63. The following is an element to element map when you translate files using Save As on the File menu. SmartSketch

MicroStation

Line

Line

Ellipse

Ellipse

Arc

Ellipse

Point

Line

Linestring

Linestring

Connector

Linestring

Bspline Curve

Bspline Curve

Rectangle

Shape

Complex String

Complex Chain

Text

Text

Dimension

Dimension

Symbol

Shared Cell

Leader

Dimension

Group

Elements

SmartLabel

Elements

Parametric Symbols

Elements

SmartSketch User's Guide

589

Working with CAD Drawings Multi Representation Symbol

Elements

.DGN Reference

.DGN Reference

.IGR, DWG, or .DXF Reference

Ignored (no equivalent)

OLE Objects (.doc, .xls, etc.)

Ignored (no equivalent)

Attribute sets

Ignored

Raster Reference

Raster Reference

See Also Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import (on page 581)

MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 590) Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 590) LineStyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591) Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591) Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591)

General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) Version - Specifies the versions of MicroStation that can be used for export. You can select multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog box. Seed File - Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate units, color tables, and other important information. When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D MicroStation reference file from the current document, the 3D reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D MicroStation reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must specify a 3D seed file on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. Browse - Displays the Seed File dialog box.

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) Maps the fonts in the software to a MicroStation font.

590

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) Maps the line styles in the software to MicroStation line styles. The number values listed below can be used in the Linestyle table to map line styles in the current document to MicroStation line styles. When mapping line styles, use the line style number; not the line style name. SmartSketch

MicroStation

Line Style

Number

Line Style

Number

Normal

9

Solid

0

Dashed

10

Dotted

1

Dotted

11

Medium Dotted

2

Dash Dot

12

Long Dotted

3

Dash 2Dot

13

Dot Dash

4

Chain

18

Short Dash

5

Double Chain

20

Dash Dot Dot

6

2Dash Dot

21

Long Short dash

7

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)

Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) Layer Mapping Table - Displays an alphanumeric ordered list of the layers.

See Also MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590) Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600)

Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation The configuration file, itmstn.ini, is delivered with the Translators (on page 28) option to \Program. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the

SmartSketch User's Guide

591

Working with CAD Drawings capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and a MicroStation document. Most of the options found in the itmstn.ini file are accessible through the various tabs on the MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) and the MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590). It is recommended that options modified directly in the INI file be done so only by an experienced user at his/her own risk. The following table defines the INI settings, along with any corresponding default values: [Name of the Section]/ Name of the Setting

Description

Import

Export

Default

Value

1

[Options]

2

Seed File

Name of a seed file used for export

Yes

Yes

File name

3

Enable Logging

If set, a log file will be created

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

4

Read Default Units

Sets the default units for foreign format

Yes

Yes

0

59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm; 63=km; 64=in; 65=ft; 66=yd; 67=mil

5

Template File

Sets the document that will be used as a template when importing foreign data.

Yes

Yes

File name

6

Symbol Template File

Sets the symbol file that will be used as a template when importing foreign data.

Yes

N/A

File name

7

Dissolve Symbol to Groups

A flag that indicates whether or Yes not to dissolve parametric and multi- representation symbols to groups.

Yes

0

0/1

8

Ignore Sheet Scale

If set to 1, the file translated into Yes RAD is fit to the sheet size by adjusting the sheet scale.

N/A

1

0/1

9

Processing Batch Translation

If set, progress bar dialog boxes Yes do not display during the translation.

Yes

0

0/1

10

Attribute Sets

Names of attributes.

Yes

Yes

String consisting of attribute names delimited by semicolons.

11

Read Cell Options

Sets how the cells in MicroStation are handled. The first option translates cells into groups, whereas the second option preserves cells.

Yes

N/A

Shared Embeds

Rigid groups/ Shared Embeds

12

Import Cells2 as Symbols

Specifies that cell headers of Type 2 should be imported from MicroStation V8 files as either groups or symbols.

Yes

N/A

0

0=Type2 cell headers are imported as groups.

Sets what version of the foreign file format is created on export.

N/A

13

Write Version

592

1=Type2 cell headers are imported as symbols Yes

5.0

3.x, 4.0, 4.4, 5.0

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 14

Read Reference Options

Specifies options to process reference files during translation.

Yes

N/A

Translate/ Link/ Merge

15

Read Reference Paths

Specifies the paths for reference Yes files.

N/A

Directory Name

16

Sub Units per Master Units

Sets the values to determine the Yes size of units for the MicroStation cell file.

N/A

10

Number

17

Pos Units per Sub Units

Sets the values to determine the Yes size of units for the MicroStation cell file.

N/A

1000

Number

18

Max Nesting Depth

Determines how deep the translation processes the reference files.

Yes

N/A

0

Number

19

Application Text Type

Determines if text origin and justification are preserved.

Yes

Yes

0

0= Text origin is always in the upper left corner 1 = Origin preserved 2 = Not Available 3 = Not Available 4 = Indicates that when the text is imported from a MicroStation file and it has both horizontal and vertical mirroring, then 180 degrees would be added to the existing angle and the mirroring properties are not set on such text 5 = Provides a combined effect of values 1 and 4

20

MS Resource Files

Determines the location of MicroStation resource files.

Yes

N/A

Directory name

21

Process Non- Displayable Reference Files

Determines if non-displayable reference files are translated.

Yes

Yes

1

0/1

22

Attributes as SmartText

Determines if SmartText is created from the attributes

Yes

N/A

0

0/1

23

EDF as SmartText

Determines if Tags are processed as SmartText

Yes

N/A

0

0/1

24

Stroke Reference

Determines if attached reference files are stroked on export.

N/A

Yes

0/1

25

Stroke Text

Determines if text is stroked during export.

N/A

Yes

0

26

Stroke Dimension

If set, the dimension objects are stroked on export.

N/A

Yes

0/1

27

Disk-based Symbols

When set to 1, .SYM files are created for each foreign symbol during import.

N/A

Yes

0

0/1

28

Ignore Non-Displayable Symbols

When set to 1, non-displayable objects are exported.

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

SmartSketch User's Guide

0/1

593

Working with CAD Drawings 29

Preserve Layers on Dissolved Symbols

If set, members or symbol are exported even if their layer is turned off.

N/A

Yes

0

0/1

30

Preserve MSTN UDLS Styles

When set to 0, user-defined linestyles are stroked.

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

31

Push Owner Attributes to its Children

If set to 1, RAD dynamic attributes are moved from a group (symbol) to its members.

N/A

Yes

0/1

32

Metafile to Raster DPI Resolution

Sets the dpi resolution for raster N/A metadata during export.

Yes

350

dpi resolution

33

Stroking Tolerance

Determines the accuracy used N/A when objects are stroked during export.

Yes

0.1

millimeters

34

Always Shift GO to Center Drawing

In case the document ranges is not larger than the .DGN file design plane but is outside of it.

N/A

Yes

0

0/1

35

No Background Color

If background is white, forces it to be black (does not apply to the printout image).

N/A

Yes

0/1

36

Hatch support complexity

Supported Hatch complexity of output format.

N/A

Yes

1 (only supports a single independent hatch line with dashes and gaps)

37

Need hatch description and stroke

If true, then stroke hatch even when hatch name and description are included in symbology.

N/A

Yes

0

38

Style Resource Name

Sets the style filename to be used on export.

N/A

Yes

Filename

39

Delete Symbol Definitions

If set, symbol definitions are deleted after the translation.

Yes

N/A

1

0/1

40

[Read Default View] and [Write Default View]

Yes

Yes

41

Transformation

Sets the 4x4 matrix.

Yes

Yes

identity matrix

4x4 matrix

42

Type

Yes

Yes

0

43

Name

Yes

Yes

0

44

Reference Point

Yes

Yes

0

45

Normal

Yes

Yes

0

46

Projection Vector

Yes

Yes

0

47

Active View

Yes

Yes

1

48

[Read Text Fonts] and [Write Text Fonts]

Determines the mapping of fonts between the foreign file format and RAD.

Yes

Yes

49

[Option Forms]

The following entries determine what dialog box is opened on the Foreign Data tab (Options dialog box)

594

0/1

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 50

Dll

Yes

Yes

51

Import Entry Point

Yes

N/A

52

Export Entry Point

N/A

Yes

53

[Read Widths] and [Write Widths]

Determines the mapping of the line widths between the foreign file format and RAD.

Yes

Yes

54

[Write Layers]

Determines the mapping of RAD N/A layers to MicroStation levels.

Yes

55

Symbol Layers

Saves the level information by pushing each symbol to the level of its first graphical element.

No

Yes

0

If set to 0, it allows setting Honor Layer Display ON for Graphic cells and OFF for Point Cells. If set to 1, it forces the Honor Layer Display to be OFF. If set to 2, it honors the Symbol Layers = 0 setting and pushes symbols to the same level as that of its first graphical element. If set to 3, it forces Honor Layer display to be OFF, and pushes all the symbols to the same level as that of its first graphical element.

See Also Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import (on page 581)

Open a MicroStation Document 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > Options. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in the Template File box.

You can search for the seed file by clicking Browse. 5. On the Browse dialog box, click the seed file you want. 6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dgn extension. 7. Select the document that you want to open.  



If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag a MicroStation document from the Windows Explorer into the current document. After you place the MicroStation information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that are already in the current document. You can use DGN resource files to preserve the original fonts and line types of the document when you open a MicroStation document with File > Open. You can set font locations before opening the MicroStation document by clicking Tools > Options and then clicking the File Locations tab. You can set options for line types by clicking Format > Style and then clicking Resources.

SmartSketch User's Guide

595

Working with CAD Drawings    



 

MicroStation line strings are imported as SmartSketch line strings. MicroStation point strings are imported as groups. A MicroStation text node (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into the software as two separate line strings (text boxes). When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents show up as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. You can use the Registration Extension utility (igrRegisterExtensions412.exe) to register alternate MicroStation extensions so that SmartSketch will recognize them as valid MicroStation files without having to rename them. The utility is delivered to the ..\SmartSketch\Program folder on your computer after you install the software. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents using Open on the File menu are delivered through the Custom or Typical setup for these options. If you cannot open an AutoCAD document, you should re- install the software with the Custom or Typical setup for these options.

See Also MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585)

Drop Line String Command (Shortcut Menu) Divides a line string into individual line segments. To access Drop Line String, point to line string and right click. After you select the command from the shortcut menu that appears, the line string is divided into individual line segments. You cannot create line strings with SmartSketch. You can only drop line strings that come in from imported MicroStation .DGN files.

See Also Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160) Drawing Lines (on page 146)

Drop Complex String Command (Shortcut Menu) Breaks a complex string of elements into individual elements, such as individual arcs, lines, and circles. To access Drop Complex String, point to the complex string and right-click. After you select the command from the shortcut menu that appears, the complex string divides into individual elements. You cannot create complex strings with SmartSketch. You can only drop complex strings that come in from imported MicroStation .DGN files.

Convert Command (Rectangle) Divides a rectangle into four individual line segments. To access the Convert command: 1. Point to the rectangle and right-click to open a shortcut menu. 2. Select Convert. The rectangle is then divided into individual line segments and right angles. The Convert command only applies to rectangles.

596

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings

Place MicroStation Information in the Document To place MicroStation information onto the drawing sheet, you must first open the software and open the document that you want. You set options for inserting the MicroStation information into the document with Options on the Tools menu. The options are located on the Foreign Data tab. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

To Drag a Document 1. Open Windows Explorer and select the MicroStation document that you want. 2. Drag the document into the active document in the software.

To Insert a Document 

Click Insert > Object and select MicroStation document that you want.

If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file. See Embed an Object (on page 454).

To Drag Selected Elements 1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want. 2. Drag the selected elements into the active document in the software. If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.

To Copy and Paste Selected Elements 1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want. 2. Copy the selected information. 3. In the software, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected elements into the current document.  



You can also open a MicroStation document directly with Open on the File menu. When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. After you place the MicroStation information in the current document, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you place using the software.

See Also Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213) Object Command (on page 456) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457)

SmartSketch User's Guide

597

Working with CAD Drawings

Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Click File > Open and select the document to base a template on. Click View > Background Sheets. Click File > Sheet Setup and set the options that you want for the background sheet. Click View > Working Sheets. Click File > Sheet Setup. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want. Click Tools > Options. On the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box, select User Templates. Click Modify. On the Modify Location dialog box, select the directory where you want to store the template. Click File > Save As to save the document in the directory that you selected. This document is the template. Click File > New to create a blank document. On the File New dialog box, in the Templates box, select the template that you created to base the new document on. On the Insert menu, click Object and select the MicroStation document that you want to insert.

See Also Background Sheets Command (on page 79) How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Options Command (on page 464)

Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements in a MicroStation reference file that you inserted. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. 1. Place a MicroStation reference file in a document. You can use one of several methods.  Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)  Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on the Tools menu. 2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the same manner you would any elements.  Make Elements Equal (on page 358) Make Elements Parallel (on page 359) If you change the position of elements in a MicroStation document that is linked to your current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships are no longer valid.

598

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File 1. Open the MicroStation reference file.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and used for reference information is termed a reference file. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit . On the Tools menu, click Display Manager. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which contains the reference file on the Sheets tab. Click the Layers tab.

Turn On/Off Layer Display 1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box. 3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.

Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group 1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog box. 3. Select a color from the list. 4. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.  

The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers. If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595)

Add MicroStation Styles to a Document You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file that contains linestyles as a style resource document from any template or document. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. 1. Click File > Open to open the document to which you want to add a style resource document. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources. 4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.

SmartSketch User's Guide

599

Working with CAD Drawings 5. On the Add Style Resource dialog box, select the name of the .RSC file that you want to add to the template. 6. Click OK on each dialog box. 7. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate if you want to save changes to document. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current document ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the current document.   



Use this procedure only for linestyle resources. You must apply linestyles to each document individually, unless you apply a template. Sometimes you can attach several style resource documents that contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the Style Resources list in the style resource document has priority. In that list, the style listed first appears on the ribbon of the active document. If you want to add MicroStation fonts to a document, click Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the fonts with the Fonts 1, 2, and 3 options.

See Also How Embedding Works (on page 453) How Linking Works (on page 457) Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)

MicroStation Cells in Your Document To use MicroStation cells as symbols in your document, the cells must first be converted into individual symbols (.sym). On the File menu, Open allows you to open a MicroStation cell library. A directory is created, with the same name as the cell library. The individual cells within the library are saved as individual symbols in the new directory. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. You can drag these symbols from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer into other SmartSketch documents. Options for the cell library units (SU and PU) can be set on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. You can access this dialog box by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the Foreign Data tab, you can enter the appropriate working units in the SU: and MU: fields. Symbols in your document are saved as MicroStation cells during translation from your document to MicroStation formats.

See Also Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600) MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565)

Open a MicroStation Cell Library 1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Foreign Data tab, in the Format box, click MicroStation.

600

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. 4. On the General tab, set the Units of Resolution to specify the resolution of the cells that you want to import. 5. On each dialog box, click OK. 6. On the Main toolbar, click File > Open. 7. On the Open dialog box, click the .CEL extension and select the cell library that you want to open. A progress box appears to show the progress of the translation of the cells in the cell library. The software creates a subdirectory with the same name as the .CEL file in the directory of the cell library. The software then creates one symbol for each cell that was in the .CEL file; the names of the new symbols are identical to the cells used to create them. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) Options Command (on page 464)

MicroStation Construction Class Information When you open a MicroStation document, the construction class information is preserved with layer names. When importing the document, the software creates special layers for construction elements. The layers are named so that you can recognize the layers, including the layer for the construction element. For example, level 6 would become Constr. 6 and level Border would also become Constr. Border. You can also save these layers back out to the MicroStation document format. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595)

Working with AutoCAD Files CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports True Type Fonts and dashed gap linetypes for outstanding visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export AutoCAD drawings. Invisible AutoCAD information such as database linkages, attributes, and Xdata is also preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files Your document supports opening and saving AutoCAD files in two ways: you can either select an AutoCAD file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, or you can create a reference file from an AutoCAD file. If you use the method for selecting an AutoCAD file and translating it into equivalent elements in your document, you can click Open on the File menu. After you open an AutoCAD file using this method, the resulting file is in a SmartSketch format (igr). If an AutoCAD file contains paper space data, the resulting SmartSketch file contains two sheets: one sheet represents the paper space data, and is named paper space; the other sheet represents model space data, and is named model space. The paper space views are recreated as reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

601

Working with CAD Drawings If you use the method for creating a reference file from an AutoCAD file, you can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display and, if AutoCAD is available on your computer, edit the AutoCAD file while working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D AutoCAD file upon placement. After an AutoCAD file has been referenced using this method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and elements on the drawing sheet. The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) and setting the format to AutoCAD, you can configure the settings for importing AutoCAD data that applies to both of these methods. Roundtrip of AutoCAD data (importing AutoCAD data to SmartSketch data and exporting back to AutoCAD data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as attributes, database linkages, and Xdata are not supported during export to the AutoCAD file format.

Other Methods for Importing AutoCAD Data You can use the following methods to move AutoCAD (.DWG or .DXF) files into SmartSketch:  Cutting and pasting.  Dragging.  Inserting the information as an object. When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open documents.

Cutting and Pasting You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then cut or copy the information and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.

Dragging You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. In the Windows Explorer, select the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. The document is embedded in the drawing by default. Before you drop the document, you can embed the document in SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked. When you place the document, handles appear that allow you to scale the object. The foreign document is placed into SmartSketch and behaves much like a symbol, allowing you to click to place it or move it around. You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.

Inserting as an Object Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The geometry of the inserted document is recognized; you can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by double-clicking it.

602

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings Object inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or CAD document, such as .DWG. The inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it. If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file.

Saving SmartSketch to AutoCAD You can save a SmartSketch file as an AutoCAD file. Before you do this, you can adjust the translation options using Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Export Options. When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DWG or .DXF document, the active sheet is saved. You do not have to map layers for AutoCAD documents; the layer names are imported or exported as named in the native document. If a SmartSketch layer has not been mapped, it is automatically placed on the next available layer or level in the foreign document until the last level or layer occurs. All detail views placed in the document are saved when you save the file as an AutoCAD DWG file. SmartSketch automatically creates a separate sheet in the resulting DWG file that contains detail view(s). The name of each generated sheet corresponds to the name of the sheet in SmartSketch containing the detail view(s). For example, if sheet25 contains one or more detail views in the SmartSketch document, the resulting AutoCAD DWG file will automatically create a sheet named sheet25, which contains the detail view(s). If you save a SmartSketch document with raster reference files as AutoCAD documents, only the files of the same type (.DWG) can be exported back into.

See Also Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import (on page 620) Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export (on page 626)

Command Comparison with AutoCAD This command comparison lists AutoCAD commands and their equivalent commands in the software. AutoCAD

Software

A Arc ...Center Start Angle

Arc by Center Point Command (on page 166)

...Center Start End ...Center Start Length ...Start Center Angle

Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165)

...Start Center ...Start Center Length ...Start End Angle

SmartSketch User's Guide

603

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Software

...Start End Direction Area

Measure Area Command (on page 317)

Array .....Polar

Circular Pattern Command (on page 222)

....Rectangular

Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)

B Block

Symbols

C Change

Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433) and Style Command (on page 420)

...color

Select Tool (on page 201) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

...endpoint ...layer ...linetype ...style Circle ...2 Point

Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162) and Tangent Circle Command (on page 163)

...3 Point

Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161)

...Center Radius

Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162)

...Tangent Radius

Tangent Circle Command (on page 163) with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Color

Select Tool (on page 201) and Style Command (on page 420) or the command ribbon.

Copy ...Multiple

Select Tool (on page 201) and Copy Command (on page 214)

...Single

Copy Command (on page 214) or Move Command (on page 212) with copy option

D DIM

604

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Software

...diameter

SmartDimension Command (on page 280)

...horizontal

Distance Between Command (on page 293)

...leader

Leader Command (on page 246)

...style

Style Command (on page 420)

Dimension ...Radius

SmartDimension Command (on page 280)

...Save

Dimension Command (on page 281)

...Variables ...Vertical

SmartDimension Command (on page 280)

DxfIn

Open Command (on page 65) (choose a dxf format document)

DxfOut

Save As Command (on page 94) (use the dxf file format)

E Ellipse ....Center

Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174)

... Axis Endpoint

Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173)

End

Exit Command (File Menu) (on page 99)

Erase ...multiple objects

Select Tool (on page 201) and Delete Command (on page 219)

...single object Extend

Extend to Next Command (on page 348) (use direct manipulation of the handles.)

F Fillet

Fillet Command (on page 353)

G

SmartSketch User's Guide

605

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Software

Grid

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and PinPoint Command (on page 270)

H Hatch ...Single Hatch

Style Command (on page 420) and Fill Command (on page 554)

I J K L Layer ...OFF

Display Manager Command (on page 371)

...ON Line ...Line

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)

...Osnap TAN ...perp

Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) and SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Linetype

Style Command (on page 420)

List

Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)

M Mview

Not Applicable

Menu

Toolbars and Shortcut menus

Mirror

Mirror Command (on page 335)

Move ...multiple objects

606

Select Tool (on page 201) and Move Command (on page 212)

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Software

...single object

Select Tool (on page 201) and Move Command (on page 212)

N O Ortho

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Osnap ...INT P PSpace

Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)

Pan

Pan Command (on page 58)

Pline

FreeSketch Command (on page 184)

Plot

Print Command (on page 104)

Point

This command is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.

Q Quit

Exit Command (File Menu) (on page 99)

R Redraw

Screen refresh is automatic.

Regen

Not applicable.

Rename ...Block

Save As Command (on page 94)

Rotate ....several objects

Select Tool (on page 201) and Rotate Command (on page 332)

S Save

SmartSketch User's Guide

Save Command (on page 94)

607

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Software

Scale ...a single object

Scale Command (on page 341)

...multiple objects Snap ...Standard

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)

Stretch

Scale Command (on page 341)

Style

Style Command (on page 420)

T Text ...Justify

Text Box Command (on page 231)

Trim

Trim Command (on page 343) and Chamfer Command (on page 351)

U Undo

Undo Command (on page 205)

Units V W X Y Z Zoom ...All

Fit Command (on page 57)

...In

Zoom Area Command (on page 55)

...Out

Zoom Out Command (on page 56)

...Window

Zoom Area Command (on page 55)

See Also Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

608

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings

Task Comparison with AutoCAD This task and term comparison lists AutoCAD tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in the software. AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

A Angular Dimension

The SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar) measures the angles or sweep angles of arcs. The Angle Between Command (on page 281) (Dimension Toolbar) measures the angle between two elements.

Absolute Coordinates

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify coordinates.

Annotations

The annotation commands allow you to add text, balloons, and leaders to drawings.

Anonymous Block

Although anonymous blocks are not necessary for crosshatching, you can use the Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) and select from several fill patterns.

Approximation Points

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to easily sketch curves. The software converts the approximation into a precision drawing.

Array

The software provides the Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221) (Change Toolbar) and the Circular Pattern Command (on page 222) for drawing patterns of elements.

Arrowhead

The terminator, such as an arrow or dot at the end of a dimension line shows which element a dimension measures.

Associative Dimension

The dimensions in the software are associative.

AutoCAD Development System (ADS)

The software uses macros to create programs to run with the software. You can create programs that automate many software tasks.

AutoDesk Device Interface (ADI)

The system architecture of The software uses GDI or Open GL for developing device drivers needed for peripherals.

Axes Tripod

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) displays the xy axis as you draw.

AutoLISP

Programming with the software is easy. You can write macros for graphics or use 3rd Party LISPS that support the software architecture.

B B-spline Curve Bezier Curve

SmartSketch User's Guide

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to draw curves.

609

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Bind

OLE servers can be used to join files.

Blip Marks

Blip marks, temporary screen markers displayed when you designate a point, are not applicable to the software. The software automatically refreshes geometry as you draw.

Block

Symbols in the software are similar to AutoCAD blocks. You can also use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block in a software document. removed symbols and OLE server links

Block Definition

Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.

Block Reference

Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.

BYBLOCK

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the color or line type of symbols within a drawing.

BYLAYER

The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to define colors, line types and other properties associated with a layer.

C Cartesian Coordinate System

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to define precision points in space using a Cartesian coordinate system.

Centerline

The AutoCenter Line option in the Dimension Command (on page 281) (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a center line at the center of a curved element.

Center Mark

610

Chamfer

The Chamfer Command (on page 351) allows you to draw a line between existing lines. The existing lines are trimmed to the chamfer's end points.

Circular External Reference

OLE servers allow you to link or embed a file as a reference file.

Color Map

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the colors of elements.

Cubic Curve

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to draw curves.

Cursor

The mouse cursor allows you to place graphics and annotations. It is a screen display device.

Cursor Menu

The Shortcut menu automatically appears when you right-click. The commands displayed on the Shortcut menu depend upon the type of element or object you select.

Curve

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to draw

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Curve Fitting

curves.

D Default

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to predefine the default settings of elements.

Definition Points

The software does not need definition points for placing an associative dimension because all dimensions are associated with the geometry.

DIESEL (Direct Interpretively Evaluated String Expression Language)

Programming in the software allows you to program and customize menu items.

Diameter Dimension

The SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a diameter dimension.

Dimension Line

A dimension line shows where a measurement starts and stops. All dimensions in the software have dimension lines.

Dimension Line Arc

The arc spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of an angular dimension. An angular dimension can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar).

Dimension Style

The settings that determine the appearance of the dimension. You can set the dimension style formats in the software by using the Dimension Command (on page 281).

Dimension Text

The value and text display of dimensioned elements is defined by using the Dimension Command (on page 281).

Dimension Variables

The dimensioning variables can be defined with the Dimension Command (on page 281).

Display Extents

Windows are used as display devices. The window coordinates are defined as view coordinates.

Documentation Drawing

Documentation drawings are two-dimensional drawings that describe a real world object. Documentation drawings are composed of drawing sheets.

Drag

Geometry or documents can be moved by dragging them with the mouse cursor.

Drawing

Drawing sheets are used to draw your elements on.

Drawing Extents

The Fill Command (on page 554) displays the entire drawing in a window.

Drawing File

Documents are drawing files that can be saved on the disk. You can save files in the software format or in AutoCAD format.

SmartSketch User's Guide

611

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Drawing Unit

The units of measure for a drawing sheet can be English or metric.

dxf (Drawing Interchange Format)

The files you create can be saved in the ASCII file format used by AutoCAD through OLE servers.

E Entity

Entities are elements within documents.

Extension Lines

Extension lines, also called witness lines or projection lines, are parts of dimensions.

External Program

The software allows you to write and run external programs.

External Reference (xref)

OLE servers allow you to attach files to one another.

F Fill

The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.

Fillet

The Fillet Command (on page 353) creates a constant radius blend between two elements. The elements are trimmed to the end points of the fillet.

Fit Points

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to place curves with interpolation and approximation points.

Freeze

The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to define how you want the information on specific layers to display.

G Graphics Area

Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing.

Graphics Cursor

The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations.

Graphics Screen / Graphics Window

The windows of the software allow you to create graphics and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the window.

Grips

Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit.

Grips Modes

Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit.

H Handle

612

Handles in the software are similar to grips in AutoCAD.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Hatching

The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.

Horizontal Dimension

Horizontal or vertical dimensions can be placed with the Distance Between Command (on page 293) (Dimension Toolbar).

I Icon Menu

Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names.

Include Angle

The SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to describe the sweep angle of a dimension.

Initial Environment

Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new drawing.

Instance

Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block or convert the graphics of an AutoCAD block.

Interpolation Points

The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to create curves. The points that the curve passes through are created when you draw the curve.

Island

Islands are closed boundaries that have not been filled within an area that has been filled with the Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar).

J K Key

The software provides user properties, OLE servers, and Open Database Connection (ODBC) from Microsoft.

L Layer

Layers allow you to group elements according to type or for manipulation purposes.

Leader

A leader line with a terminator allows you to place annotations on drawings.

Linetype

The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define dash definitions for lines.

Link

In AutoCAD, a link is a database connection between an SQL element and a database record. In the software, links allow you to reference information between documents.

M

SmartSketch User's Guide

613

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Macro

The software allows you to write programs in the form of macros. A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named and saved.

Method

When you program with the software, you use methods. A method is a named operation or instance.

Mirror

The Mirror Command (on page 335) allows you to move elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.

Mnemonic

The mnemonics on menus and dialog boxes allow you to select commands quickly.

Model Space

In the software, you can create 2-D models, which represent real world objects, by drawing the real world object on a drawing sheet.

N Node

The Curve Command (on page 171) in the software draws a curve that has nodes. The nodes describe the various key points along the curve.

Normal

A perpendicular vector.

Noun/Verb Selection

In the software you can select either the command or the object first.

NURBS (Non- Uniform Rational B- spline) Curve

A non-uniform rational B-spline curve. The software curves are mathematically defined as NURBS.

O

614

Object

The software provides elements for drawing creation.

Object Snap (Osnap)

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and PinPoint Command (on page 270) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer.

Object Snap Override

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and PinPoint Command (on page 270) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer.

Origin

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The Measure Distance command (Tools menu) allows you to locate positions and points on elements including elements on symbols.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Ortho Mode

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and PinPoint Command (on page 270) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer.

Orthogonal

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) allows you to define horizontal or vertical element positions on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the position of the mouse pointer.

P Pan

The Pan Command (on page 58) allows you to shift the view of a drawing.

Paper Space

Drawing sheets are 2-D areas that you can use to draw.

Parallel Dimension

Parallel dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar). A linear dimension can be parallel to the line it measures.

Personalization

You can personalize when you install the software.

Pick

Handles and selection sets allow you to select geometry and objects. The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations.

Point

An x and y position in space.

Pline

The FreeSketch Command (on page 184) allows you to create an element that is composed of one or more connected line or arc segments.

Polar Coordinate System

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Polygon Window

Handles and selection sets highlight when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit.

Polyline

The FreeSketch Command (on page 184) allows you to create an element that is composed of one or more connected line or arc segments.

Q R Radial Dimension

Radial dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar).

Real World Units

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then scale to real-world units.

SmartSketch User's Guide

615

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

Redraw

Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.

Regenerate

Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.

Region

Regions are automatically closed as you draw with the SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261).

Relative Coordinates

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Rubber- Band Line

The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the mouse cursor.

Running Object Snap

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) allows you to connect end points by moving the pointer over the end points.

S Screen Menu

Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names.

Script File

Scripts are written and run as macros. Programming with SmartSketch allows you to write macros for the software. A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named and saved.

Selection Set

The software provides group selection and manipulation using Select Tool (on page 201) and edit commands.

Snap Mode

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) allows you to define how you want to locate elements.

Snap Resolution

The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) allows you to define locate zones that define how close the pointer must be to an element you want to recognize or select.

Space

Drawing Sheets allow you to draw in a 2-D work space.

T Text Style

The Text Box Command (on page 231) (Draw Toolbar) lets you define the text characteristics you want to use.

Thickness

The z value, or elevation, of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through OLE servers when an AutoCAD file is embedded in a software file.

Toolbar

Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names.

Transparent Command

The view commands allow you to start a Command while another is processing.

U

616

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings AutoCAD

Equivalent Command

UCS (User Coordinate System) Icon

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Unit V Vector

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Vertical Dimension

The length of a line can be measured with the SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar). The Distance Between Command (on page 293) (Dimension Toolbar) can also be used to place a horizontal or vertical dimension.

View

Windows are used to display drawings from a particular viewpoint.

Viewport

Drawing sheets allow you to define a bounded area.

W WPolygo

The software provides group selection and manipulation using the Select Tool (on page 201).

X XYZ Point Filters

The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.

Y Z Zoom Extents

The Zoom Out Command (on page 56) and Zoom Area Command (on page 55) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fill Command (on page 554) changes the display of a window so that all the elements are displayed.

See Also Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565) Working with CAD Drawings (on page 565)

AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Conceptual Design Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, it is a natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also

SmartSketch User's Guide

617

Working with CAD Drawings alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the AutoCAD (.dwg) file format to complete downstream tasks in AutoCAD.

Drawing Files You can use the software to add annotations to existing AutoCAD drawing files by inserting an AutoCAD drawing file in the software with Object on the Insert menu, adding annotations and text, and saving the file in AutoCAD format. If you have not installed AutoCAD but need to provide drawing files in AutoCAD format, you can create the drawing files in the software and then save the file in AutoCAD format.

Project Management Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to integrate AutoCAD drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing files from several sources and combine

618

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings them into a single project book. You can then add details and save the files in AutoCAD format so other project team members using AutoCAD can review the project.

You can also use the software as a central location for all project information—both graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into an AutoCAD file that has been opened in the software.

Review and Redlining The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining AutoCAD drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D AutoCAD drawing in the software and then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and make revisions on top of the native data. After reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.

SmartSketch User's Guide

619

Working with CAD Drawings See Also Open Command (on page 65) Save As Command (on page 94) Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import When you translate AutoCAD data into your document, you are concerned with either visual fidelity or data fidelity or both. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

Visual Fidelity Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been translated. Your software preserves the visual accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support for the following seven different areas:

Colors AutoCAD colors are automatically mapped to the corresponding matching red, green, blue (RGB) color in the color table, resulting in a perfect color match. Colors that were used in AutoCAD to determine plotting pen widths can also be mapped to a width in your document by using AutoCAD Color on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box.

Widths AutoCAD R9 through R14 polylines are the only type of entity that support a width. Polyline widths are automatically mapped to an exact matching in model width of your document. All other entities such as lines, arcs, and circles in AutoCAD do not support width. For the entities that do not support width, a default width is applied (all elements in your document have a width). You can make changes to any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) after you select Options on the Tools menu). SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that correspond to standard metric pencil leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4, and 2.0.

Linestyles AutoCAD default line styles are pre-mapped to the most equivalent line styles for your document on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab.

Hatches AutoCAD default hatches are automatically mapped to matching fill styles in your document. Hatches other than the defaults delivered with AutoCAD are stroked into their primitive elements to preserve their visual accuracy.

Font Styles AutoCAD default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent font styles in your document, True Type Fonts, on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Other

620

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings fonts default to the Arial true type font delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping on the tab, it defaults to Arial.

Xrefs AutoCAD Xrefs are imported as reference files in your document, which use the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, width, line styles, hatches, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.

Paper Space If paper space was active when an AutoCAD file was saved, the file containing paper space data causes two sheets to be created when you click Open on the File menu. One sheet represents the paper space data and is named Paper Space. The other sheet represents model space data and is named Model Space. The paper space views are recreated as reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet. AutoCAD files that are reference files instead of files translated using Open on the File menu, do not support the display of paper space data; instead, the model space information is displayed.

Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature The software automatically calculates the sheet scale in your document then you import AutoCAD documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must manually modify the .INI file. To modify the .INI file, you click Explore on the Start menu and go to the directory where SmartSketch resides. You can use any text editor to modify the file. Double-click itacad. In the Options section of the file, set Ignore sheet scale = 0. You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert an AutoCAD document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.

Using AutoCAD Fonts and Styles in Your Document The software supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType™ engineering fonts. When you open a .dwg document, the software provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD font. You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.

Data fidelity Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. Your document preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing equivalent element types that entities are mapped to. The software also provides support for non-displayed data such as attributes on the resulting elements. Your document preserves data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support for the following areas:

SmartSketch User's Guide

621

Working with CAD Drawings Units AutoCAD files are considered unit-less files. The File Units setting for AutoCAD import data on the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated AutoCAD data or referenced AutoCAD data.

Coordinates AutoCAD data is automatically positioned to the matching coordinate positions when you translate the AutoCAD files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced AutoCAD file coordinate positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box. You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.

Layers Within your document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. AutoCAD layer names are preserved as layer names in your document, but the color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied directly to the resulting element. In AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on a layer-by-layer basis. When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths change. In your document, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied directly to each individual element or object. When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths are not affected. When you export back to AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on an entity basis.

AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element: 





Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block containing it. The software does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated layer. The software does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties. The software supports this concept for all of its elements and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.

Blocks When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate cells or blocks into symbols. You can change this default with the Options command on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded groups. This translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in your document. When you import an AutoCAD document that has blocks, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ITACAD.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.

Blocks with Attribute Data When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.

622

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 3D Data All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box. The following is an entity to element map when you translate files using Open on the File menu. AutoCAD

SmartSketch

Line

Line

Circle

Ellipse

Polyline (lines only)

Linestring

Polyline (lines & arcs) Complex String Arc

Arc

Trace

Line

Point

Point

Face3d

Line

Solid

Linestring

Block

Symbol

Multiline

Linestring

Spline

Bspline Curve

Dimension

Dimension

Text

Text

Paperspace Viewport Reference Xline

Line

Ray

Line

Database Linkages

Dynamic Attribute set on element

Attributes

Dynamic Attribute set on element

Ellipse

Ellipse

Region

Ignored

Solid3d

Ignored

Mtext

Text

Leader

Leader

Tolerance

Group

Xdata

Dynamic Attribute set on the element

Hatch

Fill

Image

Reference

SmartSketch User's Guide

623

Working with CAD Drawings

  





The Image Integrator option must be downloaded to support raster reference files. AutoCAD symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (for example rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols. None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using commands in the software. However, if AutoCAD software is located on your machine, then you can click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This will open the AutoCAD reference file in the AutoCAD application. If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file and then update the reference file in your document. If you change the inserted information (copied from AutoCAD), the original information does not change.

See Also Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current document. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639) General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 624) Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 625) Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 625) Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 626)

General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) Blocks - Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded symbol or a group of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym extension. When you import an AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0. Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create a document. Browse - Displays the Browse dialog box. Fit imported data to active drawing sheet - Places the AutoCAD data on the active drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.

See Also AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639) AutoCAD Template File Dialog Box Controls how you open a document.

624

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.

See Also Open Command (on page 65) Open a Document (on page 65)

Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) Maps AutoCAD fonts to system TrueType fonts. SmartSketch supports system TrueType fonts. AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx) and postscript binary fonts (.pfb) are not supported. Many of the standard AutoCAD fonts are pre-mapped to their most equivalent TrueType fonts. If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font mapping list.

See Also AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The values for mapping are as follows: Line Style

Type

Number

Normal

Continuous

9

Dashed

Dash

10

Dotted

Dot

11

Dash Dot

Dash Dot

12

Dash 2Dot

Dash Dot Dot

13

Chain

Chain

18

No Style Delivered

Centered Chain

19

Double Chain

Double Chain

20

2Dash Dot

Dash Dash Dot

21

Zig-Zag

No Type Delivered

22

No Style Delivered

End Gap

23

See Also AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

SmartSketch User's Guide

625

Working with CAD Drawings Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color. Default Width - Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or color-to-width mapping.

See Also AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export When you translate your document into AutoCAD data, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity or Data fidelity or both.  

To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. To see the AutoCAD versions that are supported for export, click the General tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box, and click the Version arrow.

Visual Fidelity Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been translated. Your document preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to AutoCAD file by providing support for the following areas:

Colors The software colors map to the closest matching red, green, blue (RGB) color in the default AutoCAD color table. Widths can be mapped to an AutoCAD color by using the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. AutoCAD colors are used to determine plotting pen widths.

Widths Every element in your document has widths applied that are exported as polyline objects with equivalent AutoCAD widths if the widths are equal to or greater than the polyline width threshold. The Polyline width threshold field is located on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Whenever possible, elements that have widths less than the threshold are exported as AutoCAD entities that do not support width.

Linestyles The default line styles in your document are pre-mapped to the most equivalent AutoCAD line styles on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab. Linestyles that are not mapped on export are stroked to give them a more correct appearance. The default length of the stroking line is 0.1 millimeters (mm).

626

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings Fill Styles SmartSketch default fill styles are exported as matching hatch styles in the resulting AutoCAD files. Blank fill styles are exported as wipeout objects.The boundaries of curved objects with fill styles are exported as polygonal shapes.

Font Styles SmartSketch default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent AutoCAD font styles (True Type Fonts (TTF)) on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Other fonts default to the txt.shx font deliver with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the font tab, it defaults to txt.shx in the resulting AutoCAD file.

Dimension Styles SmartSketch dimension styles are preserved as AutoCAD dimension styles in the resulting dwg files.

Reference Files and OLE Inserts AutoCAD .DWG files that are referenced in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD Xrefs in the resulting AutoCAD file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD raster files in the resulting AutoCAD file. Linked and embedded references, including IGR, DGN, DWG and DXF file types, will be saved as AutoCAD reference files during export to AutoCAD. Embedded files will be saved in the same location as the master file; linked files will be save in the same location as the original linked file. OLE inserted objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during export to the AutoCAD file format. The Merge References setting in itacad.ini determines how linked and embedded references are translated to AutoCAD. If set to 1 or 2, linked and embedded references are translated to AutoCAD block references and merged into a single master DWG or DXF file. If set to 0, separate DWG files are generated for each linked and embedded reference. The default value is 1.

Multiple Sheets Only the active sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to an AutoCAD file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported.

Data fidelity Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in AutoCAD. SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with elements in the file. SmartSketch preserves element and document data support for the following areas:

Units The subunits of the file being saved as a dwg file determines the model size of the graphics in the resulting AutoCAD file.

Coordinates SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate to AutoCAD.

SmartSketch User's Guide

627

Working with CAD Drawings SmartFrames and Detail Views SmartFrames that exist on the active sheet are preserved upon translation to the AutoCAD file; Detail views - whether on the active sheet or on a background sheet - are also preserved upon translation to the AutoCAD file. A separate sheet that contains one or more detail views is automatically created in the export AutoCAD DWG file. The name of the created sheet is taken from the name of the sheet in SmartSketch containing the detail view(s).

Text Box Borders In order for text box borders to display correctly in an exported DWG file, you must have wipeout objects enabled. In AutoCAD 2002, you can download the AutoCAD Wipeout Object Enabler executable directly from the AutoDesk FTP site. In newer versions of AutoCAD, you can find the Wipeout Express Tool inside the AutoCAD installation.

Layers SmartSketch layer names are preserved as AutoCAD layer names, but the color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied directly to Byentity, the resulting element In AutoCAD.

AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element: 

Byblock—a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block containing it. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to the resulting element.  Bylayer—a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated layer. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the resulting element.  Byentity—occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties. SmartSketch supports this concept for all of its elements and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles. The following is an entity to element map when you translate files:

628

SmartSketch

AutoCAD

Line

Line

Ellipse

Circle

Arc

Arc

Point

Point

Connector

Polyline

Linestring

Polyline

Bspline Curve

Polyline

Rectangle

Polyline

Complex String

Polyline

Reference

Xref

Text

Text

Leader

Leader

Dimension

Dimension

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings Group

Entity or Group

Symbol

Block

SmartLabel

Entities

Parametric Symbols

Entities

Multi-representatio Entities n Symbol Raster Reference

Raster Reference

Leader Lines and Terminators When using arrows to terminate leader lines, the leader lines are exported and display in AutoCAD, but the terminating arrows do not display in cases where the leader line is less than half the length of the entire leader (line and arrow).

See Also Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)

AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 629) Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 630) Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 630) Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 631)

General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) Version - Specifies the versions of AutoCAD that can be used for export. You can select multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog box. Prototype DWG File - Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to use during translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color tables, and other preconfigured settings. Browse - Displays the AutoCAD Template File dialog box.

See Also AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

SmartSketch User's Guide

629

Working with CAD Drawings Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) Maps the fonts in the current document to AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx), AutoCAD postscript binary fonts (.pfb), or system TrueType fonts (.ttf). If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font mapping list.

See Also AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) Maps the AutoCAD line types to line style definitions in the current document. The number values listed below are used in the linestyle table to map linestyle definitions in the current document to AutoCAD line types. Linestyle

Type

Number

Normal

Continuous

9

Dashed

Dash

10

Dotted

Dot

11

Dash Dot

Dash Dot

12

Dash 2Dot

Dash Dot Dot

13

Chain

Chain

18

No Style Delivered

Centered Chain

19

Double Chain

Double Chain

20

2Dash Dot

Dash Dash Dot

21

Zig-Zag

No Type Delivered

22

No Style Delivered

End Gap

23

See Also AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

630

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color. Polyline Width Threshold - Defines the threshold used to determine when polylines with width must be created.

See Also AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629) Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638) Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)

Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation The configuration file, itacad.ini, is delivered with the Translators (on page 28) option to \Program. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and an AutoCAD document. Most of the options found in the itacad.ini file are accessible through the various tabs on the AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) and AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629). It is recommended that options modified directly in the .INI file be done so only by an experienced user at his/her own risk. The following table defines the .INI settings, along with any corresponding default values: [Name of the Section /Name of the setting] 1

[Options]

2

Seed File

3

Description

Name of a seed file used for export

Import

Export

Default

Value

Yes

Yes

File name

Enable Logging If set, a log file will be created

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

4

Read Default Units

Sets the default units for foreign format

Yes

Yes

0

59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm; 63=km; 64=in; 65=ft; 66=yd; 67=mil

5

Template File

Sets the document that will be used as Yes a template when importing foreign data.

Yes

File name

6

Symbol Template File

Sets the symbol file that will be used as a template when importing foreign data

N/A

File name

SmartSketch User's Guide

Yes

631

Working with CAD Drawings 7

Dissolve Symbol to Groups

A flag that indicates whether or not to dissolve parametric and multi-representation symbols to groups

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

8

Ignore Sheet Scale

If set to 1, the file translated into RAD is fit to the sheet size by adjusting the sheet scale.

Yes

N/A

1

0/1

9

Processing Batch Translation

If set, progress bar dialog boxes do not display during the translation.

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

10

Attribute Sets

Names of attributes

Yes

Yes

String consisting of attribute names delimited by semicolons

11

Read Block Options

Sets how the blocks imported from AutoCAD are handled. The first option translates blocks into groups, whereas the second option preserves blocks.

Yes

N/A

Shared Embeds

632

Rigid groups/ Shared Embeds

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 12

Write Version

Sets what version of the foreign file format is created on export.

N/A

Yes

5.0

13

Read Reference Options

Specifies options to process reference files during translation

Yes

N/A

Translate/Lin k/Merge

14

Read Default Width

Sets the width to be assigned to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or color to width mapping.

Yes

N/A

0.25

Millimeters

15

Write Polyline Width Threshold

Sets the width to determine when polylines with width must be created.

N/A

Yes

16

Dissolve Symbol to Groups

A flag that indicates whether or not to dissolve parametric and multi-representation symbols to groups.

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

SmartSketch User's Guide

3.x, 4.0, 4.4, 5.0

633

Working with CAD Drawings 17

Ignore Sheet Scale

If set to 1, the file translated into RAD is fit to the sheet size by adjusting the sheet scale.

Yes

N/A

1

0/1

18

Export All Graphics to PaperSpace

This flag deals with the export of files with reference attachments. If set to 0, all graphic objects are exported to Model space. SmartFrames with clipping boundaries do not display properly and detail views are ignored. If set to 1, all graphic objects are exported into the Paper space. SmartFrames with clipping boundaries display properly. Detail views are ignored. If set to 2, all graphic objects are exported to Model space and Paper space is populated so that the original SmartSketch sheet is recreated.

Yes

Yes

2

0/1/2

19

Process Multiple Orientation in Viewports

This flag indicates whether or not to handle multiple orientation in viewports.

Yes

N/A

0

0/1

20

Max Nesting Depth

Determines how deep the translation processes the reference files.

Yes

N/A

0

Number

21

Application Text Type

Determines if text origin and justification are preserved.

Yes

Yes

1

0= Text origin is always in the upper left corner 1= Origin preserved

22

Single Text Alignment

If set to 1, horizontal text alignment is set to Horizontal Justification. If not specified or if it is set to 0, horizontal text alignment is set to Left.

Yes

No

0

0/1

23

Process Non-Displayabl e Reference Files

Determines if non-displayable reference files are translated.

Yes

Yes

1

0/1

634

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 24

Process Construction Elements

If set, elements on a MicroStation construction layer are translated.

Yes

N/A

0

0/1

25

Attributes as SmartText

Determines if SmartText is created from the attributes

Yes

N/A

0

0/1

26

AutoCAD Extended Data

Sets the XData Xdata to be imported.

Yes

N/A

String consisting of XData names delimited by semi- colons

27

Stroke Reference

Determines if attached reference files are stroked on export.

N/A

Yes

0/1

28

Stroke Text

Determines if text is stroked during export.

N/A

Yes

0

29

Stroke Dimension

If set, the dimension objects are stroked on export.

N/A

Yes

0/1

30

Disk-based Symbols

When set to 1, .SYM files are created for each foreign symbol during import.

N/A

Yes

0

0/1

31

Ignore Non-Displayabl e Symbols

When set to 1, non-displayable objects Yes are exported.

Yes

0

0/1

SmartSketch User's Guide

0/1

635

Working with CAD Drawings 32

Preserve Layers on Dissolved Symbols

If set, members or symbol are exported even if their layer is turned off.

N/A

Yes

0

0/1

33

Preserve MSTN UDLS Styles

When set to 0, user-defined linestyles are stroked.

Yes

Yes

0

0/1

34

Push Owner Attributes to its Children

If set to 1, RAD dynamic attributes are moved from a group (symbol) to its members.

N/A

Yes

0/1

35

Metafile to Raster DPI Resolution

Sets the dpi resolution for raster metadata during export.

N/A

Yes

350

dpi resolution

36

Stroking Tolerance

Determines the accuracy used when objects are stroked during export.

N/A

Yes

0.1

millimeters

37

Hatch support complexity

Supported Hatch complexity of output format.

N/A

Yes

1 (only supports a single independent hatch line with dashes and gaps)

38

Need hatch description and stroke

If true, then stroke hatch even when hatch name and description are included in symbology.

N/A

Yes

1

39

Style Resource Name

Sets the style filename to be used on export.

N/A

Yes

Filename

636

0/1

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings 40

Delete Symbol Definitions

If set, symbol definitions are deleted after the translation.

Yes

N/A

1

0/1

41

Merge References

If set to 1 or 2, linked and embedded references are translated to AutoCAD block references and merged into a single master DWG file. If set to 0, separate DWG files will be generated for each linked and embedded reference.

No

Yes

1

0 = No Merge 1 = Merge with BIND 2 = Merge with INSERT

42

[Read Default View] and [Write Default View]

Yes

Yes

43

Transformation

Sets the 4x4 matrix.

Yes

Yes

44

Type

Yes

Yes

0

45

Name

Yes

Yes

0

46

Reference Point

Yes

Yes

0

47

Normal

Yes

Yes

0

48

Projection Vector

Yes

Yes

0

49

Active View

Yes

Yes

1

50

[Read Text Fonts] and [Write Text Fonts]

Determines the mapping of fonts between the foreign file format and RAD.

Yes

Yes

51

[Option Forms]

The following entries determine what dialog box is opened on the Foreign Data tab (Options dialog box)

52

Dll

Yes

Yes

53

Import Entry Point

Yes

N/A

54

Export Entry Point

N/A

Yes

55

[Read Widths] and [Write Widths]

Determines the mapping of the line widths between the foreign file format and RAD.

Yes

Yes

56

Export Graphic Groups

If this option is set to 1, SmartSketch groups translate to AutoCAD as groups. If the option is set to 0, SmartSketch groups translate to AutoCAD as individual objects.

No

Yes

SmartSketch User's Guide

identity matrix

4x4 matrix

1

0/1

637

Working with CAD Drawings 57

Override Layers on Export

The OLOE ini setting is used only when the itacad.ini file has a seed file entry in it and is used in exporting drawing files.

No

Yes

1

0 = Visibility and symbology of the graphics are controlled by the template file layer. 1 = Visibility and symbology of the graphics are controlled by the RAD document layer. 2 = Actual block is placed on the correct layer.

See Also Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import (on page 620)

Open an AutoCAD Document 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > Options. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box. In the Import box, click Options to access the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in the Template File box.

You can search for the template by clicking Browse. 5. Click File > Open. 6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dwg extension. 7. Select the document that you want to open.  

  

  

If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag an AutoCAD document from the Windows Explorer into the current document. After you place the AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and establish relationships among the new information and elements that are already in the current document. AutoCAD polylines are imported as SmartSketch line strings. AutoCAD mtext (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into the software as two separate line strings (text boxes). When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute date into symbols with SmartLabels. All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents using Open on the File menu are delivered through the Custom or Typical setup for these options. If you cannot open an AutoCAD document, you should re-install the software with the Custom or Typical setup for these options.

Place AutoCAD Information in the Document To place AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you must first open the software and open the document that you want. You should set options for bringing the AutoCAD information into the document with Options on the Tools menu. The options appear on the Foreign Data tab. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

638

SmartSketch User's Guide

Working with CAD Drawings To Drag a Document 1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the AutoCAD document that you want. 2. Drag the document into the current document in the software.

To Insert a Document 

Click Insert > Object and select the AutoCAD document that you want.

If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the Master file.

To Drag Selected Elements 1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want. 2. Drag the selected elements into the current document in the software. If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.

To Copy and Paste Selected Elements 1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want. 2. Copy the selected information. 3. In the software, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected elements into the current document.  





You can also open an AutoCAD document directly with Open on the File menu. When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. After you place the AutoCAD information in the current document, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you place using the software. When placing translated AutoCAD symbols, all elements of the items that make up the body of the component need to be placed on the default layer of the document.

See Also Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213) Object Command (on page 456) Options Command (on page 464)

Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements within an AutoCAD object that you inserted. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option. 1. Place an AutoCAD reference file on the drawing sheet. You can use one of several methods.  Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)  Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638)

SmartSketch User's Guide

639

Working with CAD Drawings You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on the Tools menu. 2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the document in the same manner you would any elements.  Make Elements Equal (on page 358) Make Elements Parallel (on page 359) If you change the position of elements in an AutoCAD document that is linked to your current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships will not be valid any more.

See Also Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)

Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File 1. Open the AutoCAD reference file.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and used for reference information is termed a reference file. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit . On the Tools menu, click Display Manager. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which contains the reference file on the Sheets tab. Click the Layers tab.

Turn On/Off Layer Display 1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box. 3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.

Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group 1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog box. 3. Select a color from the list. 4. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.  

The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers. If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.

See Also Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638) Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595)

640

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 22

Using the Validation Add-In Tool The SmartPlant® Validation Tools Add-In is a file validation utility that allows you to scan your project files to detect certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style type and geometry type. The results of each scan are written to a validation log file. After it is installed, you can use the utility to scan your files on a case-by-case basis or to scan each file automatically when it is opened in the software.

Install the Validation Tools Add-In The Validation Tools AddIn allows you to run a file validation utility that scans documents for certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style type and geometry type. The results of each scan are written to a validation log file. You can use the Validation Tool to scan your files on a case-by-case basis or to scan each file automatically when it is opened in the software. 1. Click Tools > Add-Ins. 2. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Validation Tools AddIn check box in the list of Available add-ins. 

If the add-in is not displayed in the Available add-ins list, click Browse and navigate to :\Program\igrValidateAddIn413.dll.  If you do not see the Validation Tools AddIn file, run the Custom setup to install this option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software. 3. Click OK. The software displays the Validate toolbar in the SmartSketch window. 

You can drag the Validate toolbar and dock it at the top, bottom, or either side of the document window. The Validation Tools Add-In remains active until you disable it. To disable the Validation Tools Add-In, clear the associated check box.

SmartSketch User's Guide

641

Using the Validation Add-In Tool

Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document 

Make sure you have installed the Validation Tools Add-In. For more information, see Install the Validation Tools Add-In.  The following procedure is only necessary if you have disabled the Validate on file open option the Validation Options dialog box. For more information about this option, as well as the other options available on the dialog box, read Validation Options Dialog Box (on page 643). 1. Open a document in SmartSketch. 2. On the Validate toolbar, click Validate

.



If the Validate toolbar is not displayed, do the following: i. Click View > Toolbars. ii. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the Validate check box in the Toolbars list. iii. Click OK.  So that the Validate toolbar remains visible, you can dock it to the top, bottom, or either side of the drawing window. 3. The Validate Tool scans the document. If no invalid elements are found, the software displays the following message:

4. Click OK to close the Validate message box. 



The software writes the results of the file validation process to a log file and saves it in the location you specified in the Validation Options dialog box. The name of the log file is dependent upon the storage location you have specified. You can enable the Validate Tool to automatically scan each file as it is opened in the software.

See Also Validation Options Command (on page 643)

642

SmartSketch User's Guide

Using the Validation Add-In Tool

Validate Command Runs the Validate Tool. During the file validation process, the software scans the contents of the active document for certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style type and geometry type. The results of the scan are written to a log file and saved in the location specified in the Validation Options dialog box.

See Also Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document (on page 642) Validation Options Dialog Box (on page 643)

Validation Options Command Displays the Validation Options dialog box. You use this dialog box to specify the storage location for the log file that the software generates when it scans the contents of a file for inconsistencies and invalid elements. Additionally, you can specify whether or not the Validate Tool will automatically scan the contents of each file as it is opened in the software.

See Also Validation Options Command (on page 643)

Validation Options Dialog Box Provides the ability to specify the location of the log file that the software generates whenever it runs the Validate Tool. You can also use this dialog box to enable or disable the utility to automatically scan each file as it is opened in the software.

Log file location - Specifies where the log file that the software generates during the file validation process is stored. You can choose any one of the following three options:  Desktop - Saves the validation log file on the Desktop of the local computer. By default, the software saves the log file as SmartSketch.Document.log.  Document location - Saves the validation log file in the same location as the document that is being validated. By default, the software saves the log file as the full document name appended with .log (filename.igr.log).  Path - Saves the validation log file to the location and filename specified by the path. When specifying a path, you must type the full location, including the filename. Validate on file open - Enables the Validate Tool to scan each document automatically whenever it is opened in the software. This option is disabled by default.

SmartSketch User's Guide

643

Using the Validation Add-In Tool When the Validate on file open option is active, the software does not create a log file nor does it display the Validate message box after it scans a document..

See Also Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document (on page 642) Validation Options Command (on page 643)

644

SmartSketch User's Guide

SECTION 23

Sample Workflows The topics in this section provide you with step-by-step workflows for using SmartSketch tools to perform a variety of common tasks.

Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained Relationships cannot be maintained in certain cases, as in the following example. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points . 2. Click where you want the sweep of the arc to begin.

3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes a point on the element relationship with a line on the drawing sheet.

4. When the Point On relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the second input point for the arc. 5. Move the pointer past the line and click. The position of this input point defines it as the end of the sweep, making the point in the middle a key point that cannot have relationships. The software recognizes this, and does not maintain the point on element relationship.

If the third input point for the arc had been between the first two points, then it would have been interpreted as the arc midpoint, making the second input point one end of the arc sweep. In this case, the point would have been constrainable, and the software would have maintained the point on element relationship.

SmartSketch User's Guide

645

Sample Workflows

Connect Points While Drawing a Line 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous 2. Click where you want the line to begin.

.

3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the end point of a line on the drawing sheet.

4. When the point on relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of the line.

If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines meet.

Connect Points While Modifying a Line 1. Select the line you want to modify.

2. Position the Select Tool over the handle at the end of the line you want to modify. The pointer changes to a plus (+) shape to indicate that you have located the handle.

646

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows 3. Drag the handle to a position where the software recognizes the end point of another line on the drawing sheet.

4. Release the mouse button to place the end point of the line you are modifying at the end point of the stationary line.

Creating a Kinematics Animation 1. Click File > New. 2. Select the Mechanical Imperial template. Selecting the Mechanical Imperial template creates a document with a C-wide sheet and a 1:1 scale. 3. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer . 4. Browse to the directory with the field pump symbols. 5. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the foundation symbol in the lower left area of the document. 6. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the pendulum, donkey head, beam rod, and pump thread symbols so that these do not overlap each other or the foundation.

To connect the parts 1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships. Your action confirms that the relationships are maintained when you move parts of the drawing. 2. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock

SmartSketch User's Guide

.

647

Sample Workflows 3. To lock the foundation, select one of the end points of the line on the lower right side. This action keeps the foundation stationary when you attach the other components or animate the movement.

To connect the pendulum to the motor on the foundation 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. . 2. Select the circle on the left end of the pendulum arm as the first element. 3. Select the small circle on the motor as the next element. The pendulum moves so that the circles align and are concentric. The pendulum appears on top of the motor and the foundation. If the pendulum does not do this, select the pendulum using Select on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the pendulum is on top of the motor and foundation.

To connect the donkey head to the top of the foundation 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the circle at the center of the donkey head for the first element. 3. Select the circle at the top of the A-frame of the foundation symbol for the second element. The donkey head moves so it appears balanced on top of the A-frame and the circles align.

To connect the beam rod to the pendulum 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the lower circle on the beam rod for the first element. 3. Select the right-most circle on the pendulum arm for the second element. This circle is almost centered on the pendulum. The rod moves and connects with the pendulum.

To connect the beam rod to the donkey head 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the circle on top of the beam rod for the first element. 3. Select the circle on the left side of the donkey head for the second element. The pendulum, donkey head, and beam rod now move so that the connections are complete. The beam rod appears on top of the pendulum. Otherwise, click Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the beam rod appears on top of the other parts.

To connect the pump thread to the donkey head 1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect . 2. Click the top of the line on the pump thread. 3. For the second element, select the endpoint of the small line embedded along the right edge of the donkey head. The thread moves and attaches to the head. You can zoom on the edge of the head to find this line, because it is very small. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area .

To place a dimension on the pendulum for controlling the rotation angle 1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

648

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows 2. On the Relationships tab of the SmartSketch dialog box, ensure that the Midpoint check box is set. 3. On the Dimension toolbar, click Angle Between to place the dimension. The dimension is driving, so it appears in black . To select the circle on the pendulum where it connects to the motor, zoom in close enough to see the entire pendulum in full view. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area. You must select the right circle to ensure that a driving dimension is placed. If you use the wrong circle, the dimension will be a driven dimension, shown as green. If this should occur, delete the dimension and try again. 4. Pass the pointer over the circle where the pendulum connects to the motor. You see three ellipses appear next to the pointer. 5. Click to see a box. This is PickQuick. The box has two numbers. This PickQuick box indicates how many elements you can select at this location in the window. In this case, you can select only two elements. 6. Click the number 2 square. 





You can see three squares in the PickQuick box, depending on the zoom distance when you see the ellipses. If you see more than two squares, dismiss the PickQuick box by selecting the X in the upper right, and then zoom in closer and try again. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area. After you can see only two numbered squares in the PickQuick box, select the number two square. This action selects the circle associated with box number two as the first point of the dimension. If PickQuick does not appear, you can also click Bring To Front and click the motor symbol to bring it to the front to try the previous steps. You need to click Send To Back after you complete the steps to bring the pendulum back to the front. Pass the pointer over the line on the right end of the pendulum and move slowly toward the mid-point of the line. When you see the midpoint indicator, click for the second point of the dimension. Place the dimension to the right of the pendulum. Location is not important. This dimension drives the animation of the pump.

To drive the model 

After you place the dimension, you can select the dimension with the Select Tool and change the value in the ribbon. When the dimension changes, the angle of the pendulum changes and all of the other parts change accordingly.

See Also Mechanism Modeling (on page 407) Placing Symbols (on page 392) Creating Symbols (on page 381)

SmartSketch User's Guide

649

Sample Workflows

Customizing a Toolbar Using Extend to Next on the Draw toolbar, you can extend one line to the next line. This command is easy and intuitive to use. However, sometimes you might want to extend a line a specific distance that does not depend on the location of another element. 1. In the document, place two lines that are not connected, but are perpendicular. 2. On the Tools menu, click Customize. 3. On the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab. 4. In the Categories box, click Custom Commands. 5. Click Browse. 6. On the Select Macro Directory dialog box, navigate the :\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\VB EXAMPLES\ACTXCOM\RIBBONS\EXTEND directory, and click EXTEND.OCX. If you cannot find the VB Examples directory, you must run a Custom setup and select the Programming Tools option. 7. Click OK. 8. On the Customize dialog box, in the Custom Commands box, drag the EXTEND.OCX filename onto the drawing sheet. The filename appears as a separate floating toolbar. 9. Click Close to close the Customize dialog box. 10. Drag the floating toolbar over to the top of the window and place it beside the Main toolbar. 11. On the new toolbar, click Extend. 12. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, in the Distance box, type 10 and press Enter. The dialog box automatically converts whatever you type into the units of measure that are set for the current document. You can set the units using Properties on the File menu. 13. In the document, drag the mouse over the line that you want to extend. A preview of what the line will look like shows up in a red color. 14. Click the line to set the distance. 15. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, click Close. You can write your own applications that are very similar to the EXTEND.OCX file and run them from within the current document. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartSketch > Programming Help to get more information about creating your own macros. Programming Help is only available if you have installed the Programming Tools (on page 27) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.

650

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows

Dimension the Length of a Line 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension . 2. Click a line. SmartDimension dynamically displays a linear dimension.

3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.

Dimension the Diameter of a Circle 1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension . 2. Click a circle. SmartDimension dynamically displays a diameter dimension.

3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.

Draw an Arc 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By Center Point 2. Click where you want to place the center point.

.

3. Move the pointer horizontally to a position where the software recognizes step angle alignment with the center point.

4. Click where you want the sweep to begin.

SmartSketch User's Guide

651

Sample Workflows 5. Move the pointer to a position where the software identifies the step angle you want to use for the sweep.

6. While the step angle relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of the sweep.

Draw a Horizontal Line You can use relationships to draw a line that is exactly horizontal. You can apply a horizontal relationship as you draw the line, or draw the line without a horizontal relationship.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings. On the Relationships tab, select Horizontal or Vertical, and then click OK. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in the application window.

5. Move the pointer around in the window. Notice that the dynamic line display always extends from the end point you just placed to the current pointer position. You may also see relationship indicators displayed at the pointer.

Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship Handles on the Tools menu. 6. Move the pointer to make the dynamic line approximately horizontal. 7. When the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to place the second end point.

652



If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a horizontal relationship handle on the new line.



If you do not want to place a horizontal relationship, you can follow the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared. The line will still be exactly horizontal when you draw it.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows

Draw a Line 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous 2. Click where you want a new line to begin.

.

3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. Notice that the line follows the movement of the pointer. At the same time, the pointer recognizes any relationships it encounters, such as a horizontal relationship. When the pointer finds a relationship, a relationship indicator appears at the pointer.

4. Click to place the end point of the line according to the displayed relationships. 5. Continue clicking to draw additional line segments, or right-click to end the command.

Draw a Line Connected to Another Line You can use relationships to connect an element you are drawing with an existing element. You can apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines, or draw the line without a connect relationship.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings. On the Relationships tab, set End Point, and click OK. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . Move the pointer to the end of a line in the application window. The software displays the End Point relationship indicator at the pointer. While the software displays the relationship indicator, click to place the first end point of the new line. This end point is connected to the end point of the previous line.

5. Click where you want to place the second end point of the new line.

SmartSketch User's Guide

653

Sample Workflows 6. The new line and the previous line have connected end points.



If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a connect relationship handle at the point where the two lines connect.



If you do not want to place a connect relationship, you can follow the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared. The end points of the two lines will still be exactly coincident when you draw them.

Draw a Line with PinPoint You can use PinPoint to draw a line starting at a specific x and y distance from a known position in your drawing. 1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . 2. Click where you want the target point to be. 3. Change the step value in the PinPoint Ribbon if it is not already set to a value that is appropriate for the operation. 4. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 5. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. PinPoint displays at the pointer its current x and y positions in relation to the target point. 6. Click when the pointer is positioned where you want the line to begin. 7. Click where you want the second point of the line to be, or type the length and/or angle on the Line/Arc Continuous ribbon and then click to draw the line. 8. If you are finished with the PinPoint command, click PinPoint on the Main toolbar to dismiss the command.

See Also Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147) PinPoint Command (on page 270)

Establish More Than One Relationship 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .

654

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows 2. Click where you want the line to begin.

3. Move the pointer to recognize point on element and tangent relationships with a circle on the drawing sheet.

4. While the point on element and tangent relationship indicators are displayed at the pointer, click to define the end point of the line.

If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a relationship handle for each recognized relationship.

Formatting a New Drawing You can use styles to make new drawings conform to your company's standards. For example, the software provides line styles with names such as Normal. You have decided to apply the Normal style to hidden lines. The Normal style has a line type that looks like a dashed line. Your company standard may require that a hidden line look like a dotted line. To change the Normal line style to conform to your company's standards, you can follow these steps: 1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, click the line style type in the Style Type box. 3. In the Styles list box, click the Normal line style. 4. Click Modify to access the Modify Line Style dialog box. 5. On the General tab, in the Type box, select the line type that looks like a dotted line. All the lines that you draw while the Normal style is selected on the ribbon will conform to your company’s standards: hidden lines will appear as dotted lines. You can save the style to a template with Style on the Format menu. This allows you to use the style again in other drawings.

SmartSketch User's Guide

655

Sample Workflows

Formatting an Existing Drawing You can use styles to make existing drawings conform to your company's standards. Suppose you receive a drawing from another company, and all the hidden lines are continuous. Your company standard indicates that hidden lines should be a line type that is dashed. You have been using a line style, called Dashed, to conform to the standards used by your company. To change the hidden lines in the drawing quickly and efficiently, you can follow these steps: 1. Open the drawing that you received from the other company. 2. Select all the lines that you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, select Dashed in the Style box to change all the lines that you have selected. All the lines now appear as dashed lines instead of continuous lines.

Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. You can link to a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. 1. In the current document, create a rectangle and dimensions as shown.

Use Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw ribbon to create and dimension the rectangle as specified in the previous illustration. 2. Click Tools > Variables to display the dimensions you defined.

 

656

Although the values that appear in the Name column are automatically generated by the software, you can edit the names. By default, the Variable Table filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only the variables that are associated with elements in the active window will display. To display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows 3. In Excel, create and save a document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships as follows:

4. Arrange the windows of the Excel document and the SmartSketch document so that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents. 5. In the Excel document, select the cell that you want to link to. 6. Click Edit > Copy to copy the selected cells. 7. Click the SmartSketch document so that it becomes the active document. 8. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to. 9. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.   

To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right-click. Click Enter to accept the value you pasted. Repeat the previous steps as needed for the other values. The resulting Variable Table should update as follows:

When you edit the value in the Excel document, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. When you link the dimensions in the SmartSketch document to the Excel document, you can change the dimensions of the SmartSketch document by editing the corresponding values in the Excel document. The SmartSketch document automatically updates.

Measure the Length of a Line Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance. For example, consider the following workflow. 1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.

2. Click Tools > Measure Distance and measure a distance. You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.

3. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still active—you can pick up where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.

SmartSketch User's Guide

657

Sample Workflows

Place a Doubleline Precisely 1. On the Tools menu, set the PinPoint option On.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

     

You can click Reposition Target on the PinPoint toolbar or press F12 to change the location of the target point to the current position. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline. Click a point to start the doubleline. Click a point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the doubleline. To end the doubleline, right-click. Pause over the doubleline, and press F12 to reposition the target point and to precisely determine the starting point of the next doubleline. Place the second doubleline relative to a known point on the first one.

You can also press F9 to set PinPoint on or off. Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints of the lines. You can use the software to create an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another element. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a doubleline.

See Also Place a Doubleline Precisely (on page 658) Draw a Doubleline (on page 158) Draw with PinPoint (on page 268) Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267)

658

SmartSketch User's Guide

Sample Workflows

Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values You can use the Variable Table to create expressions that change dimensions in the drawing when you change the expressions. 1. Open a drawing document. 2. Click Tools > Variables. The Variable Table displays. 3. On the Variable Table window, click Filter and define which variables you want to display in the Variable Table. For example, in the Filter dialog box, if you select Dimensions in Type and then select Last selected window, this displays all the dimensions that appear in the active window. The default filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only the variables that are associated with elements in the active window will display. To display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File. 4. In the Variable Table, click the Formula cell that displays the dimension that you want to edit and type an arithmetic expression to calculate the value of the dimension: V681/2. When you type an entry in the cell, the entry also appears in the Formula Bar.

5. On the Formula Bar, click Enter or press ENTER to calculate the result of the expression. In this example, when V681 is modified, V680 is automatically updated to reflect the relationship.

SmartSketch User's Guide

659

Sample Workflows

660

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary A active style Style that is used when you draw an element or copy it. You can change the active style to one of the styles listed in the Style box on the ribbon bar.

angular dimension Measures the sweep angle of an arc, the angle between an origin and a line, the angle between two lines, or the angle among three key points.

annotation Text, graphics, or symbols that give you more information about a drawing.

aspect ratio Ratio of width to height of geometry.

associative Condition in which an element is related to another element.

associative dimension Dimension that is updated when the measurement of the element it refers to changes.

associativity Embraces all techniques for capturing design intent, including variational design, parametric design, and feature-based modeling.

attribute User-defined property or parameter assigned to an element, object, or document. A parameter refers to variables in a symbol document that drive dimensional values. You can display attributes with the Attribute Viewer.

azimuth Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a fixed point, based on a circle.

B background sheet Component of a drawing sheet. The background sheet is used for graphics that you want to display on more than one drawing, such as a border, title block, logo, or raster background

SmartSketch User's Guide

661

Glossary picture (watermark). A background sheet can be displayed and printed along with any attached working sheet.

balloon Type of annotation that consists of a closed shape that contains text. A balloon defines individual parts in assemblies and field notes on drawings.

base bearing Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an angle.

baseline Area between a line and text. The process that freezes a document from any further modification. When you baseline a document, you also freeze any documents that are linked to the baselined document.

basic Shows a dimension with a border.

bearing Determination of position to refer to an angle.

break line Line connecting a leader line to annotation text.

C center point Middle of a circle or arc.

centerline Annotation on a mechanical drawing that marks the center position of a hole or other feature on a part.

chained dimension group A series of dimensions that are arranged in a straight line. A chained dimension group measures locations from element to element.

chamfer Corner that has been cut at an angle.

class Shows the dimension along with the user-defined class.

662

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary closed curve Curve whose end points meet. A closed curve encloses an area.

closed element Element whose end points meet. A closed element encloses an area.

coincident relationship Relationship that specifies that two points have the same location.

collinear relationship Relationship that ensures that a set of identified points or lines lie in a straight line.

command Tool designed to complete a single task, such as create an arc or a line.

container Document that contains documents created with other applications. Through OLE you can access the application that created the document and link and embed a document created by another application.

control menu Accesses standard Windows commands for minimizing, maximizing, and switching between applications.

coordinate dimension Group of dimensions that measure locations from a common origin.

cross hatching Annotation on a drawing that designates the fill area of a model; a fill.

curve Element type that is not linear.

cusp node Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a cusp node bends sharply at the node. A handle can be attached to a cusp node for editing.

D diameter dimension Dimension that measures the diameter of a circle or arc.

SmartSketch User's Guide

663

Glossary dimension Control that assigns and maintains a dimensional value to an individual element or establishes a dimensional relationship among multiple elements. A label with text, lines, and arrows graphically represents a dimension.

dimension axis Axis for dimension orientation that you define by selecting a line. You can place linear dimensions that run parallel or perpendicular to the axis. By default, dimensions are placed horizontally or vertically.

dimension group Series of dimensions. You can place a chained dimension group, a coordinate dimension group, or a stacked dimension group.

dimension line A line used to define the measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends and a dimension in the center.

dimensional value Text that indicates the value of a dimensional measurement, such as distance, length, or angle.

direction Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.

display filter Tool that allows you to display selected layers in a drawing.

document data Annotations, such as dimensions, text boxes, callouts, balloons, and centerlines, that are used to describe design data.

drawing sheet tab Drawing sheet tabs are located at the bottom of the drawing sheets in your document. There is a drawing sheet tab for each drawing sheet. The drawing sheet tabs allow you to change the active drawing sheet, create new drawing sheets, delete drawing sheets, and copy drawing sheets.

driven dimension A dimension with a value that depends on the value of other dimensions or elements.

664

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary driving dimension Dimension with a value that controls the size, orientation, or location of an element.

E edge point Location on the boundary of an element. For example, edge points can be used to define the circumference of a circle.

embed Method for inserting information from a source document into the active document. Once embedded, the information becomes part of the active document; if changes are made to the source document, the updates are not reflected in the active document.

end point End of an element.

equation Algebraic relationship between dimensions and/or numeric properties.

error dimension Driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes on driving dimensions are changed.

F file locking Ability to prevent updates to a document.

fill Pattern or solid color placed inside a closed boundary.

free space An area that is not on or inside an element or object on a drawing sheet.

freeform Drawing tool that allows you to use the mouse to sketch curves. As you press and hold the mouse button and drag the pointer across the drawing sheet, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the mouse button, the software turns your sketch into smooth curves.

SmartSketch User's Guide

665

Glossary freesketch Drawing tool that allows you to use the mouse to sketch lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles. As you press and hold the mouse button and drag the pointer across the drawing sheet, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the mouse button, the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns them into a precise drawing.

from point Starting point for an action. For example, when you rotate elements, the from point determines where you want the rotation to begin.

G geometric element Point, line, arc, circle, or other simple geometry unit.

group Collection of objects that you can manipulate as a single item.

H handle Solid or hollow squares that are displayed at significant positions on a geometric element when you select the element. You can manipulate an element with a handle.

help lines Dashed coordinate axes displayed by PinPoint. The help lines extend from the target point to the current pointer location. They are dynamically updated as you move the cursor. You can turn the help line display on or off.

horizontal relationship Relationship that specifies that the end points of a line, or two key points, are level with each other along the x axis.

horizontal scroll bar Horizontal scroll bar allows you to pan the active window from top to bottom.

hyperlink Colored and underlined text or a graphic that you click to go to a file, a location in a file, an HTML page on the World Wide Web, or an HTML page on an intranet. Hyperlinks can also go to Gopher, telnet, newsgroup, and FTP sites.

666

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary

I image Raster image, which can be a .TIFF, .GIF, .JFIF, .BMP, .COT, .CIT, or .RLE document.

inspection Shows the dimension inside a balloon.

intent zone Quadrant divided into four pie-shaped wedges that determines the behavior of an element's relationship to either a circle or arc. Intent zones allow you to specify where you want to draw an element in relation to an arc or circle. For example, as you draw an arc, you can change the arc's direction by moving the cursor to a different position within the intent zone. You can define the size of the intent zone by specifying the number of pixels in it.

isometric Turned so that three mutually perpendicular edges are equally shortened. A two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object.

isometric drawing Drawing represented as the object or element is actually projected on a plane of projection: a 3D drawing represented in 2D.

K key point Recognizable point on an element. Key points include vertices, mid points, center points, and so forth.

kinematics analysis Analysis of mechanical motion.

L layer Logical grouping of elements or objects on a drawing sheet. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet.

limit Shows the upper and lower dimensions based on the user-defined tolerances.

SmartSketch User's Guide

667

Glossary linear dimension Dimension that measures the linear distance between two or more elements, the length of a line, or the arc length of an arc.

locate zone Circular area at the center of the crosshair cursor or at the end of the arrow cursor. The locate zone specifies how close the cursor must be to an element you want to recognize or select. You can define the size of the locate zone with the SmartSketch Settings command on the Tools menu.

lock Relationship that makes the position of an element or key point, or the value of a driving dimension, stationary.

M midpoint Middle point of an element.

mirror axis Line about which the selection set is mirrored. When you select the Mirror command, the software displays horizontal and vertical mirror axes that go through the center of the selection set. You can display other mirror axes by locating linear elements.

modification Act of changing the size, position, or orientation of an element by modifying the element or its handles.

N nested symbol Symbol that is placed into a document which is then placed as a symbol in another document. Symbols that are public display across different documents. Symbols that are private only display in the first document.

node Vertex on a curve. An exterior node has one handle, and an interior node has two handles. A curve can have one or more smooth, cusp, or symmetric nodes. The type of node a curve has affects how you modify the curve.

nominal Shows the dimension based on the current active parameters.

668

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary

O object Information that can be linked or embedded into an OLE-compliant product. A group of elements that represent a real-world object. An object can also be made up of a single element.

open curve Curve whose end points do not meet.

open element Element whose end points do not meet.

P parallel relationship Relationship that specifies that the orientation of one line is identical to that of another line.

parameter Attribute assigned to an element or object, usually a numerical value representing a dimension. A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter refers to variables in a symbol document that drive dimensional values. Parameters appear as bold characters in the Attribute Viewer.

parametric symbol Symbol that contains geometry constrained together using relationships, with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters.

perpendicular relationship Relationship that specifies that the orientation of a line or end point of an arc is at a right angle to the orientation of another line, arc, circle, or curve.

pickquick Automatic software tool that allows you to select an element when several elements overlap. When you place the pointer over a set of overlapping elements, three small circles appear at the bottom right of the cursor. When you click, a small toolbar with the number of selectable elements appears. You can move the pointer over the numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.

pinpoint Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference point.

SmartSketch User's Guide

669

Glossary pointer Screen device that you use to select elements, commands, and other items in the software.

primary axis Axis that defines the rotation angle of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. The primary axis is defined first and can be shorter than the secondary axis.

property Unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can display document properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File menu or Edit menu.

R radial dimension Dimension that measures the radius of an arc, circle, ellipse, or curve.

reference Shows the dimension within parentheses.

reference file Any file not native to Catalog Manager that is linked or embedded and used for reference information. You click Insert > Object to link or embed a reference file, or you can drag or drop it with Windows Explorer.

relationship Condition that exists for an individual element or between elements. You can establish relationships as you place new elements or between elements already on the drawing sheet. If Maintain Relationships is set, then the relationship controls the modification behavior of the related elements. For example, if two lines have a parallel relationship, they remain parallel when one of the lines is moved. SmartSketch recognizes potential relationships as you draw. Relationship handles are placed on related elements to represent maintained relationships.

670

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary relationship handle Graphic used to represent a geometric relationship between elements, key points, and dimensions, or between key points and elements. The relationship handle shows that the designated relationship is being maintained.

relationship indicator Graphic that is displayed at the pointer when the software recognizes a SmartSketch relationship.

ribbon bar Ribbon bar is a dynamic toolbar that displays different options depending on which command you are using. The options on each ribbon bar operate much like the options on standard Windows dialog boxes.

rotation angle Angle between 0-180 degrees that an element is rotated in either direction. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

rotation axis Temporary line that shows the rotation angle with respect to the rotation reference axis. Zero degrees is defined by the positional angle; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.

rotation reference axis Temporary line defined by the center of rotation and the rotation from point. Zero degrees is horizontal; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. The rotation angle is measured from this line.

S scale origin Starting point from which an object is scaled along the x and y axes.

select tool Allows you to select elements before you run a command on them.

selection set Single selected object or a group of selected objects.

share embed Document copied directly into a drawing. When you embed the same document more than once in the same document, the document elements are copied each time. When you share embed the same document more than once in the same document, the documents are not copied each time. Instead, the other documents reference the initial placement of the document.

SmartSketch User's Guide

671

Glossary sheet outline Shows the orientation of the drawing sheet and the printable region of the sheet.

shortcut menu Menu that gives you quick access to commands that are related to the item you are working with. The commands available on the shortcut menu depend upon the selected element or active command. To activate the shortcut menu, click the right mouse button.

sketch Process of creating a rough drawing that approximates the size or shape of a real-world object.

smart label Label that is associated to the attributes on an element or object. Smart Labels are created with the tools on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.

smooth node Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a smooth node has a different curvature on each side of the node. The start point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. A handle can be attached to a smooth node for editing.

source document Document that provides data, graphics, or other information to another document through a link.

stacked dimension group Series of individual dimensions that are arranged at different levels from the smallest value to the largest. A stacked dimension group measures locations from a common origin.

status bar Shows information and messages at the bottom of the window. Some of the information is about what a particular command does or what action you should take.

style resource document Any .igr or .RSC document that contains styles native to that document. A template or document can reference several style resource documents. These styles are copied into the current document when the styles are actually applied to elements or annotations in the document.

style type Type of style that is based on the type of element that the style affects. The style types include: fill, dimension, line, and text.

sweep angle Angle that defines the length of an arc.

672

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary symbol Document placed in a drawing. You can override and edit the properties and style of the symbol. A document can be linked, or embedded.

T tab scrolling buttons Scroll through the sheets in your drawing.

tabs Allow you to display a sheet in your drawing when you click the tab you want. The name of the active sheet is in bold text.

tangent relationship Relationship between an arc or circle and another geometric element. The elements share a common point that is not intersecting.

target point Origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point anywhere on the drawing sheet.

template Default set of properties that defines what a new document will look like. You can use a template to set standards for a group of users or to define your own preferences.

terminator Graphic symbol, such as an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader.

text box Rectangular element that contains text or symbols; you can place text boxes on drawing sheets.

title bar Displays the name of the active document. You can also use the title bar to move the window around on the screen.

to point Ending point for an action. For example, when you rotate elements, the to point determines where you want the rotation to stop.

tolerance Shows the dimension along with the variance allowed.

SmartSketch User's Guide

673

Glossary toolbar Graphic menus with buttons that allow you to quickly access commands. You can define custom toolbars or use the toolbars delivered with the software.

tools Set of commands that can be activated from a menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut. Tools are self-contained, designed for specific tasks, and can be used in any compatible environment.

U user property Unique characteristic of an element or object in a file. You can assign unique values to an element or object with the Properties command on the Edit menu.

user-defined property Type of property created on the User tab of the Properties dialog box for the element or object. User-defined properties are usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost and manufacturer. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the appearance of the element or object. For example, user-defined properties stored with a valve symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material. User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol.

V variable Value that can be referenced and changed.

vertex Highest point or apex of a figure, the intersection of lines or curves, or the end point of an element.

vertical relationship Relationship that specifies that the end points of a line, or two key points, are level with each other along the y axis.

vertical scroll bar Allows you to pan the active window from side to side.

W window Area defined by a standard border and buttons that is used to display information in an application.

674

SmartSketch User's Guide

Glossary wireframe element Graphic representation of simple geometry; wireframe elements include points, lines, circles, arcs, conic curves, freeform curves, and composite curves.

working sheet Component of a drawing sheet. The working sheet is where you create design data and document data. You can apply a scale to document and design data and attach a background sheet to the working sheet.

SmartSketch User's Guide

675

Glossary

676

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index A About Command • 31 Access Online Tutorials • 29 Access the Printable Guides • 29 Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export • 626 Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import • 620 Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export • 587 Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import • 581 Activate a Drawing Sheet • 77 active style • 661 Add a Button to a Toolbar • 471 Add a Command to a Menu • 472 Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group • 297 Add a Leader • 245 Add a Symbol Attribute • 509 Add MicroStation Styles to a Document • 599 Add Styles to the Current Document • 420 Add Symbol Commands • 529 Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar • 194 Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer • 389 Add-In Manager Dialog Box • 479 Adding Text to Documents • 225 Add-Ins Command • 479 Additional Documentation • 24 Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image • 551 AEC Solutions • 25 AEC Templates • 108 Align Command • 338 Align Dimensions • 291 Align Ribbon • 338 Align SmartSketch Objects • 337 Aligning SmartSketch Objects • 336 Alignment Indicator Command • 263 Alphabetical List of Functions • 325 Angle Between Command • 281 angular dimension • 661 annotation • 661 Apply a Border to a Text Box • 237 Apply a Style • 417

SmartSketch User's Guide

Apply a Style to a Group of Elements • 418 Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries • 442 Applying Formats with Styles • 416 Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements • 354 Applying Unique Formats • 431 Arc by 3 Points Command • 165 Arc by Center Point Command • 166 Arc Ribbon • 165 Architectural Templates • 108 Arranging Elements • 363 aspect ratio • 661 Assign a Shortcut Key • 476 Associate a Symbol with an Element • 392 associative • 661 associative dimension • 661 Associative Offset Command • 218 Associative Offset Ribbon • 219 associativity • 661 Atlas Mapping Templates • 117 Attach a Connector to an Object • 154, 407 Attach a Help File to a Symbol • 510 Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points • 406 attribute • 661 Attribute Viewer • 410 Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 511 AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box • 629 AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box • 624 AutoCAD Template File Dialog Box • 624 AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples • 617 AutoSave Command • 95 AutoSave Dialog Box • 95 Axis Command • 301 azimuth • 661

B background sheet • 661 Background Sheets Command • 79 Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) • 67 balloon • 662 Balloon Command • 240 Balloon Properties Dialog Box • 241 Balloon Ribbon • 240 base bearing • 662 baseline • 662

677

Index basic • 662 Basic Diagramming Templates • 119 bearing • 662 Bearing and Azimuth Command • 318 Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 69 Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 398 Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 511 Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) • 233 Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) • 439 Break a Connection to a Linked Object • 460 break line • 662 Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order • 368 Bring to Front Command • 368 Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 71

C Cascade Command • 59 Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained • 645 center point • 662 centerline • 662 chained dimension group • 662 chamfer • 662 Chamfer Command • 351 Chamfer Ribbon • 351 Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension • 306 Change Command • 331 Change Layer Dialog Box • 377 Change the Active Layer • 376 Change the Background Sheet • 79 Change the Curve Type • 170 Change the Formats of a Style • 419 Change the Layer of an Element • 376 Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group • 377 Change the Node Type • 171 Change the Source for a Linked Object • 459 Change the Window Layout • 59 Change Toolbar • 40 Changing the Shape of an Element • 330 Character Map Command • 249 Check Out a License for SmartSketch • 34 Circle by 3 Points Command • 161

678

Circle by Center Point Command • 162 Circle Ribbon • 161 Circular Pattern Command • 222 Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box • 223 Circular Pattern Ribbon • 223 class • 662 Close a Document • 98 Close a Document Without Saving Changes • 99 Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the Changes • 460 Close Command • 99 Close the Symbol Explorer • 387 closed curve • 663 closed element • 663 coincident relationship • 663 Collinear Command • 357 collinear relationship • 663 Colors Dialog Box • 374 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 465 command • 663 Command Comparison with AutoCAD • 603 Command Comparison with MicroStation • 567 Concentric Command • 357 Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation • 631 Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation • 591 Connect Command • 358 Connect Elements • 357 Connect Points While Drawing a Line • 646 Connect Points While Modifying a Line • 646 Connect Two Objects • 155 Connector Command • 156 Connector Drawing Elements • 150 Connector Ribbon • 157 container • 663 Contrast and Brightness Command • 552 Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box • 552 Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File • 599 Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File • 640 Control Loop Templates • 114 control menu • 663 Control the Display of Elements in a Window • 371 Convert Command (Rectangle) • 596 Convert Command (Symbol) • 397 Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements • 308

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index coordinate dimension • 663 Coordinate Dimension Command • 294 Copy a Format • 214 Copy an Element • 213 Copy an Element with the Select Tool • 214 Copy Command • 214 Copy Fill Style Dialog Box • 497 Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box • 496 Copy Linear Style Dialog Box • 497 Copy Point Style Dialog Box • 496 Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles • 496 Copy Style Command • 496 Copying and Pasting Elements • 213 Create a Background Sheet • 78 Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers • 374 Create a Custom Report • 412 Create a Fill Color • 445 Create a Layer • 374 Create a Layer Group • 377 Create a Leader for a SmartText Label • 521 Create a New Document • 64 Create a New Drawing Sheet • 76 Create a New Menu • 471 Create a New Toolbar • 469 Create a Parametric Symbol • 506 Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields • 524 Create a Style Using a Formatted Element • 418 Create a Style with the Style Command • 419 Create a Symbol • 381 Create a Symbol Report • 401 Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking • 531 Create a Template • 143 Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document • 598 Create a Text Label • 251 Create a To Do List • 480 Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine • 321 Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet • 322 Create a Variable with a Value or Expression • 320 Create Custom Fill Styles • 495 Create Custom Linear Patterns • 494 Create Custom Linear Styles • 495 Create Custom Point Styles • 493

SmartSketch User's Guide

Create New Fill Style Dialog Box • 495 Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box • 494 Create New Linear Style Dialog Box • 495 Create New Point Style Dialog Box • 494 Create New Style Command • 494 Create Symbol Command • 382 Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style • 485 Creating a Kinematics Animation • 647 Creating Isometric Drawings • 186 Creating Patterns • 220 Creating Symbols • 381 cross hatching • 663 Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) • 262 curve • 663 Curve Command • 171 Curve Ribbon • 171 cusp node • 663 Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 513 Custom Color Name Dialog Box • 448 Custom Command Dialog Box • 476 Custom Commands Command • 475 Customize Command • 473 Customize Dialog Box • 473 Customize Keyboard Command • 477 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box • 477 Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar • 484 Customize the Software with the Options Command • 464 Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style Editor) • 484 Customizing a Toolbar • 650 Customizing the Software • 463 Cut an Element • 220 Cut Command • 220 Cutting or Deleting Elements • 219

D Define a Text-Driven Symbol • 522 Define an Icon for a Symbol • 510 Define Handles for a Symbol • 508 Define Locate Filter Dialog Box • 204 Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon • 271 Define Point Style Graphics Command • 504 Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document • 515 Define SmartPoints for a Symbol • 531 Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart Label • 520 Define Symbol Properties • 508

679

Index Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box • 518 Defining SmartPoints • 531 Delete a Command from a Menu • 472 Delete a Drawing Sheet • 80 Delete a Hyperlink • 541 Delete a Layer Group • 378 Delete a Node from a Curve • 169 Delete a Relationship • 263 Delete a Style • 418 Delete a Vertex from a Leader • 248 Delete an Element • 219 Delete Command • 219 Delete Favorite Command • 389 Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer • 389 Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) • 170 Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles • 497 Delete Sheet Command • 81 Delete Style Command • 498 Delete Text in a Text Box • 237 Delivered Reports • 412 Detail View Command • 266 Detail View Ribbon • 266 Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) • 557 diameter dimension • 663 dimension • 664 Dimension Along a Curve • 290 dimension axis • 664 Dimension Command • 281 dimension group • 664 Dimension Groups • 295 dimension line • 664 Dimension Prefix Dialog Box • 302 Dimension Properties Dialog Box • 283 Dimension Ribbon • 281 Dimension Text Command • 306 Dimension Text Ribbon • 306 Dimension the Diameter of a Circle • 651 Dimension the Length of a Line • 651 Dimension Toolbar • 41 dimensional value • 664 Dimensioning Drawing Elements • 274 direction • 664 Directional Mapping Templates • 121 Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles • 390 Display Background Sheets • 79 Display Context-Sensitive Help • 29 display filter • 664

680

Display Help Topics • 31 Display Information About the Software • 31 Display Manager Command • 371 Display Manager Dialog Box • 372 Display or Hide Layers • 375 Display or Hide Relationship Handles • 264 Display the Attribute Viewer • 410 Display the Change Toolbar • 198 Display the Dimension Toolbar • 278 Display the Relationship Toolbar • 257 Display the Tip of the Day • 30 Distance Between Command • 293 document data • 664 Document Explorer Command • 61 Document Explorer Window • 62 Draw a Chamfer • 349 Draw a Circle by Center Point • 161 Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points • 160 Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements • 162 Draw a Circle with FreeSketch • 182 Draw a Circular Pattern • 222 Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements • 344 Draw a Curve • 168 Draw a Curve with FreeForm • 185 Draw a Doubleline • 158 Draw a Fillet • 352 Draw a Fillet Rectangle • 176 Draw a Horizontal Line • 652 Draw a Line • 146, 653 Draw a Line Connected to Another Line • 653 Draw a Line with FreeSketch • 182 Draw a Line with PinPoint • 654 Draw a Mask • 448 Draw a Point • 148 Draw a Polygon by Center point • 179 Draw a Rectangle or Square • 175 Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch • 183 Draw a Rectangular Pattern • 221 Draw an Arc • 651 Draw an Arc by Center Point • 165 Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points • 163 Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements • 166 Draw an Arc with FreeSketch • 183 Draw an Ellipse by Center Point • 174 Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points • 172 Draw an Isometric Circle • 187

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index Draw an Isometric Line • 189 Draw an Isometric Rectangle • 191 Draw an N-Sided Polygon • 178 Draw Connected Lines and Arcs • 166 Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch • 167 Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor • 194 Draw Toolbar • 42 Draw with PinPoint • 268 Draw with Relationships • 261 Drawing Basic Elements • 145 Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses • 160 Drawing Connectors • 149 Drawing Diagrams • 88 Drawing Doublelines • 158 Drawing FreeForm Shapes • 180 Drawing Lines • 146 Drawing Precisely • 267 drawing sheet tab • 664 Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons • 174 Drawing with Relationships • 255 driven dimension • 664 driving dimension • 665 Drop Complex String Command (Shortcut Menu) • 596 Drop Dimension to Graphics Command • 309 Drop Line String Command (Shortcut Menu) • 596

E edge point • 665 Edit a Dimension Prefix • 302 Edit a Formula Containing a Function • 323 Edit a Hyperlink • 543 Edit a Linked Object • 459 Edit a SmartLabel • 253 Edit a Symbol • 396 Edit a Text Box • 237 Edit a Text Label • 252 Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software • 455 Edit an Existing Variable • 320 Edit Attributes • 411 Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer • 411 Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set • 412 Edit Graphic Properties Command (Shortcut Menu) • 253 Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) • 543 Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol • 533

SmartSketch User's Guide

Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol • 521 Edit SmartText Command • 523 Edit Symbol Properties • 398 Edit Text Properties Command (Shortcut Menu) • 253 Editing Symbols • 395 Electrical Diagramming Templates • 114 Electrical Solutions • 25 Electrical Templates • 115 Element Display Priority • 367 Element Properties Dialog Box • 433 Ellipse by 3 Points Command • 173 Ellipse by Center Point Command • 174 Ellipse Ribbon • 173 embed • 665 Embed an Object • 454 end point • 665 Engineering Fonts • 254 Equal Command • 358 equation • 665 Erase Part of An Image • 558 error dimension • 665 Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command • 263 Establish More Than One Relationship • 654 Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File • 598 Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File • 639 Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse • 53 Exit Command (File Menu) • 99 Exploring the Interface • 35 Exploring the Window with Your Mouse • 36 Extend an Element • 347 Extend an Element to a Point • 348 Extend to Next Command • 348 Extend to Point Command • 349 Extending or Trimming Elements • 341

F File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 466 file locking • 665 fill • 665 Fill an Image Area with Color • 553 Fill Command • 446, 554 Fill Dialog Box • 554 Fill Properties Dialog Box • 447 Fill Ribbon • 446 Fill Style Properties Dialog Box • 503

681

Index Fill Tab • 447 Fillet Command • 353 Fillet Rectangle Command • 177 Fillet Rectangle Ribbon • 178 Fillet Ribbon • 353 Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) • 326 Filter Dialog Box • 326 Filter Objects Dialog Box • 62 Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements • 204 Find a SmartSketch Object • 206 Find Command • 207 Find Dialog Box • 207 Finding Elements • 206 Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet • 68, 310 Fit All Elements in the Active View • 57 Fit Command • 57 Flowchart Templates • 122 Follow a Hyperlink • 542 Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) • 541 Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) • 630 Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) • 625 Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) • 590 Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) • 586 Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 467 Format a Column • 323 Format a Connector • 154 Format a Dimension or Annotation • 440 Format a Fill • 445 Format a Geometric Element • 432 Format a Text Box • 440 Format Dimension Command • 441 Format Dimension Dialog Box • 441 Format Line Dialog Box • 432 Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) • 215 Format Part of an Element • 193 Format Tab (Connectors) • 437 Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) • 437 Format Text Box Dialog Box • 440 Formatting a New Drawing • 655 Formatting an Existing Drawing • 656 free space • 665 freeform • 665

682

FreeForm Command • 185 FreeForm Ribbon • 185 freesketch • 666 FreeSketch Command • 184 FreeSketch Ribbon • 184 from point • 666 Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box • 327 Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box • 327

G General Diagramming Templates • 117 General Tab • 284, 424 General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) • 629 General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) • 624 General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) • 241 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 71 General Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 209 General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) • 557 General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) • 590 General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) • 585 General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) • 422 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 465 General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 514 Generate a Lookup Table • 535 geometric element • 666 Getting Started with SmartSketch • 33 Grid Brightness Command • 273 Grid Display Command • 272 Grid Intensity Ribbon • 274 Grid Snap Command • 273 group • 666 Group Command • 365 Group or Ungroup Elements • 364 Group Properties Dialog Box • 365 Group Ribbon • 365 Grouping Elements • 363

H handle • 666 Help Command • 29 help lines • 666

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index horizontal relationship • 666 horizontal scroll bar • 666 Horizontal/Vertical Command • 359 How Embedding Works • 453 How Linking Works • 457 HVAC Templates • 110 hyperlink • 666 Hyperlink Command • 540 Hyperlinks • 539

I Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 514 image • 667 Image Command • 547 Image Erase Command • 558 Image Integrator • 25 Image Integrator Toolbar • 45 Image Properties Command • 557 Image Properties Dialog Box • 557 Image Redo Command • 548 Image Undo Command • 548 Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles • 497 Import Style Command • 497 Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) • 433 Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) • 366 Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) • 438 Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 400 Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) • 233 Insert a Detail View • 265 Insert a Font Character into a Text Box • 248 Insert a Function into a Formula • 323 Insert a Hyperlink • 539 Insert a Node into a Curve • 169 Insert a Raster Image • 546 Insert a Vertex in a Leader • 247 Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box • 540 Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) • 169 Insert Object Dialog Box • 456 inspection • 667 Install or Remove an Add-In • 479 Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility • 33 Install the To Do List Add-In • 480 Install the Validation Tools Add-In • 641

SmartSketch User's Guide

Installing Additional Tools • 478 Integrating Programs with Your Symbol • 529 intent zone • 667 Intent Zones • 259 Introducing SmartSketch • 23 Invert Colors in an Image • 553 Invert Command • 553 Invert Selection Command • 204 isometric • 667 Isometric Circle Command • 188 Isometric Circle Ribbon • 188 isometric drawing • 667 Isometric Line Command • 190 Isometric Line Ribbon • 190 Isometric Rectangle Command • 192 Isometric Rectangle Ribbon • 192 Isometric Toolbar • 46 Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) • 86

K key point • 667 Keyboard • 51 kinematics analysis • 667

L Labels • 250 Landscape Templates • 111 layer • 667 Layer Display Dialog Box • 376 Layer Groups Command • 378 Layer Groups Dialog Box • 378 Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 208 Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) • 591 Layers Command • 375 Layers Ribbon • 375 Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) • 373 Leader Command • 246 Leader Properties Dialog Box • 247 Leader Ribbon • 246 Learning Center Command • 30 License Checkout Utility Dialog Box • 35 limit • 667 Line Command • 432 Line Ribbon • 147 Line Style Editor Command • 492 Line Style Editor Toolbar • 492 Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) • 631

683

Index Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) • 626 Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) • 591 Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) • 586 Line/Arc Continuous Command • 147 linear dimension • 668 Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box • 499 Linear Style Properties Dialog Box • 501 Lines and Coordinate Tab • 286, 426 Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) • 630 Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) • 625 Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) • 591 Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) • 586 Link an Object • 458 Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet • 656 Links Command • 460 Links Dialog Box • 460 Load Points Dialog Box • 563 locate zone • 668 lock • 668 Lock an Element or Key Point • 265 Lock Command • 265 Lookup Table Command • 536 Lookup Table Dialog Box • 536

M Main Toolbar • 47 Maintain Relationships • 264 Maintain Relationships Command • 264 Make Elements Collinear • 357 Make Elements Concentric • 356 Make Elements Equal • 358 Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical • 358 Make Elements Parallel • 359 Make Elements Perpendicular • 359 Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis • 360 Make Elements Tangential • 360 Managing Multi-Sheet Documents • 73 Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors • 415 Managing Text in Symbols • 519 Manipulate a Symbol • 406 Manipulating Symbols • 405 Mask Command • 448 Mask Ribbon • 449

684

Measure a Distance • 311 Measure an Area • 316 Measure Area Command • 317 Measure Distance Along Command • 315 Measure Distance Command • 313 Measure the Distance Along an Object • 313 Measure the Length of a Line • 312, 657 Measuring Distances and Areas • 310 Mechanical Engineering Templates • 131 Mechanical Solutions • 26 Mechanical Templates • 132 Mechanism Modeling • 407 Menu Bar and Menus • 38 Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 473 Merge Connectors • 155 Microsoft IntelliMouse Features • 52 MicroStation Cells in Your Document • 600 MicroStation Construction Class Information • 601 MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box • 590 MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box • 585 MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples • 578 midpoint • 668 Mirror a Symbol • 403 Mirror an Element • 334 mirror axis • 668 Mirror Command • 335 Mirror Ribbon • 335 Mirroring Elements • 334 Mirroring Symbols • 403 modification • 668 Modify a Connector • 152 Modify a Symbol Attribute • 509 Modify an Element with the Select Tool • 330 Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box • 430 Modify Grid Intensity • 273 Modify Layers in a Layer Group • 377 Modify Line Style Dialog Box • 429 Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles • 498 Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box • 430 More Text Box Ribbon Commands • 232 Most Recently Used Files Command • 68 Mouse • 52 Move a Dimension • 303 Move a Label • 252 Move a Text Box • 237 Move an Annotation • 228

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index Move an Element • 211 Move an Element Precisely • 212 Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool • 269 Move an Element with the Select Tool • 211 Move Command • 212 Move Ribbon • 212 Move Sheet Border • 82 Move Sheet Border Command • 82 Move Sheet Border Dialog Box • 83 Move the Attribute Viewer • 410 Move the Symbol Explorer • 388 Moving Elements • 210 Multi-Point Warp Command • 560 Multi-Point Warp Ribbon • 560

N Name Tab • 284, 422 Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) • 67 nested symbol • 668 Network Diagram Templates • 124 New Command • 64 New Dialog Box • 64 New Dimension Style Dialog Box • 423 New Line Style Dialog Box • 421 New Sheet Command • 76 New Text Box Style Dialog Box • 422 New Toolbar Dialog Box • 471 New Window Command • 59 node • 668 nominal • 668 Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) • 308 Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) • 87 Nudge an Element • 213 Nudge Command • 213

O object • 669 Object Command • 456 Office Layout Templates • 126 Offset Command • 217 Offset Elements • 216 Offset Ribbon • 218 Open a Document • 65 Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer • 539 Open a MicroStation Cell Library • 600 Open a MicroStation Document • 595 Open a New Window • 58 Open a Symbol Library • 385

SmartSketch User's Guide

Open an AutoCAD Document • 638 Open an OLE Object for Editing • 459 Open Command • 65 open curve • 669 Open Dialog Box • 65 Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer • 387 open element • 669 Open Source Command • 328 Open the SmartSketch Home Page • 31 Options Command • 464 Options Dialog Box • 464 Organizational Chart Templates • 128 Organizational Chart Wizard • 131 Ortho Piping Templates • 135 Override a Driven Dimension • 307

P Pan a View • 57 Pan Command • 58 Paragraph Tab • 422 Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) • 236 Parallel Command • 359 parallel relationship • 669 parameter • 669 Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 514 parametric symbol • 669 Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 400 Paste an Element • 215 Paste an Element with a Different Format • 216 Paste Command • 215 Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) • 328 Paste Special Command • 216 Paste Special Dialog Box • 216 Perpendicular Command • 359 perpendicular relationship • 669 PFD and P&ID Templates • 136 pickquick • 669 pinpoint • 669 PinPoint Command • 270 PinPoint Ribbon • 270 Place a Balloon • 239 Place a Connector • 150 Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points • 292 Place a Dimension Group • 296 Place a Doubleline Precisely • 658 Place a Driving Dimension • 305

685

Index Place a Fill • 444 Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension • 279 Place a Revision Cloud • 242 Place a SmartLabel • 252 Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes • 532 Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes • 532 Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes • 532 Place a Symbol • 393 Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension • 298 Place a Text Box • 230 Place AutoCAD Information in the Document • 638 Place Copies of a Symbol • 394 Place Doubleline Command • 159 Place Doubleline Ribbon • 159 Place Elements with a Grid • 272 Place Here Command • 394 Place MicroStation Information in the Document • 597 Place Multiple Labels • 252 Place Point Style Graphics Command • 504 Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet • 504 Placing Annotations • 225 Placing Elements in Precise Locations • 267 Placing Elements with a Grid • 271 Placing Symbols • 392 Planning Your Symbol • 505 Plot Plan Templates • 138 Point Command • 148 Point Ribbon • 148 Point Style Properties Dialog Box • 498 pointer • 670 Polygon by Center Command • 180 Polygon by Center Ribbon • 180 Polygon Command • 178 Polygon Ribbon • 179 Polygonal Select Area Command • 551 Position an Image by Clicking • 556 Position an Image by Dragging • 554 Position Command • 556 Position Command (Shortcut Menu) • 555 Preface • 19 Previous Command • 57 primary axis • 670 Print a Document • 101 Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet • 102 Print Area Dialog Box • 105

686

Print Command • 104 Print Dialog Box • 104 Print Several Documents Simultaneously • 103 Print to a File • 103 Printable Guides Command • 29 Printer Document Properties Dialog Box • 105 Printing Documents • 99 Process Block Diagramming Templates • 139 Process Diagraming Templates • 134 Process Solutions • 26 Programming Tools • 27 Properties Command • 498 Properties Command (Edit Menu) • 433 Properties Command (File Menu) • 69 Properties Dialog Box • 69 property • 670 Pull an Element Up in the Display Order • 369 Pull Up Command • 369 Push an Element Down in the Display Order • 369 Push Down Command • 369

R radial dimension • 670 Reapply Style Dialog Box • 431 Rectangle Command • 176 Rectangle Ribbon • 176 Rectangular Pattern Command • 221 Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box • 221 Rectangular Pattern Ribbon • 222 Rectangular Select Area Command • 549 Redefine Point Styles • 504 Redefine the Origin of a Symbol • 518 Redo Actions • 205 Redo Changes to Images • 548 Redo Command • 206 Redo List Command • 206 reference • 670 reference file • 670 Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 467 Refill a Modified Boundary • 446 relationship • 670 relationship handle • 671 Relationship Handles Command • 264 relationship indicator • 671 Relationship Toolbar • 48 Relationships Command • 261

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) • 262 Remove a Command from a Toolbar • 471 Remove a Symbol Attribute • 509 Remove Empty Layers • 379 Remove Empty Layers Command • 379 Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box • 380 Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) • 541 Remove Speckles from an Image • 558 Rename a Drawing Sheet • 80 Rename a Style • 417 Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) • 80 Rename Dialog Box • 80 Reorder Sheets • 81 Reorder Sheets Command • 82 Reorder Sheets Dialog Box • 82 Re-Orient PinPoint • 269 Report Generator Command • 413 Report Generator Dialog Box • 413 Reposition the PinPoint Target Point • 269 Resize a Text Box • 238 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings • 470 Restore a View • 57 Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings • 473 Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element • 307 Reverse Connector Direction • 155 Revision Cloud Command • 243 Revision Cloud Ribbon • 244 Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) • 87 ribbon bar • 671 Ribbons and Dialog Boxes • 39 Rotate a Symbol • 404 Rotate an Element • 331 Rotate Command • 332 Rotate Ribbon • 332 Rotating Elements • 331 Rotating Symbols • 403 rotation angle • 671 rotation axis • 671 rotation reference axis • 671 Run a Custom Command • 475 Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol • 530 Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document • 642

S Sample Workflows • 645

SmartSketch User's Guide

Save a Document • 93 Save a Document as a PDF File • 95 Save a Document as a Template • 143 Save a Style to a Template • 419 Save As Command • 94 Save As Dialog Box • 94 Save as Image • 96 Save as Image Command • 97 Save as Image Dialog Box • 97 Save as PDF Command • 96 Save as PDF Dialog Box • 96 Save as Template Command • 143 Save Changes to a Linked Image • 547 Save Command • 94 Save Copy As Command (File Menu) • 457 Save Points Dialog Box • 563 Save Selected Image(s) Command • 547 Saving a Document Automatically • 94 Saving and Printing Documents • 91 Saving Documents • 92 Scale a Symbol • 402 Scale an Element • 339 Scale an Element with Its Handles • 340 Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size • 340 Scale Command • 341 scale origin • 671 Scale Ribbon • 341 Scaled Sketching Command • 195 Scaled Sketching Ribbon • 195 Scaling Elements • 338 Scaling Symbols • 402 Schematic Toolbar • 49 Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs • 77 Secondary Units Tab • 285, 425 Segmented Style Command • 193 Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image • 550 Select a Rectangular Area of an Image • 548 Select All Command • 202 Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu) • 78 Select an Element • 199 Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets • 77 Select Elements Using SmartSelect • 202 Select Macro Directory Dialog Box • 475 select tool • 671 Select Tool • 201 Select Tool Ribbon • 201 Selecting Elements • 198 Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements • 203

687

Index Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements • 197 selection set • 671 Send a Document to Others • 98 Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order • 368 Send Command • 98 Send to Back Command • 369 Set a Dimension Axis • 300 Set AutoSave Options • 95 Set Bearing and Azimuth • 318 Set Bearing Dialog Box • 317 Set Document Home Command (Shortcut Menu) • 388 Set Document Properties • 68 Set Printing Options • 101 Set the Dimension Type • 301 Set the Dimension Units • 303 Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer • 387 Set the Unit of Measure • 317 Set Up a Drawing Sheet • 66 Set Up an ODBC Data Source • 535 Setting Paper and Model Units • 309 Setting Up Documents • 63 Settings Dialog Box • 106 share embed • 671 sheet outline • 672 Sheet Setup Command • 66 Sheet Setup Dialog Box • 66 Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) • 372 shortcut menu • 672 Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer • 388 Show Favorites Command • 389 Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu) • 542 Show Styles in Resource Files Command • 503 Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) • 86 Site Templates • 112 Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) • 66 sketch • 672 smart label • 672 SmartDimension Command • 280 SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box • 438 SmartPoint Properties Command • 533 SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box • 534 SmartSelect Command • 202 SmartSelect Ribbon • 203

688

SmartSketch on the Web Command • 31 SmartSketch Settings Command • 261 SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box • 262 SmartSketch Templates • 107 SmartText Editor Dialog Box • 523 smooth node • 672 source document • 672 Spacing Tab • 287, 427 Speckle Remove Command • 559 Speckle Remove Dialog Box • 559 Spelling Command • 238 Spelling Dialog Box • 239 Split a Connector • 156 Split Command • 346 Split Graphic Elements • 345 Split/Segment Ribbon • 347 stacked dimension group • 672 Stamp Here Command • 395 Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 515 Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 72 status bar • 672 Status Bar • 53 Style Command • 420 Style Dialog Box • 421 style resource document • 672 Style Resources Dialog Box • 430 Style Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 208 style type • 672 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 72 Suspend Relationships • 263 sweep angle • 672 Switch to Another Open Document • 58 symbol • 673 Symbol Authoring • 27, 505 Symbol Authoring Toolbar • 50 Symbol Explorer Command • 385 Symbol Explorer Window • 384 Symbol Lookup Tables • 534 Symbol Origin Command • 518 Symbol Properties Command • 510 Symbol Properties Dialog Box • 398, 511 Symbol Representation Command • 517 Symbol Ribbon • 397 Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 72 Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 208 Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 468 Symmetric Command • 360 Symmetric Diameter Command • 299

SmartSketch User's Guide

Index

T tab scrolling buttons • 673 tabs • 673 Tangent Arc Command • 168 Tangent Circle Command • 163 Tangent Command • 361 tangent relationship • 673 target point • 673 Task Comparison with AutoCAD • 609 Task Comparison with MicroStation • 574 Technical Drawing Templates • 141 Technical User Forum • 24 template • 673 terminator • 673 Terminator and Symbol Tab • 288, 427 Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) • 241 text box • 673 Text Box Command • 231, 440 Text Box Handles • 230 Text Box Properties Dialog Box • 232 Text Box Ribbon • 231 Text Tab • 286, 425 Text Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 209 The Symbol Explorer • 382 Tile Horizontally Command • 59 Tile Vertically Command • 60 Tip of the Day Command • 30 Tip of the Day Dialog Box • 30 Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) • 85 title bar • 673 Title Block Field Command • 84 Title Block Field Ribbon • 84 Title Block Properties Command • 84 Title Block Properties Dialog Box • 85 Title Block Templates • 142 To Do List Manager Command • 481 To Do List Manager Dialog Box • 481 To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box • 482 To Do List Options Command • 481 To Do List Toolbar • 480 to point • 673 tolerance • 673 toolbar • 674 Toolbars • 40 Toolbars Command • 470 Toolbars Dialog Box • 470 Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) • 474 tools • 674 Transforming Elements • 329 Translators • 28

SmartSketch User's Guide

Trim an Element • 343 Trim an Element to a Point • 345 Trim an Element to Another Element • 344 Trim Command • 343 Trim Corner Command • 344 Trim Inside Command • 345 Trim Part of Element • 345 Trim to Element Command • 343 Trim to Point Command • 345 Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off • 30 Type Tab (Find Dialog Box) • 207 Types of Dimensions • 277

U Understanding Document Concepts • 61 Undo Actions • 205 Undo Changes to Images • 547 Undo Command • 205 Undo List Command (Edit Menu) • 205 Ungroup Command • 367 Unicode Character Map Dialog Box • 249 Units Tab • 284, 424 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) • 73 Unlock a Symbol From an Element • 406 Update a Symbol Report • 401 Use Spell Checker • 238 User Assistance • 28 user property • 674 User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) • 366 User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 437 User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box) • 439 User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) • 400 User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) • 236 user-defined property • 674 Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols • 530 Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements • 294, 305 Using Layers to Arrange Elements • 370 Using Relationships as You Draw • 257 Using Scaled Sketching • 194 Using SmartSketch Options • 24 Using Symbols in Documents • 381 Using the Internet • 539 Using the Line Style Editor • 483 Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility • 33 Using the Validation Add-In Tool • 641 Using the Variable Table • 318

689

Index Using Title Blocks • 84 Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values • 659

V Validate Command • 643 Validation Options Command • 643 Validation Options Dialog Box • 643 variable • 674 Variable Table Dialog Box • 324 Variables Command • 324 vertex • 674 vertical relationship • 674 vertical scroll bar • 674 View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer • 386 View Document Properties • 62 View Documents with the Symbol Explorer • 386 View File Type Command • 385 View Image Properties • 556 View Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 468 View the Properties of a Document • 69 Viewing Your Work • 54

W Warp an Image Using Multiple Points • 560 Warp Options Dialog Box • 561 What's New in SmartSketch? • 21 What's This Help Command • 29 window • 674 Window List Command • 58 wireframe element • 675 Workflow Diagram Templates • 130 working sheet • 675 Working Sheets Command • 78 Working with Attributes • 409 Working with AutoCAD Files • 601 Working with CAD Drawings • 565 Working with MicroStation Files • 565 Working with Object, Linking and Embedding • 451 Working with Raster Images • 545

Z Zoom Area • 55 Zoom Area Command • 55 Zoom In Command • 56 Zoom In on an Area • 55 Zoom Out • 56 Zoom Out Command • 56

690

SmartSketch User's Guide